File: | clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp |
Warning: | line 3930, column 20 Called C++ object pointer is null |
Press '?' to see keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts:
1 | //===--- SemaOverload.cpp - C++ Overloading -------------------------------===// | ||||
2 | // | ||||
3 | // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. | ||||
4 | // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. | ||||
5 | // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception | ||||
6 | // | ||||
7 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | ||||
8 | // | ||||
9 | // This file provides Sema routines for C++ overloading. | ||||
10 | // | ||||
11 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | ||||
12 | |||||
13 | #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h" | ||||
14 | #include "clang/AST/CXXInheritance.h" | ||||
15 | #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h" | ||||
16 | #include "clang/AST/DependenceFlags.h" | ||||
17 | #include "clang/AST/Expr.h" | ||||
18 | #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h" | ||||
19 | #include "clang/AST/ExprObjC.h" | ||||
20 | #include "clang/AST/TypeOrdering.h" | ||||
21 | #include "clang/Basic/Diagnostic.h" | ||||
22 | #include "clang/Basic/DiagnosticOptions.h" | ||||
23 | #include "clang/Basic/PartialDiagnostic.h" | ||||
24 | #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h" | ||||
25 | #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h" | ||||
26 | #include "clang/Sema/Initialization.h" | ||||
27 | #include "clang/Sema/Lookup.h" | ||||
28 | #include "clang/Sema/Overload.h" | ||||
29 | #include "clang/Sema/SemaInternal.h" | ||||
30 | #include "clang/Sema/Template.h" | ||||
31 | #include "clang/Sema/TemplateDeduction.h" | ||||
32 | #include "llvm/ADT/DenseSet.h" | ||||
33 | #include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h" | ||||
34 | #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" | ||||
35 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h" | ||||
36 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h" | ||||
37 | #include <algorithm> | ||||
38 | #include <cstdlib> | ||||
39 | |||||
40 | using namespace clang; | ||||
41 | using namespace sema; | ||||
42 | |||||
43 | using AllowedExplicit = Sema::AllowedExplicit; | ||||
44 | |||||
45 | static bool functionHasPassObjectSizeParams(const FunctionDecl *FD) { | ||||
46 | return llvm::any_of(FD->parameters(), [](const ParmVarDecl *P) { | ||||
47 | return P->hasAttr<PassObjectSizeAttr>(); | ||||
48 | }); | ||||
49 | } | ||||
50 | |||||
51 | /// A convenience routine for creating a decayed reference to a function. | ||||
52 | static ExprResult | ||||
53 | CreateFunctionRefExpr(Sema &S, FunctionDecl *Fn, NamedDecl *FoundDecl, | ||||
54 | const Expr *Base, bool HadMultipleCandidates, | ||||
55 | SourceLocation Loc = SourceLocation(), | ||||
56 | const DeclarationNameLoc &LocInfo = DeclarationNameLoc()){ | ||||
57 | if (S.DiagnoseUseOfDecl(FoundDecl, Loc)) | ||||
58 | return ExprError(); | ||||
59 | // If FoundDecl is different from Fn (such as if one is a template | ||||
60 | // and the other a specialization), make sure DiagnoseUseOfDecl is | ||||
61 | // called on both. | ||||
62 | // FIXME: This would be more comprehensively addressed by modifying | ||||
63 | // DiagnoseUseOfDecl to accept both the FoundDecl and the decl | ||||
64 | // being used. | ||||
65 | if (FoundDecl != Fn && S.DiagnoseUseOfDecl(Fn, Loc)) | ||||
66 | return ExprError(); | ||||
67 | DeclRefExpr *DRE = new (S.Context) | ||||
68 | DeclRefExpr(S.Context, Fn, false, Fn->getType(), VK_LValue, Loc, LocInfo); | ||||
69 | if (HadMultipleCandidates) | ||||
70 | DRE->setHadMultipleCandidates(true); | ||||
71 | |||||
72 | S.MarkDeclRefReferenced(DRE, Base); | ||||
73 | if (auto *FPT = DRE->getType()->getAs<FunctionProtoType>()) { | ||||
74 | if (isUnresolvedExceptionSpec(FPT->getExceptionSpecType())) { | ||||
75 | S.ResolveExceptionSpec(Loc, FPT); | ||||
76 | DRE->setType(Fn->getType()); | ||||
77 | } | ||||
78 | } | ||||
79 | return S.ImpCastExprToType(DRE, S.Context.getPointerType(DRE->getType()), | ||||
80 | CK_FunctionToPointerDecay); | ||||
81 | } | ||||
82 | |||||
83 | static bool IsStandardConversion(Sema &S, Expr* From, QualType ToType, | ||||
84 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
85 | StandardConversionSequence &SCS, | ||||
86 | bool CStyle, | ||||
87 | bool AllowObjCWritebackConversion); | ||||
88 | |||||
89 | static bool IsTransparentUnionStandardConversion(Sema &S, Expr* From, | ||||
90 | QualType &ToType, | ||||
91 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
92 | StandardConversionSequence &SCS, | ||||
93 | bool CStyle); | ||||
94 | static OverloadingResult | ||||
95 | IsUserDefinedConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
96 | UserDefinedConversionSequence& User, | ||||
97 | OverloadCandidateSet& Conversions, | ||||
98 | AllowedExplicit AllowExplicit, | ||||
99 | bool AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit); | ||||
100 | |||||
101 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
102 | CompareStandardConversionSequences(Sema &S, SourceLocation Loc, | ||||
103 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS1, | ||||
104 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS2); | ||||
105 | |||||
106 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
107 | CompareQualificationConversions(Sema &S, | ||||
108 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS1, | ||||
109 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS2); | ||||
110 | |||||
111 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
112 | CompareDerivedToBaseConversions(Sema &S, SourceLocation Loc, | ||||
113 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS1, | ||||
114 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS2); | ||||
115 | |||||
116 | /// GetConversionRank - Retrieve the implicit conversion rank | ||||
117 | /// corresponding to the given implicit conversion kind. | ||||
118 | ImplicitConversionRank clang::GetConversionRank(ImplicitConversionKind Kind) { | ||||
119 | static const ImplicitConversionRank | ||||
120 | Rank[(int)ICK_Num_Conversion_Kinds] = { | ||||
121 | ICR_Exact_Match, | ||||
122 | ICR_Exact_Match, | ||||
123 | ICR_Exact_Match, | ||||
124 | ICR_Exact_Match, | ||||
125 | ICR_Exact_Match, | ||||
126 | ICR_Exact_Match, | ||||
127 | ICR_Promotion, | ||||
128 | ICR_Promotion, | ||||
129 | ICR_Promotion, | ||||
130 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
131 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
132 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
133 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
134 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
135 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
136 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
137 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
138 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
139 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
140 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
141 | ICR_OCL_Scalar_Widening, | ||||
142 | ICR_Complex_Real_Conversion, | ||||
143 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
144 | ICR_Conversion, | ||||
145 | ICR_Writeback_Conversion, | ||||
146 | ICR_Exact_Match, // NOTE(gbiv): This may not be completely right -- | ||||
147 | // it was omitted by the patch that added | ||||
148 | // ICK_Zero_Event_Conversion | ||||
149 | ICR_C_Conversion, | ||||
150 | ICR_C_Conversion_Extension | ||||
151 | }; | ||||
152 | return Rank[(int)Kind]; | ||||
153 | } | ||||
154 | |||||
155 | /// GetImplicitConversionName - Return the name of this kind of | ||||
156 | /// implicit conversion. | ||||
157 | static const char* GetImplicitConversionName(ImplicitConversionKind Kind) { | ||||
158 | static const char* const Name[(int)ICK_Num_Conversion_Kinds] = { | ||||
159 | "No conversion", | ||||
160 | "Lvalue-to-rvalue", | ||||
161 | "Array-to-pointer", | ||||
162 | "Function-to-pointer", | ||||
163 | "Function pointer conversion", | ||||
164 | "Qualification", | ||||
165 | "Integral promotion", | ||||
166 | "Floating point promotion", | ||||
167 | "Complex promotion", | ||||
168 | "Integral conversion", | ||||
169 | "Floating conversion", | ||||
170 | "Complex conversion", | ||||
171 | "Floating-integral conversion", | ||||
172 | "Pointer conversion", | ||||
173 | "Pointer-to-member conversion", | ||||
174 | "Boolean conversion", | ||||
175 | "Compatible-types conversion", | ||||
176 | "Derived-to-base conversion", | ||||
177 | "Vector conversion", | ||||
178 | "SVE Vector conversion", | ||||
179 | "Vector splat", | ||||
180 | "Complex-real conversion", | ||||
181 | "Block Pointer conversion", | ||||
182 | "Transparent Union Conversion", | ||||
183 | "Writeback conversion", | ||||
184 | "OpenCL Zero Event Conversion", | ||||
185 | "C specific type conversion", | ||||
186 | "Incompatible pointer conversion" | ||||
187 | }; | ||||
188 | return Name[Kind]; | ||||
189 | } | ||||
190 | |||||
191 | /// StandardConversionSequence - Set the standard conversion | ||||
192 | /// sequence to the identity conversion. | ||||
193 | void StandardConversionSequence::setAsIdentityConversion() { | ||||
194 | First = ICK_Identity; | ||||
195 | Second = ICK_Identity; | ||||
196 | Third = ICK_Identity; | ||||
197 | DeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtr = false; | ||||
198 | QualificationIncludesObjCLifetime = false; | ||||
199 | ReferenceBinding = false; | ||||
200 | DirectBinding = false; | ||||
201 | IsLvalueReference = true; | ||||
202 | BindsToFunctionLvalue = false; | ||||
203 | BindsToRvalue = false; | ||||
204 | BindsImplicitObjectArgumentWithoutRefQualifier = false; | ||||
205 | ObjCLifetimeConversionBinding = false; | ||||
206 | CopyConstructor = nullptr; | ||||
207 | } | ||||
208 | |||||
209 | /// getRank - Retrieve the rank of this standard conversion sequence | ||||
210 | /// (C++ 13.3.3.1.1p3). The rank is the largest rank of each of the | ||||
211 | /// implicit conversions. | ||||
212 | ImplicitConversionRank StandardConversionSequence::getRank() const { | ||||
213 | ImplicitConversionRank Rank = ICR_Exact_Match; | ||||
214 | if (GetConversionRank(First) > Rank) | ||||
215 | Rank = GetConversionRank(First); | ||||
216 | if (GetConversionRank(Second) > Rank) | ||||
217 | Rank = GetConversionRank(Second); | ||||
218 | if (GetConversionRank(Third) > Rank) | ||||
219 | Rank = GetConversionRank(Third); | ||||
220 | return Rank; | ||||
221 | } | ||||
222 | |||||
223 | /// isPointerConversionToBool - Determines whether this conversion is | ||||
224 | /// a conversion of a pointer or pointer-to-member to bool. This is | ||||
225 | /// used as part of the ranking of standard conversion sequences | ||||
226 | /// (C++ 13.3.3.2p4). | ||||
227 | bool StandardConversionSequence::isPointerConversionToBool() const { | ||||
228 | // Note that FromType has not necessarily been transformed by the | ||||
229 | // array-to-pointer or function-to-pointer implicit conversions, so | ||||
230 | // check for their presence as well as checking whether FromType is | ||||
231 | // a pointer. | ||||
232 | if (getToType(1)->isBooleanType() && | ||||
233 | (getFromType()->isPointerType() || | ||||
234 | getFromType()->isMemberPointerType() || | ||||
235 | getFromType()->isObjCObjectPointerType() || | ||||
236 | getFromType()->isBlockPointerType() || | ||||
237 | First == ICK_Array_To_Pointer || First == ICK_Function_To_Pointer)) | ||||
238 | return true; | ||||
239 | |||||
240 | return false; | ||||
241 | } | ||||
242 | |||||
243 | /// isPointerConversionToVoidPointer - Determines whether this | ||||
244 | /// conversion is a conversion of a pointer to a void pointer. This is | ||||
245 | /// used as part of the ranking of standard conversion sequences (C++ | ||||
246 | /// 13.3.3.2p4). | ||||
247 | bool | ||||
248 | StandardConversionSequence:: | ||||
249 | isPointerConversionToVoidPointer(ASTContext& Context) const { | ||||
250 | QualType FromType = getFromType(); | ||||
251 | QualType ToType = getToType(1); | ||||
252 | |||||
253 | // Note that FromType has not necessarily been transformed by the | ||||
254 | // array-to-pointer implicit conversion, so check for its presence | ||||
255 | // and redo the conversion to get a pointer. | ||||
256 | if (First == ICK_Array_To_Pointer) | ||||
257 | FromType = Context.getArrayDecayedType(FromType); | ||||
258 | |||||
259 | if (Second == ICK_Pointer_Conversion && FromType->isAnyPointerType()) | ||||
260 | if (const PointerType* ToPtrType = ToType->getAs<PointerType>()) | ||||
261 | return ToPtrType->getPointeeType()->isVoidType(); | ||||
262 | |||||
263 | return false; | ||||
264 | } | ||||
265 | |||||
266 | /// Skip any implicit casts which could be either part of a narrowing conversion | ||||
267 | /// or after one in an implicit conversion. | ||||
268 | static const Expr *IgnoreNarrowingConversion(ASTContext &Ctx, | ||||
269 | const Expr *Converted) { | ||||
270 | // We can have cleanups wrapping the converted expression; these need to be | ||||
271 | // preserved so that destructors run if necessary. | ||||
272 | if (auto *EWC = dyn_cast<ExprWithCleanups>(Converted)) { | ||||
273 | Expr *Inner = | ||||
274 | const_cast<Expr *>(IgnoreNarrowingConversion(Ctx, EWC->getSubExpr())); | ||||
275 | return ExprWithCleanups::Create(Ctx, Inner, EWC->cleanupsHaveSideEffects(), | ||||
276 | EWC->getObjects()); | ||||
277 | } | ||||
278 | |||||
279 | while (auto *ICE = dyn_cast<ImplicitCastExpr>(Converted)) { | ||||
280 | switch (ICE->getCastKind()) { | ||||
281 | case CK_NoOp: | ||||
282 | case CK_IntegralCast: | ||||
283 | case CK_IntegralToBoolean: | ||||
284 | case CK_IntegralToFloating: | ||||
285 | case CK_BooleanToSignedIntegral: | ||||
286 | case CK_FloatingToIntegral: | ||||
287 | case CK_FloatingToBoolean: | ||||
288 | case CK_FloatingCast: | ||||
289 | Converted = ICE->getSubExpr(); | ||||
290 | continue; | ||||
291 | |||||
292 | default: | ||||
293 | return Converted; | ||||
294 | } | ||||
295 | } | ||||
296 | |||||
297 | return Converted; | ||||
298 | } | ||||
299 | |||||
300 | /// Check if this standard conversion sequence represents a narrowing | ||||
301 | /// conversion, according to C++11 [dcl.init.list]p7. | ||||
302 | /// | ||||
303 | /// \param Ctx The AST context. | ||||
304 | /// \param Converted The result of applying this standard conversion sequence. | ||||
305 | /// \param ConstantValue If this is an NK_Constant_Narrowing conversion, the | ||||
306 | /// value of the expression prior to the narrowing conversion. | ||||
307 | /// \param ConstantType If this is an NK_Constant_Narrowing conversion, the | ||||
308 | /// type of the expression prior to the narrowing conversion. | ||||
309 | /// \param IgnoreFloatToIntegralConversion If true type-narrowing conversions | ||||
310 | /// from floating point types to integral types should be ignored. | ||||
311 | NarrowingKind StandardConversionSequence::getNarrowingKind( | ||||
312 | ASTContext &Ctx, const Expr *Converted, APValue &ConstantValue, | ||||
313 | QualType &ConstantType, bool IgnoreFloatToIntegralConversion) const { | ||||
314 | assert(Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && "narrowing check outside C++")((Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && "narrowing check outside C++" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("Ctx.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && \"narrowing check outside C++\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 314, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
315 | |||||
316 | // C++11 [dcl.init.list]p7: | ||||
317 | // A narrowing conversion is an implicit conversion ... | ||||
318 | QualType FromType = getToType(0); | ||||
319 | QualType ToType = getToType(1); | ||||
320 | |||||
321 | // A conversion to an enumeration type is narrowing if the conversion to | ||||
322 | // the underlying type is narrowing. This only arises for expressions of | ||||
323 | // the form 'Enum{init}'. | ||||
324 | if (auto *ET = ToType->getAs<EnumType>()) | ||||
325 | ToType = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); | ||||
326 | |||||
327 | switch (Second) { | ||||
328 | // 'bool' is an integral type; dispatch to the right place to handle it. | ||||
329 | case ICK_Boolean_Conversion: | ||||
330 | if (FromType->isRealFloatingType()) | ||||
331 | goto FloatingIntegralConversion; | ||||
332 | if (FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType()) | ||||
333 | goto IntegralConversion; | ||||
334 | // -- from a pointer type or pointer-to-member type to bool, or | ||||
335 | return NK_Type_Narrowing; | ||||
336 | |||||
337 | // -- from a floating-point type to an integer type, or | ||||
338 | // | ||||
339 | // -- from an integer type or unscoped enumeration type to a floating-point | ||||
340 | // type, except where the source is a constant expression and the actual | ||||
341 | // value after conversion will fit into the target type and will produce | ||||
342 | // the original value when converted back to the original type, or | ||||
343 | case ICK_Floating_Integral: | ||||
344 | FloatingIntegralConversion: | ||||
345 | if (FromType->isRealFloatingType() && ToType->isIntegralType(Ctx)) { | ||||
346 | return NK_Type_Narrowing; | ||||
347 | } else if (FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType() && | ||||
348 | ToType->isRealFloatingType()) { | ||||
349 | if (IgnoreFloatToIntegralConversion) | ||||
350 | return NK_Not_Narrowing; | ||||
351 | const Expr *Initializer = IgnoreNarrowingConversion(Ctx, Converted); | ||||
352 | assert(Initializer && "Unknown conversion expression")((Initializer && "Unknown conversion expression") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("Initializer && \"Unknown conversion expression\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 352, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
353 | |||||
354 | // If it's value-dependent, we can't tell whether it's narrowing. | ||||
355 | if (Initializer->isValueDependent()) | ||||
356 | return NK_Dependent_Narrowing; | ||||
357 | |||||
358 | if (Optional<llvm::APSInt> IntConstantValue = | ||||
359 | Initializer->getIntegerConstantExpr(Ctx)) { | ||||
360 | // Convert the integer to the floating type. | ||||
361 | llvm::APFloat Result(Ctx.getFloatTypeSemantics(ToType)); | ||||
362 | Result.convertFromAPInt(*IntConstantValue, IntConstantValue->isSigned(), | ||||
363 | llvm::APFloat::rmNearestTiesToEven); | ||||
364 | // And back. | ||||
365 | llvm::APSInt ConvertedValue = *IntConstantValue; | ||||
366 | bool ignored; | ||||
367 | Result.convertToInteger(ConvertedValue, | ||||
368 | llvm::APFloat::rmTowardZero, &ignored); | ||||
369 | // If the resulting value is different, this was a narrowing conversion. | ||||
370 | if (*IntConstantValue != ConvertedValue) { | ||||
371 | ConstantValue = APValue(*IntConstantValue); | ||||
372 | ConstantType = Initializer->getType(); | ||||
373 | return NK_Constant_Narrowing; | ||||
374 | } | ||||
375 | } else { | ||||
376 | // Variables are always narrowings. | ||||
377 | return NK_Variable_Narrowing; | ||||
378 | } | ||||
379 | } | ||||
380 | return NK_Not_Narrowing; | ||||
381 | |||||
382 | // -- from long double to double or float, or from double to float, except | ||||
383 | // where the source is a constant expression and the actual value after | ||||
384 | // conversion is within the range of values that can be represented (even | ||||
385 | // if it cannot be represented exactly), or | ||||
386 | case ICK_Floating_Conversion: | ||||
387 | if (FromType->isRealFloatingType() && ToType->isRealFloatingType() && | ||||
388 | Ctx.getFloatingTypeOrder(FromType, ToType) == 1) { | ||||
389 | // FromType is larger than ToType. | ||||
390 | const Expr *Initializer = IgnoreNarrowingConversion(Ctx, Converted); | ||||
391 | |||||
392 | // If it's value-dependent, we can't tell whether it's narrowing. | ||||
393 | if (Initializer->isValueDependent()) | ||||
394 | return NK_Dependent_Narrowing; | ||||
395 | |||||
396 | if (Initializer->isCXX11ConstantExpr(Ctx, &ConstantValue)) { | ||||
397 | // Constant! | ||||
398 | assert(ConstantValue.isFloat())((ConstantValue.isFloat()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("ConstantValue.isFloat()", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 398, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
399 | llvm::APFloat FloatVal = ConstantValue.getFloat(); | ||||
400 | // Convert the source value into the target type. | ||||
401 | bool ignored; | ||||
402 | llvm::APFloat::opStatus ConvertStatus = FloatVal.convert( | ||||
403 | Ctx.getFloatTypeSemantics(ToType), | ||||
404 | llvm::APFloat::rmNearestTiesToEven, &ignored); | ||||
405 | // If there was no overflow, the source value is within the range of | ||||
406 | // values that can be represented. | ||||
407 | if (ConvertStatus & llvm::APFloat::opOverflow) { | ||||
408 | ConstantType = Initializer->getType(); | ||||
409 | return NK_Constant_Narrowing; | ||||
410 | } | ||||
411 | } else { | ||||
412 | return NK_Variable_Narrowing; | ||||
413 | } | ||||
414 | } | ||||
415 | return NK_Not_Narrowing; | ||||
416 | |||||
417 | // -- from an integer type or unscoped enumeration type to an integer type | ||||
418 | // that cannot represent all the values of the original type, except where | ||||
419 | // the source is a constant expression and the actual value after | ||||
420 | // conversion will fit into the target type and will produce the original | ||||
421 | // value when converted back to the original type. | ||||
422 | case ICK_Integral_Conversion: | ||||
423 | IntegralConversion: { | ||||
424 | assert(FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType())((FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType()) ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 424, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
425 | assert(ToType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType())((ToType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType()) ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("ToType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 425, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
426 | const bool FromSigned = FromType->isSignedIntegerOrEnumerationType(); | ||||
427 | const unsigned FromWidth = Ctx.getIntWidth(FromType); | ||||
428 | const bool ToSigned = ToType->isSignedIntegerOrEnumerationType(); | ||||
429 | const unsigned ToWidth = Ctx.getIntWidth(ToType); | ||||
430 | |||||
431 | if (FromWidth > ToWidth || | ||||
432 | (FromWidth == ToWidth && FromSigned != ToSigned) || | ||||
433 | (FromSigned && !ToSigned)) { | ||||
434 | // Not all values of FromType can be represented in ToType. | ||||
435 | const Expr *Initializer = IgnoreNarrowingConversion(Ctx, Converted); | ||||
436 | |||||
437 | // If it's value-dependent, we can't tell whether it's narrowing. | ||||
438 | if (Initializer->isValueDependent()) | ||||
439 | return NK_Dependent_Narrowing; | ||||
440 | |||||
441 | Optional<llvm::APSInt> OptInitializerValue; | ||||
442 | if (!(OptInitializerValue = Initializer->getIntegerConstantExpr(Ctx))) { | ||||
443 | // Such conversions on variables are always narrowing. | ||||
444 | return NK_Variable_Narrowing; | ||||
445 | } | ||||
446 | llvm::APSInt &InitializerValue = *OptInitializerValue; | ||||
447 | bool Narrowing = false; | ||||
448 | if (FromWidth < ToWidth) { | ||||
449 | // Negative -> unsigned is narrowing. Otherwise, more bits is never | ||||
450 | // narrowing. | ||||
451 | if (InitializerValue.isSigned() && InitializerValue.isNegative()) | ||||
452 | Narrowing = true; | ||||
453 | } else { | ||||
454 | // Add a bit to the InitializerValue so we don't have to worry about | ||||
455 | // signed vs. unsigned comparisons. | ||||
456 | InitializerValue = InitializerValue.extend( | ||||
457 | InitializerValue.getBitWidth() + 1); | ||||
458 | // Convert the initializer to and from the target width and signed-ness. | ||||
459 | llvm::APSInt ConvertedValue = InitializerValue; | ||||
460 | ConvertedValue = ConvertedValue.trunc(ToWidth); | ||||
461 | ConvertedValue.setIsSigned(ToSigned); | ||||
462 | ConvertedValue = ConvertedValue.extend(InitializerValue.getBitWidth()); | ||||
463 | ConvertedValue.setIsSigned(InitializerValue.isSigned()); | ||||
464 | // If the result is different, this was a narrowing conversion. | ||||
465 | if (ConvertedValue != InitializerValue) | ||||
466 | Narrowing = true; | ||||
467 | } | ||||
468 | if (Narrowing) { | ||||
469 | ConstantType = Initializer->getType(); | ||||
470 | ConstantValue = APValue(InitializerValue); | ||||
471 | return NK_Constant_Narrowing; | ||||
472 | } | ||||
473 | } | ||||
474 | return NK_Not_Narrowing; | ||||
475 | } | ||||
476 | |||||
477 | default: | ||||
478 | // Other kinds of conversions are not narrowings. | ||||
479 | return NK_Not_Narrowing; | ||||
480 | } | ||||
481 | } | ||||
482 | |||||
483 | /// dump - Print this standard conversion sequence to standard | ||||
484 | /// error. Useful for debugging overloading issues. | ||||
485 | LLVM_DUMP_METHOD__attribute__((noinline)) __attribute__((__used__)) void StandardConversionSequence::dump() const { | ||||
486 | raw_ostream &OS = llvm::errs(); | ||||
487 | bool PrintedSomething = false; | ||||
488 | if (First != ICK_Identity) { | ||||
489 | OS << GetImplicitConversionName(First); | ||||
490 | PrintedSomething = true; | ||||
491 | } | ||||
492 | |||||
493 | if (Second != ICK_Identity) { | ||||
494 | if (PrintedSomething) { | ||||
495 | OS << " -> "; | ||||
496 | } | ||||
497 | OS << GetImplicitConversionName(Second); | ||||
498 | |||||
499 | if (CopyConstructor) { | ||||
500 | OS << " (by copy constructor)"; | ||||
501 | } else if (DirectBinding) { | ||||
502 | OS << " (direct reference binding)"; | ||||
503 | } else if (ReferenceBinding) { | ||||
504 | OS << " (reference binding)"; | ||||
505 | } | ||||
506 | PrintedSomething = true; | ||||
507 | } | ||||
508 | |||||
509 | if (Third != ICK_Identity) { | ||||
510 | if (PrintedSomething) { | ||||
511 | OS << " -> "; | ||||
512 | } | ||||
513 | OS << GetImplicitConversionName(Third); | ||||
514 | PrintedSomething = true; | ||||
515 | } | ||||
516 | |||||
517 | if (!PrintedSomething) { | ||||
518 | OS << "No conversions required"; | ||||
519 | } | ||||
520 | } | ||||
521 | |||||
522 | /// dump - Print this user-defined conversion sequence to standard | ||||
523 | /// error. Useful for debugging overloading issues. | ||||
524 | void UserDefinedConversionSequence::dump() const { | ||||
525 | raw_ostream &OS = llvm::errs(); | ||||
526 | if (Before.First || Before.Second || Before.Third) { | ||||
527 | Before.dump(); | ||||
528 | OS << " -> "; | ||||
529 | } | ||||
530 | if (ConversionFunction) | ||||
531 | OS << '\'' << *ConversionFunction << '\''; | ||||
532 | else | ||||
533 | OS << "aggregate initialization"; | ||||
534 | if (After.First || After.Second || After.Third) { | ||||
535 | OS << " -> "; | ||||
536 | After.dump(); | ||||
537 | } | ||||
538 | } | ||||
539 | |||||
540 | /// dump - Print this implicit conversion sequence to standard | ||||
541 | /// error. Useful for debugging overloading issues. | ||||
542 | void ImplicitConversionSequence::dump() const { | ||||
543 | raw_ostream &OS = llvm::errs(); | ||||
544 | if (isStdInitializerListElement()) | ||||
545 | OS << "Worst std::initializer_list element conversion: "; | ||||
546 | switch (ConversionKind) { | ||||
547 | case StandardConversion: | ||||
548 | OS << "Standard conversion: "; | ||||
549 | Standard.dump(); | ||||
550 | break; | ||||
551 | case UserDefinedConversion: | ||||
552 | OS << "User-defined conversion: "; | ||||
553 | UserDefined.dump(); | ||||
554 | break; | ||||
555 | case EllipsisConversion: | ||||
556 | OS << "Ellipsis conversion"; | ||||
557 | break; | ||||
558 | case AmbiguousConversion: | ||||
559 | OS << "Ambiguous conversion"; | ||||
560 | break; | ||||
561 | case BadConversion: | ||||
562 | OS << "Bad conversion"; | ||||
563 | break; | ||||
564 | } | ||||
565 | |||||
566 | OS << "\n"; | ||||
567 | } | ||||
568 | |||||
569 | void AmbiguousConversionSequence::construct() { | ||||
570 | new (&conversions()) ConversionSet(); | ||||
571 | } | ||||
572 | |||||
573 | void AmbiguousConversionSequence::destruct() { | ||||
574 | conversions().~ConversionSet(); | ||||
575 | } | ||||
576 | |||||
577 | void | ||||
578 | AmbiguousConversionSequence::copyFrom(const AmbiguousConversionSequence &O) { | ||||
579 | FromTypePtr = O.FromTypePtr; | ||||
580 | ToTypePtr = O.ToTypePtr; | ||||
581 | new (&conversions()) ConversionSet(O.conversions()); | ||||
582 | } | ||||
583 | |||||
584 | namespace { | ||||
585 | // Structure used by DeductionFailureInfo to store | ||||
586 | // template argument information. | ||||
587 | struct DFIArguments { | ||||
588 | TemplateArgument FirstArg; | ||||
589 | TemplateArgument SecondArg; | ||||
590 | }; | ||||
591 | // Structure used by DeductionFailureInfo to store | ||||
592 | // template parameter and template argument information. | ||||
593 | struct DFIParamWithArguments : DFIArguments { | ||||
594 | TemplateParameter Param; | ||||
595 | }; | ||||
596 | // Structure used by DeductionFailureInfo to store template argument | ||||
597 | // information and the index of the problematic call argument. | ||||
598 | struct DFIDeducedMismatchArgs : DFIArguments { | ||||
599 | TemplateArgumentList *TemplateArgs; | ||||
600 | unsigned CallArgIndex; | ||||
601 | }; | ||||
602 | // Structure used by DeductionFailureInfo to store information about | ||||
603 | // unsatisfied constraints. | ||||
604 | struct CNSInfo { | ||||
605 | TemplateArgumentList *TemplateArgs; | ||||
606 | ConstraintSatisfaction Satisfaction; | ||||
607 | }; | ||||
608 | } | ||||
609 | |||||
610 | /// Convert from Sema's representation of template deduction information | ||||
611 | /// to the form used in overload-candidate information. | ||||
612 | DeductionFailureInfo | ||||
613 | clang::MakeDeductionFailureInfo(ASTContext &Context, | ||||
614 | Sema::TemplateDeductionResult TDK, | ||||
615 | TemplateDeductionInfo &Info) { | ||||
616 | DeductionFailureInfo Result; | ||||
617 | Result.Result = static_cast<unsigned>(TDK); | ||||
618 | Result.HasDiagnostic = false; | ||||
619 | switch (TDK) { | ||||
620 | case Sema::TDK_Invalid: | ||||
621 | case Sema::TDK_InstantiationDepth: | ||||
622 | case Sema::TDK_TooManyArguments: | ||||
623 | case Sema::TDK_TooFewArguments: | ||||
624 | case Sema::TDK_MiscellaneousDeductionFailure: | ||||
625 | case Sema::TDK_CUDATargetMismatch: | ||||
626 | Result.Data = nullptr; | ||||
627 | break; | ||||
628 | |||||
629 | case Sema::TDK_Incomplete: | ||||
630 | case Sema::TDK_InvalidExplicitArguments: | ||||
631 | Result.Data = Info.Param.getOpaqueValue(); | ||||
632 | break; | ||||
633 | |||||
634 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
635 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: { | ||||
636 | // FIXME: Should allocate from normal heap so that we can free this later. | ||||
637 | auto *Saved = new (Context) DFIDeducedMismatchArgs; | ||||
638 | Saved->FirstArg = Info.FirstArg; | ||||
639 | Saved->SecondArg = Info.SecondArg; | ||||
640 | Saved->TemplateArgs = Info.take(); | ||||
641 | Saved->CallArgIndex = Info.CallArgIndex; | ||||
642 | Result.Data = Saved; | ||||
643 | break; | ||||
644 | } | ||||
645 | |||||
646 | case Sema::TDK_NonDeducedMismatch: { | ||||
647 | // FIXME: Should allocate from normal heap so that we can free this later. | ||||
648 | DFIArguments *Saved = new (Context) DFIArguments; | ||||
649 | Saved->FirstArg = Info.FirstArg; | ||||
650 | Saved->SecondArg = Info.SecondArg; | ||||
651 | Result.Data = Saved; | ||||
652 | break; | ||||
653 | } | ||||
654 | |||||
655 | case Sema::TDK_IncompletePack: | ||||
656 | // FIXME: It's slightly wasteful to allocate two TemplateArguments for this. | ||||
657 | case Sema::TDK_Inconsistent: | ||||
658 | case Sema::TDK_Underqualified: { | ||||
659 | // FIXME: Should allocate from normal heap so that we can free this later. | ||||
660 | DFIParamWithArguments *Saved = new (Context) DFIParamWithArguments; | ||||
661 | Saved->Param = Info.Param; | ||||
662 | Saved->FirstArg = Info.FirstArg; | ||||
663 | Saved->SecondArg = Info.SecondArg; | ||||
664 | Result.Data = Saved; | ||||
665 | break; | ||||
666 | } | ||||
667 | |||||
668 | case Sema::TDK_SubstitutionFailure: | ||||
669 | Result.Data = Info.take(); | ||||
670 | if (Info.hasSFINAEDiagnostic()) { | ||||
671 | PartialDiagnosticAt *Diag = new (Result.Diagnostic) PartialDiagnosticAt( | ||||
672 | SourceLocation(), PartialDiagnostic::NullDiagnostic()); | ||||
673 | Info.takeSFINAEDiagnostic(*Diag); | ||||
674 | Result.HasDiagnostic = true; | ||||
675 | } | ||||
676 | break; | ||||
677 | |||||
678 | case Sema::TDK_ConstraintsNotSatisfied: { | ||||
679 | CNSInfo *Saved = new (Context) CNSInfo; | ||||
680 | Saved->TemplateArgs = Info.take(); | ||||
681 | Saved->Satisfaction = Info.AssociatedConstraintsSatisfaction; | ||||
682 | Result.Data = Saved; | ||||
683 | break; | ||||
684 | } | ||||
685 | |||||
686 | case Sema::TDK_Success: | ||||
687 | case Sema::TDK_NonDependentConversionFailure: | ||||
688 | llvm_unreachable("not a deduction failure")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("not a deduction failure", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 688); | ||||
689 | } | ||||
690 | |||||
691 | return Result; | ||||
692 | } | ||||
693 | |||||
694 | void DeductionFailureInfo::Destroy() { | ||||
695 | switch (static_cast<Sema::TemplateDeductionResult>(Result)) { | ||||
696 | case Sema::TDK_Success: | ||||
697 | case Sema::TDK_Invalid: | ||||
698 | case Sema::TDK_InstantiationDepth: | ||||
699 | case Sema::TDK_Incomplete: | ||||
700 | case Sema::TDK_TooManyArguments: | ||||
701 | case Sema::TDK_TooFewArguments: | ||||
702 | case Sema::TDK_InvalidExplicitArguments: | ||||
703 | case Sema::TDK_CUDATargetMismatch: | ||||
704 | case Sema::TDK_NonDependentConversionFailure: | ||||
705 | break; | ||||
706 | |||||
707 | case Sema::TDK_IncompletePack: | ||||
708 | case Sema::TDK_Inconsistent: | ||||
709 | case Sema::TDK_Underqualified: | ||||
710 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
711 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: | ||||
712 | case Sema::TDK_NonDeducedMismatch: | ||||
713 | // FIXME: Destroy the data? | ||||
714 | Data = nullptr; | ||||
715 | break; | ||||
716 | |||||
717 | case Sema::TDK_SubstitutionFailure: | ||||
718 | // FIXME: Destroy the template argument list? | ||||
719 | Data = nullptr; | ||||
720 | if (PartialDiagnosticAt *Diag = getSFINAEDiagnostic()) { | ||||
721 | Diag->~PartialDiagnosticAt(); | ||||
722 | HasDiagnostic = false; | ||||
723 | } | ||||
724 | break; | ||||
725 | |||||
726 | case Sema::TDK_ConstraintsNotSatisfied: | ||||
727 | // FIXME: Destroy the template argument list? | ||||
728 | Data = nullptr; | ||||
729 | if (PartialDiagnosticAt *Diag = getSFINAEDiagnostic()) { | ||||
730 | Diag->~PartialDiagnosticAt(); | ||||
731 | HasDiagnostic = false; | ||||
732 | } | ||||
733 | break; | ||||
734 | |||||
735 | // Unhandled | ||||
736 | case Sema::TDK_MiscellaneousDeductionFailure: | ||||
737 | break; | ||||
738 | } | ||||
739 | } | ||||
740 | |||||
741 | PartialDiagnosticAt *DeductionFailureInfo::getSFINAEDiagnostic() { | ||||
742 | if (HasDiagnostic) | ||||
743 | return static_cast<PartialDiagnosticAt*>(static_cast<void*>(Diagnostic)); | ||||
744 | return nullptr; | ||||
745 | } | ||||
746 | |||||
747 | TemplateParameter DeductionFailureInfo::getTemplateParameter() { | ||||
748 | switch (static_cast<Sema::TemplateDeductionResult>(Result)) { | ||||
749 | case Sema::TDK_Success: | ||||
750 | case Sema::TDK_Invalid: | ||||
751 | case Sema::TDK_InstantiationDepth: | ||||
752 | case Sema::TDK_TooManyArguments: | ||||
753 | case Sema::TDK_TooFewArguments: | ||||
754 | case Sema::TDK_SubstitutionFailure: | ||||
755 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
756 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: | ||||
757 | case Sema::TDK_NonDeducedMismatch: | ||||
758 | case Sema::TDK_CUDATargetMismatch: | ||||
759 | case Sema::TDK_NonDependentConversionFailure: | ||||
760 | case Sema::TDK_ConstraintsNotSatisfied: | ||||
761 | return TemplateParameter(); | ||||
762 | |||||
763 | case Sema::TDK_Incomplete: | ||||
764 | case Sema::TDK_InvalidExplicitArguments: | ||||
765 | return TemplateParameter::getFromOpaqueValue(Data); | ||||
766 | |||||
767 | case Sema::TDK_IncompletePack: | ||||
768 | case Sema::TDK_Inconsistent: | ||||
769 | case Sema::TDK_Underqualified: | ||||
770 | return static_cast<DFIParamWithArguments*>(Data)->Param; | ||||
771 | |||||
772 | // Unhandled | ||||
773 | case Sema::TDK_MiscellaneousDeductionFailure: | ||||
774 | break; | ||||
775 | } | ||||
776 | |||||
777 | return TemplateParameter(); | ||||
778 | } | ||||
779 | |||||
780 | TemplateArgumentList *DeductionFailureInfo::getTemplateArgumentList() { | ||||
781 | switch (static_cast<Sema::TemplateDeductionResult>(Result)) { | ||||
782 | case Sema::TDK_Success: | ||||
783 | case Sema::TDK_Invalid: | ||||
784 | case Sema::TDK_InstantiationDepth: | ||||
785 | case Sema::TDK_TooManyArguments: | ||||
786 | case Sema::TDK_TooFewArguments: | ||||
787 | case Sema::TDK_Incomplete: | ||||
788 | case Sema::TDK_IncompletePack: | ||||
789 | case Sema::TDK_InvalidExplicitArguments: | ||||
790 | case Sema::TDK_Inconsistent: | ||||
791 | case Sema::TDK_Underqualified: | ||||
792 | case Sema::TDK_NonDeducedMismatch: | ||||
793 | case Sema::TDK_CUDATargetMismatch: | ||||
794 | case Sema::TDK_NonDependentConversionFailure: | ||||
795 | return nullptr; | ||||
796 | |||||
797 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
798 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: | ||||
799 | return static_cast<DFIDeducedMismatchArgs*>(Data)->TemplateArgs; | ||||
800 | |||||
801 | case Sema::TDK_SubstitutionFailure: | ||||
802 | return static_cast<TemplateArgumentList*>(Data); | ||||
803 | |||||
804 | case Sema::TDK_ConstraintsNotSatisfied: | ||||
805 | return static_cast<CNSInfo*>(Data)->TemplateArgs; | ||||
806 | |||||
807 | // Unhandled | ||||
808 | case Sema::TDK_MiscellaneousDeductionFailure: | ||||
809 | break; | ||||
810 | } | ||||
811 | |||||
812 | return nullptr; | ||||
813 | } | ||||
814 | |||||
815 | const TemplateArgument *DeductionFailureInfo::getFirstArg() { | ||||
816 | switch (static_cast<Sema::TemplateDeductionResult>(Result)) { | ||||
817 | case Sema::TDK_Success: | ||||
818 | case Sema::TDK_Invalid: | ||||
819 | case Sema::TDK_InstantiationDepth: | ||||
820 | case Sema::TDK_Incomplete: | ||||
821 | case Sema::TDK_TooManyArguments: | ||||
822 | case Sema::TDK_TooFewArguments: | ||||
823 | case Sema::TDK_InvalidExplicitArguments: | ||||
824 | case Sema::TDK_SubstitutionFailure: | ||||
825 | case Sema::TDK_CUDATargetMismatch: | ||||
826 | case Sema::TDK_NonDependentConversionFailure: | ||||
827 | case Sema::TDK_ConstraintsNotSatisfied: | ||||
828 | return nullptr; | ||||
829 | |||||
830 | case Sema::TDK_IncompletePack: | ||||
831 | case Sema::TDK_Inconsistent: | ||||
832 | case Sema::TDK_Underqualified: | ||||
833 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
834 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: | ||||
835 | case Sema::TDK_NonDeducedMismatch: | ||||
836 | return &static_cast<DFIArguments*>(Data)->FirstArg; | ||||
837 | |||||
838 | // Unhandled | ||||
839 | case Sema::TDK_MiscellaneousDeductionFailure: | ||||
840 | break; | ||||
841 | } | ||||
842 | |||||
843 | return nullptr; | ||||
844 | } | ||||
845 | |||||
846 | const TemplateArgument *DeductionFailureInfo::getSecondArg() { | ||||
847 | switch (static_cast<Sema::TemplateDeductionResult>(Result)) { | ||||
848 | case Sema::TDK_Success: | ||||
849 | case Sema::TDK_Invalid: | ||||
850 | case Sema::TDK_InstantiationDepth: | ||||
851 | case Sema::TDK_Incomplete: | ||||
852 | case Sema::TDK_IncompletePack: | ||||
853 | case Sema::TDK_TooManyArguments: | ||||
854 | case Sema::TDK_TooFewArguments: | ||||
855 | case Sema::TDK_InvalidExplicitArguments: | ||||
856 | case Sema::TDK_SubstitutionFailure: | ||||
857 | case Sema::TDK_CUDATargetMismatch: | ||||
858 | case Sema::TDK_NonDependentConversionFailure: | ||||
859 | case Sema::TDK_ConstraintsNotSatisfied: | ||||
860 | return nullptr; | ||||
861 | |||||
862 | case Sema::TDK_Inconsistent: | ||||
863 | case Sema::TDK_Underqualified: | ||||
864 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
865 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: | ||||
866 | case Sema::TDK_NonDeducedMismatch: | ||||
867 | return &static_cast<DFIArguments*>(Data)->SecondArg; | ||||
868 | |||||
869 | // Unhandled | ||||
870 | case Sema::TDK_MiscellaneousDeductionFailure: | ||||
871 | break; | ||||
872 | } | ||||
873 | |||||
874 | return nullptr; | ||||
875 | } | ||||
876 | |||||
877 | llvm::Optional<unsigned> DeductionFailureInfo::getCallArgIndex() { | ||||
878 | switch (static_cast<Sema::TemplateDeductionResult>(Result)) { | ||||
879 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatch: | ||||
880 | case Sema::TDK_DeducedMismatchNested: | ||||
881 | return static_cast<DFIDeducedMismatchArgs*>(Data)->CallArgIndex; | ||||
882 | |||||
883 | default: | ||||
884 | return llvm::None; | ||||
885 | } | ||||
886 | } | ||||
887 | |||||
888 | bool OverloadCandidateSet::OperatorRewriteInfo::shouldAddReversed( | ||||
889 | OverloadedOperatorKind Op) { | ||||
890 | if (!AllowRewrittenCandidates) | ||||
891 | return false; | ||||
892 | return Op == OO_EqualEqual || Op == OO_Spaceship; | ||||
893 | } | ||||
894 | |||||
895 | bool OverloadCandidateSet::OperatorRewriteInfo::shouldAddReversed( | ||||
896 | ASTContext &Ctx, const FunctionDecl *FD) { | ||||
897 | if (!shouldAddReversed(FD->getDeclName().getCXXOverloadedOperator())) | ||||
898 | return false; | ||||
899 | // Don't bother adding a reversed candidate that can never be a better | ||||
900 | // match than the non-reversed version. | ||||
901 | return FD->getNumParams() != 2 || | ||||
902 | !Ctx.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FD->getParamDecl(0)->getType(), | ||||
903 | FD->getParamDecl(1)->getType()) || | ||||
904 | FD->hasAttr<EnableIfAttr>(); | ||||
905 | } | ||||
906 | |||||
907 | void OverloadCandidateSet::destroyCandidates() { | ||||
908 | for (iterator i = begin(), e = end(); i != e; ++i) { | ||||
909 | for (auto &C : i->Conversions) | ||||
910 | C.~ImplicitConversionSequence(); | ||||
911 | if (!i->Viable && i->FailureKind == ovl_fail_bad_deduction) | ||||
912 | i->DeductionFailure.Destroy(); | ||||
913 | } | ||||
914 | } | ||||
915 | |||||
916 | void OverloadCandidateSet::clear(CandidateSetKind CSK) { | ||||
917 | destroyCandidates(); | ||||
918 | SlabAllocator.Reset(); | ||||
919 | NumInlineBytesUsed = 0; | ||||
920 | Candidates.clear(); | ||||
921 | Functions.clear(); | ||||
922 | Kind = CSK; | ||||
923 | } | ||||
924 | |||||
925 | namespace { | ||||
926 | class UnbridgedCastsSet { | ||||
927 | struct Entry { | ||||
928 | Expr **Addr; | ||||
929 | Expr *Saved; | ||||
930 | }; | ||||
931 | SmallVector<Entry, 2> Entries; | ||||
932 | |||||
933 | public: | ||||
934 | void save(Sema &S, Expr *&E) { | ||||
935 | assert(E->hasPlaceholderType(BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast))((E->hasPlaceholderType(BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast)) ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("E->hasPlaceholderType(BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast)" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 935, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
936 | Entry entry = { &E, E }; | ||||
937 | Entries.push_back(entry); | ||||
938 | E = S.stripARCUnbridgedCast(E); | ||||
939 | } | ||||
940 | |||||
941 | void restore() { | ||||
942 | for (SmallVectorImpl<Entry>::iterator | ||||
943 | i = Entries.begin(), e = Entries.end(); i != e; ++i) | ||||
944 | *i->Addr = i->Saved; | ||||
945 | } | ||||
946 | }; | ||||
947 | } | ||||
948 | |||||
949 | /// checkPlaceholderForOverload - Do any interesting placeholder-like | ||||
950 | /// preprocessing on the given expression. | ||||
951 | /// | ||||
952 | /// \param unbridgedCasts a collection to which to add unbridged casts; | ||||
953 | /// without this, they will be immediately diagnosed as errors | ||||
954 | /// | ||||
955 | /// Return true on unrecoverable error. | ||||
956 | static bool | ||||
957 | checkPlaceholderForOverload(Sema &S, Expr *&E, | ||||
958 | UnbridgedCastsSet *unbridgedCasts = nullptr) { | ||||
959 | if (const BuiltinType *placeholder = E->getType()->getAsPlaceholderType()) { | ||||
960 | // We can't handle overloaded expressions here because overload | ||||
961 | // resolution might reasonably tweak them. | ||||
962 | if (placeholder->getKind() == BuiltinType::Overload) return false; | ||||
963 | |||||
964 | // If the context potentially accepts unbridged ARC casts, strip | ||||
965 | // the unbridged cast and add it to the collection for later restoration. | ||||
966 | if (placeholder->getKind() == BuiltinType::ARCUnbridgedCast && | ||||
967 | unbridgedCasts) { | ||||
968 | unbridgedCasts->save(S, E); | ||||
969 | return false; | ||||
970 | } | ||||
971 | |||||
972 | // Go ahead and check everything else. | ||||
973 | ExprResult result = S.CheckPlaceholderExpr(E); | ||||
974 | if (result.isInvalid()) | ||||
975 | return true; | ||||
976 | |||||
977 | E = result.get(); | ||||
978 | return false; | ||||
979 | } | ||||
980 | |||||
981 | // Nothing to do. | ||||
982 | return false; | ||||
983 | } | ||||
984 | |||||
985 | /// checkArgPlaceholdersForOverload - Check a set of call operands for | ||||
986 | /// placeholders. | ||||
987 | static bool checkArgPlaceholdersForOverload(Sema &S, | ||||
988 | MultiExprArg Args, | ||||
989 | UnbridgedCastsSet &unbridged) { | ||||
990 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Args.size(); i != e; ++i) | ||||
991 | if (checkPlaceholderForOverload(S, Args[i], &unbridged)) | ||||
992 | return true; | ||||
993 | |||||
994 | return false; | ||||
995 | } | ||||
996 | |||||
997 | /// Determine whether the given New declaration is an overload of the | ||||
998 | /// declarations in Old. This routine returns Ovl_Match or Ovl_NonFunction if | ||||
999 | /// New and Old cannot be overloaded, e.g., if New has the same signature as | ||||
1000 | /// some function in Old (C++ 1.3.10) or if the Old declarations aren't | ||||
1001 | /// functions (or function templates) at all. When it does return Ovl_Match or | ||||
1002 | /// Ovl_NonFunction, MatchedDecl will point to the decl that New cannot be | ||||
1003 | /// overloaded with. This decl may be a UsingShadowDecl on top of the underlying | ||||
1004 | /// declaration. | ||||
1005 | /// | ||||
1006 | /// Example: Given the following input: | ||||
1007 | /// | ||||
1008 | /// void f(int, float); // #1 | ||||
1009 | /// void f(int, int); // #2 | ||||
1010 | /// int f(int, int); // #3 | ||||
1011 | /// | ||||
1012 | /// When we process #1, there is no previous declaration of "f", so IsOverload | ||||
1013 | /// will not be used. | ||||
1014 | /// | ||||
1015 | /// When we process #2, Old contains only the FunctionDecl for #1. By comparing | ||||
1016 | /// the parameter types, we see that #1 and #2 are overloaded (since they have | ||||
1017 | /// different signatures), so this routine returns Ovl_Overload; MatchedDecl is | ||||
1018 | /// unchanged. | ||||
1019 | /// | ||||
1020 | /// When we process #3, Old is an overload set containing #1 and #2. We compare | ||||
1021 | /// the signatures of #3 to #1 (they're overloaded, so we do nothing) and then | ||||
1022 | /// #3 to #2. Since the signatures of #3 and #2 are identical (return types of | ||||
1023 | /// functions are not part of the signature), IsOverload returns Ovl_Match and | ||||
1024 | /// MatchedDecl will be set to point to the FunctionDecl for #2. | ||||
1025 | /// | ||||
1026 | /// 'NewIsUsingShadowDecl' indicates that 'New' is being introduced into a class | ||||
1027 | /// by a using declaration. The rules for whether to hide shadow declarations | ||||
1028 | /// ignore some properties which otherwise figure into a function template's | ||||
1029 | /// signature. | ||||
1030 | Sema::OverloadKind | ||||
1031 | Sema::CheckOverload(Scope *S, FunctionDecl *New, const LookupResult &Old, | ||||
1032 | NamedDecl *&Match, bool NewIsUsingDecl) { | ||||
1033 | for (LookupResult::iterator I = Old.begin(), E = Old.end(); | ||||
1034 | I != E; ++I) { | ||||
1035 | NamedDecl *OldD = *I; | ||||
1036 | |||||
1037 | bool OldIsUsingDecl = false; | ||||
1038 | if (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(OldD)) { | ||||
1039 | OldIsUsingDecl = true; | ||||
1040 | |||||
1041 | // We can always introduce two using declarations into the same | ||||
1042 | // context, even if they have identical signatures. | ||||
1043 | if (NewIsUsingDecl) continue; | ||||
1044 | |||||
1045 | OldD = cast<UsingShadowDecl>(OldD)->getTargetDecl(); | ||||
1046 | } | ||||
1047 | |||||
1048 | // A using-declaration does not conflict with another declaration | ||||
1049 | // if one of them is hidden. | ||||
1050 | if ((OldIsUsingDecl || NewIsUsingDecl) && !isVisible(*I)) | ||||
1051 | continue; | ||||
1052 | |||||
1053 | // If either declaration was introduced by a using declaration, | ||||
1054 | // we'll need to use slightly different rules for matching. | ||||
1055 | // Essentially, these rules are the normal rules, except that | ||||
1056 | // function templates hide function templates with different | ||||
1057 | // return types or template parameter lists. | ||||
1058 | bool UseMemberUsingDeclRules = | ||||
1059 | (OldIsUsingDecl || NewIsUsingDecl) && CurContext->isRecord() && | ||||
1060 | !New->getFriendObjectKind(); | ||||
1061 | |||||
1062 | if (FunctionDecl *OldF = OldD->getAsFunction()) { | ||||
1063 | if (!IsOverload(New, OldF, UseMemberUsingDeclRules)) { | ||||
1064 | if (UseMemberUsingDeclRules && OldIsUsingDecl) { | ||||
1065 | HideUsingShadowDecl(S, cast<UsingShadowDecl>(*I)); | ||||
1066 | continue; | ||||
1067 | } | ||||
1068 | |||||
1069 | if (!isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(OldD) && | ||||
1070 | !shouldLinkPossiblyHiddenDecl(*I, New)) | ||||
1071 | continue; | ||||
1072 | |||||
1073 | Match = *I; | ||||
1074 | return Ovl_Match; | ||||
1075 | } | ||||
1076 | |||||
1077 | // Builtins that have custom typechecking or have a reference should | ||||
1078 | // not be overloadable or redeclarable. | ||||
1079 | if (!getASTContext().canBuiltinBeRedeclared(OldF)) { | ||||
1080 | Match = *I; | ||||
1081 | return Ovl_NonFunction; | ||||
1082 | } | ||||
1083 | } else if (isa<UsingDecl>(OldD) || isa<UsingPackDecl>(OldD)) { | ||||
1084 | // We can overload with these, which can show up when doing | ||||
1085 | // redeclaration checks for UsingDecls. | ||||
1086 | assert(Old.getLookupKind() == LookupUsingDeclName)((Old.getLookupKind() == LookupUsingDeclName) ? static_cast< void> (0) : __assert_fail ("Old.getLookupKind() == LookupUsingDeclName" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1086, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1087 | } else if (isa<TagDecl>(OldD)) { | ||||
1088 | // We can always overload with tags by hiding them. | ||||
1089 | } else if (auto *UUD = dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(OldD)) { | ||||
1090 | // Optimistically assume that an unresolved using decl will | ||||
1091 | // overload; if it doesn't, we'll have to diagnose during | ||||
1092 | // template instantiation. | ||||
1093 | // | ||||
1094 | // Exception: if the scope is dependent and this is not a class | ||||
1095 | // member, the using declaration can only introduce an enumerator. | ||||
1096 | if (UUD->getQualifier()->isDependent() && !UUD->isCXXClassMember()) { | ||||
1097 | Match = *I; | ||||
1098 | return Ovl_NonFunction; | ||||
1099 | } | ||||
1100 | } else { | ||||
1101 | // (C++ 13p1): | ||||
1102 | // Only function declarations can be overloaded; object and type | ||||
1103 | // declarations cannot be overloaded. | ||||
1104 | Match = *I; | ||||
1105 | return Ovl_NonFunction; | ||||
1106 | } | ||||
1107 | } | ||||
1108 | |||||
1109 | // C++ [temp.friend]p1: | ||||
1110 | // For a friend function declaration that is not a template declaration: | ||||
1111 | // -- if the name of the friend is a qualified or unqualified template-id, | ||||
1112 | // [...], otherwise | ||||
1113 | // -- if the name of the friend is a qualified-id and a matching | ||||
1114 | // non-template function is found in the specified class or namespace, | ||||
1115 | // the friend declaration refers to that function, otherwise, | ||||
1116 | // -- if the name of the friend is a qualified-id and a matching function | ||||
1117 | // template is found in the specified class or namespace, the friend | ||||
1118 | // declaration refers to the deduced specialization of that function | ||||
1119 | // template, otherwise | ||||
1120 | // -- the name shall be an unqualified-id [...] | ||||
1121 | // If we get here for a qualified friend declaration, we've just reached the | ||||
1122 | // third bullet. If the type of the friend is dependent, skip this lookup | ||||
1123 | // until instantiation. | ||||
1124 | if (New->getFriendObjectKind() && New->getQualifier() && | ||||
1125 | !New->getDescribedFunctionTemplate() && | ||||
1126 | !New->getDependentSpecializationInfo() && | ||||
1127 | !New->getType()->isDependentType()) { | ||||
1128 | LookupResult TemplateSpecResult(LookupResult::Temporary, Old); | ||||
1129 | TemplateSpecResult.addAllDecls(Old); | ||||
1130 | if (CheckFunctionTemplateSpecialization(New, nullptr, TemplateSpecResult, | ||||
1131 | /*QualifiedFriend*/true)) { | ||||
1132 | New->setInvalidDecl(); | ||||
1133 | return Ovl_Overload; | ||||
1134 | } | ||||
1135 | |||||
1136 | Match = TemplateSpecResult.getAsSingle<FunctionDecl>(); | ||||
1137 | return Ovl_Match; | ||||
1138 | } | ||||
1139 | |||||
1140 | return Ovl_Overload; | ||||
1141 | } | ||||
1142 | |||||
1143 | bool Sema::IsOverload(FunctionDecl *New, FunctionDecl *Old, | ||||
1144 | bool UseMemberUsingDeclRules, bool ConsiderCudaAttrs, | ||||
1145 | bool ConsiderRequiresClauses) { | ||||
1146 | // C++ [basic.start.main]p2: This function shall not be overloaded. | ||||
1147 | if (New->isMain()) | ||||
1148 | return false; | ||||
1149 | |||||
1150 | // MSVCRT user defined entry points cannot be overloaded. | ||||
1151 | if (New->isMSVCRTEntryPoint()) | ||||
1152 | return false; | ||||
1153 | |||||
1154 | FunctionTemplateDecl *OldTemplate = Old->getDescribedFunctionTemplate(); | ||||
1155 | FunctionTemplateDecl *NewTemplate = New->getDescribedFunctionTemplate(); | ||||
1156 | |||||
1157 | // C++ [temp.fct]p2: | ||||
1158 | // A function template can be overloaded with other function templates | ||||
1159 | // and with normal (non-template) functions. | ||||
1160 | if ((OldTemplate == nullptr) != (NewTemplate == nullptr)) | ||||
1161 | return true; | ||||
1162 | |||||
1163 | // Is the function New an overload of the function Old? | ||||
1164 | QualType OldQType = Context.getCanonicalType(Old->getType()); | ||||
1165 | QualType NewQType = Context.getCanonicalType(New->getType()); | ||||
1166 | |||||
1167 | // Compare the signatures (C++ 1.3.10) of the two functions to | ||||
1168 | // determine whether they are overloads. If we find any mismatch | ||||
1169 | // in the signature, they are overloads. | ||||
1170 | |||||
1171 | // If either of these functions is a K&R-style function (no | ||||
1172 | // prototype), then we consider them to have matching signatures. | ||||
1173 | if (isa<FunctionNoProtoType>(OldQType.getTypePtr()) || | ||||
1174 | isa<FunctionNoProtoType>(NewQType.getTypePtr())) | ||||
1175 | return false; | ||||
1176 | |||||
1177 | const FunctionProtoType *OldType = cast<FunctionProtoType>(OldQType); | ||||
1178 | const FunctionProtoType *NewType = cast<FunctionProtoType>(NewQType); | ||||
1179 | |||||
1180 | // The signature of a function includes the types of its | ||||
1181 | // parameters (C++ 1.3.10), which includes the presence or absence | ||||
1182 | // of the ellipsis; see C++ DR 357). | ||||
1183 | if (OldQType != NewQType && | ||||
1184 | (OldType->getNumParams() != NewType->getNumParams() || | ||||
1185 | OldType->isVariadic() != NewType->isVariadic() || | ||||
1186 | !FunctionParamTypesAreEqual(OldType, NewType))) | ||||
1187 | return true; | ||||
1188 | |||||
1189 | // C++ [temp.over.link]p4: | ||||
1190 | // The signature of a function template consists of its function | ||||
1191 | // signature, its return type and its template parameter list. The names | ||||
1192 | // of the template parameters are significant only for establishing the | ||||
1193 | // relationship between the template parameters and the rest of the | ||||
1194 | // signature. | ||||
1195 | // | ||||
1196 | // We check the return type and template parameter lists for function | ||||
1197 | // templates first; the remaining checks follow. | ||||
1198 | // | ||||
1199 | // However, we don't consider either of these when deciding whether | ||||
1200 | // a member introduced by a shadow declaration is hidden. | ||||
1201 | if (!UseMemberUsingDeclRules && NewTemplate && | ||||
1202 | (!TemplateParameterListsAreEqual(NewTemplate->getTemplateParameters(), | ||||
1203 | OldTemplate->getTemplateParameters(), | ||||
1204 | false, TPL_TemplateMatch) || | ||||
1205 | !Context.hasSameType(Old->getDeclaredReturnType(), | ||||
1206 | New->getDeclaredReturnType()))) | ||||
1207 | return true; | ||||
1208 | |||||
1209 | // If the function is a class member, its signature includes the | ||||
1210 | // cv-qualifiers (if any) and ref-qualifier (if any) on the function itself. | ||||
1211 | // | ||||
1212 | // As part of this, also check whether one of the member functions | ||||
1213 | // is static, in which case they are not overloads (C++ | ||||
1214 | // 13.1p2). While not part of the definition of the signature, | ||||
1215 | // this check is important to determine whether these functions | ||||
1216 | // can be overloaded. | ||||
1217 | CXXMethodDecl *OldMethod = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(Old); | ||||
1218 | CXXMethodDecl *NewMethod = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(New); | ||||
1219 | if (OldMethod && NewMethod && | ||||
1220 | !OldMethod->isStatic() && !NewMethod->isStatic()) { | ||||
1221 | if (OldMethod->getRefQualifier() != NewMethod->getRefQualifier()) { | ||||
1222 | if (!UseMemberUsingDeclRules && | ||||
1223 | (OldMethod->getRefQualifier() == RQ_None || | ||||
1224 | NewMethod->getRefQualifier() == RQ_None)) { | ||||
1225 | // C++0x [over.load]p2: | ||||
1226 | // - Member function declarations with the same name and the same | ||||
1227 | // parameter-type-list as well as member function template | ||||
1228 | // declarations with the same name, the same parameter-type-list, and | ||||
1229 | // the same template parameter lists cannot be overloaded if any of | ||||
1230 | // them, but not all, have a ref-qualifier (8.3.5). | ||||
1231 | Diag(NewMethod->getLocation(), diag::err_ref_qualifier_overload) | ||||
1232 | << NewMethod->getRefQualifier() << OldMethod->getRefQualifier(); | ||||
1233 | Diag(OldMethod->getLocation(), diag::note_previous_declaration); | ||||
1234 | } | ||||
1235 | return true; | ||||
1236 | } | ||||
1237 | |||||
1238 | // We may not have applied the implicit const for a constexpr member | ||||
1239 | // function yet (because we haven't yet resolved whether this is a static | ||||
1240 | // or non-static member function). Add it now, on the assumption that this | ||||
1241 | // is a redeclaration of OldMethod. | ||||
1242 | auto OldQuals = OldMethod->getMethodQualifiers(); | ||||
1243 | auto NewQuals = NewMethod->getMethodQualifiers(); | ||||
1244 | if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus14 && NewMethod->isConstexpr() && | ||||
1245 | !isa<CXXConstructorDecl>(NewMethod)) | ||||
1246 | NewQuals.addConst(); | ||||
1247 | // We do not allow overloading based off of '__restrict'. | ||||
1248 | OldQuals.removeRestrict(); | ||||
1249 | NewQuals.removeRestrict(); | ||||
1250 | if (OldQuals != NewQuals) | ||||
1251 | return true; | ||||
1252 | } | ||||
1253 | |||||
1254 | // Though pass_object_size is placed on parameters and takes an argument, we | ||||
1255 | // consider it to be a function-level modifier for the sake of function | ||||
1256 | // identity. Either the function has one or more parameters with | ||||
1257 | // pass_object_size or it doesn't. | ||||
1258 | if (functionHasPassObjectSizeParams(New) != | ||||
1259 | functionHasPassObjectSizeParams(Old)) | ||||
1260 | return true; | ||||
1261 | |||||
1262 | // enable_if attributes are an order-sensitive part of the signature. | ||||
1263 | for (specific_attr_iterator<EnableIfAttr> | ||||
1264 | NewI = New->specific_attr_begin<EnableIfAttr>(), | ||||
1265 | NewE = New->specific_attr_end<EnableIfAttr>(), | ||||
1266 | OldI = Old->specific_attr_begin<EnableIfAttr>(), | ||||
1267 | OldE = Old->specific_attr_end<EnableIfAttr>(); | ||||
1268 | NewI != NewE || OldI != OldE; ++NewI, ++OldI) { | ||||
1269 | if (NewI == NewE || OldI == OldE) | ||||
1270 | return true; | ||||
1271 | llvm::FoldingSetNodeID NewID, OldID; | ||||
1272 | NewI->getCond()->Profile(NewID, Context, true); | ||||
1273 | OldI->getCond()->Profile(OldID, Context, true); | ||||
1274 | if (NewID != OldID) | ||||
1275 | return true; | ||||
1276 | } | ||||
1277 | |||||
1278 | if (getLangOpts().CUDA && ConsiderCudaAttrs) { | ||||
1279 | // Don't allow overloading of destructors. (In theory we could, but it | ||||
1280 | // would be a giant change to clang.) | ||||
1281 | if (!isa<CXXDestructorDecl>(New)) { | ||||
1282 | CUDAFunctionTarget NewTarget = IdentifyCUDATarget(New), | ||||
1283 | OldTarget = IdentifyCUDATarget(Old); | ||||
1284 | if (NewTarget != CFT_InvalidTarget) { | ||||
1285 | assert((OldTarget != CFT_InvalidTarget) &&(((OldTarget != CFT_InvalidTarget) && "Unexpected invalid target." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("(OldTarget != CFT_InvalidTarget) && \"Unexpected invalid target.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1286, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1286 | "Unexpected invalid target.")(((OldTarget != CFT_InvalidTarget) && "Unexpected invalid target." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("(OldTarget != CFT_InvalidTarget) && \"Unexpected invalid target.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1286, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1287 | |||||
1288 | // Allow overloading of functions with same signature and different CUDA | ||||
1289 | // target attributes. | ||||
1290 | if (NewTarget != OldTarget) | ||||
1291 | return true; | ||||
1292 | } | ||||
1293 | } | ||||
1294 | } | ||||
1295 | |||||
1296 | if (ConsiderRequiresClauses) { | ||||
1297 | Expr *NewRC = New->getTrailingRequiresClause(), | ||||
1298 | *OldRC = Old->getTrailingRequiresClause(); | ||||
1299 | if ((NewRC != nullptr) != (OldRC != nullptr)) | ||||
1300 | // RC are most certainly different - these are overloads. | ||||
1301 | return true; | ||||
1302 | |||||
1303 | if (NewRC) { | ||||
1304 | llvm::FoldingSetNodeID NewID, OldID; | ||||
1305 | NewRC->Profile(NewID, Context, /*Canonical=*/true); | ||||
1306 | OldRC->Profile(OldID, Context, /*Canonical=*/true); | ||||
1307 | if (NewID != OldID) | ||||
1308 | // RCs are not equivalent - these are overloads. | ||||
1309 | return true; | ||||
1310 | } | ||||
1311 | } | ||||
1312 | |||||
1313 | // The signatures match; this is not an overload. | ||||
1314 | return false; | ||||
1315 | } | ||||
1316 | |||||
1317 | /// Tries a user-defined conversion from From to ToType. | ||||
1318 | /// | ||||
1319 | /// Produces an implicit conversion sequence for when a standard conversion | ||||
1320 | /// is not an option. See TryImplicitConversion for more information. | ||||
1321 | static ImplicitConversionSequence | ||||
1322 | TryUserDefinedConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
1323 | bool SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
1324 | AllowedExplicit AllowExplicit, | ||||
1325 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1326 | bool CStyle, | ||||
1327 | bool AllowObjCWritebackConversion, | ||||
1328 | bool AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit) { | ||||
1329 | ImplicitConversionSequence ICS; | ||||
1330 | |||||
1331 | if (SuppressUserConversions) { | ||||
1332 | // We're not in the case above, so there is no conversion that | ||||
1333 | // we can perform. | ||||
1334 | ICS.setBad(BadConversionSequence::no_conversion, From, ToType); | ||||
1335 | return ICS; | ||||
1336 | } | ||||
1337 | |||||
1338 | // Attempt user-defined conversion. | ||||
1339 | OverloadCandidateSet Conversions(From->getExprLoc(), | ||||
1340 | OverloadCandidateSet::CSK_Normal); | ||||
1341 | switch (IsUserDefinedConversion(S, From, ToType, ICS.UserDefined, | ||||
1342 | Conversions, AllowExplicit, | ||||
1343 | AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit)) { | ||||
1344 | case OR_Success: | ||||
1345 | case OR_Deleted: | ||||
1346 | ICS.setUserDefined(); | ||||
1347 | // C++ [over.ics.user]p4: | ||||
1348 | // A conversion of an expression of class type to the same class | ||||
1349 | // type is given Exact Match rank, and a conversion of an | ||||
1350 | // expression of class type to a base class of that type is | ||||
1351 | // given Conversion rank, in spite of the fact that a copy | ||||
1352 | // constructor (i.e., a user-defined conversion function) is | ||||
1353 | // called for those cases. | ||||
1354 | if (CXXConstructorDecl *Constructor | ||||
1355 | = dyn_cast<CXXConstructorDecl>(ICS.UserDefined.ConversionFunction)) { | ||||
1356 | QualType FromCanon | ||||
1357 | = S.Context.getCanonicalType(From->getType().getUnqualifiedType()); | ||||
1358 | QualType ToCanon | ||||
1359 | = S.Context.getCanonicalType(ToType).getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1360 | if (Constructor->isCopyConstructor() && | ||||
1361 | (FromCanon == ToCanon || | ||||
1362 | S.IsDerivedFrom(From->getBeginLoc(), FromCanon, ToCanon))) { | ||||
1363 | // Turn this into a "standard" conversion sequence, so that it | ||||
1364 | // gets ranked with standard conversion sequences. | ||||
1365 | DeclAccessPair Found = ICS.UserDefined.FoundConversionFunction; | ||||
1366 | ICS.setStandard(); | ||||
1367 | ICS.Standard.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
1368 | ICS.Standard.setFromType(From->getType()); | ||||
1369 | ICS.Standard.setAllToTypes(ToType); | ||||
1370 | ICS.Standard.CopyConstructor = Constructor; | ||||
1371 | ICS.Standard.FoundCopyConstructor = Found; | ||||
1372 | if (ToCanon != FromCanon) | ||||
1373 | ICS.Standard.Second = ICK_Derived_To_Base; | ||||
1374 | } | ||||
1375 | } | ||||
1376 | break; | ||||
1377 | |||||
1378 | case OR_Ambiguous: | ||||
1379 | ICS.setAmbiguous(); | ||||
1380 | ICS.Ambiguous.setFromType(From->getType()); | ||||
1381 | ICS.Ambiguous.setToType(ToType); | ||||
1382 | for (OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Cand = Conversions.begin(); | ||||
1383 | Cand != Conversions.end(); ++Cand) | ||||
1384 | if (Cand->Best) | ||||
1385 | ICS.Ambiguous.addConversion(Cand->FoundDecl, Cand->Function); | ||||
1386 | break; | ||||
1387 | |||||
1388 | // Fall through. | ||||
1389 | case OR_No_Viable_Function: | ||||
1390 | ICS.setBad(BadConversionSequence::no_conversion, From, ToType); | ||||
1391 | break; | ||||
1392 | } | ||||
1393 | |||||
1394 | return ICS; | ||||
1395 | } | ||||
1396 | |||||
1397 | /// TryImplicitConversion - Attempt to perform an implicit conversion | ||||
1398 | /// from the given expression (Expr) to the given type (ToType). This | ||||
1399 | /// function returns an implicit conversion sequence that can be used | ||||
1400 | /// to perform the initialization. Given | ||||
1401 | /// | ||||
1402 | /// void f(float f); | ||||
1403 | /// void g(int i) { f(i); } | ||||
1404 | /// | ||||
1405 | /// this routine would produce an implicit conversion sequence to | ||||
1406 | /// describe the initialization of f from i, which will be a standard | ||||
1407 | /// conversion sequence containing an lvalue-to-rvalue conversion (C++ | ||||
1408 | /// 4.1) followed by a floating-integral conversion (C++ 4.9). | ||||
1409 | // | ||||
1410 | /// Note that this routine only determines how the conversion can be | ||||
1411 | /// performed; it does not actually perform the conversion. As such, | ||||
1412 | /// it will not produce any diagnostics if no conversion is available, | ||||
1413 | /// but will instead return an implicit conversion sequence of kind | ||||
1414 | /// "BadConversion". | ||||
1415 | /// | ||||
1416 | /// If @p SuppressUserConversions, then user-defined conversions are | ||||
1417 | /// not permitted. | ||||
1418 | /// If @p AllowExplicit, then explicit user-defined conversions are | ||||
1419 | /// permitted. | ||||
1420 | /// | ||||
1421 | /// \param AllowObjCWritebackConversion Whether we allow the Objective-C | ||||
1422 | /// writeback conversion, which allows __autoreleasing id* parameters to | ||||
1423 | /// be initialized with __strong id* or __weak id* arguments. | ||||
1424 | static ImplicitConversionSequence | ||||
1425 | TryImplicitConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
1426 | bool SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
1427 | AllowedExplicit AllowExplicit, | ||||
1428 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1429 | bool CStyle, | ||||
1430 | bool AllowObjCWritebackConversion, | ||||
1431 | bool AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit) { | ||||
1432 | ImplicitConversionSequence ICS; | ||||
1433 | if (IsStandardConversion(S, From, ToType, InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1434 | ICS.Standard, CStyle, AllowObjCWritebackConversion)){ | ||||
1435 | ICS.setStandard(); | ||||
1436 | return ICS; | ||||
1437 | } | ||||
1438 | |||||
1439 | if (!S.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) { | ||||
1440 | ICS.setBad(BadConversionSequence::no_conversion, From, ToType); | ||||
1441 | return ICS; | ||||
1442 | } | ||||
1443 | |||||
1444 | // C++ [over.ics.user]p4: | ||||
1445 | // A conversion of an expression of class type to the same class | ||||
1446 | // type is given Exact Match rank, and a conversion of an | ||||
1447 | // expression of class type to a base class of that type is | ||||
1448 | // given Conversion rank, in spite of the fact that a copy/move | ||||
1449 | // constructor (i.e., a user-defined conversion function) is | ||||
1450 | // called for those cases. | ||||
1451 | QualType FromType = From->getType(); | ||||
1452 | if (ToType->getAs<RecordType>() && FromType->getAs<RecordType>() && | ||||
1453 | (S.Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType, ToType) || | ||||
1454 | S.IsDerivedFrom(From->getBeginLoc(), FromType, ToType))) { | ||||
1455 | ICS.setStandard(); | ||||
1456 | ICS.Standard.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
1457 | ICS.Standard.setFromType(FromType); | ||||
1458 | ICS.Standard.setAllToTypes(ToType); | ||||
1459 | |||||
1460 | // We don't actually check at this point whether there is a valid | ||||
1461 | // copy/move constructor, since overloading just assumes that it | ||||
1462 | // exists. When we actually perform initialization, we'll find the | ||||
1463 | // appropriate constructor to copy the returned object, if needed. | ||||
1464 | ICS.Standard.CopyConstructor = nullptr; | ||||
1465 | |||||
1466 | // Determine whether this is considered a derived-to-base conversion. | ||||
1467 | if (!S.Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType, ToType)) | ||||
1468 | ICS.Standard.Second = ICK_Derived_To_Base; | ||||
1469 | |||||
1470 | return ICS; | ||||
1471 | } | ||||
1472 | |||||
1473 | return TryUserDefinedConversion(S, From, ToType, SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
1474 | AllowExplicit, InOverloadResolution, CStyle, | ||||
1475 | AllowObjCWritebackConversion, | ||||
1476 | AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit); | ||||
1477 | } | ||||
1478 | |||||
1479 | ImplicitConversionSequence | ||||
1480 | Sema::TryImplicitConversion(Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
1481 | bool SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
1482 | AllowedExplicit AllowExplicit, | ||||
1483 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1484 | bool CStyle, | ||||
1485 | bool AllowObjCWritebackConversion) { | ||||
1486 | return ::TryImplicitConversion(*this, From, ToType, SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
1487 | AllowExplicit, InOverloadResolution, CStyle, | ||||
1488 | AllowObjCWritebackConversion, | ||||
1489 | /*AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit=*/false); | ||||
1490 | } | ||||
1491 | |||||
1492 | /// PerformImplicitConversion - Perform an implicit conversion of the | ||||
1493 | /// expression From to the type ToType. Returns the | ||||
1494 | /// converted expression. Flavor is the kind of conversion we're | ||||
1495 | /// performing, used in the error message. If @p AllowExplicit, | ||||
1496 | /// explicit user-defined conversions are permitted. | ||||
1497 | ExprResult Sema::PerformImplicitConversion(Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
1498 | AssignmentAction Action, | ||||
1499 | bool AllowExplicit) { | ||||
1500 | if (checkPlaceholderForOverload(*this, From)) | ||||
1501 | return ExprError(); | ||||
1502 | |||||
1503 | // Objective-C ARC: Determine whether we will allow the writeback conversion. | ||||
1504 | bool AllowObjCWritebackConversion | ||||
1505 | = getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount && | ||||
1506 | (Action == AA_Passing || Action == AA_Sending); | ||||
1507 | if (getLangOpts().ObjC) | ||||
1508 | CheckObjCBridgeRelatedConversions(From->getBeginLoc(), ToType, | ||||
1509 | From->getType(), From); | ||||
1510 | ImplicitConversionSequence ICS = ::TryImplicitConversion( | ||||
1511 | *this, From, ToType, | ||||
1512 | /*SuppressUserConversions=*/false, | ||||
1513 | AllowExplicit ? AllowedExplicit::All : AllowedExplicit::None, | ||||
1514 | /*InOverloadResolution=*/false, | ||||
1515 | /*CStyle=*/false, AllowObjCWritebackConversion, | ||||
1516 | /*AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit=*/false); | ||||
1517 | return PerformImplicitConversion(From, ToType, ICS, Action); | ||||
1518 | } | ||||
1519 | |||||
1520 | /// Determine whether the conversion from FromType to ToType is a valid | ||||
1521 | /// conversion that strips "noexcept" or "noreturn" off the nested function | ||||
1522 | /// type. | ||||
1523 | bool Sema::IsFunctionConversion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
1524 | QualType &ResultTy) { | ||||
1525 | if (Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType, ToType)) | ||||
1526 | return false; | ||||
1527 | |||||
1528 | // Permit the conversion F(t __attribute__((noreturn))) -> F(t) | ||||
1529 | // or F(t noexcept) -> F(t) | ||||
1530 | // where F adds one of the following at most once: | ||||
1531 | // - a pointer | ||||
1532 | // - a member pointer | ||||
1533 | // - a block pointer | ||||
1534 | // Changes here need matching changes in FindCompositePointerType. | ||||
1535 | CanQualType CanTo = Context.getCanonicalType(ToType); | ||||
1536 | CanQualType CanFrom = Context.getCanonicalType(FromType); | ||||
1537 | Type::TypeClass TyClass = CanTo->getTypeClass(); | ||||
1538 | if (TyClass != CanFrom->getTypeClass()) return false; | ||||
1539 | if (TyClass != Type::FunctionProto && TyClass != Type::FunctionNoProto) { | ||||
1540 | if (TyClass == Type::Pointer) { | ||||
1541 | CanTo = CanTo.castAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | ||||
1542 | CanFrom = CanFrom.castAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | ||||
1543 | } else if (TyClass == Type::BlockPointer) { | ||||
1544 | CanTo = CanTo.castAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | ||||
1545 | CanFrom = CanFrom.castAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | ||||
1546 | } else if (TyClass == Type::MemberPointer) { | ||||
1547 | auto ToMPT = CanTo.castAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
1548 | auto FromMPT = CanFrom.castAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
1549 | // A function pointer conversion cannot change the class of the function. | ||||
1550 | if (ToMPT->getClass() != FromMPT->getClass()) | ||||
1551 | return false; | ||||
1552 | CanTo = ToMPT->getPointeeType(); | ||||
1553 | CanFrom = FromMPT->getPointeeType(); | ||||
1554 | } else { | ||||
1555 | return false; | ||||
1556 | } | ||||
1557 | |||||
1558 | TyClass = CanTo->getTypeClass(); | ||||
1559 | if (TyClass != CanFrom->getTypeClass()) return false; | ||||
1560 | if (TyClass != Type::FunctionProto && TyClass != Type::FunctionNoProto) | ||||
1561 | return false; | ||||
1562 | } | ||||
1563 | |||||
1564 | const auto *FromFn = cast<FunctionType>(CanFrom); | ||||
1565 | FunctionType::ExtInfo FromEInfo = FromFn->getExtInfo(); | ||||
1566 | |||||
1567 | const auto *ToFn = cast<FunctionType>(CanTo); | ||||
1568 | FunctionType::ExtInfo ToEInfo = ToFn->getExtInfo(); | ||||
1569 | |||||
1570 | bool Changed = false; | ||||
1571 | |||||
1572 | // Drop 'noreturn' if not present in target type. | ||||
1573 | if (FromEInfo.getNoReturn() && !ToEInfo.getNoReturn()) { | ||||
1574 | FromFn = Context.adjustFunctionType(FromFn, FromEInfo.withNoReturn(false)); | ||||
1575 | Changed = true; | ||||
1576 | } | ||||
1577 | |||||
1578 | // Drop 'noexcept' if not present in target type. | ||||
1579 | if (const auto *FromFPT = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(FromFn)) { | ||||
1580 | const auto *ToFPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(ToFn); | ||||
1581 | if (FromFPT->isNothrow() && !ToFPT->isNothrow()) { | ||||
1582 | FromFn = cast<FunctionType>( | ||||
1583 | Context.getFunctionTypeWithExceptionSpec(QualType(FromFPT, 0), | ||||
1584 | EST_None) | ||||
1585 | .getTypePtr()); | ||||
1586 | Changed = true; | ||||
1587 | } | ||||
1588 | |||||
1589 | // Convert FromFPT's ExtParameterInfo if necessary. The conversion is valid | ||||
1590 | // only if the ExtParameterInfo lists of the two function prototypes can be | ||||
1591 | // merged and the merged list is identical to ToFPT's ExtParameterInfo list. | ||||
1592 | SmallVector<FunctionProtoType::ExtParameterInfo, 4> NewParamInfos; | ||||
1593 | bool CanUseToFPT, CanUseFromFPT; | ||||
1594 | if (Context.mergeExtParameterInfo(ToFPT, FromFPT, CanUseToFPT, | ||||
1595 | CanUseFromFPT, NewParamInfos) && | ||||
1596 | CanUseToFPT && !CanUseFromFPT) { | ||||
1597 | FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo ExtInfo = FromFPT->getExtProtoInfo(); | ||||
1598 | ExtInfo.ExtParameterInfos = | ||||
1599 | NewParamInfos.empty() ? nullptr : NewParamInfos.data(); | ||||
1600 | QualType QT = Context.getFunctionType(FromFPT->getReturnType(), | ||||
1601 | FromFPT->getParamTypes(), ExtInfo); | ||||
1602 | FromFn = QT->getAs<FunctionType>(); | ||||
1603 | Changed = true; | ||||
1604 | } | ||||
1605 | } | ||||
1606 | |||||
1607 | if (!Changed) | ||||
1608 | return false; | ||||
1609 | |||||
1610 | assert(QualType(FromFn, 0).isCanonical())((QualType(FromFn, 0).isCanonical()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("QualType(FromFn, 0).isCanonical()", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1610, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1611 | if (QualType(FromFn, 0) != CanTo) return false; | ||||
1612 | |||||
1613 | ResultTy = ToType; | ||||
1614 | return true; | ||||
1615 | } | ||||
1616 | |||||
1617 | /// Determine whether the conversion from FromType to ToType is a valid | ||||
1618 | /// vector conversion. | ||||
1619 | /// | ||||
1620 | /// \param ICK Will be set to the vector conversion kind, if this is a vector | ||||
1621 | /// conversion. | ||||
1622 | static bool IsVectorConversion(Sema &S, QualType FromType, | ||||
1623 | QualType ToType, ImplicitConversionKind &ICK) { | ||||
1624 | // We need at least one of these types to be a vector type to have a vector | ||||
1625 | // conversion. | ||||
1626 | if (!ToType->isVectorType() && !FromType->isVectorType()) | ||||
1627 | return false; | ||||
1628 | |||||
1629 | // Identical types require no conversions. | ||||
1630 | if (S.Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType, ToType)) | ||||
1631 | return false; | ||||
1632 | |||||
1633 | // There are no conversions between extended vector types, only identity. | ||||
1634 | if (ToType->isExtVectorType()) { | ||||
1635 | // There are no conversions between extended vector types other than the | ||||
1636 | // identity conversion. | ||||
1637 | if (FromType->isExtVectorType()) | ||||
1638 | return false; | ||||
1639 | |||||
1640 | // Vector splat from any arithmetic type to a vector. | ||||
1641 | if (FromType->isArithmeticType()) { | ||||
1642 | ICK = ICK_Vector_Splat; | ||||
1643 | return true; | ||||
1644 | } | ||||
1645 | } | ||||
1646 | |||||
1647 | if (ToType->isSizelessBuiltinType() || FromType->isSizelessBuiltinType()) | ||||
1648 | if (S.Context.areCompatibleSveTypes(FromType, ToType) || | ||||
1649 | S.Context.areLaxCompatibleSveTypes(FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
1650 | ICK = ICK_SVE_Vector_Conversion; | ||||
1651 | return true; | ||||
1652 | } | ||||
1653 | |||||
1654 | // We can perform the conversion between vector types in the following cases: | ||||
1655 | // 1)vector types are equivalent AltiVec and GCC vector types | ||||
1656 | // 2)lax vector conversions are permitted and the vector types are of the | ||||
1657 | // same size | ||||
1658 | // 3)the destination type does not have the ARM MVE strict-polymorphism | ||||
1659 | // attribute, which inhibits lax vector conversion for overload resolution | ||||
1660 | // only | ||||
1661 | if (ToType->isVectorType() && FromType->isVectorType()) { | ||||
1662 | if (S.Context.areCompatibleVectorTypes(FromType, ToType) || | ||||
1663 | (S.isLaxVectorConversion(FromType, ToType) && | ||||
1664 | !ToType->hasAttr(attr::ArmMveStrictPolymorphism))) { | ||||
1665 | ICK = ICK_Vector_Conversion; | ||||
1666 | return true; | ||||
1667 | } | ||||
1668 | } | ||||
1669 | |||||
1670 | return false; | ||||
1671 | } | ||||
1672 | |||||
1673 | static bool tryAtomicConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
1674 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1675 | StandardConversionSequence &SCS, | ||||
1676 | bool CStyle); | ||||
1677 | |||||
1678 | /// IsStandardConversion - Determines whether there is a standard | ||||
1679 | /// conversion sequence (C++ [conv], C++ [over.ics.scs]) from the | ||||
1680 | /// expression From to the type ToType. Standard conversion sequences | ||||
1681 | /// only consider non-class types; for conversions that involve class | ||||
1682 | /// types, use TryImplicitConversion. If a conversion exists, SCS will | ||||
1683 | /// contain the standard conversion sequence required to perform this | ||||
1684 | /// conversion and this routine will return true. Otherwise, this | ||||
1685 | /// routine will return false and the value of SCS is unspecified. | ||||
1686 | static bool IsStandardConversion(Sema &S, Expr* From, QualType ToType, | ||||
1687 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1688 | StandardConversionSequence &SCS, | ||||
1689 | bool CStyle, | ||||
1690 | bool AllowObjCWritebackConversion) { | ||||
1691 | QualType FromType = From->getType(); | ||||
1692 | |||||
1693 | // Standard conversions (C++ [conv]) | ||||
1694 | SCS.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
1695 | SCS.IncompatibleObjC = false; | ||||
1696 | SCS.setFromType(FromType); | ||||
1697 | SCS.CopyConstructor = nullptr; | ||||
1698 | |||||
1699 | // There are no standard conversions for class types in C++, so | ||||
1700 | // abort early. When overloading in C, however, we do permit them. | ||||
1701 | if (S.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && | ||||
1702 | (FromType->isRecordType() || ToType->isRecordType())) | ||||
1703 | return false; | ||||
1704 | |||||
1705 | // The first conversion can be an lvalue-to-rvalue conversion, | ||||
1706 | // array-to-pointer conversion, or function-to-pointer conversion | ||||
1707 | // (C++ 4p1). | ||||
1708 | |||||
1709 | if (FromType == S.Context.OverloadTy) { | ||||
1710 | DeclAccessPair AccessPair; | ||||
1711 | if (FunctionDecl *Fn | ||||
1712 | = S.ResolveAddressOfOverloadedFunction(From, ToType, false, | ||||
1713 | AccessPair)) { | ||||
1714 | // We were able to resolve the address of the overloaded function, | ||||
1715 | // so we can convert to the type of that function. | ||||
1716 | FromType = Fn->getType(); | ||||
1717 | SCS.setFromType(FromType); | ||||
1718 | |||||
1719 | // we can sometimes resolve &foo<int> regardless of ToType, so check | ||||
1720 | // if the type matches (identity) or we are converting to bool | ||||
1721 | if (!S.Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType( | ||||
1722 | S.ExtractUnqualifiedFunctionType(ToType), FromType)) { | ||||
1723 | QualType resultTy; | ||||
1724 | // if the function type matches except for [[noreturn]], it's ok | ||||
1725 | if (!S.IsFunctionConversion(FromType, | ||||
1726 | S.ExtractUnqualifiedFunctionType(ToType), resultTy)) | ||||
1727 | // otherwise, only a boolean conversion is standard | ||||
1728 | if (!ToType->isBooleanType()) | ||||
1729 | return false; | ||||
1730 | } | ||||
1731 | |||||
1732 | // Check if the "from" expression is taking the address of an overloaded | ||||
1733 | // function and recompute the FromType accordingly. Take advantage of the | ||||
1734 | // fact that non-static member functions *must* have such an address-of | ||||
1735 | // expression. | ||||
1736 | CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(Fn); | ||||
1737 | if (Method && !Method->isStatic()) { | ||||
1738 | assert(isa<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens()) &&((isa<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens()) && "Non-unary operator on non-static member address") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens()) && \"Non-unary operator on non-static member address\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1739, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1739 | "Non-unary operator on non-static member address")((isa<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens()) && "Non-unary operator on non-static member address") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens()) && \"Non-unary operator on non-static member address\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1739, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1740 | assert(cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode()((cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode () == UO_AddrOf && "Non-address-of operator on non-static member address" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() == UO_AddrOf && \"Non-address-of operator on non-static member address\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1742, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1741 | == UO_AddrOf &&((cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode () == UO_AddrOf && "Non-address-of operator on non-static member address" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() == UO_AddrOf && \"Non-address-of operator on non-static member address\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1742, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1742 | "Non-address-of operator on non-static member address")((cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode () == UO_AddrOf && "Non-address-of operator on non-static member address" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() == UO_AddrOf && \"Non-address-of operator on non-static member address\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1742, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1743 | const Type *ClassType | ||||
1744 | = S.Context.getTypeDeclType(Method->getParent()).getTypePtr(); | ||||
1745 | FromType = S.Context.getMemberPointerType(FromType, ClassType); | ||||
1746 | } else if (isa<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())) { | ||||
1747 | assert(cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() ==((cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode () == UO_AddrOf && "Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() == UO_AddrOf && \"Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1749, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1748 | UO_AddrOf &&((cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode () == UO_AddrOf && "Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() == UO_AddrOf && \"Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1749, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1749 | "Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression")((cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode () == UO_AddrOf && "Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("cast<UnaryOperator>(From->IgnoreParens())->getOpcode() == UO_AddrOf && \"Non-address-of operator for overloaded function expression\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1749, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1750 | FromType = S.Context.getPointerType(FromType); | ||||
1751 | } | ||||
1752 | |||||
1753 | // Check that we've computed the proper type after overload resolution. | ||||
1754 | // FIXME: FixOverloadedFunctionReference has side-effects; we shouldn't | ||||
1755 | // be calling it from within an NDEBUG block. | ||||
1756 | assert(S.Context.hasSameType(((S.Context.hasSameType( FromType, S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference (From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType())) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("S.Context.hasSameType( FromType, S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference(From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType())" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1758, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1757 | FromType,((S.Context.hasSameType( FromType, S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference (From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType())) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("S.Context.hasSameType( FromType, S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference(From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType())" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1758, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
1758 | S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference(From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType()))((S.Context.hasSameType( FromType, S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference (From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType())) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("S.Context.hasSameType( FromType, S.FixOverloadedFunctionReference(From, AccessPair, Fn)->getType())" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 1758, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
1759 | } else { | ||||
1760 | return false; | ||||
1761 | } | ||||
1762 | } | ||||
1763 | // Lvalue-to-rvalue conversion (C++11 4.1): | ||||
1764 | // A glvalue (3.10) of a non-function, non-array type T can | ||||
1765 | // be converted to a prvalue. | ||||
1766 | bool argIsLValue = From->isGLValue(); | ||||
1767 | if (argIsLValue && | ||||
1768 | !FromType->isFunctionType() && !FromType->isArrayType() && | ||||
1769 | S.Context.getCanonicalType(FromType) != S.Context.OverloadTy) { | ||||
1770 | SCS.First = ICK_Lvalue_To_Rvalue; | ||||
1771 | |||||
1772 | // C11 6.3.2.1p2: | ||||
1773 | // ... if the lvalue has atomic type, the value has the non-atomic version | ||||
1774 | // of the type of the lvalue ... | ||||
1775 | if (const AtomicType *Atomic = FromType->getAs<AtomicType>()) | ||||
1776 | FromType = Atomic->getValueType(); | ||||
1777 | |||||
1778 | // If T is a non-class type, the type of the rvalue is the | ||||
1779 | // cv-unqualified version of T. Otherwise, the type of the rvalue | ||||
1780 | // is T (C++ 4.1p1). C++ can't get here with class types; in C, we | ||||
1781 | // just strip the qualifiers because they don't matter. | ||||
1782 | FromType = FromType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1783 | } else if (FromType->isArrayType()) { | ||||
1784 | // Array-to-pointer conversion (C++ 4.2) | ||||
1785 | SCS.First = ICK_Array_To_Pointer; | ||||
1786 | |||||
1787 | // An lvalue or rvalue of type "array of N T" or "array of unknown | ||||
1788 | // bound of T" can be converted to an rvalue of type "pointer to | ||||
1789 | // T" (C++ 4.2p1). | ||||
1790 | FromType = S.Context.getArrayDecayedType(FromType); | ||||
1791 | |||||
1792 | if (S.IsStringLiteralToNonConstPointerConversion(From, ToType)) { | ||||
1793 | // This conversion is deprecated in C++03 (D.4) | ||||
1794 | SCS.DeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtr = true; | ||||
1795 | |||||
1796 | // For the purpose of ranking in overload resolution | ||||
1797 | // (13.3.3.1.1), this conversion is considered an | ||||
1798 | // array-to-pointer conversion followed by a qualification | ||||
1799 | // conversion (4.4). (C++ 4.2p2) | ||||
1800 | SCS.Second = ICK_Identity; | ||||
1801 | SCS.Third = ICK_Qualification; | ||||
1802 | SCS.QualificationIncludesObjCLifetime = false; | ||||
1803 | SCS.setAllToTypes(FromType); | ||||
1804 | return true; | ||||
1805 | } | ||||
1806 | } else if (FromType->isFunctionType() && argIsLValue) { | ||||
1807 | // Function-to-pointer conversion (C++ 4.3). | ||||
1808 | SCS.First = ICK_Function_To_Pointer; | ||||
1809 | |||||
1810 | if (auto *DRE = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(From->IgnoreParenCasts())) | ||||
1811 | if (auto *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(DRE->getDecl())) | ||||
1812 | if (!S.checkAddressOfFunctionIsAvailable(FD)) | ||||
1813 | return false; | ||||
1814 | |||||
1815 | // An lvalue of function type T can be converted to an rvalue of | ||||
1816 | // type "pointer to T." The result is a pointer to the | ||||
1817 | // function. (C++ 4.3p1). | ||||
1818 | FromType = S.Context.getPointerType(FromType); | ||||
1819 | } else { | ||||
1820 | // We don't require any conversions for the first step. | ||||
1821 | SCS.First = ICK_Identity; | ||||
1822 | } | ||||
1823 | SCS.setToType(0, FromType); | ||||
1824 | |||||
1825 | // The second conversion can be an integral promotion, floating | ||||
1826 | // point promotion, integral conversion, floating point conversion, | ||||
1827 | // floating-integral conversion, pointer conversion, | ||||
1828 | // pointer-to-member conversion, or boolean conversion (C++ 4p1). | ||||
1829 | // For overloading in C, this can also be a "compatible-type" | ||||
1830 | // conversion. | ||||
1831 | bool IncompatibleObjC = false; | ||||
1832 | ImplicitConversionKind SecondICK = ICK_Identity; | ||||
1833 | if (S.Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
1834 | // The unqualified versions of the types are the same: there's no | ||||
1835 | // conversion to do. | ||||
1836 | SCS.Second = ICK_Identity; | ||||
1837 | } else if (S.IsIntegralPromotion(From, FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
1838 | // Integral promotion (C++ 4.5). | ||||
1839 | SCS.Second = ICK_Integral_Promotion; | ||||
1840 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1841 | } else if (S.IsFloatingPointPromotion(FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
1842 | // Floating point promotion (C++ 4.6). | ||||
1843 | SCS.Second = ICK_Floating_Promotion; | ||||
1844 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1845 | } else if (S.IsComplexPromotion(FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
1846 | // Complex promotion (Clang extension) | ||||
1847 | SCS.Second = ICK_Complex_Promotion; | ||||
1848 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1849 | } else if (ToType->isBooleanType() && | ||||
1850 | (FromType->isArithmeticType() || | ||||
1851 | FromType->isAnyPointerType() || | ||||
1852 | FromType->isBlockPointerType() || | ||||
1853 | FromType->isMemberPointerType())) { | ||||
1854 | // Boolean conversions (C++ 4.12). | ||||
1855 | SCS.Second = ICK_Boolean_Conversion; | ||||
1856 | FromType = S.Context.BoolTy; | ||||
1857 | } else if (FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType() && | ||||
1858 | ToType->isIntegralType(S.Context)) { | ||||
1859 | // Integral conversions (C++ 4.7). | ||||
1860 | SCS.Second = ICK_Integral_Conversion; | ||||
1861 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1862 | } else if (FromType->isAnyComplexType() && ToType->isAnyComplexType()) { | ||||
1863 | // Complex conversions (C99 6.3.1.6) | ||||
1864 | SCS.Second = ICK_Complex_Conversion; | ||||
1865 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1866 | } else if ((FromType->isAnyComplexType() && ToType->isArithmeticType()) || | ||||
1867 | (ToType->isAnyComplexType() && FromType->isArithmeticType())) { | ||||
1868 | // Complex-real conversions (C99 6.3.1.7) | ||||
1869 | SCS.Second = ICK_Complex_Real; | ||||
1870 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1871 | } else if (FromType->isRealFloatingType() && ToType->isRealFloatingType()) { | ||||
1872 | // FIXME: disable conversions between long double and __float128 if | ||||
1873 | // their representation is different until there is back end support | ||||
1874 | // We of course allow this conversion if long double is really double. | ||||
1875 | |||||
1876 | // Conversions between bfloat and other floats are not permitted. | ||||
1877 | if (FromType == S.Context.BFloat16Ty || ToType == S.Context.BFloat16Ty) | ||||
1878 | return false; | ||||
1879 | if (&S.Context.getFloatTypeSemantics(FromType) != | ||||
1880 | &S.Context.getFloatTypeSemantics(ToType)) { | ||||
1881 | bool Float128AndLongDouble = ((FromType == S.Context.Float128Ty && | ||||
1882 | ToType == S.Context.LongDoubleTy) || | ||||
1883 | (FromType == S.Context.LongDoubleTy && | ||||
1884 | ToType == S.Context.Float128Ty)); | ||||
1885 | if (Float128AndLongDouble && | ||||
1886 | (&S.Context.getFloatTypeSemantics(S.Context.LongDoubleTy) == | ||||
1887 | &llvm::APFloat::PPCDoubleDouble())) | ||||
1888 | return false; | ||||
1889 | } | ||||
1890 | // Floating point conversions (C++ 4.8). | ||||
1891 | SCS.Second = ICK_Floating_Conversion; | ||||
1892 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1893 | } else if ((FromType->isRealFloatingType() && | ||||
1894 | ToType->isIntegralType(S.Context)) || | ||||
1895 | (FromType->isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType() && | ||||
1896 | ToType->isRealFloatingType())) { | ||||
1897 | // Conversions between bfloat and int are not permitted. | ||||
1898 | if (FromType->isBFloat16Type() || ToType->isBFloat16Type()) | ||||
1899 | return false; | ||||
1900 | |||||
1901 | // Floating-integral conversions (C++ 4.9). | ||||
1902 | SCS.Second = ICK_Floating_Integral; | ||||
1903 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1904 | } else if (S.IsBlockPointerConversion(FromType, ToType, FromType)) { | ||||
1905 | SCS.Second = ICK_Block_Pointer_Conversion; | ||||
1906 | } else if (AllowObjCWritebackConversion && | ||||
1907 | S.isObjCWritebackConversion(FromType, ToType, FromType)) { | ||||
1908 | SCS.Second = ICK_Writeback_Conversion; | ||||
1909 | } else if (S.IsPointerConversion(From, FromType, ToType, InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1910 | FromType, IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
1911 | // Pointer conversions (C++ 4.10). | ||||
1912 | SCS.Second = ICK_Pointer_Conversion; | ||||
1913 | SCS.IncompatibleObjC = IncompatibleObjC; | ||||
1914 | FromType = FromType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1915 | } else if (S.IsMemberPointerConversion(From, FromType, ToType, | ||||
1916 | InOverloadResolution, FromType)) { | ||||
1917 | // Pointer to member conversions (4.11). | ||||
1918 | SCS.Second = ICK_Pointer_Member; | ||||
1919 | } else if (IsVectorConversion(S, FromType, ToType, SecondICK)) { | ||||
1920 | SCS.Second = SecondICK; | ||||
1921 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1922 | } else if (!S.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && | ||||
1923 | S.Context.typesAreCompatible(ToType, FromType)) { | ||||
1924 | // Compatible conversions (Clang extension for C function overloading) | ||||
1925 | SCS.Second = ICK_Compatible_Conversion; | ||||
1926 | FromType = ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
1927 | } else if (IsTransparentUnionStandardConversion(S, From, ToType, | ||||
1928 | InOverloadResolution, | ||||
1929 | SCS, CStyle)) { | ||||
1930 | SCS.Second = ICK_TransparentUnionConversion; | ||||
1931 | FromType = ToType; | ||||
1932 | } else if (tryAtomicConversion(S, From, ToType, InOverloadResolution, SCS, | ||||
1933 | CStyle)) { | ||||
1934 | // tryAtomicConversion has updated the standard conversion sequence | ||||
1935 | // appropriately. | ||||
1936 | return true; | ||||
1937 | } else if (ToType->isEventT() && | ||||
1938 | From->isIntegerConstantExpr(S.getASTContext()) && | ||||
1939 | From->EvaluateKnownConstInt(S.getASTContext()) == 0) { | ||||
1940 | SCS.Second = ICK_Zero_Event_Conversion; | ||||
1941 | FromType = ToType; | ||||
1942 | } else if (ToType->isQueueT() && | ||||
1943 | From->isIntegerConstantExpr(S.getASTContext()) && | ||||
1944 | (From->EvaluateKnownConstInt(S.getASTContext()) == 0)) { | ||||
1945 | SCS.Second = ICK_Zero_Queue_Conversion; | ||||
1946 | FromType = ToType; | ||||
1947 | } else if (ToType->isSamplerT() && | ||||
1948 | From->isIntegerConstantExpr(S.getASTContext())) { | ||||
1949 | SCS.Second = ICK_Compatible_Conversion; | ||||
1950 | FromType = ToType; | ||||
1951 | } else { | ||||
1952 | // No second conversion required. | ||||
1953 | SCS.Second = ICK_Identity; | ||||
1954 | } | ||||
1955 | SCS.setToType(1, FromType); | ||||
1956 | |||||
1957 | // The third conversion can be a function pointer conversion or a | ||||
1958 | // qualification conversion (C++ [conv.fctptr], [conv.qual]). | ||||
1959 | bool ObjCLifetimeConversion; | ||||
1960 | if (S.IsFunctionConversion(FromType, ToType, FromType)) { | ||||
1961 | // Function pointer conversions (removing 'noexcept') including removal of | ||||
1962 | // 'noreturn' (Clang extension). | ||||
1963 | SCS.Third = ICK_Function_Conversion; | ||||
1964 | } else if (S.IsQualificationConversion(FromType, ToType, CStyle, | ||||
1965 | ObjCLifetimeConversion)) { | ||||
1966 | SCS.Third = ICK_Qualification; | ||||
1967 | SCS.QualificationIncludesObjCLifetime = ObjCLifetimeConversion; | ||||
1968 | FromType = ToType; | ||||
1969 | } else { | ||||
1970 | // No conversion required | ||||
1971 | SCS.Third = ICK_Identity; | ||||
1972 | } | ||||
1973 | |||||
1974 | // C++ [over.best.ics]p6: | ||||
1975 | // [...] Any difference in top-level cv-qualification is | ||||
1976 | // subsumed by the initialization itself and does not constitute | ||||
1977 | // a conversion. [...] | ||||
1978 | QualType CanonFrom = S.Context.getCanonicalType(FromType); | ||||
1979 | QualType CanonTo = S.Context.getCanonicalType(ToType); | ||||
1980 | if (CanonFrom.getLocalUnqualifiedType() | ||||
1981 | == CanonTo.getLocalUnqualifiedType() && | ||||
1982 | CanonFrom.getLocalQualifiers() != CanonTo.getLocalQualifiers()) { | ||||
1983 | FromType = ToType; | ||||
1984 | CanonFrom = CanonTo; | ||||
1985 | } | ||||
1986 | |||||
1987 | SCS.setToType(2, FromType); | ||||
1988 | |||||
1989 | if (CanonFrom == CanonTo) | ||||
1990 | return true; | ||||
1991 | |||||
1992 | // If we have not converted the argument type to the parameter type, | ||||
1993 | // this is a bad conversion sequence, unless we're resolving an overload in C. | ||||
1994 | if (S.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || !InOverloadResolution) | ||||
1995 | return false; | ||||
1996 | |||||
1997 | ExprResult ER = ExprResult{From}; | ||||
1998 | Sema::AssignConvertType Conv = | ||||
1999 | S.CheckSingleAssignmentConstraints(ToType, ER, | ||||
2000 | /*Diagnose=*/false, | ||||
2001 | /*DiagnoseCFAudited=*/false, | ||||
2002 | /*ConvertRHS=*/false); | ||||
2003 | ImplicitConversionKind SecondConv; | ||||
2004 | switch (Conv) { | ||||
2005 | case Sema::Compatible: | ||||
2006 | SecondConv = ICK_C_Only_Conversion; | ||||
2007 | break; | ||||
2008 | // For our purposes, discarding qualifiers is just as bad as using an | ||||
2009 | // incompatible pointer. Note that an IncompatiblePointer conversion can drop | ||||
2010 | // qualifiers, as well. | ||||
2011 | case Sema::CompatiblePointerDiscardsQualifiers: | ||||
2012 | case Sema::IncompatiblePointer: | ||||
2013 | case Sema::IncompatiblePointerSign: | ||||
2014 | SecondConv = ICK_Incompatible_Pointer_Conversion; | ||||
2015 | break; | ||||
2016 | default: | ||||
2017 | return false; | ||||
2018 | } | ||||
2019 | |||||
2020 | // First can only be an lvalue conversion, so we pretend that this was the | ||||
2021 | // second conversion. First should already be valid from earlier in the | ||||
2022 | // function. | ||||
2023 | SCS.Second = SecondConv; | ||||
2024 | SCS.setToType(1, ToType); | ||||
2025 | |||||
2026 | // Third is Identity, because Second should rank us worse than any other | ||||
2027 | // conversion. This could also be ICK_Qualification, but it's simpler to just | ||||
2028 | // lump everything in with the second conversion, and we don't gain anything | ||||
2029 | // from making this ICK_Qualification. | ||||
2030 | SCS.Third = ICK_Identity; | ||||
2031 | SCS.setToType(2, ToType); | ||||
2032 | return true; | ||||
2033 | } | ||||
2034 | |||||
2035 | static bool | ||||
2036 | IsTransparentUnionStandardConversion(Sema &S, Expr* From, | ||||
2037 | QualType &ToType, | ||||
2038 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
2039 | StandardConversionSequence &SCS, | ||||
2040 | bool CStyle) { | ||||
2041 | |||||
2042 | const RecordType *UT = ToType->getAsUnionType(); | ||||
2043 | if (!UT || !UT->getDecl()->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) | ||||
2044 | return false; | ||||
2045 | // The field to initialize within the transparent union. | ||||
2046 | RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl(); | ||||
2047 | // It's compatible if the expression matches any of the fields. | ||||
2048 | for (const auto *it : UD->fields()) { | ||||
2049 | if (IsStandardConversion(S, From, it->getType(), InOverloadResolution, SCS, | ||||
2050 | CStyle, /*AllowObjCWritebackConversion=*/false)) { | ||||
2051 | ToType = it->getType(); | ||||
2052 | return true; | ||||
2053 | } | ||||
2054 | } | ||||
2055 | return false; | ||||
2056 | } | ||||
2057 | |||||
2058 | /// IsIntegralPromotion - Determines whether the conversion from the | ||||
2059 | /// expression From (whose potentially-adjusted type is FromType) to | ||||
2060 | /// ToType is an integral promotion (C++ 4.5). If so, returns true and | ||||
2061 | /// sets PromotedType to the promoted type. | ||||
2062 | bool Sema::IsIntegralPromotion(Expr *From, QualType FromType, QualType ToType) { | ||||
2063 | const BuiltinType *To = ToType->getAs<BuiltinType>(); | ||||
2064 | // All integers are built-in. | ||||
2065 | if (!To) { | ||||
2066 | return false; | ||||
2067 | } | ||||
2068 | |||||
2069 | // An rvalue of type char, signed char, unsigned char, short int, or | ||||
2070 | // unsigned short int can be converted to an rvalue of type int if | ||||
2071 | // int can represent all the values of the source type; otherwise, | ||||
2072 | // the source rvalue can be converted to an rvalue of type unsigned | ||||
2073 | // int (C++ 4.5p1). | ||||
2074 | if (FromType->isPromotableIntegerType() && !FromType->isBooleanType() && | ||||
2075 | !FromType->isEnumeralType()) { | ||||
2076 | if (// We can promote any signed, promotable integer type to an int | ||||
2077 | (FromType->isSignedIntegerType() || | ||||
2078 | // We can promote any unsigned integer type whose size is | ||||
2079 | // less than int to an int. | ||||
2080 | Context.getTypeSize(FromType) < Context.getTypeSize(ToType))) { | ||||
2081 | return To->getKind() == BuiltinType::Int; | ||||
2082 | } | ||||
2083 | |||||
2084 | return To->getKind() == BuiltinType::UInt; | ||||
2085 | } | ||||
2086 | |||||
2087 | // C++11 [conv.prom]p3: | ||||
2088 | // A prvalue of an unscoped enumeration type whose underlying type is not | ||||
2089 | // fixed (7.2) can be converted to an rvalue a prvalue of the first of the | ||||
2090 | // following types that can represent all the values of the enumeration | ||||
2091 | // (i.e., the values in the range bmin to bmax as described in 7.2): int, | ||||
2092 | // unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or unsigned | ||||
2093 | // long long int. If none of the types in that list can represent all the | ||||
2094 | // values of the enumeration, an rvalue a prvalue of an unscoped enumeration | ||||
2095 | // type can be converted to an rvalue a prvalue of the extended integer type | ||||
2096 | // with lowest integer conversion rank (4.13) greater than the rank of long | ||||
2097 | // long in which all the values of the enumeration can be represented. If | ||||
2098 | // there are two such extended types, the signed one is chosen. | ||||
2099 | // C++11 [conv.prom]p4: | ||||
2100 | // A prvalue of an unscoped enumeration type whose underlying type is fixed | ||||
2101 | // can be converted to a prvalue of its underlying type. Moreover, if | ||||
2102 | // integral promotion can be applied to its underlying type, a prvalue of an | ||||
2103 | // unscoped enumeration type whose underlying type is fixed can also be | ||||
2104 | // converted to a prvalue of the promoted underlying type. | ||||
2105 | if (const EnumType *FromEnumType = FromType->getAs<EnumType>()) { | ||||
2106 | // C++0x 7.2p9: Note that this implicit enum to int conversion is not | ||||
2107 | // provided for a scoped enumeration. | ||||
2108 | if (FromEnumType->getDecl()->isScoped()) | ||||
2109 | return false; | ||||
2110 | |||||
2111 | // We can perform an integral promotion to the underlying type of the enum, | ||||
2112 | // even if that's not the promoted type. Note that the check for promoting | ||||
2113 | // the underlying type is based on the type alone, and does not consider | ||||
2114 | // the bitfield-ness of the actual source expression. | ||||
2115 | if (FromEnumType->getDecl()->isFixed()) { | ||||
2116 | QualType Underlying = FromEnumType->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); | ||||
2117 | return Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(Underlying, ToType) || | ||||
2118 | IsIntegralPromotion(nullptr, Underlying, ToType); | ||||
2119 | } | ||||
2120 | |||||
2121 | // We have already pre-calculated the promotion type, so this is trivial. | ||||
2122 | if (ToType->isIntegerType() && | ||||
2123 | isCompleteType(From->getBeginLoc(), FromType)) | ||||
2124 | return Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType( | ||||
2125 | ToType, FromEnumType->getDecl()->getPromotionType()); | ||||
2126 | |||||
2127 | // C++ [conv.prom]p5: | ||||
2128 | // If the bit-field has an enumerated type, it is treated as any other | ||||
2129 | // value of that type for promotion purposes. | ||||
2130 | // | ||||
2131 | // ... so do not fall through into the bit-field checks below in C++. | ||||
2132 | if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus) | ||||
2133 | return false; | ||||
2134 | } | ||||
2135 | |||||
2136 | // C++0x [conv.prom]p2: | ||||
2137 | // A prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, or wchar_t (3.9.1) can be converted | ||||
2138 | // to an rvalue a prvalue of the first of the following types that can | ||||
2139 | // represent all the values of its underlying type: int, unsigned int, | ||||
2140 | // long int, unsigned long int, long long int, or unsigned long long int. | ||||
2141 | // If none of the types in that list can represent all the values of its | ||||
2142 | // underlying type, an rvalue a prvalue of type char16_t, char32_t, | ||||
2143 | // or wchar_t can be converted to an rvalue a prvalue of its underlying | ||||
2144 | // type. | ||||
2145 | if (FromType->isAnyCharacterType() && !FromType->isCharType() && | ||||
2146 | ToType->isIntegerType()) { | ||||
2147 | // Determine whether the type we're converting from is signed or | ||||
2148 | // unsigned. | ||||
2149 | bool FromIsSigned = FromType->isSignedIntegerType(); | ||||
2150 | uint64_t FromSize = Context.getTypeSize(FromType); | ||||
2151 | |||||
2152 | // The types we'll try to promote to, in the appropriate | ||||
2153 | // order. Try each of these types. | ||||
2154 | QualType PromoteTypes[6] = { | ||||
2155 | Context.IntTy, Context.UnsignedIntTy, | ||||
2156 | Context.LongTy, Context.UnsignedLongTy , | ||||
2157 | Context.LongLongTy, Context.UnsignedLongLongTy | ||||
2158 | }; | ||||
2159 | for (int Idx = 0; Idx < 6; ++Idx) { | ||||
2160 | uint64_t ToSize = Context.getTypeSize(PromoteTypes[Idx]); | ||||
2161 | if (FromSize < ToSize || | ||||
2162 | (FromSize == ToSize && | ||||
2163 | FromIsSigned == PromoteTypes[Idx]->isSignedIntegerType())) { | ||||
2164 | // We found the type that we can promote to. If this is the | ||||
2165 | // type we wanted, we have a promotion. Otherwise, no | ||||
2166 | // promotion. | ||||
2167 | return Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(ToType, PromoteTypes[Idx]); | ||||
2168 | } | ||||
2169 | } | ||||
2170 | } | ||||
2171 | |||||
2172 | // An rvalue for an integral bit-field (9.6) can be converted to an | ||||
2173 | // rvalue of type int if int can represent all the values of the | ||||
2174 | // bit-field; otherwise, it can be converted to unsigned int if | ||||
2175 | // unsigned int can represent all the values of the bit-field. If | ||||
2176 | // the bit-field is larger yet, no integral promotion applies to | ||||
2177 | // it. If the bit-field has an enumerated type, it is treated as any | ||||
2178 | // other value of that type for promotion purposes (C++ 4.5p3). | ||||
2179 | // FIXME: We should delay checking of bit-fields until we actually perform the | ||||
2180 | // conversion. | ||||
2181 | // | ||||
2182 | // FIXME: In C, only bit-fields of types _Bool, int, or unsigned int may be | ||||
2183 | // promoted, per C11 6.3.1.1/2. We promote all bit-fields (including enum | ||||
2184 | // bit-fields and those whose underlying type is larger than int) for GCC | ||||
2185 | // compatibility. | ||||
2186 | if (From) { | ||||
2187 | if (FieldDecl *MemberDecl = From->getSourceBitField()) { | ||||
2188 | Optional<llvm::APSInt> BitWidth; | ||||
2189 | if (FromType->isIntegralType(Context) && | ||||
2190 | (BitWidth = | ||||
2191 | MemberDecl->getBitWidth()->getIntegerConstantExpr(Context))) { | ||||
2192 | llvm::APSInt ToSize(BitWidth->getBitWidth(), BitWidth->isUnsigned()); | ||||
2193 | ToSize = Context.getTypeSize(ToType); | ||||
2194 | |||||
2195 | // Are we promoting to an int from a bitfield that fits in an int? | ||||
2196 | if (*BitWidth < ToSize || | ||||
2197 | (FromType->isSignedIntegerType() && *BitWidth <= ToSize)) { | ||||
2198 | return To->getKind() == BuiltinType::Int; | ||||
2199 | } | ||||
2200 | |||||
2201 | // Are we promoting to an unsigned int from an unsigned bitfield | ||||
2202 | // that fits into an unsigned int? | ||||
2203 | if (FromType->isUnsignedIntegerType() && *BitWidth <= ToSize) { | ||||
2204 | return To->getKind() == BuiltinType::UInt; | ||||
2205 | } | ||||
2206 | |||||
2207 | return false; | ||||
2208 | } | ||||
2209 | } | ||||
2210 | } | ||||
2211 | |||||
2212 | // An rvalue of type bool can be converted to an rvalue of type int, | ||||
2213 | // with false becoming zero and true becoming one (C++ 4.5p4). | ||||
2214 | if (FromType->isBooleanType() && To->getKind() == BuiltinType::Int) { | ||||
2215 | return true; | ||||
2216 | } | ||||
2217 | |||||
2218 | return false; | ||||
2219 | } | ||||
2220 | |||||
2221 | /// IsFloatingPointPromotion - Determines whether the conversion from | ||||
2222 | /// FromType to ToType is a floating point promotion (C++ 4.6). If so, | ||||
2223 | /// returns true and sets PromotedType to the promoted type. | ||||
2224 | bool Sema::IsFloatingPointPromotion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType) { | ||||
2225 | if (const BuiltinType *FromBuiltin = FromType->getAs<BuiltinType>()) | ||||
2226 | if (const BuiltinType *ToBuiltin = ToType->getAs<BuiltinType>()) { | ||||
2227 | /// An rvalue of type float can be converted to an rvalue of type | ||||
2228 | /// double. (C++ 4.6p1). | ||||
2229 | if (FromBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Float && | ||||
2230 | ToBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Double) | ||||
2231 | return true; | ||||
2232 | |||||
2233 | // C99 6.3.1.5p1: | ||||
2234 | // When a float is promoted to double or long double, or a | ||||
2235 | // double is promoted to long double [...]. | ||||
2236 | if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && | ||||
2237 | (FromBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Float || | ||||
2238 | FromBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Double) && | ||||
2239 | (ToBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::LongDouble || | ||||
2240 | ToBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Float128)) | ||||
2241 | return true; | ||||
2242 | |||||
2243 | // Half can be promoted to float. | ||||
2244 | if (!getLangOpts().NativeHalfType && | ||||
2245 | FromBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Half && | ||||
2246 | ToBuiltin->getKind() == BuiltinType::Float) | ||||
2247 | return true; | ||||
2248 | } | ||||
2249 | |||||
2250 | return false; | ||||
2251 | } | ||||
2252 | |||||
2253 | /// Determine if a conversion is a complex promotion. | ||||
2254 | /// | ||||
2255 | /// A complex promotion is defined as a complex -> complex conversion | ||||
2256 | /// where the conversion between the underlying real types is a | ||||
2257 | /// floating-point or integral promotion. | ||||
2258 | bool Sema::IsComplexPromotion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType) { | ||||
2259 | const ComplexType *FromComplex = FromType->getAs<ComplexType>(); | ||||
2260 | if (!FromComplex) | ||||
2261 | return false; | ||||
2262 | |||||
2263 | const ComplexType *ToComplex = ToType->getAs<ComplexType>(); | ||||
2264 | if (!ToComplex) | ||||
2265 | return false; | ||||
2266 | |||||
2267 | return IsFloatingPointPromotion(FromComplex->getElementType(), | ||||
2268 | ToComplex->getElementType()) || | ||||
2269 | IsIntegralPromotion(nullptr, FromComplex->getElementType(), | ||||
2270 | ToComplex->getElementType()); | ||||
2271 | } | ||||
2272 | |||||
2273 | /// BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType - In a pointer conversion from | ||||
2274 | /// the pointer type FromPtr to a pointer to type ToPointee, with the | ||||
2275 | /// same type qualifiers as FromPtr has on its pointee type. ToType, | ||||
2276 | /// if non-empty, will be a pointer to ToType that may or may not have | ||||
2277 | /// the right set of qualifiers on its pointee. | ||||
2278 | /// | ||||
2279 | static QualType | ||||
2280 | BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(const Type *FromPtr, | ||||
2281 | QualType ToPointee, QualType ToType, | ||||
2282 | ASTContext &Context, | ||||
2283 | bool StripObjCLifetime = false) { | ||||
2284 | assert((FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer ||(((FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer || FromPtr-> getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) && "Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("(FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer || FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) && \"Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 2286, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
2285 | FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) &&(((FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer || FromPtr-> getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) && "Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("(FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer || FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) && \"Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 2286, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
2286 | "Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type")(((FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer || FromPtr-> getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) && "Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("(FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::Pointer || FromPtr->getTypeClass() == Type::ObjCObjectPointer) && \"Invalid similarly-qualified pointer type\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 2286, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
2287 | |||||
2288 | /// Conversions to 'id' subsume cv-qualifier conversions. | ||||
2289 | if (ToType->isObjCIdType() || ToType->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) | ||||
2290 | return ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
2291 | |||||
2292 | QualType CanonFromPointee | ||||
2293 | = Context.getCanonicalType(FromPtr->getPointeeType()); | ||||
2294 | QualType CanonToPointee = Context.getCanonicalType(ToPointee); | ||||
2295 | Qualifiers Quals = CanonFromPointee.getQualifiers(); | ||||
2296 | |||||
2297 | if (StripObjCLifetime) | ||||
2298 | Quals.removeObjCLifetime(); | ||||
2299 | |||||
2300 | // Exact qualifier match -> return the pointer type we're converting to. | ||||
2301 | if (CanonToPointee.getLocalQualifiers() == Quals) { | ||||
2302 | // ToType is exactly what we need. Return it. | ||||
2303 | if (!ToType.isNull()) | ||||
2304 | return ToType.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
2305 | |||||
2306 | // Build a pointer to ToPointee. It has the right qualifiers | ||||
2307 | // already. | ||||
2308 | if (isa<ObjCObjectPointerType>(ToType)) | ||||
2309 | return Context.getObjCObjectPointerType(ToPointee); | ||||
2310 | return Context.getPointerType(ToPointee); | ||||
2311 | } | ||||
2312 | |||||
2313 | // Just build a canonical type that has the right qualifiers. | ||||
2314 | QualType QualifiedCanonToPointee | ||||
2315 | = Context.getQualifiedType(CanonToPointee.getLocalUnqualifiedType(), Quals); | ||||
2316 | |||||
2317 | if (isa<ObjCObjectPointerType>(ToType)) | ||||
2318 | return Context.getObjCObjectPointerType(QualifiedCanonToPointee); | ||||
2319 | return Context.getPointerType(QualifiedCanonToPointee); | ||||
2320 | } | ||||
2321 | |||||
2322 | static bool isNullPointerConstantForConversion(Expr *Expr, | ||||
2323 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
2324 | ASTContext &Context) { | ||||
2325 | // Handle value-dependent integral null pointer constants correctly. | ||||
2326 | // http://www.open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg21/docs/cwg_active.html#903 | ||||
2327 | if (Expr->isValueDependent() && !Expr->isTypeDependent() && | ||||
2328 | Expr->getType()->isIntegerType() && !Expr->getType()->isEnumeralType()) | ||||
2329 | return !InOverloadResolution; | ||||
2330 | |||||
2331 | return Expr->isNullPointerConstant(Context, | ||||
2332 | InOverloadResolution? Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNotNull | ||||
2333 | : Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull); | ||||
2334 | } | ||||
2335 | |||||
2336 | /// IsPointerConversion - Determines whether the conversion of the | ||||
2337 | /// expression From, which has the (possibly adjusted) type FromType, | ||||
2338 | /// can be converted to the type ToType via a pointer conversion (C++ | ||||
2339 | /// 4.10). If so, returns true and places the converted type (that | ||||
2340 | /// might differ from ToType in its cv-qualifiers at some level) into | ||||
2341 | /// ConvertedType. | ||||
2342 | /// | ||||
2343 | /// This routine also supports conversions to and from block pointers | ||||
2344 | /// and conversions with Objective-C's 'id', 'id<protocols...>', and | ||||
2345 | /// pointers to interfaces. FIXME: Once we've determined the | ||||
2346 | /// appropriate overloading rules for Objective-C, we may want to | ||||
2347 | /// split the Objective-C checks into a different routine; however, | ||||
2348 | /// GCC seems to consider all of these conversions to be pointer | ||||
2349 | /// conversions, so for now they live here. IncompatibleObjC will be | ||||
2350 | /// set if the conversion is an allowed Objective-C conversion that | ||||
2351 | /// should result in a warning. | ||||
2352 | bool Sema::IsPointerConversion(Expr *From, QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
2353 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
2354 | QualType& ConvertedType, | ||||
2355 | bool &IncompatibleObjC) { | ||||
2356 | IncompatibleObjC = false; | ||||
2357 | if (isObjCPointerConversion(FromType, ToType, ConvertedType, | ||||
2358 | IncompatibleObjC)) | ||||
2359 | return true; | ||||
2360 | |||||
2361 | // Conversion from a null pointer constant to any Objective-C pointer type. | ||||
2362 | if (ToType->isObjCObjectPointerType() && | ||||
2363 | isNullPointerConstantForConversion(From, InOverloadResolution, Context)) { | ||||
2364 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
2365 | return true; | ||||
2366 | } | ||||
2367 | |||||
2368 | // Blocks: Block pointers can be converted to void*. | ||||
2369 | if (FromType->isBlockPointerType() && ToType->isPointerType() && | ||||
2370 | ToType->castAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType()->isVoidType()) { | ||||
2371 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
2372 | return true; | ||||
2373 | } | ||||
2374 | // Blocks: A null pointer constant can be converted to a block | ||||
2375 | // pointer type. | ||||
2376 | if (ToType->isBlockPointerType() && | ||||
2377 | isNullPointerConstantForConversion(From, InOverloadResolution, Context)) { | ||||
2378 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
2379 | return true; | ||||
2380 | } | ||||
2381 | |||||
2382 | // If the left-hand-side is nullptr_t, the right side can be a null | ||||
2383 | // pointer constant. | ||||
2384 | if (ToType->isNullPtrType() && | ||||
2385 | isNullPointerConstantForConversion(From, InOverloadResolution, Context)) { | ||||
2386 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
2387 | return true; | ||||
2388 | } | ||||
2389 | |||||
2390 | const PointerType* ToTypePtr = ToType->getAs<PointerType>(); | ||||
2391 | if (!ToTypePtr) | ||||
2392 | return false; | ||||
2393 | |||||
2394 | // A null pointer constant can be converted to a pointer type (C++ 4.10p1). | ||||
2395 | if (isNullPointerConstantForConversion(From, InOverloadResolution, Context)) { | ||||
2396 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
2397 | return true; | ||||
2398 | } | ||||
2399 | |||||
2400 | // Beyond this point, both types need to be pointers | ||||
2401 | // , including objective-c pointers. | ||||
2402 | QualType ToPointeeType = ToTypePtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2403 | if (FromType->isObjCObjectPointerType() && ToPointeeType->isVoidType() && | ||||
2404 | !getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount) { | ||||
2405 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType( | ||||
2406 | FromType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), | ||||
2407 | ToPointeeType, | ||||
2408 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2409 | return true; | ||||
2410 | } | ||||
2411 | const PointerType *FromTypePtr = FromType->getAs<PointerType>(); | ||||
2412 | if (!FromTypePtr) | ||||
2413 | return false; | ||||
2414 | |||||
2415 | QualType FromPointeeType = FromTypePtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2416 | |||||
2417 | // If the unqualified pointee types are the same, this can't be a | ||||
2418 | // pointer conversion, so don't do all of the work below. | ||||
2419 | if (Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType)) | ||||
2420 | return false; | ||||
2421 | |||||
2422 | // An rvalue of type "pointer to cv T," where T is an object type, | ||||
2423 | // can be converted to an rvalue of type "pointer to cv void" (C++ | ||||
2424 | // 4.10p2). | ||||
2425 | if (FromPointeeType->isIncompleteOrObjectType() && | ||||
2426 | ToPointeeType->isVoidType()) { | ||||
2427 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromTypePtr, | ||||
2428 | ToPointeeType, | ||||
2429 | ToType, Context, | ||||
2430 | /*StripObjCLifetime=*/true); | ||||
2431 | return true; | ||||
2432 | } | ||||
2433 | |||||
2434 | // MSVC allows implicit function to void* type conversion. | ||||
2435 | if (getLangOpts().MSVCCompat && FromPointeeType->isFunctionType() && | ||||
2436 | ToPointeeType->isVoidType()) { | ||||
2437 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromTypePtr, | ||||
2438 | ToPointeeType, | ||||
2439 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2440 | return true; | ||||
2441 | } | ||||
2442 | |||||
2443 | // When we're overloading in C, we allow a special kind of pointer | ||||
2444 | // conversion for compatible-but-not-identical pointee types. | ||||
2445 | if (!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && | ||||
2446 | Context.typesAreCompatible(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType)) { | ||||
2447 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromTypePtr, | ||||
2448 | ToPointeeType, | ||||
2449 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2450 | return true; | ||||
2451 | } | ||||
2452 | |||||
2453 | // C++ [conv.ptr]p3: | ||||
2454 | // | ||||
2455 | // An rvalue of type "pointer to cv D," where D is a class type, | ||||
2456 | // can be converted to an rvalue of type "pointer to cv B," where | ||||
2457 | // B is a base class (clause 10) of D. If B is an inaccessible | ||||
2458 | // (clause 11) or ambiguous (10.2) base class of D, a program that | ||||
2459 | // necessitates this conversion is ill-formed. The result of the | ||||
2460 | // conversion is a pointer to the base class sub-object of the | ||||
2461 | // derived class object. The null pointer value is converted to | ||||
2462 | // the null pointer value of the destination type. | ||||
2463 | // | ||||
2464 | // Note that we do not check for ambiguity or inaccessibility | ||||
2465 | // here. That is handled by CheckPointerConversion. | ||||
2466 | if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && FromPointeeType->isRecordType() && | ||||
2467 | ToPointeeType->isRecordType() && | ||||
2468 | !Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType) && | ||||
2469 | IsDerivedFrom(From->getBeginLoc(), FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType)) { | ||||
2470 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromTypePtr, | ||||
2471 | ToPointeeType, | ||||
2472 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2473 | return true; | ||||
2474 | } | ||||
2475 | |||||
2476 | if (FromPointeeType->isVectorType() && ToPointeeType->isVectorType() && | ||||
2477 | Context.areCompatibleVectorTypes(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType)) { | ||||
2478 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromTypePtr, | ||||
2479 | ToPointeeType, | ||||
2480 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2481 | return true; | ||||
2482 | } | ||||
2483 | |||||
2484 | return false; | ||||
2485 | } | ||||
2486 | |||||
2487 | /// Adopt the given qualifiers for the given type. | ||||
2488 | static QualType AdoptQualifiers(ASTContext &Context, QualType T, Qualifiers Qs){ | ||||
2489 | Qualifiers TQs = T.getQualifiers(); | ||||
2490 | |||||
2491 | // Check whether qualifiers already match. | ||||
2492 | if (TQs == Qs) | ||||
2493 | return T; | ||||
2494 | |||||
2495 | if (Qs.compatiblyIncludes(TQs)) | ||||
2496 | return Context.getQualifiedType(T, Qs); | ||||
2497 | |||||
2498 | return Context.getQualifiedType(T.getUnqualifiedType(), Qs); | ||||
2499 | } | ||||
2500 | |||||
2501 | /// isObjCPointerConversion - Determines whether this is an | ||||
2502 | /// Objective-C pointer conversion. Subroutine of IsPointerConversion, | ||||
2503 | /// with the same arguments and return values. | ||||
2504 | bool Sema::isObjCPointerConversion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
2505 | QualType& ConvertedType, | ||||
2506 | bool &IncompatibleObjC) { | ||||
2507 | if (!getLangOpts().ObjC) | ||||
2508 | return false; | ||||
2509 | |||||
2510 | // The set of qualifiers on the type we're converting from. | ||||
2511 | Qualifiers FromQualifiers = FromType.getQualifiers(); | ||||
2512 | |||||
2513 | // First, we handle all conversions on ObjC object pointer types. | ||||
2514 | const ObjCObjectPointerType* ToObjCPtr = | ||||
2515 | ToType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | ||||
2516 | const ObjCObjectPointerType *FromObjCPtr = | ||||
2517 | FromType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | ||||
2518 | |||||
2519 | if (ToObjCPtr && FromObjCPtr) { | ||||
2520 | // If the pointee types are the same (ignoring qualifications), | ||||
2521 | // then this is not a pointer conversion. | ||||
2522 | if (Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(ToObjCPtr->getPointeeType(), | ||||
2523 | FromObjCPtr->getPointeeType())) | ||||
2524 | return false; | ||||
2525 | |||||
2526 | // Conversion between Objective-C pointers. | ||||
2527 | if (Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(ToObjCPtr, FromObjCPtr)) { | ||||
2528 | const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = ToObjCPtr->getInterfaceType(); | ||||
2529 | const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = FromObjCPtr->getInterfaceType(); | ||||
2530 | if (getLangOpts().CPlusPlus && LHS && RHS && | ||||
2531 | !ToObjCPtr->getPointeeType().isAtLeastAsQualifiedAs( | ||||
2532 | FromObjCPtr->getPointeeType())) | ||||
2533 | return false; | ||||
2534 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromObjCPtr, | ||||
2535 | ToObjCPtr->getPointeeType(), | ||||
2536 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2537 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ConvertedType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2538 | return true; | ||||
2539 | } | ||||
2540 | |||||
2541 | if (Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(FromObjCPtr, ToObjCPtr)) { | ||||
2542 | // Okay: this is some kind of implicit downcast of Objective-C | ||||
2543 | // interfaces, which is permitted. However, we're going to | ||||
2544 | // complain about it. | ||||
2545 | IncompatibleObjC = true; | ||||
2546 | ConvertedType = BuildSimilarlyQualifiedPointerType(FromObjCPtr, | ||||
2547 | ToObjCPtr->getPointeeType(), | ||||
2548 | ToType, Context); | ||||
2549 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ConvertedType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2550 | return true; | ||||
2551 | } | ||||
2552 | } | ||||
2553 | // Beyond this point, both types need to be C pointers or block pointers. | ||||
2554 | QualType ToPointeeType; | ||||
2555 | if (const PointerType *ToCPtr = ToType->getAs<PointerType>()) | ||||
2556 | ToPointeeType = ToCPtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2557 | else if (const BlockPointerType *ToBlockPtr = | ||||
2558 | ToType->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) { | ||||
2559 | // Objective C++: We're able to convert from a pointer to any object | ||||
2560 | // to a block pointer type. | ||||
2561 | if (FromObjCPtr && FromObjCPtr->isObjCBuiltinType()) { | ||||
2562 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ToType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2563 | return true; | ||||
2564 | } | ||||
2565 | ToPointeeType = ToBlockPtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2566 | } | ||||
2567 | else if (FromType->getAs<BlockPointerType>() && | ||||
2568 | ToObjCPtr && ToObjCPtr->isObjCBuiltinType()) { | ||||
2569 | // Objective C++: We're able to convert from a block pointer type to a | ||||
2570 | // pointer to any object. | ||||
2571 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ToType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2572 | return true; | ||||
2573 | } | ||||
2574 | else | ||||
2575 | return false; | ||||
2576 | |||||
2577 | QualType FromPointeeType; | ||||
2578 | if (const PointerType *FromCPtr = FromType->getAs<PointerType>()) | ||||
2579 | FromPointeeType = FromCPtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2580 | else if (const BlockPointerType *FromBlockPtr = | ||||
2581 | FromType->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) | ||||
2582 | FromPointeeType = FromBlockPtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2583 | else | ||||
2584 | return false; | ||||
2585 | |||||
2586 | // If we have pointers to pointers, recursively check whether this | ||||
2587 | // is an Objective-C conversion. | ||||
2588 | if (FromPointeeType->isPointerType() && ToPointeeType->isPointerType() && | ||||
2589 | isObjCPointerConversion(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType, ConvertedType, | ||||
2590 | IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
2591 | // We always complain about this conversion. | ||||
2592 | IncompatibleObjC = true; | ||||
2593 | ConvertedType = Context.getPointerType(ConvertedType); | ||||
2594 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ConvertedType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2595 | return true; | ||||
2596 | } | ||||
2597 | // Allow conversion of pointee being objective-c pointer to another one; | ||||
2598 | // as in I* to id. | ||||
2599 | if (FromPointeeType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>() && | ||||
2600 | ToPointeeType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>() && | ||||
2601 | isObjCPointerConversion(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType, ConvertedType, | ||||
2602 | IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
2603 | |||||
2604 | ConvertedType = Context.getPointerType(ConvertedType); | ||||
2605 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ConvertedType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2606 | return true; | ||||
2607 | } | ||||
2608 | |||||
2609 | // If we have pointers to functions or blocks, check whether the only | ||||
2610 | // differences in the argument and result types are in Objective-C | ||||
2611 | // pointer conversions. If so, we permit the conversion (but | ||||
2612 | // complain about it). | ||||
2613 | const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType | ||||
2614 | = FromPointeeType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
2615 | const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType | ||||
2616 | = ToPointeeType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
2617 | if (FromFunctionType && ToFunctionType) { | ||||
2618 | // If the function types are exactly the same, this isn't an | ||||
2619 | // Objective-C pointer conversion. | ||||
2620 | if (Context.getCanonicalType(FromPointeeType) | ||||
2621 | == Context.getCanonicalType(ToPointeeType)) | ||||
2622 | return false; | ||||
2623 | |||||
2624 | // Perform the quick checks that will tell us whether these | ||||
2625 | // function types are obviously different. | ||||
2626 | if (FromFunctionType->getNumParams() != ToFunctionType->getNumParams() || | ||||
2627 | FromFunctionType->isVariadic() != ToFunctionType->isVariadic() || | ||||
2628 | FromFunctionType->getMethodQuals() != ToFunctionType->getMethodQuals()) | ||||
2629 | return false; | ||||
2630 | |||||
2631 | bool HasObjCConversion = false; | ||||
2632 | if (Context.getCanonicalType(FromFunctionType->getReturnType()) == | ||||
2633 | Context.getCanonicalType(ToFunctionType->getReturnType())) { | ||||
2634 | // Okay, the types match exactly. Nothing to do. | ||||
2635 | } else if (isObjCPointerConversion(FromFunctionType->getReturnType(), | ||||
2636 | ToFunctionType->getReturnType(), | ||||
2637 | ConvertedType, IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
2638 | // Okay, we have an Objective-C pointer conversion. | ||||
2639 | HasObjCConversion = true; | ||||
2640 | } else { | ||||
2641 | // Function types are too different. Abort. | ||||
2642 | return false; | ||||
2643 | } | ||||
2644 | |||||
2645 | // Check argument types. | ||||
2646 | for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumParams(); | ||||
2647 | ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx) { | ||||
2648 | QualType FromArgType = FromFunctionType->getParamType(ArgIdx); | ||||
2649 | QualType ToArgType = ToFunctionType->getParamType(ArgIdx); | ||||
2650 | if (Context.getCanonicalType(FromArgType) | ||||
2651 | == Context.getCanonicalType(ToArgType)) { | ||||
2652 | // Okay, the types match exactly. Nothing to do. | ||||
2653 | } else if (isObjCPointerConversion(FromArgType, ToArgType, | ||||
2654 | ConvertedType, IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
2655 | // Okay, we have an Objective-C pointer conversion. | ||||
2656 | HasObjCConversion = true; | ||||
2657 | } else { | ||||
2658 | // Argument types are too different. Abort. | ||||
2659 | return false; | ||||
2660 | } | ||||
2661 | } | ||||
2662 | |||||
2663 | if (HasObjCConversion) { | ||||
2664 | // We had an Objective-C conversion. Allow this pointer | ||||
2665 | // conversion, but complain about it. | ||||
2666 | ConvertedType = AdoptQualifiers(Context, ToType, FromQualifiers); | ||||
2667 | IncompatibleObjC = true; | ||||
2668 | return true; | ||||
2669 | } | ||||
2670 | } | ||||
2671 | |||||
2672 | return false; | ||||
2673 | } | ||||
2674 | |||||
2675 | /// Determine whether this is an Objective-C writeback conversion, | ||||
2676 | /// used for parameter passing when performing automatic reference counting. | ||||
2677 | /// | ||||
2678 | /// \param FromType The type we're converting form. | ||||
2679 | /// | ||||
2680 | /// \param ToType The type we're converting to. | ||||
2681 | /// | ||||
2682 | /// \param ConvertedType The type that will be produced after applying | ||||
2683 | /// this conversion. | ||||
2684 | bool Sema::isObjCWritebackConversion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
2685 | QualType &ConvertedType) { | ||||
2686 | if (!getLangOpts().ObjCAutoRefCount || | ||||
2687 | Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType, ToType)) | ||||
2688 | return false; | ||||
2689 | |||||
2690 | // Parameter must be a pointer to __autoreleasing (with no other qualifiers). | ||||
2691 | QualType ToPointee; | ||||
2692 | if (const PointerType *ToPointer = ToType->getAs<PointerType>()) | ||||
2693 | ToPointee = ToPointer->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2694 | else | ||||
2695 | return false; | ||||
2696 | |||||
2697 | Qualifiers ToQuals = ToPointee.getQualifiers(); | ||||
2698 | if (!ToPointee->isObjCLifetimeType() || | ||||
2699 | ToQuals.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing || | ||||
2700 | !ToQuals.withoutObjCLifetime().empty()) | ||||
2701 | return false; | ||||
2702 | |||||
2703 | // Argument must be a pointer to __strong to __weak. | ||||
2704 | QualType FromPointee; | ||||
2705 | if (const PointerType *FromPointer = FromType->getAs<PointerType>()) | ||||
2706 | FromPointee = FromPointer->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2707 | else | ||||
2708 | return false; | ||||
2709 | |||||
2710 | Qualifiers FromQuals = FromPointee.getQualifiers(); | ||||
2711 | if (!FromPointee->isObjCLifetimeType() || | ||||
2712 | (FromQuals.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_Strong && | ||||
2713 | FromQuals.getObjCLifetime() != Qualifiers::OCL_Weak)) | ||||
2714 | return false; | ||||
2715 | |||||
2716 | // Make sure that we have compatible qualifiers. | ||||
2717 | FromQuals.setObjCLifetime(Qualifiers::OCL_Autoreleasing); | ||||
2718 | if (!ToQuals.compatiblyIncludes(FromQuals)) | ||||
2719 | return false; | ||||
2720 | |||||
2721 | // Remove qualifiers from the pointee type we're converting from; they | ||||
2722 | // aren't used in the compatibility check belong, and we'll be adding back | ||||
2723 | // qualifiers (with __autoreleasing) if the compatibility check succeeds. | ||||
2724 | FromPointee = FromPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
2725 | |||||
2726 | // The unqualified form of the pointee types must be compatible. | ||||
2727 | ToPointee = ToPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
2728 | bool IncompatibleObjC; | ||||
2729 | if (Context.typesAreCompatible(FromPointee, ToPointee)) | ||||
2730 | FromPointee = ToPointee; | ||||
2731 | else if (!isObjCPointerConversion(FromPointee, ToPointee, FromPointee, | ||||
2732 | IncompatibleObjC)) | ||||
2733 | return false; | ||||
2734 | |||||
2735 | /// Construct the type we're converting to, which is a pointer to | ||||
2736 | /// __autoreleasing pointee. | ||||
2737 | FromPointee = Context.getQualifiedType(FromPointee, FromQuals); | ||||
2738 | ConvertedType = Context.getPointerType(FromPointee); | ||||
2739 | return true; | ||||
2740 | } | ||||
2741 | |||||
2742 | bool Sema::IsBlockPointerConversion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
2743 | QualType& ConvertedType) { | ||||
2744 | QualType ToPointeeType; | ||||
2745 | if (const BlockPointerType *ToBlockPtr = | ||||
2746 | ToType->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) | ||||
2747 | ToPointeeType = ToBlockPtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2748 | else | ||||
2749 | return false; | ||||
2750 | |||||
2751 | QualType FromPointeeType; | ||||
2752 | if (const BlockPointerType *FromBlockPtr = | ||||
2753 | FromType->getAs<BlockPointerType>()) | ||||
2754 | FromPointeeType = FromBlockPtr->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2755 | else | ||||
2756 | return false; | ||||
2757 | // We have pointer to blocks, check whether the only | ||||
2758 | // differences in the argument and result types are in Objective-C | ||||
2759 | // pointer conversions. If so, we permit the conversion. | ||||
2760 | |||||
2761 | const FunctionProtoType *FromFunctionType | ||||
2762 | = FromPointeeType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
2763 | const FunctionProtoType *ToFunctionType | ||||
2764 | = ToPointeeType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
2765 | |||||
2766 | if (!FromFunctionType || !ToFunctionType) | ||||
2767 | return false; | ||||
2768 | |||||
2769 | if (Context.hasSameType(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType)) | ||||
2770 | return true; | ||||
2771 | |||||
2772 | // Perform the quick checks that will tell us whether these | ||||
2773 | // function types are obviously different. | ||||
2774 | if (FromFunctionType->getNumParams() != ToFunctionType->getNumParams() || | ||||
2775 | FromFunctionType->isVariadic() != ToFunctionType->isVariadic()) | ||||
2776 | return false; | ||||
2777 | |||||
2778 | FunctionType::ExtInfo FromEInfo = FromFunctionType->getExtInfo(); | ||||
2779 | FunctionType::ExtInfo ToEInfo = ToFunctionType->getExtInfo(); | ||||
2780 | if (FromEInfo != ToEInfo) | ||||
2781 | return false; | ||||
2782 | |||||
2783 | bool IncompatibleObjC = false; | ||||
2784 | if (Context.hasSameType(FromFunctionType->getReturnType(), | ||||
2785 | ToFunctionType->getReturnType())) { | ||||
2786 | // Okay, the types match exactly. Nothing to do. | ||||
2787 | } else { | ||||
2788 | QualType RHS = FromFunctionType->getReturnType(); | ||||
2789 | QualType LHS = ToFunctionType->getReturnType(); | ||||
2790 | if ((!getLangOpts().CPlusPlus || !RHS->isRecordType()) && | ||||
2791 | !RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers()) | ||||
2792 | LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType(); | ||||
2793 | |||||
2794 | if (Context.hasSameType(RHS,LHS)) { | ||||
2795 | // OK exact match. | ||||
2796 | } else if (isObjCPointerConversion(RHS, LHS, | ||||
2797 | ConvertedType, IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
2798 | if (IncompatibleObjC) | ||||
2799 | return false; | ||||
2800 | // Okay, we have an Objective-C pointer conversion. | ||||
2801 | } | ||||
2802 | else | ||||
2803 | return false; | ||||
2804 | } | ||||
2805 | |||||
2806 | // Check argument types. | ||||
2807 | for (unsigned ArgIdx = 0, NumArgs = FromFunctionType->getNumParams(); | ||||
2808 | ArgIdx != NumArgs; ++ArgIdx) { | ||||
2809 | IncompatibleObjC = false; | ||||
2810 | QualType FromArgType = FromFunctionType->getParamType(ArgIdx); | ||||
2811 | QualType ToArgType = ToFunctionType->getParamType(ArgIdx); | ||||
2812 | if (Context.hasSameType(FromArgType, ToArgType)) { | ||||
2813 | // Okay, the types match exactly. Nothing to do. | ||||
2814 | } else if (isObjCPointerConversion(ToArgType, FromArgType, | ||||
2815 | ConvertedType, IncompatibleObjC)) { | ||||
2816 | if (IncompatibleObjC) | ||||
2817 | return false; | ||||
2818 | // Okay, we have an Objective-C pointer conversion. | ||||
2819 | } else | ||||
2820 | // Argument types are too different. Abort. | ||||
2821 | return false; | ||||
2822 | } | ||||
2823 | |||||
2824 | SmallVector<FunctionProtoType::ExtParameterInfo, 4> NewParamInfos; | ||||
2825 | bool CanUseToFPT, CanUseFromFPT; | ||||
2826 | if (!Context.mergeExtParameterInfo(ToFunctionType, FromFunctionType, | ||||
2827 | CanUseToFPT, CanUseFromFPT, | ||||
2828 | NewParamInfos)) | ||||
2829 | return false; | ||||
2830 | |||||
2831 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
2832 | return true; | ||||
2833 | } | ||||
2834 | |||||
2835 | enum { | ||||
2836 | ft_default, | ||||
2837 | ft_different_class, | ||||
2838 | ft_parameter_arity, | ||||
2839 | ft_parameter_mismatch, | ||||
2840 | ft_return_type, | ||||
2841 | ft_qualifer_mismatch, | ||||
2842 | ft_noexcept | ||||
2843 | }; | ||||
2844 | |||||
2845 | /// Attempts to get the FunctionProtoType from a Type. Handles | ||||
2846 | /// MemberFunctionPointers properly. | ||||
2847 | static const FunctionProtoType *tryGetFunctionProtoType(QualType FromType) { | ||||
2848 | if (auto *FPT = FromType->getAs<FunctionProtoType>()) | ||||
2849 | return FPT; | ||||
2850 | |||||
2851 | if (auto *MPT = FromType->getAs<MemberPointerType>()) | ||||
2852 | return MPT->getPointeeType()->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
2853 | |||||
2854 | return nullptr; | ||||
2855 | } | ||||
2856 | |||||
2857 | /// HandleFunctionTypeMismatch - Gives diagnostic information for differeing | ||||
2858 | /// function types. Catches different number of parameter, mismatch in | ||||
2859 | /// parameter types, and different return types. | ||||
2860 | void Sema::HandleFunctionTypeMismatch(PartialDiagnostic &PDiag, | ||||
2861 | QualType FromType, QualType ToType) { | ||||
2862 | // If either type is not valid, include no extra info. | ||||
2863 | if (FromType.isNull() || ToType.isNull()) { | ||||
2864 | PDiag << ft_default; | ||||
2865 | return; | ||||
2866 | } | ||||
2867 | |||||
2868 | // Get the function type from the pointers. | ||||
2869 | if (FromType->isMemberPointerType() && ToType->isMemberPointerType()) { | ||||
2870 | const auto *FromMember = FromType->castAs<MemberPointerType>(), | ||||
2871 | *ToMember = ToType->castAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
2872 | if (!Context.hasSameType(FromMember->getClass(), ToMember->getClass())) { | ||||
2873 | PDiag << ft_different_class << QualType(ToMember->getClass(), 0) | ||||
2874 | << QualType(FromMember->getClass(), 0); | ||||
2875 | return; | ||||
2876 | } | ||||
2877 | FromType = FromMember->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2878 | ToType = ToMember->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2879 | } | ||||
2880 | |||||
2881 | if (FromType->isPointerType()) | ||||
2882 | FromType = FromType->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2883 | if (ToType->isPointerType()) | ||||
2884 | ToType = ToType->getPointeeType(); | ||||
2885 | |||||
2886 | // Remove references. | ||||
2887 | FromType = FromType.getNonReferenceType(); | ||||
2888 | ToType = ToType.getNonReferenceType(); | ||||
2889 | |||||
2890 | // Don't print extra info for non-specialized template functions. | ||||
2891 | if (FromType->isInstantiationDependentType() && | ||||
2892 | !FromType->getAs<TemplateSpecializationType>()) { | ||||
2893 | PDiag << ft_default; | ||||
2894 | return; | ||||
2895 | } | ||||
2896 | |||||
2897 | // No extra info for same types. | ||||
2898 | if (Context.hasSameType(FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
2899 | PDiag << ft_default; | ||||
2900 | return; | ||||
2901 | } | ||||
2902 | |||||
2903 | const FunctionProtoType *FromFunction = tryGetFunctionProtoType(FromType), | ||||
2904 | *ToFunction = tryGetFunctionProtoType(ToType); | ||||
2905 | |||||
2906 | // Both types need to be function types. | ||||
2907 | if (!FromFunction || !ToFunction) { | ||||
2908 | PDiag << ft_default; | ||||
2909 | return; | ||||
2910 | } | ||||
2911 | |||||
2912 | if (FromFunction->getNumParams() != ToFunction->getNumParams()) { | ||||
2913 | PDiag << ft_parameter_arity << ToFunction->getNumParams() | ||||
2914 | << FromFunction->getNumParams(); | ||||
2915 | return; | ||||
2916 | } | ||||
2917 | |||||
2918 | // Handle different parameter types. | ||||
2919 | unsigned ArgPos; | ||||
2920 | if (!FunctionParamTypesAreEqual(FromFunction, ToFunction, &ArgPos)) { | ||||
2921 | PDiag << ft_parameter_mismatch << ArgPos + 1 | ||||
2922 | << ToFunction->getParamType(ArgPos) | ||||
2923 | << FromFunction->getParamType(ArgPos); | ||||
2924 | return; | ||||
2925 | } | ||||
2926 | |||||
2927 | // Handle different return type. | ||||
2928 | if (!Context.hasSameType(FromFunction->getReturnType(), | ||||
2929 | ToFunction->getReturnType())) { | ||||
2930 | PDiag << ft_return_type << ToFunction->getReturnType() | ||||
2931 | << FromFunction->getReturnType(); | ||||
2932 | return; | ||||
2933 | } | ||||
2934 | |||||
2935 | if (FromFunction->getMethodQuals() != ToFunction->getMethodQuals()) { | ||||
2936 | PDiag << ft_qualifer_mismatch << ToFunction->getMethodQuals() | ||||
2937 | << FromFunction->getMethodQuals(); | ||||
2938 | return; | ||||
2939 | } | ||||
2940 | |||||
2941 | // Handle exception specification differences on canonical type (in C++17 | ||||
2942 | // onwards). | ||||
2943 | if (cast<FunctionProtoType>(FromFunction->getCanonicalTypeUnqualified()) | ||||
2944 | ->isNothrow() != | ||||
2945 | cast<FunctionProtoType>(ToFunction->getCanonicalTypeUnqualified()) | ||||
2946 | ->isNothrow()) { | ||||
2947 | PDiag << ft_noexcept; | ||||
2948 | return; | ||||
2949 | } | ||||
2950 | |||||
2951 | // Unable to find a difference, so add no extra info. | ||||
2952 | PDiag << ft_default; | ||||
2953 | } | ||||
2954 | |||||
2955 | /// FunctionParamTypesAreEqual - This routine checks two function proto types | ||||
2956 | /// for equality of their argument types. Caller has already checked that | ||||
2957 | /// they have same number of arguments. If the parameters are different, | ||||
2958 | /// ArgPos will have the parameter index of the first different parameter. | ||||
2959 | bool Sema::FunctionParamTypesAreEqual(const FunctionProtoType *OldType, | ||||
2960 | const FunctionProtoType *NewType, | ||||
2961 | unsigned *ArgPos) { | ||||
2962 | for (FunctionProtoType::param_type_iterator O = OldType->param_type_begin(), | ||||
2963 | N = NewType->param_type_begin(), | ||||
2964 | E = OldType->param_type_end(); | ||||
2965 | O && (O != E); ++O, ++N) { | ||||
2966 | // Ignore address spaces in pointee type. This is to disallow overloading | ||||
2967 | // on __ptr32/__ptr64 address spaces. | ||||
2968 | QualType Old = Context.removePtrSizeAddrSpace(O->getUnqualifiedType()); | ||||
2969 | QualType New = Context.removePtrSizeAddrSpace(N->getUnqualifiedType()); | ||||
2970 | |||||
2971 | if (!Context.hasSameType(Old, New)) { | ||||
2972 | if (ArgPos) | ||||
2973 | *ArgPos = O - OldType->param_type_begin(); | ||||
2974 | return false; | ||||
2975 | } | ||||
2976 | } | ||||
2977 | return true; | ||||
2978 | } | ||||
2979 | |||||
2980 | /// CheckPointerConversion - Check the pointer conversion from the | ||||
2981 | /// expression From to the type ToType. This routine checks for | ||||
2982 | /// ambiguous or inaccessible derived-to-base pointer | ||||
2983 | /// conversions for which IsPointerConversion has already returned | ||||
2984 | /// true. It returns true and produces a diagnostic if there was an | ||||
2985 | /// error, or returns false otherwise. | ||||
2986 | bool Sema::CheckPointerConversion(Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
2987 | CastKind &Kind, | ||||
2988 | CXXCastPath& BasePath, | ||||
2989 | bool IgnoreBaseAccess, | ||||
2990 | bool Diagnose) { | ||||
2991 | QualType FromType = From->getType(); | ||||
2992 | bool IsCStyleOrFunctionalCast = IgnoreBaseAccess; | ||||
2993 | |||||
2994 | Kind = CK_BitCast; | ||||
2995 | |||||
2996 | if (Diagnose && !IsCStyleOrFunctionalCast && !FromType->isAnyPointerType() && | ||||
2997 | From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNotNull) == | ||||
2998 | Expr::NPCK_ZeroExpression) { | ||||
2999 | if (Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(From->getType(), Context.BoolTy)) | ||||
3000 | DiagRuntimeBehavior(From->getExprLoc(), From, | ||||
3001 | PDiag(diag::warn_impcast_bool_to_null_pointer) | ||||
3002 | << ToType << From->getSourceRange()); | ||||
3003 | else if (!isUnevaluatedContext()) | ||||
3004 | Diag(From->getExprLoc(), diag::warn_non_literal_null_pointer) | ||||
3005 | << ToType << From->getSourceRange(); | ||||
3006 | } | ||||
3007 | if (const PointerType *ToPtrType = ToType->getAs<PointerType>()) { | ||||
3008 | if (const PointerType *FromPtrType = FromType->getAs<PointerType>()) { | ||||
3009 | QualType FromPointeeType = FromPtrType->getPointeeType(), | ||||
3010 | ToPointeeType = ToPtrType->getPointeeType(); | ||||
3011 | |||||
3012 | if (FromPointeeType->isRecordType() && ToPointeeType->isRecordType() && | ||||
3013 | !Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType)) { | ||||
3014 | // We must have a derived-to-base conversion. Check an | ||||
3015 | // ambiguous or inaccessible conversion. | ||||
3016 | unsigned InaccessibleID = 0; | ||||
3017 | unsigned AmbiguousID = 0; | ||||
3018 | if (Diagnose) { | ||||
3019 | InaccessibleID = diag::err_upcast_to_inaccessible_base; | ||||
3020 | AmbiguousID = diag::err_ambiguous_derived_to_base_conv; | ||||
3021 | } | ||||
3022 | if (CheckDerivedToBaseConversion( | ||||
3023 | FromPointeeType, ToPointeeType, InaccessibleID, AmbiguousID, | ||||
3024 | From->getExprLoc(), From->getSourceRange(), DeclarationName(), | ||||
3025 | &BasePath, IgnoreBaseAccess)) | ||||
3026 | return true; | ||||
3027 | |||||
3028 | // The conversion was successful. | ||||
3029 | Kind = CK_DerivedToBase; | ||||
3030 | } | ||||
3031 | |||||
3032 | if (Diagnose && !IsCStyleOrFunctionalCast && | ||||
3033 | FromPointeeType->isFunctionType() && ToPointeeType->isVoidType()) { | ||||
3034 | assert(getLangOpts().MSVCCompat &&((getLangOpts().MSVCCompat && "this should only be possible with MSVCCompat!" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getLangOpts().MSVCCompat && \"this should only be possible with MSVCCompat!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3035, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
3035 | "this should only be possible with MSVCCompat!")((getLangOpts().MSVCCompat && "this should only be possible with MSVCCompat!" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getLangOpts().MSVCCompat && \"this should only be possible with MSVCCompat!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3035, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3036 | Diag(From->getExprLoc(), diag::ext_ms_impcast_fn_obj) | ||||
3037 | << From->getSourceRange(); | ||||
3038 | } | ||||
3039 | } | ||||
3040 | } else if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *ToPtrType = | ||||
3041 | ToType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) { | ||||
3042 | if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *FromPtrType = | ||||
3043 | FromType->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) { | ||||
3044 | // Objective-C++ conversions are always okay. | ||||
3045 | // FIXME: We should have a different class of conversions for the | ||||
3046 | // Objective-C++ implicit conversions. | ||||
3047 | if (FromPtrType->isObjCBuiltinType() || ToPtrType->isObjCBuiltinType()) | ||||
3048 | return false; | ||||
3049 | } else if (FromType->isBlockPointerType()) { | ||||
3050 | Kind = CK_BlockPointerToObjCPointerCast; | ||||
3051 | } else { | ||||
3052 | Kind = CK_CPointerToObjCPointerCast; | ||||
3053 | } | ||||
3054 | } else if (ToType->isBlockPointerType()) { | ||||
3055 | if (!FromType->isBlockPointerType()) | ||||
3056 | Kind = CK_AnyPointerToBlockPointerCast; | ||||
3057 | } | ||||
3058 | |||||
3059 | // We shouldn't fall into this case unless it's valid for other | ||||
3060 | // reasons. | ||||
3061 | if (From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull)) | ||||
3062 | Kind = CK_NullToPointer; | ||||
3063 | |||||
3064 | return false; | ||||
3065 | } | ||||
3066 | |||||
3067 | /// IsMemberPointerConversion - Determines whether the conversion of the | ||||
3068 | /// expression From, which has the (possibly adjusted) type FromType, can be | ||||
3069 | /// converted to the type ToType via a member pointer conversion (C++ 4.11). | ||||
3070 | /// If so, returns true and places the converted type (that might differ from | ||||
3071 | /// ToType in its cv-qualifiers at some level) into ConvertedType. | ||||
3072 | bool Sema::IsMemberPointerConversion(Expr *From, QualType FromType, | ||||
3073 | QualType ToType, | ||||
3074 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
3075 | QualType &ConvertedType) { | ||||
3076 | const MemberPointerType *ToTypePtr = ToType->getAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
3077 | if (!ToTypePtr) | ||||
3078 | return false; | ||||
3079 | |||||
3080 | // A null pointer constant can be converted to a member pointer (C++ 4.11p1) | ||||
3081 | if (From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, | ||||
3082 | InOverloadResolution? Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNotNull | ||||
3083 | : Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull)) { | ||||
3084 | ConvertedType = ToType; | ||||
3085 | return true; | ||||
3086 | } | ||||
3087 | |||||
3088 | // Otherwise, both types have to be member pointers. | ||||
3089 | const MemberPointerType *FromTypePtr = FromType->getAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
3090 | if (!FromTypePtr) | ||||
3091 | return false; | ||||
3092 | |||||
3093 | // A pointer to member of B can be converted to a pointer to member of D, | ||||
3094 | // where D is derived from B (C++ 4.11p2). | ||||
3095 | QualType FromClass(FromTypePtr->getClass(), 0); | ||||
3096 | QualType ToClass(ToTypePtr->getClass(), 0); | ||||
3097 | |||||
3098 | if (!Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromClass, ToClass) && | ||||
3099 | IsDerivedFrom(From->getBeginLoc(), ToClass, FromClass)) { | ||||
3100 | ConvertedType = Context.getMemberPointerType(FromTypePtr->getPointeeType(), | ||||
3101 | ToClass.getTypePtr()); | ||||
3102 | return true; | ||||
3103 | } | ||||
3104 | |||||
3105 | return false; | ||||
3106 | } | ||||
3107 | |||||
3108 | /// CheckMemberPointerConversion - Check the member pointer conversion from the | ||||
3109 | /// expression From to the type ToType. This routine checks for ambiguous or | ||||
3110 | /// virtual or inaccessible base-to-derived member pointer conversions | ||||
3111 | /// for which IsMemberPointerConversion has already returned true. It returns | ||||
3112 | /// true and produces a diagnostic if there was an error, or returns false | ||||
3113 | /// otherwise. | ||||
3114 | bool Sema::CheckMemberPointerConversion(Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
3115 | CastKind &Kind, | ||||
3116 | CXXCastPath &BasePath, | ||||
3117 | bool IgnoreBaseAccess) { | ||||
3118 | QualType FromType = From->getType(); | ||||
3119 | const MemberPointerType *FromPtrType = FromType->getAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
3120 | if (!FromPtrType) { | ||||
3121 | // This must be a null pointer to member pointer conversion | ||||
3122 | assert(From->isNullPointerConstant(Context,((From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull ) && "Expr must be null pointer constant!") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull) && \"Expr must be null pointer constant!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3124, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
3123 | Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull) &&((From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull ) && "Expr must be null pointer constant!") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull) && \"Expr must be null pointer constant!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3124, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
3124 | "Expr must be null pointer constant!")((From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull ) && "Expr must be null pointer constant!") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("From->isNullPointerConstant(Context, Expr::NPC_ValueDependentIsNull) && \"Expr must be null pointer constant!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3124, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3125 | Kind = CK_NullToMemberPointer; | ||||
3126 | return false; | ||||
3127 | } | ||||
3128 | |||||
3129 | const MemberPointerType *ToPtrType = ToType->getAs<MemberPointerType>(); | ||||
3130 | assert(ToPtrType && "No member pointer cast has a target type "((ToPtrType && "No member pointer cast has a target type " "that is not a member pointer.") ? static_cast<void> ( 0) : __assert_fail ("ToPtrType && \"No member pointer cast has a target type \" \"that is not a member pointer.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3131, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
3131 | "that is not a member pointer.")((ToPtrType && "No member pointer cast has a target type " "that is not a member pointer.") ? static_cast<void> ( 0) : __assert_fail ("ToPtrType && \"No member pointer cast has a target type \" \"that is not a member pointer.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3131, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3132 | |||||
3133 | QualType FromClass = QualType(FromPtrType->getClass(), 0); | ||||
3134 | QualType ToClass = QualType(ToPtrType->getClass(), 0); | ||||
3135 | |||||
3136 | // FIXME: What about dependent types? | ||||
3137 | assert(FromClass->isRecordType() && "Pointer into non-class.")((FromClass->isRecordType() && "Pointer into non-class." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("FromClass->isRecordType() && \"Pointer into non-class.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3137, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3138 | assert(ToClass->isRecordType() && "Pointer into non-class.")((ToClass->isRecordType() && "Pointer into non-class." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("ToClass->isRecordType() && \"Pointer into non-class.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3138, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3139 | |||||
3140 | CXXBasePaths Paths(/*FindAmbiguities=*/true, /*RecordPaths=*/true, | ||||
3141 | /*DetectVirtual=*/true); | ||||
3142 | bool DerivationOkay = | ||||
3143 | IsDerivedFrom(From->getBeginLoc(), ToClass, FromClass, Paths); | ||||
3144 | assert(DerivationOkay &&((DerivationOkay && "Should not have been called if derivation isn't OK." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("DerivationOkay && \"Should not have been called if derivation isn't OK.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3145, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
3145 | "Should not have been called if derivation isn't OK.")((DerivationOkay && "Should not have been called if derivation isn't OK." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("DerivationOkay && \"Should not have been called if derivation isn't OK.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3145, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3146 | (void)DerivationOkay; | ||||
3147 | |||||
3148 | if (Paths.isAmbiguous(Context.getCanonicalType(FromClass). | ||||
3149 | getUnqualifiedType())) { | ||||
3150 | std::string PathDisplayStr = getAmbiguousPathsDisplayString(Paths); | ||||
3151 | Diag(From->getExprLoc(), diag::err_ambiguous_memptr_conv) | ||||
3152 | << 0 << FromClass << ToClass << PathDisplayStr << From->getSourceRange(); | ||||
3153 | return true; | ||||
3154 | } | ||||
3155 | |||||
3156 | if (const RecordType *VBase = Paths.getDetectedVirtual()) { | ||||
3157 | Diag(From->getExprLoc(), diag::err_memptr_conv_via_virtual) | ||||
3158 | << FromClass << ToClass << QualType(VBase, 0) | ||||
3159 | << From->getSourceRange(); | ||||
3160 | return true; | ||||
3161 | } | ||||
3162 | |||||
3163 | if (!IgnoreBaseAccess) | ||||
3164 | CheckBaseClassAccess(From->getExprLoc(), FromClass, ToClass, | ||||
3165 | Paths.front(), | ||||
3166 | diag::err_downcast_from_inaccessible_base); | ||||
3167 | |||||
3168 | // Must be a base to derived member conversion. | ||||
3169 | BuildBasePathArray(Paths, BasePath); | ||||
3170 | Kind = CK_BaseToDerivedMemberPointer; | ||||
3171 | return false; | ||||
3172 | } | ||||
3173 | |||||
3174 | /// Determine whether the lifetime conversion between the two given | ||||
3175 | /// qualifiers sets is nontrivial. | ||||
3176 | static bool isNonTrivialObjCLifetimeConversion(Qualifiers FromQuals, | ||||
3177 | Qualifiers ToQuals) { | ||||
3178 | // Converting anything to const __unsafe_unretained is trivial. | ||||
3179 | if (ToQuals.hasConst() && | ||||
3180 | ToQuals.getObjCLifetime() == Qualifiers::OCL_ExplicitNone) | ||||
3181 | return false; | ||||
3182 | |||||
3183 | return true; | ||||
3184 | } | ||||
3185 | |||||
3186 | /// Perform a single iteration of the loop for checking if a qualification | ||||
3187 | /// conversion is valid. | ||||
3188 | /// | ||||
3189 | /// Specifically, check whether any change between the qualifiers of \p | ||||
3190 | /// FromType and \p ToType is permissible, given knowledge about whether every | ||||
3191 | /// outer layer is const-qualified. | ||||
3192 | static bool isQualificationConversionStep(QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
3193 | bool CStyle, bool IsTopLevel, | ||||
3194 | bool &PreviousToQualsIncludeConst, | ||||
3195 | bool &ObjCLifetimeConversion) { | ||||
3196 | Qualifiers FromQuals = FromType.getQualifiers(); | ||||
3197 | Qualifiers ToQuals = ToType.getQualifiers(); | ||||
3198 | |||||
3199 | // Ignore __unaligned qualifier if this type is void. | ||||
3200 | if (ToType.getUnqualifiedType()->isVoidType()) | ||||
3201 | FromQuals.removeUnaligned(); | ||||
3202 | |||||
3203 | // Objective-C ARC: | ||||
3204 | // Check Objective-C lifetime conversions. | ||||
3205 | if (FromQuals.getObjCLifetime() != ToQuals.getObjCLifetime()) { | ||||
3206 | if (ToQuals.compatiblyIncludesObjCLifetime(FromQuals)) { | ||||
3207 | if (isNonTrivialObjCLifetimeConversion(FromQuals, ToQuals)) | ||||
3208 | ObjCLifetimeConversion = true; | ||||
3209 | FromQuals.removeObjCLifetime(); | ||||
3210 | ToQuals.removeObjCLifetime(); | ||||
3211 | } else { | ||||
3212 | // Qualification conversions cannot cast between different | ||||
3213 | // Objective-C lifetime qualifiers. | ||||
3214 | return false; | ||||
3215 | } | ||||
3216 | } | ||||
3217 | |||||
3218 | // Allow addition/removal of GC attributes but not changing GC attributes. | ||||
3219 | if (FromQuals.getObjCGCAttr() != ToQuals.getObjCGCAttr() && | ||||
3220 | (!FromQuals.hasObjCGCAttr() || !ToQuals.hasObjCGCAttr())) { | ||||
3221 | FromQuals.removeObjCGCAttr(); | ||||
3222 | ToQuals.removeObjCGCAttr(); | ||||
3223 | } | ||||
3224 | |||||
3225 | // -- for every j > 0, if const is in cv 1,j then const is in cv | ||||
3226 | // 2,j, and similarly for volatile. | ||||
3227 | if (!CStyle && !ToQuals.compatiblyIncludes(FromQuals)) | ||||
3228 | return false; | ||||
3229 | |||||
3230 | // If address spaces mismatch: | ||||
3231 | // - in top level it is only valid to convert to addr space that is a | ||||
3232 | // superset in all cases apart from C-style casts where we allow | ||||
3233 | // conversions between overlapping address spaces. | ||||
3234 | // - in non-top levels it is not a valid conversion. | ||||
3235 | if (ToQuals.getAddressSpace() != FromQuals.getAddressSpace() && | ||||
3236 | (!IsTopLevel || | ||||
3237 | !(ToQuals.isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(FromQuals) || | ||||
3238 | (CStyle && FromQuals.isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(ToQuals))))) | ||||
3239 | return false; | ||||
3240 | |||||
3241 | // -- if the cv 1,j and cv 2,j are different, then const is in | ||||
3242 | // every cv for 0 < k < j. | ||||
3243 | if (!CStyle && FromQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != ToQuals.getCVRQualifiers() && | ||||
3244 | !PreviousToQualsIncludeConst) | ||||
3245 | return false; | ||||
3246 | |||||
3247 | // Keep track of whether all prior cv-qualifiers in the "to" type | ||||
3248 | // include const. | ||||
3249 | PreviousToQualsIncludeConst = | ||||
3250 | PreviousToQualsIncludeConst && ToQuals.hasConst(); | ||||
3251 | return true; | ||||
3252 | } | ||||
3253 | |||||
3254 | /// IsQualificationConversion - Determines whether the conversion from | ||||
3255 | /// an rvalue of type FromType to ToType is a qualification conversion | ||||
3256 | /// (C++ 4.4). | ||||
3257 | /// | ||||
3258 | /// \param ObjCLifetimeConversion Output parameter that will be set to indicate | ||||
3259 | /// when the qualification conversion involves a change in the Objective-C | ||||
3260 | /// object lifetime. | ||||
3261 | bool | ||||
3262 | Sema::IsQualificationConversion(QualType FromType, QualType ToType, | ||||
3263 | bool CStyle, bool &ObjCLifetimeConversion) { | ||||
3264 | FromType = Context.getCanonicalType(FromType); | ||||
3265 | ToType = Context.getCanonicalType(ToType); | ||||
3266 | ObjCLifetimeConversion = false; | ||||
3267 | |||||
3268 | // If FromType and ToType are the same type, this is not a | ||||
3269 | // qualification conversion. | ||||
3270 | if (FromType.getUnqualifiedType() == ToType.getUnqualifiedType()) | ||||
3271 | return false; | ||||
3272 | |||||
3273 | // (C++ 4.4p4): | ||||
3274 | // A conversion can add cv-qualifiers at levels other than the first | ||||
3275 | // in multi-level pointers, subject to the following rules: [...] | ||||
3276 | bool PreviousToQualsIncludeConst = true; | ||||
3277 | bool UnwrappedAnyPointer = false; | ||||
3278 | while (Context.UnwrapSimilarTypes(FromType, ToType)) { | ||||
3279 | if (!isQualificationConversionStep( | ||||
3280 | FromType, ToType, CStyle, !UnwrappedAnyPointer, | ||||
3281 | PreviousToQualsIncludeConst, ObjCLifetimeConversion)) | ||||
3282 | return false; | ||||
3283 | UnwrappedAnyPointer = true; | ||||
3284 | } | ||||
3285 | |||||
3286 | // We are left with FromType and ToType being the pointee types | ||||
3287 | // after unwrapping the original FromType and ToType the same number | ||||
3288 | // of times. If we unwrapped any pointers, and if FromType and | ||||
3289 | // ToType have the same unqualified type (since we checked | ||||
3290 | // qualifiers above), then this is a qualification conversion. | ||||
3291 | return UnwrappedAnyPointer && Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(FromType,ToType); | ||||
3292 | } | ||||
3293 | |||||
3294 | /// - Determine whether this is a conversion from a scalar type to an | ||||
3295 | /// atomic type. | ||||
3296 | /// | ||||
3297 | /// If successful, updates \c SCS's second and third steps in the conversion | ||||
3298 | /// sequence to finish the conversion. | ||||
3299 | static bool tryAtomicConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
3300 | bool InOverloadResolution, | ||||
3301 | StandardConversionSequence &SCS, | ||||
3302 | bool CStyle) { | ||||
3303 | const AtomicType *ToAtomic = ToType->getAs<AtomicType>(); | ||||
3304 | if (!ToAtomic) | ||||
3305 | return false; | ||||
3306 | |||||
3307 | StandardConversionSequence InnerSCS; | ||||
3308 | if (!IsStandardConversion(S, From, ToAtomic->getValueType(), | ||||
3309 | InOverloadResolution, InnerSCS, | ||||
3310 | CStyle, /*AllowObjCWritebackConversion=*/false)) | ||||
3311 | return false; | ||||
3312 | |||||
3313 | SCS.Second = InnerSCS.Second; | ||||
3314 | SCS.setToType(1, InnerSCS.getToType(1)); | ||||
3315 | SCS.Third = InnerSCS.Third; | ||||
3316 | SCS.QualificationIncludesObjCLifetime | ||||
3317 | = InnerSCS.QualificationIncludesObjCLifetime; | ||||
3318 | SCS.setToType(2, InnerSCS.getToType(2)); | ||||
3319 | return true; | ||||
3320 | } | ||||
3321 | |||||
3322 | static bool isFirstArgumentCompatibleWithType(ASTContext &Context, | ||||
3323 | CXXConstructorDecl *Constructor, | ||||
3324 | QualType Type) { | ||||
3325 | const auto *CtorType = Constructor->getType()->castAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
3326 | if (CtorType->getNumParams() > 0) { | ||||
3327 | QualType FirstArg = CtorType->getParamType(0); | ||||
3328 | if (Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(Type, FirstArg.getNonReferenceType())) | ||||
3329 | return true; | ||||
3330 | } | ||||
3331 | return false; | ||||
3332 | } | ||||
3333 | |||||
3334 | static OverloadingResult | ||||
3335 | IsInitializerListConstructorConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
3336 | CXXRecordDecl *To, | ||||
3337 | UserDefinedConversionSequence &User, | ||||
3338 | OverloadCandidateSet &CandidateSet, | ||||
3339 | bool AllowExplicit) { | ||||
3340 | CandidateSet.clear(OverloadCandidateSet::CSK_InitByUserDefinedConversion); | ||||
3341 | for (auto *D : S.LookupConstructors(To)) { | ||||
3342 | auto Info = getConstructorInfo(D); | ||||
3343 | if (!Info) | ||||
3344 | continue; | ||||
3345 | |||||
3346 | bool Usable = !Info.Constructor->isInvalidDecl() && | ||||
3347 | S.isInitListConstructor(Info.Constructor); | ||||
3348 | if (Usable) { | ||||
3349 | // If the first argument is (a reference to) the target type, | ||||
3350 | // suppress conversions. | ||||
3351 | bool SuppressUserConversions = isFirstArgumentCompatibleWithType( | ||||
3352 | S.Context, Info.Constructor, ToType); | ||||
3353 | if (Info.ConstructorTmpl) | ||||
3354 | S.AddTemplateOverloadCandidate(Info.ConstructorTmpl, Info.FoundDecl, | ||||
3355 | /*ExplicitArgs*/ nullptr, From, | ||||
3356 | CandidateSet, SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
3357 | /*PartialOverloading*/ false, | ||||
3358 | AllowExplicit); | ||||
3359 | else | ||||
3360 | S.AddOverloadCandidate(Info.Constructor, Info.FoundDecl, From, | ||||
3361 | CandidateSet, SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
3362 | /*PartialOverloading*/ false, AllowExplicit); | ||||
3363 | } | ||||
3364 | } | ||||
3365 | |||||
3366 | bool HadMultipleCandidates = (CandidateSet.size() > 1); | ||||
3367 | |||||
3368 | OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Best; | ||||
3369 | switch (auto Result = | ||||
3370 | CandidateSet.BestViableFunction(S, From->getBeginLoc(), Best)) { | ||||
3371 | case OR_Deleted: | ||||
3372 | case OR_Success: { | ||||
3373 | // Record the standard conversion we used and the conversion function. | ||||
3374 | CXXConstructorDecl *Constructor = cast<CXXConstructorDecl>(Best->Function); | ||||
3375 | QualType ThisType = Constructor->getThisType(); | ||||
3376 | // Initializer lists don't have conversions as such. | ||||
3377 | User.Before.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
3378 | User.HadMultipleCandidates = HadMultipleCandidates; | ||||
3379 | User.ConversionFunction = Constructor; | ||||
3380 | User.FoundConversionFunction = Best->FoundDecl; | ||||
3381 | User.After.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
3382 | User.After.setFromType(ThisType->castAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType()); | ||||
3383 | User.After.setAllToTypes(ToType); | ||||
3384 | return Result; | ||||
3385 | } | ||||
3386 | |||||
3387 | case OR_No_Viable_Function: | ||||
3388 | return OR_No_Viable_Function; | ||||
3389 | case OR_Ambiguous: | ||||
3390 | return OR_Ambiguous; | ||||
3391 | } | ||||
3392 | |||||
3393 | llvm_unreachable("Invalid OverloadResult!")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("Invalid OverloadResult!", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3393); | ||||
3394 | } | ||||
3395 | |||||
3396 | /// Determines whether there is a user-defined conversion sequence | ||||
3397 | /// (C++ [over.ics.user]) that converts expression From to the type | ||||
3398 | /// ToType. If such a conversion exists, User will contain the | ||||
3399 | /// user-defined conversion sequence that performs such a conversion | ||||
3400 | /// and this routine will return true. Otherwise, this routine returns | ||||
3401 | /// false and User is unspecified. | ||||
3402 | /// | ||||
3403 | /// \param AllowExplicit true if the conversion should consider C++0x | ||||
3404 | /// "explicit" conversion functions as well as non-explicit conversion | ||||
3405 | /// functions (C++0x [class.conv.fct]p2). | ||||
3406 | /// | ||||
3407 | /// \param AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit true if the conversion should | ||||
3408 | /// allow an extra Objective-C pointer conversion on uses of explicit | ||||
3409 | /// constructors. Requires \c AllowExplicit to also be set. | ||||
3410 | static OverloadingResult | ||||
3411 | IsUserDefinedConversion(Sema &S, Expr *From, QualType ToType, | ||||
3412 | UserDefinedConversionSequence &User, | ||||
3413 | OverloadCandidateSet &CandidateSet, | ||||
3414 | AllowedExplicit AllowExplicit, | ||||
3415 | bool AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit) { | ||||
3416 | assert(AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None ||((AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None || !AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None || !AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3417, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) | ||||
3417 | !AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit)((AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None || !AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None || !AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3417, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); | ||||
3418 | CandidateSet.clear(OverloadCandidateSet::CSK_InitByUserDefinedConversion); | ||||
3419 | |||||
3420 | // Whether we will only visit constructors. | ||||
3421 | bool ConstructorsOnly = false; | ||||
3422 | |||||
3423 | // If the type we are conversion to is a class type, enumerate its | ||||
3424 | // constructors. | ||||
3425 | if (const RecordType *ToRecordType = ToType->getAs<RecordType>()) { | ||||
3426 | // C++ [over.match.ctor]p1: | ||||
3427 | // When objects of class type are direct-initialized (8.5), or | ||||
3428 | // copy-initialized from an expression of the same or a | ||||
3429 | // derived class type (8.5), overload resolution selects the | ||||
3430 | // constructor. [...] For copy-initialization, the candidate | ||||
3431 | // functions are all the converting constructors (12.3.1) of | ||||
3432 | // that class. The argument list is the expression-list within | ||||
3433 | // the parentheses of the initializer. | ||||
3434 | if (S.Context.hasSameUnqualifiedType(ToType, From->getType()) || | ||||
3435 | (From->getType()->getAs<RecordType>() && | ||||
3436 | S.IsDerivedFrom(From->getBeginLoc(), From->getType(), ToType))) | ||||
3437 | ConstructorsOnly = true; | ||||
3438 | |||||
3439 | if (!S.isCompleteType(From->getExprLoc(), ToType)) { | ||||
3440 | // We're not going to find any constructors. | ||||
3441 | } else if (CXXRecordDecl *ToRecordDecl | ||||
3442 | = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(ToRecordType->getDecl())) { | ||||
3443 | |||||
3444 | Expr **Args = &From; | ||||
3445 | unsigned NumArgs = 1; | ||||
3446 | bool ListInitializing = false; | ||||
3447 | if (InitListExpr *InitList = dyn_cast<InitListExpr>(From)) { | ||||
3448 | // But first, see if there is an init-list-constructor that will work. | ||||
3449 | OverloadingResult Result = IsInitializerListConstructorConversion( | ||||
3450 | S, From, ToType, ToRecordDecl, User, CandidateSet, | ||||
3451 | AllowExplicit == AllowedExplicit::All); | ||||
3452 | if (Result != OR_No_Viable_Function) | ||||
3453 | return Result; | ||||
3454 | // Never mind. | ||||
3455 | CandidateSet.clear( | ||||
3456 | OverloadCandidateSet::CSK_InitByUserDefinedConversion); | ||||
3457 | |||||
3458 | // If we're list-initializing, we pass the individual elements as | ||||
3459 | // arguments, not the entire list. | ||||
3460 | Args = InitList->getInits(); | ||||
3461 | NumArgs = InitList->getNumInits(); | ||||
3462 | ListInitializing = true; | ||||
3463 | } | ||||
3464 | |||||
3465 | for (auto *D : S.LookupConstructors(ToRecordDecl)) { | ||||
3466 | auto Info = getConstructorInfo(D); | ||||
3467 | if (!Info) | ||||
3468 | continue; | ||||
3469 | |||||
3470 | bool Usable = !Info.Constructor->isInvalidDecl(); | ||||
3471 | if (!ListInitializing) | ||||
3472 | Usable = Usable && Info.Constructor->isConvertingConstructor( | ||||
3473 | /*AllowExplicit*/ true); | ||||
3474 | if (Usable) { | ||||
3475 | bool SuppressUserConversions = !ConstructorsOnly; | ||||
3476 | if (SuppressUserConversions && ListInitializing) { | ||||
3477 | SuppressUserConversions = false; | ||||
3478 | if (NumArgs == 1) { | ||||
3479 | // If the first argument is (a reference to) the target type, | ||||
3480 | // suppress conversions. | ||||
3481 | SuppressUserConversions = isFirstArgumentCompatibleWithType( | ||||
3482 | S.Context, Info.Constructor, ToType); | ||||
3483 | } | ||||
3484 | } | ||||
3485 | if (Info.ConstructorTmpl) | ||||
3486 | S.AddTemplateOverloadCandidate( | ||||
3487 | Info.ConstructorTmpl, Info.FoundDecl, | ||||
3488 | /*ExplicitArgs*/ nullptr, llvm::makeArrayRef(Args, NumArgs), | ||||
3489 | CandidateSet, SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
3490 | /*PartialOverloading*/ false, | ||||
3491 | AllowExplicit == AllowedExplicit::All); | ||||
3492 | else | ||||
3493 | // Allow one user-defined conversion when user specifies a | ||||
3494 | // From->ToType conversion via an static cast (c-style, etc). | ||||
3495 | S.AddOverloadCandidate(Info.Constructor, Info.FoundDecl, | ||||
3496 | llvm::makeArrayRef(Args, NumArgs), | ||||
3497 | CandidateSet, SuppressUserConversions, | ||||
3498 | /*PartialOverloading*/ false, | ||||
3499 | AllowExplicit == AllowedExplicit::All); | ||||
3500 | } | ||||
3501 | } | ||||
3502 | } | ||||
3503 | } | ||||
3504 | |||||
3505 | // Enumerate conversion functions, if we're allowed to. | ||||
3506 | if (ConstructorsOnly || isa<InitListExpr>(From)) { | ||||
3507 | } else if (!S.isCompleteType(From->getBeginLoc(), From->getType())) { | ||||
3508 | // No conversion functions from incomplete types. | ||||
3509 | } else if (const RecordType *FromRecordType = | ||||
3510 | From->getType()->getAs<RecordType>()) { | ||||
3511 | if (CXXRecordDecl *FromRecordDecl | ||||
3512 | = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(FromRecordType->getDecl())) { | ||||
3513 | // Add all of the conversion functions as candidates. | ||||
3514 | const auto &Conversions = FromRecordDecl->getVisibleConversionFunctions(); | ||||
3515 | for (auto I = Conversions.begin(), E = Conversions.end(); I != E; ++I) { | ||||
3516 | DeclAccessPair FoundDecl = I.getPair(); | ||||
3517 | NamedDecl *D = FoundDecl.getDecl(); | ||||
3518 | CXXRecordDecl *ActingContext = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D->getDeclContext()); | ||||
3519 | if (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D)) | ||||
3520 | D = cast<UsingShadowDecl>(D)->getTargetDecl(); | ||||
3521 | |||||
3522 | CXXConversionDecl *Conv; | ||||
3523 | FunctionTemplateDecl *ConvTemplate; | ||||
3524 | if ((ConvTemplate = dyn_cast<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D))) | ||||
3525 | Conv = cast<CXXConversionDecl>(ConvTemplate->getTemplatedDecl()); | ||||
3526 | else | ||||
3527 | Conv = cast<CXXConversionDecl>(D); | ||||
3528 | |||||
3529 | if (ConvTemplate) | ||||
3530 | S.AddTemplateConversionCandidate( | ||||
3531 | ConvTemplate, FoundDecl, ActingContext, From, ToType, | ||||
3532 | CandidateSet, AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit, | ||||
3533 | AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None); | ||||
3534 | else | ||||
3535 | S.AddConversionCandidate(Conv, FoundDecl, ActingContext, From, ToType, | ||||
3536 | CandidateSet, AllowObjCConversionOnExplicit, | ||||
3537 | AllowExplicit != AllowedExplicit::None); | ||||
3538 | } | ||||
3539 | } | ||||
3540 | } | ||||
3541 | |||||
3542 | bool HadMultipleCandidates = (CandidateSet.size() > 1); | ||||
3543 | |||||
3544 | OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Best; | ||||
3545 | switch (auto Result = | ||||
3546 | CandidateSet.BestViableFunction(S, From->getBeginLoc(), Best)) { | ||||
3547 | case OR_Success: | ||||
3548 | case OR_Deleted: | ||||
3549 | // Record the standard conversion we used and the conversion function. | ||||
3550 | if (CXXConstructorDecl *Constructor | ||||
3551 | = dyn_cast<CXXConstructorDecl>(Best->Function)) { | ||||
3552 | // C++ [over.ics.user]p1: | ||||
3553 | // If the user-defined conversion is specified by a | ||||
3554 | // constructor (12.3.1), the initial standard conversion | ||||
3555 | // sequence converts the source type to the type required by | ||||
3556 | // the argument of the constructor. | ||||
3557 | // | ||||
3558 | QualType ThisType = Constructor->getThisType(); | ||||
3559 | if (isa<InitListExpr>(From)) { | ||||
3560 | // Initializer lists don't have conversions as such. | ||||
3561 | User.Before.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
3562 | } else { | ||||
3563 | if (Best->Conversions[0].isEllipsis()) | ||||
3564 | User.EllipsisConversion = true; | ||||
3565 | else { | ||||
3566 | User.Before = Best->Conversions[0].Standard; | ||||
3567 | User.EllipsisConversion = false; | ||||
3568 | } | ||||
3569 | } | ||||
3570 | User.HadMultipleCandidates = HadMultipleCandidates; | ||||
3571 | User.ConversionFunction = Constructor; | ||||
3572 | User.FoundConversionFunction = Best->FoundDecl; | ||||
3573 | User.After.setAsIdentityConversion(); | ||||
3574 | User.After.setFromType(ThisType->castAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType()); | ||||
3575 | User.After.setAllToTypes(ToType); | ||||
3576 | return Result; | ||||
3577 | } | ||||
3578 | if (CXXConversionDecl *Conversion | ||||
3579 | = dyn_cast<CXXConversionDecl>(Best->Function)) { | ||||
3580 | // C++ [over.ics.user]p1: | ||||
3581 | // | ||||
3582 | // [...] If the user-defined conversion is specified by a | ||||
3583 | // conversion function (12.3.2), the initial standard | ||||
3584 | // conversion sequence converts the source type to the | ||||
3585 | // implicit object parameter of the conversion function. | ||||
3586 | User.Before = Best->Conversions[0].Standard; | ||||
3587 | User.HadMultipleCandidates = HadMultipleCandidates; | ||||
3588 | User.ConversionFunction = Conversion; | ||||
3589 | User.FoundConversionFunction = Best->FoundDecl; | ||||
3590 | User.EllipsisConversion = false; | ||||
3591 | |||||
3592 | // C++ [over.ics.user]p2: | ||||
3593 | // The second standard conversion sequence converts the | ||||
3594 | // result of the user-defined conversion to the target type | ||||
3595 | // for the sequence. Since an implicit conversion sequence | ||||
3596 | // is an initialization, the special rules for | ||||
3597 | // initialization by user-defined conversion apply when | ||||
3598 | // selecting the best user-defined conversion for a | ||||
3599 | // user-defined conversion sequence (see 13.3.3 and | ||||
3600 | // 13.3.3.1). | ||||
3601 | User.After = Best->FinalConversion; | ||||
3602 | return Result; | ||||
3603 | } | ||||
3604 | llvm_unreachable("Not a constructor or conversion function?")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("Not a constructor or conversion function?" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3604); | ||||
3605 | |||||
3606 | case OR_No_Viable_Function: | ||||
3607 | return OR_No_Viable_Function; | ||||
3608 | |||||
3609 | case OR_Ambiguous: | ||||
3610 | return OR_Ambiguous; | ||||
3611 | } | ||||
3612 | |||||
3613 | llvm_unreachable("Invalid OverloadResult!")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("Invalid OverloadResult!", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/lib/Sema/SemaOverload.cpp" , 3613); | ||||
3614 | } | ||||
3615 | |||||
3616 | bool | ||||
3617 | Sema::DiagnoseMultipleUserDefinedConversion(Expr *From, QualType ToType) { | ||||
3618 | ImplicitConversionSequence ICS; | ||||
3619 | OverloadCandidateSet CandidateSet(From->getExprLoc(), | ||||
3620 | OverloadCandidateSet::CSK_Normal); | ||||
3621 | OverloadingResult OvResult = | ||||
3622 | IsUserDefinedConversion(*this, From, ToType, ICS.UserDefined, | ||||
3623 | CandidateSet, AllowedExplicit::None, false); | ||||
3624 | |||||
3625 | if (!(OvResult == OR_Ambiguous || | ||||
3626 | (OvResult == OR_No_Viable_Function && !CandidateSet.empty()))) | ||||
3627 | return false; | ||||
3628 | |||||
3629 | auto Cands = CandidateSet.CompleteCandidates( | ||||
3630 | *this, | ||||
3631 | OvResult == OR_Ambiguous ? OCD_AmbiguousCandidates : OCD_AllCandidates, | ||||
3632 | From); | ||||
3633 | if (OvResult == OR_Ambiguous) | ||||
3634 | Diag(From->getBeginLoc(), diag::err_typecheck_ambiguous_condition) | ||||
3635 | << From->getType() << ToType << From->getSourceRange(); | ||||
3636 | else { // OR_No_Viable_Function && !CandidateSet.empty() | ||||
3637 | if (!RequireCompleteType(From->getBeginLoc(), ToType, | ||||
3638 | diag::err_typecheck_nonviable_condition_incomplete, | ||||
3639 | From->getType(), From->getSourceRange())) | ||||
3640 | Diag(From->getBeginLoc(), diag::err_typecheck_nonviable_condition) | ||||
3641 | << false << From->getType() << From->getSourceRange() << ToType; | ||||
3642 | } | ||||
3643 | |||||
3644 | CandidateSet.NoteCandidates( | ||||
3645 | *this, From, Cands); | ||||
3646 | return true; | ||||
3647 | } | ||||
3648 | |||||
3649 | // Helper for compareConversionFunctions that gets the FunctionType that the | ||||
3650 | // conversion-operator return value 'points' to, or nullptr. | ||||
3651 | static const FunctionType * | ||||
3652 | getConversionOpReturnTyAsFunction(CXXConversionDecl *Conv) { | ||||
3653 | const FunctionType *ConvFuncTy = Conv->getType()->castAs<FunctionType>(); | ||||
3654 | const PointerType *RetPtrTy = | ||||
3655 | ConvFuncTy->getReturnType()->getAs<PointerType>(); | ||||
3656 | |||||
3657 | if (!RetPtrTy) | ||||
3658 | return nullptr; | ||||
3659 | |||||
3660 | return RetPtrTy->getPointeeType()->getAs<FunctionType>(); | ||||
3661 | } | ||||
3662 | |||||
3663 | /// Compare the user-defined conversion functions or constructors | ||||
3664 | /// of two user-defined conversion sequences to determine whether any ordering | ||||
3665 | /// is possible. | ||||
3666 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
3667 | compareConversionFunctions(Sema &S, FunctionDecl *Function1, | ||||
3668 | FunctionDecl *Function2) { | ||||
3669 | CXXConversionDecl *Conv1 = dyn_cast_or_null<CXXConversionDecl>(Function1); | ||||
3670 | CXXConversionDecl *Conv2 = dyn_cast_or_null<CXXConversionDecl>(Function2); | ||||
3671 | if (!Conv1 || !Conv2) | ||||
3672 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3673 | |||||
3674 | if (!Conv1->getParent()->isLambda() || !Conv2->getParent()->isLambda()) | ||||
3675 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3676 | |||||
3677 | // Objective-C++: | ||||
3678 | // If both conversion functions are implicitly-declared conversions from | ||||
3679 | // a lambda closure type to a function pointer and a block pointer, | ||||
3680 | // respectively, always prefer the conversion to a function pointer, | ||||
3681 | // because the function pointer is more lightweight and is more likely | ||||
3682 | // to keep code working. | ||||
3683 | if (S.getLangOpts().ObjC && S.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus11) { | ||||
3684 | bool Block1 = Conv1->getConversionType()->isBlockPointerType(); | ||||
3685 | bool Block2 = Conv2->getConversionType()->isBlockPointerType(); | ||||
3686 | if (Block1 != Block2) | ||||
3687 | return Block1 ? ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse | ||||
3688 | : ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3689 | } | ||||
3690 | |||||
3691 | // In order to support multiple calling conventions for the lambda conversion | ||||
3692 | // operator (such as when the free and member function calling convention is | ||||
3693 | // different), prefer the 'free' mechanism, followed by the calling-convention | ||||
3694 | // of operator(). The latter is in place to support the MSVC-like solution of | ||||
3695 | // defining ALL of the possible conversions in regards to calling-convention. | ||||
3696 | const FunctionType *Conv1FuncRet = getConversionOpReturnTyAsFunction(Conv1); | ||||
3697 | const FunctionType *Conv2FuncRet = getConversionOpReturnTyAsFunction(Conv2); | ||||
3698 | |||||
3699 | if (Conv1FuncRet && Conv2FuncRet && | ||||
3700 | Conv1FuncRet->getCallConv() != Conv2FuncRet->getCallConv()) { | ||||
3701 | CallingConv Conv1CC = Conv1FuncRet->getCallConv(); | ||||
3702 | CallingConv Conv2CC = Conv2FuncRet->getCallConv(); | ||||
3703 | |||||
3704 | CXXMethodDecl *CallOp = Conv2->getParent()->getLambdaCallOperator(); | ||||
3705 | const FunctionProtoType *CallOpProto = | ||||
3706 | CallOp->getType()->getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); | ||||
3707 | |||||
3708 | CallingConv CallOpCC = | ||||
3709 | CallOp->getType()->getAs<FunctionType>()->getCallConv(); | ||||
3710 | CallingConv DefaultFree = S.Context.getDefaultCallingConvention( | ||||
3711 | CallOpProto->isVariadic(), /*IsCXXMethod=*/false); | ||||
3712 | CallingConv DefaultMember = S.Context.getDefaultCallingConvention( | ||||
3713 | CallOpProto->isVariadic(), /*IsCXXMethod=*/true); | ||||
3714 | |||||
3715 | CallingConv PrefOrder[] = {DefaultFree, DefaultMember, CallOpCC}; | ||||
3716 | for (CallingConv CC : PrefOrder) { | ||||
3717 | if (Conv1CC == CC) | ||||
3718 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3719 | if (Conv2CC == CC) | ||||
3720 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse; | ||||
3721 | } | ||||
3722 | } | ||||
3723 | |||||
3724 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3725 | } | ||||
3726 | |||||
3727 | static bool hasDeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtrConversion( | ||||
3728 | const ImplicitConversionSequence &ICS) { | ||||
3729 | return (ICS.isStandard() && ICS.Standard.DeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtr) || | ||||
3730 | (ICS.isUserDefined() && | ||||
3731 | ICS.UserDefined.Before.DeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtr); | ||||
3732 | } | ||||
3733 | |||||
3734 | /// CompareImplicitConversionSequences - Compare two implicit | ||||
3735 | /// conversion sequences to determine whether one is better than the | ||||
3736 | /// other or if they are indistinguishable (C++ 13.3.3.2). | ||||
3737 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
3738 | CompareImplicitConversionSequences(Sema &S, SourceLocation Loc, | ||||
3739 | const ImplicitConversionSequence& ICS1, | ||||
3740 | const ImplicitConversionSequence& ICS2) | ||||
3741 | { | ||||
3742 | // (C++ 13.3.3.2p2): When comparing the basic forms of implicit | ||||
3743 | // conversion sequences (as defined in 13.3.3.1) | ||||
3744 | // -- a standard conversion sequence (13.3.3.1.1) is a better | ||||
3745 | // conversion sequence than a user-defined conversion sequence or | ||||
3746 | // an ellipsis conversion sequence, and | ||||
3747 | // -- a user-defined conversion sequence (13.3.3.1.2) is a better | ||||
3748 | // conversion sequence than an ellipsis conversion sequence | ||||
3749 | // (13.3.3.1.3). | ||||
3750 | // | ||||
3751 | // C++0x [over.best.ics]p10: | ||||
3752 | // For the purpose of ranking implicit conversion sequences as | ||||
3753 | // described in 13.3.3.2, the ambiguous conversion sequence is | ||||
3754 | // treated as a user-defined sequence that is indistinguishable | ||||
3755 | // from any other user-defined conversion sequence. | ||||
3756 | |||||
3757 | // String literal to 'char *' conversion has been deprecated in C++03. It has | ||||
3758 | // been removed from C++11. We still accept this conversion, if it happens at | ||||
3759 | // the best viable function. Otherwise, this conversion is considered worse | ||||
3760 | // than ellipsis conversion. Consider this as an extension; this is not in the | ||||
3761 | // standard. For example: | ||||
3762 | // | ||||
3763 | // int &f(...); // #1 | ||||
3764 | // void f(char*); // #2 | ||||
3765 | // void g() { int &r = f("foo"); } | ||||
3766 | // | ||||
3767 | // In C++03, we pick #2 as the best viable function. | ||||
3768 | // In C++11, we pick #1 as the best viable function, because ellipsis | ||||
3769 | // conversion is better than string-literal to char* conversion (since there | ||||
3770 | // is no such conversion in C++11). If there was no #1 at all or #1 couldn't | ||||
3771 | // convert arguments, #2 would be the best viable function in C++11. | ||||
3772 | // If the best viable function has this conversion, a warning will be issued | ||||
3773 | // in C++03, or an ExtWarn (+SFINAE failure) will be issued in C++11. | ||||
3774 | |||||
3775 | if (S.getLangOpts().CPlusPlus11 && !S.getLangOpts().WritableStrings && | ||||
3776 | hasDeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtrConversion(ICS1) != | ||||
3777 | hasDeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtrConversion(ICS2)) | ||||
3778 | return hasDeprecatedStringLiteralToCharPtrConversion(ICS1) | ||||
3779 | ? ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse | ||||
3780 | : ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3781 | |||||
3782 | if (ICS1.getKindRank() < ICS2.getKindRank()) | ||||
3783 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3784 | if (ICS2.getKindRank() < ICS1.getKindRank()) | ||||
3785 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse; | ||||
3786 | |||||
3787 | // The following checks require both conversion sequences to be of | ||||
3788 | // the same kind. | ||||
3789 | if (ICS1.getKind() != ICS2.getKind()) | ||||
3790 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3791 | |||||
3792 | ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind Result = | ||||
3793 | ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3794 | |||||
3795 | // Two implicit conversion sequences of the same form are | ||||
3796 | // indistinguishable conversion sequences unless one of the | ||||
3797 | // following rules apply: (C++ 13.3.3.2p3): | ||||
3798 | |||||
3799 | // List-initialization sequence L1 is a better conversion sequence than | ||||
3800 | // list-initialization sequence L2 if: | ||||
3801 | // - L1 converts to std::initializer_list<X> for some X and L2 does not, or, | ||||
3802 | // if not that, | ||||
3803 | // - L1 converts to type "array of N1 T", L2 converts to type "array of N2 T", | ||||
3804 | // and N1 is smaller than N2., | ||||
3805 | // even if one of the other rules in this paragraph would otherwise apply. | ||||
3806 | if (!ICS1.isBad()) { | ||||
3807 | if (ICS1.isStdInitializerListElement() && | ||||
3808 | !ICS2.isStdInitializerListElement()) | ||||
3809 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3810 | if (!ICS1.isStdInitializerListElement() && | ||||
3811 | ICS2.isStdInitializerListElement()) | ||||
3812 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse; | ||||
3813 | } | ||||
3814 | |||||
3815 | if (ICS1.isStandard()) | ||||
3816 | // Standard conversion sequence S1 is a better conversion sequence than | ||||
3817 | // standard conversion sequence S2 if [...] | ||||
3818 | Result = CompareStandardConversionSequences(S, Loc, | ||||
3819 | ICS1.Standard, ICS2.Standard); | ||||
3820 | else if (ICS1.isUserDefined()) { | ||||
3821 | // User-defined conversion sequence U1 is a better conversion | ||||
3822 | // sequence than another user-defined conversion sequence U2 if | ||||
3823 | // they contain the same user-defined conversion function or | ||||
3824 | // constructor and if the second standard conversion sequence of | ||||
3825 | // U1 is better than the second standard conversion sequence of | ||||
3826 | // U2 (C++ 13.3.3.2p3). | ||||
3827 | if (ICS1.UserDefined.ConversionFunction == | ||||
3828 | ICS2.UserDefined.ConversionFunction) | ||||
3829 | Result = CompareStandardConversionSequences(S, Loc, | ||||
3830 | ICS1.UserDefined.After, | ||||
3831 | ICS2.UserDefined.After); | ||||
3832 | else | ||||
3833 | Result = compareConversionFunctions(S, | ||||
3834 | ICS1.UserDefined.ConversionFunction, | ||||
3835 | ICS2.UserDefined.ConversionFunction); | ||||
3836 | } | ||||
3837 | |||||
3838 | return Result; | ||||
3839 | } | ||||
3840 | |||||
3841 | // Per 13.3.3.2p3, compare the given standard conversion sequences to | ||||
3842 | // determine if one is a proper subset of the other. | ||||
3843 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
3844 | compareStandardConversionSubsets(ASTContext &Context, | ||||
3845 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS1, | ||||
3846 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS2) { | ||||
3847 | ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind Result | ||||
3848 | = ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3849 | |||||
3850 | // the identity conversion sequence is considered to be a subsequence of | ||||
3851 | // any non-identity conversion sequence | ||||
3852 | if (SCS1.isIdentityConversion() && !SCS2.isIdentityConversion()) | ||||
3853 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3854 | else if (!SCS1.isIdentityConversion() && SCS2.isIdentityConversion()) | ||||
3855 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse; | ||||
3856 | |||||
3857 | if (SCS1.Second != SCS2.Second) { | ||||
3858 | if (SCS1.Second == ICK_Identity) | ||||
3859 | Result = ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3860 | else if (SCS2.Second == ICK_Identity) | ||||
3861 | Result = ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse; | ||||
3862 | else | ||||
3863 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3864 | } else if (!Context.hasSimilarType(SCS1.getToType(1), SCS2.getToType(1))) | ||||
3865 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3866 | |||||
3867 | if (SCS1.Third == SCS2.Third) { | ||||
3868 | return Context.hasSameType(SCS1.getToType(2), SCS2.getToType(2))? Result | ||||
3869 | : ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3870 | } | ||||
3871 | |||||
3872 | if (SCS1.Third == ICK_Identity) | ||||
3873 | return Result == ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse | ||||
3874 | ? ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable | ||||
3875 | : ImplicitConversionSequence::Better; | ||||
3876 | |||||
3877 | if (SCS2.Third == ICK_Identity) | ||||
3878 | return Result == ImplicitConversionSequence::Better | ||||
3879 | ? ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable | ||||
3880 | : ImplicitConversionSequence::Worse; | ||||
3881 | |||||
3882 | return ImplicitConversionSequence::Indistinguishable; | ||||
3883 | } | ||||
3884 | |||||
3885 | /// Determine whether one of the given reference bindings is better | ||||
3886 | /// than the other based on what kind of bindings they are. | ||||
3887 | static bool | ||||
3888 | isBetterReferenceBindingKind(const StandardConversionSequence &SCS1, | ||||
3889 | const StandardConversionSequence &SCS2) { | ||||
3890 | // C++0x [over.ics.rank]p3b4: | ||||
3891 | // -- S1 and S2 are reference bindings (8.5.3) and neither refers to an | ||||
3892 | // implicit object parameter of a non-static member function declared | ||||
3893 | // without a ref-qualifier, and *either* S1 binds an rvalue reference | ||||
3894 | // to an rvalue and S2 binds an lvalue reference *or S1 binds an | ||||
3895 | // lvalue reference to a function lvalue and S2 binds an rvalue | ||||
3896 | // reference*. | ||||
3897 | // | ||||
3898 | // FIXME: Rvalue references. We're going rogue with the above edits, | ||||
3899 | // because the semantics in the current C++0x working paper (N3225 at the | ||||
3900 | // time of this writing) break the standard definition of std::forward | ||||
3901 | // and std::reference_wrapper when dealing with references to functions. | ||||
3902 | // Proposed wording changes submitted to CWG for consideration. | ||||
3903 | if (SCS1.BindsImplicitObjectArgumentWithoutRefQualifier || | ||||
3904 | SCS2.BindsImplicitObjectArgumentWithoutRefQualifier) | ||||
3905 | return false; | ||||
3906 | |||||
3907 | return (!SCS1.IsLvalueReference && SCS1.BindsToRvalue && | ||||
3908 | SCS2.IsLvalueReference) || | ||||
3909 | (SCS1.IsLvalueReference && SCS1.BindsToFunctionLvalue && | ||||
3910 | !SCS2.IsLvalueReference && SCS2.BindsToFunctionLvalue); | ||||
3911 | } | ||||
3912 | |||||
3913 | enum class FixedEnumPromotion { | ||||
3914 | None, | ||||
3915 | ToUnderlyingType, | ||||
3916 | ToPromotedUnderlyingType | ||||
3917 | }; | ||||
3918 | |||||
3919 | /// Returns kind of fixed enum promotion the \a SCS uses. | ||||
3920 | static FixedEnumPromotion | ||||
3921 | getFixedEnumPromtion(Sema &S, const StandardConversionSequence &SCS) { | ||||
3922 | |||||
3923 | if (SCS.Second != ICK_Integral_Promotion) | ||||
3924 | return FixedEnumPromotion::None; | ||||
3925 | |||||
3926 | QualType FromType = SCS.getFromType(); | ||||
3927 | if (!FromType->isEnumeralType()) | ||||
3928 | return FixedEnumPromotion::None; | ||||
3929 | |||||
3930 | EnumDecl *Enum = FromType->getAs<EnumType>()->getDecl(); | ||||
| |||||
3931 | if (!Enum->isFixed()) | ||||
3932 | return FixedEnumPromotion::None; | ||||
3933 | |||||
3934 | QualType UnderlyingType = Enum->getIntegerType(); | ||||
3935 | if (S.Context.hasSameType(SCS.getToType(1), UnderlyingType)) | ||||
3936 | return FixedEnumPromotion::ToUnderlyingType; | ||||
3937 | |||||
3938 | return FixedEnumPromotion::ToPromotedUnderlyingType; | ||||
3939 | } | ||||
3940 | |||||
3941 | /// CompareStandardConversionSequences - Compare two standard | ||||
3942 | /// conversion sequences to determine whether one is better than the | ||||
3943 | /// other or if they are indistinguishable (C++ 13.3.3.2p3). | ||||
3944 | static ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind | ||||
3945 | CompareStandardConversionSequences(Sema &S, SourceLocation Loc, | ||||
3946 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS1, | ||||
3947 | const StandardConversionSequence& SCS2) | ||||
3948 | { | ||||
3949 | // Standard conversion sequence S1 is a better conversion sequence | ||||
3950 | // than standard conversion sequence S2 if (C++ 13.3.3.2p3): | ||||
3951 | |||||
3952 | // -- S1 is a proper subsequence of S2 (comparing the conversion | ||||
3953 | // sequences in the canonical form defined by 13.3.3.1.1, | ||||
3954 | // excluding any Lvalue Transformation; the identity conversion | ||||
3955 | // sequence is considered to be a subsequence of any | ||||
3956 | // non-identity conversion sequence) or, if not that, | ||||
3957 | if (ImplicitConversionSequence::CompareKind CK
|
22.1 | 'CK' is 0 |
23.1 | 'Rank1' is >= 'Rank2' |
23.1 | 'Rank1' is >= 'Rank2' |
24.1 | 'Rank2' is >= 'Rank1' |
24.1 | 'Rank2' is >= 'Rank1' |
1 | Assuming field 'Viable' is true |
12.1 | 'HasBetterConversion' is false |
12.1 | 'HasBetterConversion' is false |
14.1 | 'HasBetterConversion' is false |
14.1 | 'HasBetterConversion' is false |
20.1 | 'Result' is equal to Indistinguishable |
20.1 | 'Result' is equal to Indistinguishable |
1 | //===- Type.h - C Language Family Type Representation -----------*- C++ -*-===// |
2 | // |
3 | // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. |
4 | // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. |
5 | // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception |
6 | // |
7 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
8 | // |
9 | /// \file |
10 | /// C Language Family Type Representation |
11 | /// |
12 | /// This file defines the clang::Type interface and subclasses, used to |
13 | /// represent types for languages in the C family. |
14 | // |
15 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
16 | |
17 | #ifndef LLVM_CLANG_AST_TYPE_H |
18 | #define LLVM_CLANG_AST_TYPE_H |
19 | |
20 | #include "clang/AST/DependenceFlags.h" |
21 | #include "clang/AST/NestedNameSpecifier.h" |
22 | #include "clang/AST/TemplateName.h" |
23 | #include "clang/Basic/AddressSpaces.h" |
24 | #include "clang/Basic/AttrKinds.h" |
25 | #include "clang/Basic/Diagnostic.h" |
26 | #include "clang/Basic/ExceptionSpecificationType.h" |
27 | #include "clang/Basic/LLVM.h" |
28 | #include "clang/Basic/Linkage.h" |
29 | #include "clang/Basic/PartialDiagnostic.h" |
30 | #include "clang/Basic/SourceLocation.h" |
31 | #include "clang/Basic/Specifiers.h" |
32 | #include "clang/Basic/Visibility.h" |
33 | #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h" |
34 | #include "llvm/ADT/APSInt.h" |
35 | #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h" |
36 | #include "llvm/ADT/FoldingSet.h" |
37 | #include "llvm/ADT/None.h" |
38 | #include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h" |
39 | #include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h" |
40 | #include "llvm/ADT/PointerUnion.h" |
41 | #include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h" |
42 | #include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h" |
43 | #include "llvm/ADT/iterator_range.h" |
44 | #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h" |
45 | #include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h" |
46 | #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h" |
47 | #include "llvm/Support/PointerLikeTypeTraits.h" |
48 | #include "llvm/Support/TrailingObjects.h" |
49 | #include "llvm/Support/type_traits.h" |
50 | #include <cassert> |
51 | #include <cstddef> |
52 | #include <cstdint> |
53 | #include <cstring> |
54 | #include <string> |
55 | #include <type_traits> |
56 | #include <utility> |
57 | |
58 | namespace clang { |
59 | |
60 | class ExtQuals; |
61 | class QualType; |
62 | class ConceptDecl; |
63 | class TagDecl; |
64 | class TemplateParameterList; |
65 | class Type; |
66 | |
67 | enum { |
68 | TypeAlignmentInBits = 4, |
69 | TypeAlignment = 1 << TypeAlignmentInBits |
70 | }; |
71 | |
72 | namespace serialization { |
73 | template <class T> class AbstractTypeReader; |
74 | template <class T> class AbstractTypeWriter; |
75 | } |
76 | |
77 | } // namespace clang |
78 | |
79 | namespace llvm { |
80 | |
81 | template <typename T> |
82 | struct PointerLikeTypeTraits; |
83 | template<> |
84 | struct PointerLikeTypeTraits< ::clang::Type*> { |
85 | static inline void *getAsVoidPointer(::clang::Type *P) { return P; } |
86 | |
87 | static inline ::clang::Type *getFromVoidPointer(void *P) { |
88 | return static_cast< ::clang::Type*>(P); |
89 | } |
90 | |
91 | static constexpr int NumLowBitsAvailable = clang::TypeAlignmentInBits; |
92 | }; |
93 | |
94 | template<> |
95 | struct PointerLikeTypeTraits< ::clang::ExtQuals*> { |
96 | static inline void *getAsVoidPointer(::clang::ExtQuals *P) { return P; } |
97 | |
98 | static inline ::clang::ExtQuals *getFromVoidPointer(void *P) { |
99 | return static_cast< ::clang::ExtQuals*>(P); |
100 | } |
101 | |
102 | static constexpr int NumLowBitsAvailable = clang::TypeAlignmentInBits; |
103 | }; |
104 | |
105 | } // namespace llvm |
106 | |
107 | namespace clang { |
108 | |
109 | class ASTContext; |
110 | template <typename> class CanQual; |
111 | class CXXRecordDecl; |
112 | class DeclContext; |
113 | class EnumDecl; |
114 | class Expr; |
115 | class ExtQualsTypeCommonBase; |
116 | class FunctionDecl; |
117 | class IdentifierInfo; |
118 | class NamedDecl; |
119 | class ObjCInterfaceDecl; |
120 | class ObjCProtocolDecl; |
121 | class ObjCTypeParamDecl; |
122 | struct PrintingPolicy; |
123 | class RecordDecl; |
124 | class Stmt; |
125 | class TagDecl; |
126 | class TemplateArgument; |
127 | class TemplateArgumentListInfo; |
128 | class TemplateArgumentLoc; |
129 | class TemplateTypeParmDecl; |
130 | class TypedefNameDecl; |
131 | class UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl; |
132 | |
133 | using CanQualType = CanQual<Type>; |
134 | |
135 | // Provide forward declarations for all of the *Type classes. |
136 | #define TYPE(Class, Base) class Class##Type; |
137 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.inc" |
138 | |
139 | /// The collection of all-type qualifiers we support. |
140 | /// Clang supports five independent qualifiers: |
141 | /// * C99: const, volatile, and restrict |
142 | /// * MS: __unaligned |
143 | /// * Embedded C (TR18037): address spaces |
144 | /// * Objective C: the GC attributes (none, weak, or strong) |
145 | class Qualifiers { |
146 | public: |
147 | enum TQ { // NOTE: These flags must be kept in sync with DeclSpec::TQ. |
148 | Const = 0x1, |
149 | Restrict = 0x2, |
150 | Volatile = 0x4, |
151 | CVRMask = Const | Volatile | Restrict |
152 | }; |
153 | |
154 | enum GC { |
155 | GCNone = 0, |
156 | Weak, |
157 | Strong |
158 | }; |
159 | |
160 | enum ObjCLifetime { |
161 | /// There is no lifetime qualification on this type. |
162 | OCL_None, |
163 | |
164 | /// This object can be modified without requiring retains or |
165 | /// releases. |
166 | OCL_ExplicitNone, |
167 | |
168 | /// Assigning into this object requires the old value to be |
169 | /// released and the new value to be retained. The timing of the |
170 | /// release of the old value is inexact: it may be moved to |
171 | /// immediately after the last known point where the value is |
172 | /// live. |
173 | OCL_Strong, |
174 | |
175 | /// Reading or writing from this object requires a barrier call. |
176 | OCL_Weak, |
177 | |
178 | /// Assigning into this object requires a lifetime extension. |
179 | OCL_Autoreleasing |
180 | }; |
181 | |
182 | enum { |
183 | /// The maximum supported address space number. |
184 | /// 23 bits should be enough for anyone. |
185 | MaxAddressSpace = 0x7fffffu, |
186 | |
187 | /// The width of the "fast" qualifier mask. |
188 | FastWidth = 3, |
189 | |
190 | /// The fast qualifier mask. |
191 | FastMask = (1 << FastWidth) - 1 |
192 | }; |
193 | |
194 | /// Returns the common set of qualifiers while removing them from |
195 | /// the given sets. |
196 | static Qualifiers removeCommonQualifiers(Qualifiers &L, Qualifiers &R) { |
197 | // If both are only CVR-qualified, bit operations are sufficient. |
198 | if (!(L.Mask & ~CVRMask) && !(R.Mask & ~CVRMask)) { |
199 | Qualifiers Q; |
200 | Q.Mask = L.Mask & R.Mask; |
201 | L.Mask &= ~Q.Mask; |
202 | R.Mask &= ~Q.Mask; |
203 | return Q; |
204 | } |
205 | |
206 | Qualifiers Q; |
207 | unsigned CommonCRV = L.getCVRQualifiers() & R.getCVRQualifiers(); |
208 | Q.addCVRQualifiers(CommonCRV); |
209 | L.removeCVRQualifiers(CommonCRV); |
210 | R.removeCVRQualifiers(CommonCRV); |
211 | |
212 | if (L.getObjCGCAttr() == R.getObjCGCAttr()) { |
213 | Q.setObjCGCAttr(L.getObjCGCAttr()); |
214 | L.removeObjCGCAttr(); |
215 | R.removeObjCGCAttr(); |
216 | } |
217 | |
218 | if (L.getObjCLifetime() == R.getObjCLifetime()) { |
219 | Q.setObjCLifetime(L.getObjCLifetime()); |
220 | L.removeObjCLifetime(); |
221 | R.removeObjCLifetime(); |
222 | } |
223 | |
224 | if (L.getAddressSpace() == R.getAddressSpace()) { |
225 | Q.setAddressSpace(L.getAddressSpace()); |
226 | L.removeAddressSpace(); |
227 | R.removeAddressSpace(); |
228 | } |
229 | return Q; |
230 | } |
231 | |
232 | static Qualifiers fromFastMask(unsigned Mask) { |
233 | Qualifiers Qs; |
234 | Qs.addFastQualifiers(Mask); |
235 | return Qs; |
236 | } |
237 | |
238 | static Qualifiers fromCVRMask(unsigned CVR) { |
239 | Qualifiers Qs; |
240 | Qs.addCVRQualifiers(CVR); |
241 | return Qs; |
242 | } |
243 | |
244 | static Qualifiers fromCVRUMask(unsigned CVRU) { |
245 | Qualifiers Qs; |
246 | Qs.addCVRUQualifiers(CVRU); |
247 | return Qs; |
248 | } |
249 | |
250 | // Deserialize qualifiers from an opaque representation. |
251 | static Qualifiers fromOpaqueValue(unsigned opaque) { |
252 | Qualifiers Qs; |
253 | Qs.Mask = opaque; |
254 | return Qs; |
255 | } |
256 | |
257 | // Serialize these qualifiers into an opaque representation. |
258 | unsigned getAsOpaqueValue() const { |
259 | return Mask; |
260 | } |
261 | |
262 | bool hasConst() const { return Mask & Const; } |
263 | bool hasOnlyConst() const { return Mask == Const; } |
264 | void removeConst() { Mask &= ~Const; } |
265 | void addConst() { Mask |= Const; } |
266 | |
267 | bool hasVolatile() const { return Mask & Volatile; } |
268 | bool hasOnlyVolatile() const { return Mask == Volatile; } |
269 | void removeVolatile() { Mask &= ~Volatile; } |
270 | void addVolatile() { Mask |= Volatile; } |
271 | |
272 | bool hasRestrict() const { return Mask & Restrict; } |
273 | bool hasOnlyRestrict() const { return Mask == Restrict; } |
274 | void removeRestrict() { Mask &= ~Restrict; } |
275 | void addRestrict() { Mask |= Restrict; } |
276 | |
277 | bool hasCVRQualifiers() const { return getCVRQualifiers(); } |
278 | unsigned getCVRQualifiers() const { return Mask & CVRMask; } |
279 | unsigned getCVRUQualifiers() const { return Mask & (CVRMask | UMask); } |
280 | |
281 | void setCVRQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
282 | assert(!(mask & ~CVRMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVR bits")((!(mask & ~CVRMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVR bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~CVRMask) && \"bitmask contains non-CVR bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 282, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
283 | Mask = (Mask & ~CVRMask) | mask; |
284 | } |
285 | void removeCVRQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
286 | assert(!(mask & ~CVRMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVR bits")((!(mask & ~CVRMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVR bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~CVRMask) && \"bitmask contains non-CVR bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 286, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
287 | Mask &= ~mask; |
288 | } |
289 | void removeCVRQualifiers() { |
290 | removeCVRQualifiers(CVRMask); |
291 | } |
292 | void addCVRQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
293 | assert(!(mask & ~CVRMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVR bits")((!(mask & ~CVRMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVR bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~CVRMask) && \"bitmask contains non-CVR bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 293, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
294 | Mask |= mask; |
295 | } |
296 | void addCVRUQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
297 | assert(!(mask & ~CVRMask & ~UMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVRU bits")((!(mask & ~CVRMask & ~UMask) && "bitmask contains non-CVRU bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~CVRMask & ~UMask) && \"bitmask contains non-CVRU bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 297, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
298 | Mask |= mask; |
299 | } |
300 | |
301 | bool hasUnaligned() const { return Mask & UMask; } |
302 | void setUnaligned(bool flag) { |
303 | Mask = (Mask & ~UMask) | (flag ? UMask : 0); |
304 | } |
305 | void removeUnaligned() { Mask &= ~UMask; } |
306 | void addUnaligned() { Mask |= UMask; } |
307 | |
308 | bool hasObjCGCAttr() const { return Mask & GCAttrMask; } |
309 | GC getObjCGCAttr() const { return GC((Mask & GCAttrMask) >> GCAttrShift); } |
310 | void setObjCGCAttr(GC type) { |
311 | Mask = (Mask & ~GCAttrMask) | (type << GCAttrShift); |
312 | } |
313 | void removeObjCGCAttr() { setObjCGCAttr(GCNone); } |
314 | void addObjCGCAttr(GC type) { |
315 | assert(type)((type) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("type" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 315, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
316 | setObjCGCAttr(type); |
317 | } |
318 | Qualifiers withoutObjCGCAttr() const { |
319 | Qualifiers qs = *this; |
320 | qs.removeObjCGCAttr(); |
321 | return qs; |
322 | } |
323 | Qualifiers withoutObjCLifetime() const { |
324 | Qualifiers qs = *this; |
325 | qs.removeObjCLifetime(); |
326 | return qs; |
327 | } |
328 | Qualifiers withoutAddressSpace() const { |
329 | Qualifiers qs = *this; |
330 | qs.removeAddressSpace(); |
331 | return qs; |
332 | } |
333 | |
334 | bool hasObjCLifetime() const { return Mask & LifetimeMask; } |
335 | ObjCLifetime getObjCLifetime() const { |
336 | return ObjCLifetime((Mask & LifetimeMask) >> LifetimeShift); |
337 | } |
338 | void setObjCLifetime(ObjCLifetime type) { |
339 | Mask = (Mask & ~LifetimeMask) | (type << LifetimeShift); |
340 | } |
341 | void removeObjCLifetime() { setObjCLifetime(OCL_None); } |
342 | void addObjCLifetime(ObjCLifetime type) { |
343 | assert(type)((type) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("type" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 343, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
344 | assert(!hasObjCLifetime())((!hasObjCLifetime()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!hasObjCLifetime()", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 344, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
345 | Mask |= (type << LifetimeShift); |
346 | } |
347 | |
348 | /// True if the lifetime is neither None or ExplicitNone. |
349 | bool hasNonTrivialObjCLifetime() const { |
350 | ObjCLifetime lifetime = getObjCLifetime(); |
351 | return (lifetime > OCL_ExplicitNone); |
352 | } |
353 | |
354 | /// True if the lifetime is either strong or weak. |
355 | bool hasStrongOrWeakObjCLifetime() const { |
356 | ObjCLifetime lifetime = getObjCLifetime(); |
357 | return (lifetime == OCL_Strong || lifetime == OCL_Weak); |
358 | } |
359 | |
360 | bool hasAddressSpace() const { return Mask & AddressSpaceMask; } |
361 | LangAS getAddressSpace() const { |
362 | return static_cast<LangAS>(Mask >> AddressSpaceShift); |
363 | } |
364 | bool hasTargetSpecificAddressSpace() const { |
365 | return isTargetAddressSpace(getAddressSpace()); |
366 | } |
367 | /// Get the address space attribute value to be printed by diagnostics. |
368 | unsigned getAddressSpaceAttributePrintValue() const { |
369 | auto Addr = getAddressSpace(); |
370 | // This function is not supposed to be used with language specific |
371 | // address spaces. If that happens, the diagnostic message should consider |
372 | // printing the QualType instead of the address space value. |
373 | assert(Addr == LangAS::Default || hasTargetSpecificAddressSpace())((Addr == LangAS::Default || hasTargetSpecificAddressSpace()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("Addr == LangAS::Default || hasTargetSpecificAddressSpace()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 373, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
374 | if (Addr != LangAS::Default) |
375 | return toTargetAddressSpace(Addr); |
376 | // TODO: The diagnostic messages where Addr may be 0 should be fixed |
377 | // since it cannot differentiate the situation where 0 denotes the default |
378 | // address space or user specified __attribute__((address_space(0))). |
379 | return 0; |
380 | } |
381 | void setAddressSpace(LangAS space) { |
382 | assert((unsigned)space <= MaxAddressSpace)(((unsigned)space <= MaxAddressSpace) ? static_cast<void > (0) : __assert_fail ("(unsigned)space <= MaxAddressSpace" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 382, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
383 | Mask = (Mask & ~AddressSpaceMask) |
384 | | (((uint32_t) space) << AddressSpaceShift); |
385 | } |
386 | void removeAddressSpace() { setAddressSpace(LangAS::Default); } |
387 | void addAddressSpace(LangAS space) { |
388 | assert(space != LangAS::Default)((space != LangAS::Default) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("space != LangAS::Default", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 388, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
389 | setAddressSpace(space); |
390 | } |
391 | |
392 | // Fast qualifiers are those that can be allocated directly |
393 | // on a QualType object. |
394 | bool hasFastQualifiers() const { return getFastQualifiers(); } |
395 | unsigned getFastQualifiers() const { return Mask & FastMask; } |
396 | void setFastQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
397 | assert(!(mask & ~FastMask) && "bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits")((!(mask & ~FastMask) && "bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~FastMask) && \"bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 397, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
398 | Mask = (Mask & ~FastMask) | mask; |
399 | } |
400 | void removeFastQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
401 | assert(!(mask & ~FastMask) && "bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits")((!(mask & ~FastMask) && "bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~FastMask) && \"bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 401, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
402 | Mask &= ~mask; |
403 | } |
404 | void removeFastQualifiers() { |
405 | removeFastQualifiers(FastMask); |
406 | } |
407 | void addFastQualifiers(unsigned mask) { |
408 | assert(!(mask & ~FastMask) && "bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits")((!(mask & ~FastMask) && "bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(mask & ~FastMask) && \"bitmask contains non-fast qualifier bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 408, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
409 | Mask |= mask; |
410 | } |
411 | |
412 | /// Return true if the set contains any qualifiers which require an ExtQuals |
413 | /// node to be allocated. |
414 | bool hasNonFastQualifiers() const { return Mask & ~FastMask; } |
415 | Qualifiers getNonFastQualifiers() const { |
416 | Qualifiers Quals = *this; |
417 | Quals.setFastQualifiers(0); |
418 | return Quals; |
419 | } |
420 | |
421 | /// Return true if the set contains any qualifiers. |
422 | bool hasQualifiers() const { return Mask; } |
423 | bool empty() const { return !Mask; } |
424 | |
425 | /// Add the qualifiers from the given set to this set. |
426 | void addQualifiers(Qualifiers Q) { |
427 | // If the other set doesn't have any non-boolean qualifiers, just |
428 | // bit-or it in. |
429 | if (!(Q.Mask & ~CVRMask)) |
430 | Mask |= Q.Mask; |
431 | else { |
432 | Mask |= (Q.Mask & CVRMask); |
433 | if (Q.hasAddressSpace()) |
434 | addAddressSpace(Q.getAddressSpace()); |
435 | if (Q.hasObjCGCAttr()) |
436 | addObjCGCAttr(Q.getObjCGCAttr()); |
437 | if (Q.hasObjCLifetime()) |
438 | addObjCLifetime(Q.getObjCLifetime()); |
439 | } |
440 | } |
441 | |
442 | /// Remove the qualifiers from the given set from this set. |
443 | void removeQualifiers(Qualifiers Q) { |
444 | // If the other set doesn't have any non-boolean qualifiers, just |
445 | // bit-and the inverse in. |
446 | if (!(Q.Mask & ~CVRMask)) |
447 | Mask &= ~Q.Mask; |
448 | else { |
449 | Mask &= ~(Q.Mask & CVRMask); |
450 | if (getObjCGCAttr() == Q.getObjCGCAttr()) |
451 | removeObjCGCAttr(); |
452 | if (getObjCLifetime() == Q.getObjCLifetime()) |
453 | removeObjCLifetime(); |
454 | if (getAddressSpace() == Q.getAddressSpace()) |
455 | removeAddressSpace(); |
456 | } |
457 | } |
458 | |
459 | /// Add the qualifiers from the given set to this set, given that |
460 | /// they don't conflict. |
461 | void addConsistentQualifiers(Qualifiers qs) { |
462 | assert(getAddressSpace() == qs.getAddressSpace() ||((getAddressSpace() == qs.getAddressSpace() || !hasAddressSpace () || !qs.hasAddressSpace()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getAddressSpace() == qs.getAddressSpace() || !hasAddressSpace() || !qs.hasAddressSpace()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 463, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
463 | !hasAddressSpace() || !qs.hasAddressSpace())((getAddressSpace() == qs.getAddressSpace() || !hasAddressSpace () || !qs.hasAddressSpace()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getAddressSpace() == qs.getAddressSpace() || !hasAddressSpace() || !qs.hasAddressSpace()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 463, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
464 | assert(getObjCGCAttr() == qs.getObjCGCAttr() ||((getObjCGCAttr() == qs.getObjCGCAttr() || !hasObjCGCAttr() || !qs.hasObjCGCAttr()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getObjCGCAttr() == qs.getObjCGCAttr() || !hasObjCGCAttr() || !qs.hasObjCGCAttr()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 465, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
465 | !hasObjCGCAttr() || !qs.hasObjCGCAttr())((getObjCGCAttr() == qs.getObjCGCAttr() || !hasObjCGCAttr() || !qs.hasObjCGCAttr()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getObjCGCAttr() == qs.getObjCGCAttr() || !hasObjCGCAttr() || !qs.hasObjCGCAttr()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 465, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
466 | assert(getObjCLifetime() == qs.getObjCLifetime() ||((getObjCLifetime() == qs.getObjCLifetime() || !hasObjCLifetime () || !qs.hasObjCLifetime()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getObjCLifetime() == qs.getObjCLifetime() || !hasObjCLifetime() || !qs.hasObjCLifetime()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 467, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
467 | !hasObjCLifetime() || !qs.hasObjCLifetime())((getObjCLifetime() == qs.getObjCLifetime() || !hasObjCLifetime () || !qs.hasObjCLifetime()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getObjCLifetime() == qs.getObjCLifetime() || !hasObjCLifetime() || !qs.hasObjCLifetime()" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 467, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
468 | Mask |= qs.Mask; |
469 | } |
470 | |
471 | /// Returns true if address space A is equal to or a superset of B. |
472 | /// OpenCL v2.0 defines conversion rules (OpenCLC v2.0 s6.5.5) and notion of |
473 | /// overlapping address spaces. |
474 | /// CL1.1 or CL1.2: |
475 | /// every address space is a superset of itself. |
476 | /// CL2.0 adds: |
477 | /// __generic is a superset of any address space except for __constant. |
478 | static bool isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(LangAS A, LangAS B) { |
479 | // Address spaces must match exactly. |
480 | return A == B || |
481 | // Otherwise in OpenCLC v2.0 s6.5.5: every address space except |
482 | // for __constant can be used as __generic. |
483 | (A == LangAS::opencl_generic && B != LangAS::opencl_constant) || |
484 | // We also define global_device and global_host address spaces, |
485 | // to distinguish global pointers allocated on host from pointers |
486 | // allocated on device, which are a subset of __global. |
487 | (A == LangAS::opencl_global && (B == LangAS::opencl_global_device || |
488 | B == LangAS::opencl_global_host)) || |
489 | // Consider pointer size address spaces to be equivalent to default. |
490 | ((isPtrSizeAddressSpace(A) || A == LangAS::Default) && |
491 | (isPtrSizeAddressSpace(B) || B == LangAS::Default)); |
492 | } |
493 | |
494 | /// Returns true if the address space in these qualifiers is equal to or |
495 | /// a superset of the address space in the argument qualifiers. |
496 | bool isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(Qualifiers other) const { |
497 | return isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(getAddressSpace(), other.getAddressSpace()); |
498 | } |
499 | |
500 | /// Determines if these qualifiers compatibly include another set. |
501 | /// Generally this answers the question of whether an object with the other |
502 | /// qualifiers can be safely used as an object with these qualifiers. |
503 | bool compatiblyIncludes(Qualifiers other) const { |
504 | return isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(other) && |
505 | // ObjC GC qualifiers can match, be added, or be removed, but can't |
506 | // be changed. |
507 | (getObjCGCAttr() == other.getObjCGCAttr() || !hasObjCGCAttr() || |
508 | !other.hasObjCGCAttr()) && |
509 | // ObjC lifetime qualifiers must match exactly. |
510 | getObjCLifetime() == other.getObjCLifetime() && |
511 | // CVR qualifiers may subset. |
512 | (((Mask & CVRMask) | (other.Mask & CVRMask)) == (Mask & CVRMask)) && |
513 | // U qualifier may superset. |
514 | (!other.hasUnaligned() || hasUnaligned()); |
515 | } |
516 | |
517 | /// Determines if these qualifiers compatibly include another set of |
518 | /// qualifiers from the narrow perspective of Objective-C ARC lifetime. |
519 | /// |
520 | /// One set of Objective-C lifetime qualifiers compatibly includes the other |
521 | /// if the lifetime qualifiers match, or if both are non-__weak and the |
522 | /// including set also contains the 'const' qualifier, or both are non-__weak |
523 | /// and one is None (which can only happen in non-ARC modes). |
524 | bool compatiblyIncludesObjCLifetime(Qualifiers other) const { |
525 | if (getObjCLifetime() == other.getObjCLifetime()) |
526 | return true; |
527 | |
528 | if (getObjCLifetime() == OCL_Weak || other.getObjCLifetime() == OCL_Weak) |
529 | return false; |
530 | |
531 | if (getObjCLifetime() == OCL_None || other.getObjCLifetime() == OCL_None) |
532 | return true; |
533 | |
534 | return hasConst(); |
535 | } |
536 | |
537 | /// Determine whether this set of qualifiers is a strict superset of |
538 | /// another set of qualifiers, not considering qualifier compatibility. |
539 | bool isStrictSupersetOf(Qualifiers Other) const; |
540 | |
541 | bool operator==(Qualifiers Other) const { return Mask == Other.Mask; } |
542 | bool operator!=(Qualifiers Other) const { return Mask != Other.Mask; } |
543 | |
544 | explicit operator bool() const { return hasQualifiers(); } |
545 | |
546 | Qualifiers &operator+=(Qualifiers R) { |
547 | addQualifiers(R); |
548 | return *this; |
549 | } |
550 | |
551 | // Union two qualifier sets. If an enumerated qualifier appears |
552 | // in both sets, use the one from the right. |
553 | friend Qualifiers operator+(Qualifiers L, Qualifiers R) { |
554 | L += R; |
555 | return L; |
556 | } |
557 | |
558 | Qualifiers &operator-=(Qualifiers R) { |
559 | removeQualifiers(R); |
560 | return *this; |
561 | } |
562 | |
563 | /// Compute the difference between two qualifier sets. |
564 | friend Qualifiers operator-(Qualifiers L, Qualifiers R) { |
565 | L -= R; |
566 | return L; |
567 | } |
568 | |
569 | std::string getAsString() const; |
570 | std::string getAsString(const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
571 | |
572 | static std::string getAddrSpaceAsString(LangAS AS); |
573 | |
574 | bool isEmptyWhenPrinted(const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
575 | void print(raw_ostream &OS, const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
576 | bool appendSpaceIfNonEmpty = false) const; |
577 | |
578 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) const { |
579 | ID.AddInteger(Mask); |
580 | } |
581 | |
582 | private: |
583 | // bits: |0 1 2|3|4 .. 5|6 .. 8|9 ... 31| |
584 | // |C R V|U|GCAttr|Lifetime|AddressSpace| |
585 | uint32_t Mask = 0; |
586 | |
587 | static const uint32_t UMask = 0x8; |
588 | static const uint32_t UShift = 3; |
589 | static const uint32_t GCAttrMask = 0x30; |
590 | static const uint32_t GCAttrShift = 4; |
591 | static const uint32_t LifetimeMask = 0x1C0; |
592 | static const uint32_t LifetimeShift = 6; |
593 | static const uint32_t AddressSpaceMask = |
594 | ~(CVRMask | UMask | GCAttrMask | LifetimeMask); |
595 | static const uint32_t AddressSpaceShift = 9; |
596 | }; |
597 | |
598 | /// A std::pair-like structure for storing a qualified type split |
599 | /// into its local qualifiers and its locally-unqualified type. |
600 | struct SplitQualType { |
601 | /// The locally-unqualified type. |
602 | const Type *Ty = nullptr; |
603 | |
604 | /// The local qualifiers. |
605 | Qualifiers Quals; |
606 | |
607 | SplitQualType() = default; |
608 | SplitQualType(const Type *ty, Qualifiers qs) : Ty(ty), Quals(qs) {} |
609 | |
610 | SplitQualType getSingleStepDesugaredType() const; // end of this file |
611 | |
612 | // Make std::tie work. |
613 | std::pair<const Type *,Qualifiers> asPair() const { |
614 | return std::pair<const Type *, Qualifiers>(Ty, Quals); |
615 | } |
616 | |
617 | friend bool operator==(SplitQualType a, SplitQualType b) { |
618 | return a.Ty == b.Ty && a.Quals == b.Quals; |
619 | } |
620 | friend bool operator!=(SplitQualType a, SplitQualType b) { |
621 | return a.Ty != b.Ty || a.Quals != b.Quals; |
622 | } |
623 | }; |
624 | |
625 | /// The kind of type we are substituting Objective-C type arguments into. |
626 | /// |
627 | /// The kind of substitution affects the replacement of type parameters when |
628 | /// no concrete type information is provided, e.g., when dealing with an |
629 | /// unspecialized type. |
630 | enum class ObjCSubstitutionContext { |
631 | /// An ordinary type. |
632 | Ordinary, |
633 | |
634 | /// The result type of a method or function. |
635 | Result, |
636 | |
637 | /// The parameter type of a method or function. |
638 | Parameter, |
639 | |
640 | /// The type of a property. |
641 | Property, |
642 | |
643 | /// The superclass of a type. |
644 | Superclass, |
645 | }; |
646 | |
647 | /// A (possibly-)qualified type. |
648 | /// |
649 | /// For efficiency, we don't store CV-qualified types as nodes on their |
650 | /// own: instead each reference to a type stores the qualifiers. This |
651 | /// greatly reduces the number of nodes we need to allocate for types (for |
652 | /// example we only need one for 'int', 'const int', 'volatile int', |
653 | /// 'const volatile int', etc). |
654 | /// |
655 | /// As an added efficiency bonus, instead of making this a pair, we |
656 | /// just store the two bits we care about in the low bits of the |
657 | /// pointer. To handle the packing/unpacking, we make QualType be a |
658 | /// simple wrapper class that acts like a smart pointer. A third bit |
659 | /// indicates whether there are extended qualifiers present, in which |
660 | /// case the pointer points to a special structure. |
661 | class QualType { |
662 | friend class QualifierCollector; |
663 | |
664 | // Thankfully, these are efficiently composable. |
665 | llvm::PointerIntPair<llvm::PointerUnion<const Type *, const ExtQuals *>, |
666 | Qualifiers::FastWidth> Value; |
667 | |
668 | const ExtQuals *getExtQualsUnsafe() const { |
669 | return Value.getPointer().get<const ExtQuals*>(); |
670 | } |
671 | |
672 | const Type *getTypePtrUnsafe() const { |
673 | return Value.getPointer().get<const Type*>(); |
674 | } |
675 | |
676 | const ExtQualsTypeCommonBase *getCommonPtr() const { |
677 | assert(!isNull() && "Cannot retrieve a NULL type pointer")((!isNull() && "Cannot retrieve a NULL type pointer") ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!isNull() && \"Cannot retrieve a NULL type pointer\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 677, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
678 | auto CommonPtrVal = reinterpret_cast<uintptr_t>(Value.getOpaqueValue()); |
679 | CommonPtrVal &= ~(uintptr_t)((1 << TypeAlignmentInBits) - 1); |
680 | return reinterpret_cast<ExtQualsTypeCommonBase*>(CommonPtrVal); |
681 | } |
682 | |
683 | public: |
684 | QualType() = default; |
685 | QualType(const Type *Ptr, unsigned Quals) : Value(Ptr, Quals) {} |
686 | QualType(const ExtQuals *Ptr, unsigned Quals) : Value(Ptr, Quals) {} |
687 | |
688 | unsigned getLocalFastQualifiers() const { return Value.getInt(); } |
689 | void setLocalFastQualifiers(unsigned Quals) { Value.setInt(Quals); } |
690 | |
691 | /// Retrieves a pointer to the underlying (unqualified) type. |
692 | /// |
693 | /// This function requires that the type not be NULL. If the type might be |
694 | /// NULL, use the (slightly less efficient) \c getTypePtrOrNull(). |
695 | const Type *getTypePtr() const; |
696 | |
697 | const Type *getTypePtrOrNull() const; |
698 | |
699 | /// Retrieves a pointer to the name of the base type. |
700 | const IdentifierInfo *getBaseTypeIdentifier() const; |
701 | |
702 | /// Divides a QualType into its unqualified type and a set of local |
703 | /// qualifiers. |
704 | SplitQualType split() const; |
705 | |
706 | void *getAsOpaquePtr() const { return Value.getOpaqueValue(); } |
707 | |
708 | static QualType getFromOpaquePtr(const void *Ptr) { |
709 | QualType T; |
710 | T.Value.setFromOpaqueValue(const_cast<void*>(Ptr)); |
711 | return T; |
712 | } |
713 | |
714 | const Type &operator*() const { |
715 | return *getTypePtr(); |
716 | } |
717 | |
718 | const Type *operator->() const { |
719 | return getTypePtr(); |
720 | } |
721 | |
722 | bool isCanonical() const; |
723 | bool isCanonicalAsParam() const; |
724 | |
725 | /// Return true if this QualType doesn't point to a type yet. |
726 | bool isNull() const { |
727 | return Value.getPointer().isNull(); |
728 | } |
729 | |
730 | /// Determine whether this particular QualType instance has the |
731 | /// "const" qualifier set, without looking through typedefs that may have |
732 | /// added "const" at a different level. |
733 | bool isLocalConstQualified() const { |
734 | return (getLocalFastQualifiers() & Qualifiers::Const); |
735 | } |
736 | |
737 | /// Determine whether this type is const-qualified. |
738 | bool isConstQualified() const; |
739 | |
740 | /// Determine whether this particular QualType instance has the |
741 | /// "restrict" qualifier set, without looking through typedefs that may have |
742 | /// added "restrict" at a different level. |
743 | bool isLocalRestrictQualified() const { |
744 | return (getLocalFastQualifiers() & Qualifiers::Restrict); |
745 | } |
746 | |
747 | /// Determine whether this type is restrict-qualified. |
748 | bool isRestrictQualified() const; |
749 | |
750 | /// Determine whether this particular QualType instance has the |
751 | /// "volatile" qualifier set, without looking through typedefs that may have |
752 | /// added "volatile" at a different level. |
753 | bool isLocalVolatileQualified() const { |
754 | return (getLocalFastQualifiers() & Qualifiers::Volatile); |
755 | } |
756 | |
757 | /// Determine whether this type is volatile-qualified. |
758 | bool isVolatileQualified() const; |
759 | |
760 | /// Determine whether this particular QualType instance has any |
761 | /// qualifiers, without looking through any typedefs that might add |
762 | /// qualifiers at a different level. |
763 | bool hasLocalQualifiers() const { |
764 | return getLocalFastQualifiers() || hasLocalNonFastQualifiers(); |
765 | } |
766 | |
767 | /// Determine whether this type has any qualifiers. |
768 | bool hasQualifiers() const; |
769 | |
770 | /// Determine whether this particular QualType instance has any |
771 | /// "non-fast" qualifiers, e.g., those that are stored in an ExtQualType |
772 | /// instance. |
773 | bool hasLocalNonFastQualifiers() const { |
774 | return Value.getPointer().is<const ExtQuals*>(); |
775 | } |
776 | |
777 | /// Retrieve the set of qualifiers local to this particular QualType |
778 | /// instance, not including any qualifiers acquired through typedefs or |
779 | /// other sugar. |
780 | Qualifiers getLocalQualifiers() const; |
781 | |
782 | /// Retrieve the set of qualifiers applied to this type. |
783 | Qualifiers getQualifiers() const; |
784 | |
785 | /// Retrieve the set of CVR (const-volatile-restrict) qualifiers |
786 | /// local to this particular QualType instance, not including any qualifiers |
787 | /// acquired through typedefs or other sugar. |
788 | unsigned getLocalCVRQualifiers() const { |
789 | return getLocalFastQualifiers(); |
790 | } |
791 | |
792 | /// Retrieve the set of CVR (const-volatile-restrict) qualifiers |
793 | /// applied to this type. |
794 | unsigned getCVRQualifiers() const; |
795 | |
796 | bool isConstant(const ASTContext& Ctx) const { |
797 | return QualType::isConstant(*this, Ctx); |
798 | } |
799 | |
800 | /// Determine whether this is a Plain Old Data (POD) type (C++ 3.9p10). |
801 | bool isPODType(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
802 | |
803 | /// Return true if this is a POD type according to the rules of the C++98 |
804 | /// standard, regardless of the current compilation's language. |
805 | bool isCXX98PODType(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
806 | |
807 | /// Return true if this is a POD type according to the more relaxed rules |
808 | /// of the C++11 standard, regardless of the current compilation's language. |
809 | /// (C++0x [basic.types]p9). Note that, unlike |
810 | /// CXXRecordDecl::isCXX11StandardLayout, this takes DRs into account. |
811 | bool isCXX11PODType(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
812 | |
813 | /// Return true if this is a trivial type per (C++0x [basic.types]p9) |
814 | bool isTrivialType(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
815 | |
816 | /// Return true if this is a trivially copyable type (C++0x [basic.types]p9) |
817 | bool isTriviallyCopyableType(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
818 | |
819 | |
820 | /// Returns true if it is a class and it might be dynamic. |
821 | bool mayBeDynamicClass() const; |
822 | |
823 | /// Returns true if it is not a class or if the class might not be dynamic. |
824 | bool mayBeNotDynamicClass() const; |
825 | |
826 | // Don't promise in the API that anything besides 'const' can be |
827 | // easily added. |
828 | |
829 | /// Add the `const` type qualifier to this QualType. |
830 | void addConst() { |
831 | addFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Const); |
832 | } |
833 | QualType withConst() const { |
834 | return withFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Const); |
835 | } |
836 | |
837 | /// Add the `volatile` type qualifier to this QualType. |
838 | void addVolatile() { |
839 | addFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Volatile); |
840 | } |
841 | QualType withVolatile() const { |
842 | return withFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Volatile); |
843 | } |
844 | |
845 | /// Add the `restrict` qualifier to this QualType. |
846 | void addRestrict() { |
847 | addFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Restrict); |
848 | } |
849 | QualType withRestrict() const { |
850 | return withFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Restrict); |
851 | } |
852 | |
853 | QualType withCVRQualifiers(unsigned CVR) const { |
854 | return withFastQualifiers(CVR); |
855 | } |
856 | |
857 | void addFastQualifiers(unsigned TQs) { |
858 | assert(!(TQs & ~Qualifiers::FastMask)((!(TQs & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && "non-fast qualifier bits set in mask!" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(TQs & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && \"non-fast qualifier bits set in mask!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 859, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
859 | && "non-fast qualifier bits set in mask!")((!(TQs & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && "non-fast qualifier bits set in mask!" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(TQs & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && \"non-fast qualifier bits set in mask!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 859, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
860 | Value.setInt(Value.getInt() | TQs); |
861 | } |
862 | |
863 | void removeLocalConst(); |
864 | void removeLocalVolatile(); |
865 | void removeLocalRestrict(); |
866 | void removeLocalCVRQualifiers(unsigned Mask); |
867 | |
868 | void removeLocalFastQualifiers() { Value.setInt(0); } |
869 | void removeLocalFastQualifiers(unsigned Mask) { |
870 | assert(!(Mask & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && "mask has non-fast qualifiers")((!(Mask & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && "mask has non-fast qualifiers" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(Mask & ~Qualifiers::FastMask) && \"mask has non-fast qualifiers\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 870, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
871 | Value.setInt(Value.getInt() & ~Mask); |
872 | } |
873 | |
874 | // Creates a type with the given qualifiers in addition to any |
875 | // qualifiers already on this type. |
876 | QualType withFastQualifiers(unsigned TQs) const { |
877 | QualType T = *this; |
878 | T.addFastQualifiers(TQs); |
879 | return T; |
880 | } |
881 | |
882 | // Creates a type with exactly the given fast qualifiers, removing |
883 | // any existing fast qualifiers. |
884 | QualType withExactLocalFastQualifiers(unsigned TQs) const { |
885 | return withoutLocalFastQualifiers().withFastQualifiers(TQs); |
886 | } |
887 | |
888 | // Removes fast qualifiers, but leaves any extended qualifiers in place. |
889 | QualType withoutLocalFastQualifiers() const { |
890 | QualType T = *this; |
891 | T.removeLocalFastQualifiers(); |
892 | return T; |
893 | } |
894 | |
895 | QualType getCanonicalType() const; |
896 | |
897 | /// Return this type with all of the instance-specific qualifiers |
898 | /// removed, but without removing any qualifiers that may have been applied |
899 | /// through typedefs. |
900 | QualType getLocalUnqualifiedType() const { return QualType(getTypePtr(), 0); } |
901 | |
902 | /// Retrieve the unqualified variant of the given type, |
903 | /// removing as little sugar as possible. |
904 | /// |
905 | /// This routine looks through various kinds of sugar to find the |
906 | /// least-desugared type that is unqualified. For example, given: |
907 | /// |
908 | /// \code |
909 | /// typedef int Integer; |
910 | /// typedef const Integer CInteger; |
911 | /// typedef CInteger DifferenceType; |
912 | /// \endcode |
913 | /// |
914 | /// Executing \c getUnqualifiedType() on the type \c DifferenceType will |
915 | /// desugar until we hit the type \c Integer, which has no qualifiers on it. |
916 | /// |
917 | /// The resulting type might still be qualified if it's sugar for an array |
918 | /// type. To strip qualifiers even from within a sugared array type, use |
919 | /// ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType. |
920 | inline QualType getUnqualifiedType() const; |
921 | |
922 | /// Retrieve the unqualified variant of the given type, removing as little |
923 | /// sugar as possible. |
924 | /// |
925 | /// Like getUnqualifiedType(), but also returns the set of |
926 | /// qualifiers that were built up. |
927 | /// |
928 | /// The resulting type might still be qualified if it's sugar for an array |
929 | /// type. To strip qualifiers even from within a sugared array type, use |
930 | /// ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType. |
931 | inline SplitQualType getSplitUnqualifiedType() const; |
932 | |
933 | /// Determine whether this type is more qualified than the other |
934 | /// given type, requiring exact equality for non-CVR qualifiers. |
935 | bool isMoreQualifiedThan(QualType Other) const; |
936 | |
937 | /// Determine whether this type is at least as qualified as the other |
938 | /// given type, requiring exact equality for non-CVR qualifiers. |
939 | bool isAtLeastAsQualifiedAs(QualType Other) const; |
940 | |
941 | QualType getNonReferenceType() const; |
942 | |
943 | /// Determine the type of a (typically non-lvalue) expression with the |
944 | /// specified result type. |
945 | /// |
946 | /// This routine should be used for expressions for which the return type is |
947 | /// explicitly specified (e.g., in a cast or call) and isn't necessarily |
948 | /// an lvalue. It removes a top-level reference (since there are no |
949 | /// expressions of reference type) and deletes top-level cvr-qualifiers |
950 | /// from non-class types (in C++) or all types (in C). |
951 | QualType getNonLValueExprType(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
952 | |
953 | /// Remove an outer pack expansion type (if any) from this type. Used as part |
954 | /// of converting the type of a declaration to the type of an expression that |
955 | /// references that expression. It's meaningless for an expression to have a |
956 | /// pack expansion type. |
957 | QualType getNonPackExpansionType() const; |
958 | |
959 | /// Return the specified type with any "sugar" removed from |
960 | /// the type. This takes off typedefs, typeof's etc. If the outer level of |
961 | /// the type is already concrete, it returns it unmodified. This is similar |
962 | /// to getting the canonical type, but it doesn't remove *all* typedefs. For |
963 | /// example, it returns "T*" as "T*", (not as "int*"), because the pointer is |
964 | /// concrete. |
965 | /// |
966 | /// Qualifiers are left in place. |
967 | QualType getDesugaredType(const ASTContext &Context) const { |
968 | return getDesugaredType(*this, Context); |
969 | } |
970 | |
971 | SplitQualType getSplitDesugaredType() const { |
972 | return getSplitDesugaredType(*this); |
973 | } |
974 | |
975 | /// Return the specified type with one level of "sugar" removed from |
976 | /// the type. |
977 | /// |
978 | /// This routine takes off the first typedef, typeof, etc. If the outer level |
979 | /// of the type is already concrete, it returns it unmodified. |
980 | QualType getSingleStepDesugaredType(const ASTContext &Context) const { |
981 | return getSingleStepDesugaredTypeImpl(*this, Context); |
982 | } |
983 | |
984 | /// Returns the specified type after dropping any |
985 | /// outer-level parentheses. |
986 | QualType IgnoreParens() const { |
987 | if (isa<ParenType>(*this)) |
988 | return QualType::IgnoreParens(*this); |
989 | return *this; |
990 | } |
991 | |
992 | /// Indicate whether the specified types and qualifiers are identical. |
993 | friend bool operator==(const QualType &LHS, const QualType &RHS) { |
994 | return LHS.Value == RHS.Value; |
995 | } |
996 | friend bool operator!=(const QualType &LHS, const QualType &RHS) { |
997 | return LHS.Value != RHS.Value; |
998 | } |
999 | friend bool operator<(const QualType &LHS, const QualType &RHS) { |
1000 | return LHS.Value < RHS.Value; |
1001 | } |
1002 | |
1003 | static std::string getAsString(SplitQualType split, |
1004 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy) { |
1005 | return getAsString(split.Ty, split.Quals, Policy); |
1006 | } |
1007 | static std::string getAsString(const Type *ty, Qualifiers qs, |
1008 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy); |
1009 | |
1010 | std::string getAsString() const; |
1011 | std::string getAsString(const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
1012 | |
1013 | void print(raw_ostream &OS, const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
1014 | const Twine &PlaceHolder = Twine(), |
1015 | unsigned Indentation = 0) const; |
1016 | |
1017 | static void print(SplitQualType split, raw_ostream &OS, |
1018 | const PrintingPolicy &policy, const Twine &PlaceHolder, |
1019 | unsigned Indentation = 0) { |
1020 | return print(split.Ty, split.Quals, OS, policy, PlaceHolder, Indentation); |
1021 | } |
1022 | |
1023 | static void print(const Type *ty, Qualifiers qs, |
1024 | raw_ostream &OS, const PrintingPolicy &policy, |
1025 | const Twine &PlaceHolder, |
1026 | unsigned Indentation = 0); |
1027 | |
1028 | void getAsStringInternal(std::string &Str, |
1029 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
1030 | |
1031 | static void getAsStringInternal(SplitQualType split, std::string &out, |
1032 | const PrintingPolicy &policy) { |
1033 | return getAsStringInternal(split.Ty, split.Quals, out, policy); |
1034 | } |
1035 | |
1036 | static void getAsStringInternal(const Type *ty, Qualifiers qs, |
1037 | std::string &out, |
1038 | const PrintingPolicy &policy); |
1039 | |
1040 | class StreamedQualTypeHelper { |
1041 | const QualType &T; |
1042 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy; |
1043 | const Twine &PlaceHolder; |
1044 | unsigned Indentation; |
1045 | |
1046 | public: |
1047 | StreamedQualTypeHelper(const QualType &T, const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
1048 | const Twine &PlaceHolder, unsigned Indentation) |
1049 | : T(T), Policy(Policy), PlaceHolder(PlaceHolder), |
1050 | Indentation(Indentation) {} |
1051 | |
1052 | friend raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, |
1053 | const StreamedQualTypeHelper &SQT) { |
1054 | SQT.T.print(OS, SQT.Policy, SQT.PlaceHolder, SQT.Indentation); |
1055 | return OS; |
1056 | } |
1057 | }; |
1058 | |
1059 | StreamedQualTypeHelper stream(const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
1060 | const Twine &PlaceHolder = Twine(), |
1061 | unsigned Indentation = 0) const { |
1062 | return StreamedQualTypeHelper(*this, Policy, PlaceHolder, Indentation); |
1063 | } |
1064 | |
1065 | void dump(const char *s) const; |
1066 | void dump() const; |
1067 | void dump(llvm::raw_ostream &OS, const ASTContext &Context) const; |
1068 | |
1069 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) const { |
1070 | ID.AddPointer(getAsOpaquePtr()); |
1071 | } |
1072 | |
1073 | /// Check if this type has any address space qualifier. |
1074 | inline bool hasAddressSpace() const; |
1075 | |
1076 | /// Return the address space of this type. |
1077 | inline LangAS getAddressSpace() const; |
1078 | |
1079 | /// Returns true if address space qualifiers overlap with T address space |
1080 | /// qualifiers. |
1081 | /// OpenCL C defines conversion rules for pointers to different address spaces |
1082 | /// and notion of overlapping address spaces. |
1083 | /// CL1.1 or CL1.2: |
1084 | /// address spaces overlap iff they are they same. |
1085 | /// OpenCL C v2.0 s6.5.5 adds: |
1086 | /// __generic overlaps with any address space except for __constant. |
1087 | bool isAddressSpaceOverlapping(QualType T) const { |
1088 | Qualifiers Q = getQualifiers(); |
1089 | Qualifiers TQ = T.getQualifiers(); |
1090 | // Address spaces overlap if at least one of them is a superset of another |
1091 | return Q.isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(TQ) || TQ.isAddressSpaceSupersetOf(Q); |
1092 | } |
1093 | |
1094 | /// Returns gc attribute of this type. |
1095 | inline Qualifiers::GC getObjCGCAttr() const; |
1096 | |
1097 | /// true when Type is objc's weak. |
1098 | bool isObjCGCWeak() const { |
1099 | return getObjCGCAttr() == Qualifiers::Weak; |
1100 | } |
1101 | |
1102 | /// true when Type is objc's strong. |
1103 | bool isObjCGCStrong() const { |
1104 | return getObjCGCAttr() == Qualifiers::Strong; |
1105 | } |
1106 | |
1107 | /// Returns lifetime attribute of this type. |
1108 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime getObjCLifetime() const { |
1109 | return getQualifiers().getObjCLifetime(); |
1110 | } |
1111 | |
1112 | bool hasNonTrivialObjCLifetime() const { |
1113 | return getQualifiers().hasNonTrivialObjCLifetime(); |
1114 | } |
1115 | |
1116 | bool hasStrongOrWeakObjCLifetime() const { |
1117 | return getQualifiers().hasStrongOrWeakObjCLifetime(); |
1118 | } |
1119 | |
1120 | // true when Type is objc's weak and weak is enabled but ARC isn't. |
1121 | bool isNonWeakInMRRWithObjCWeak(const ASTContext &Context) const; |
1122 | |
1123 | enum PrimitiveDefaultInitializeKind { |
1124 | /// The type does not fall into any of the following categories. Note that |
1125 | /// this case is zero-valued so that values of this enum can be used as a |
1126 | /// boolean condition for non-triviality. |
1127 | PDIK_Trivial, |
1128 | |
1129 | /// The type is an Objective-C retainable pointer type that is qualified |
1130 | /// with the ARC __strong qualifier. |
1131 | PDIK_ARCStrong, |
1132 | |
1133 | /// The type is an Objective-C retainable pointer type that is qualified |
1134 | /// with the ARC __weak qualifier. |
1135 | PDIK_ARCWeak, |
1136 | |
1137 | /// The type is a struct containing a field whose type is not PCK_Trivial. |
1138 | PDIK_Struct |
1139 | }; |
1140 | |
1141 | /// Functions to query basic properties of non-trivial C struct types. |
1142 | |
1143 | /// Check if this is a non-trivial type that would cause a C struct |
1144 | /// transitively containing this type to be non-trivial to default initialize |
1145 | /// and return the kind. |
1146 | PrimitiveDefaultInitializeKind |
1147 | isNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitialize() const; |
1148 | |
1149 | enum PrimitiveCopyKind { |
1150 | /// The type does not fall into any of the following categories. Note that |
1151 | /// this case is zero-valued so that values of this enum can be used as a |
1152 | /// boolean condition for non-triviality. |
1153 | PCK_Trivial, |
1154 | |
1155 | /// The type would be trivial except that it is volatile-qualified. Types |
1156 | /// that fall into one of the other non-trivial cases may additionally be |
1157 | /// volatile-qualified. |
1158 | PCK_VolatileTrivial, |
1159 | |
1160 | /// The type is an Objective-C retainable pointer type that is qualified |
1161 | /// with the ARC __strong qualifier. |
1162 | PCK_ARCStrong, |
1163 | |
1164 | /// The type is an Objective-C retainable pointer type that is qualified |
1165 | /// with the ARC __weak qualifier. |
1166 | PCK_ARCWeak, |
1167 | |
1168 | /// The type is a struct containing a field whose type is neither |
1169 | /// PCK_Trivial nor PCK_VolatileTrivial. |
1170 | /// Note that a C++ struct type does not necessarily match this; C++ copying |
1171 | /// semantics are too complex to express here, in part because they depend |
1172 | /// on the exact constructor or assignment operator that is chosen by |
1173 | /// overload resolution to do the copy. |
1174 | PCK_Struct |
1175 | }; |
1176 | |
1177 | /// Check if this is a non-trivial type that would cause a C struct |
1178 | /// transitively containing this type to be non-trivial to copy and return the |
1179 | /// kind. |
1180 | PrimitiveCopyKind isNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy() const; |
1181 | |
1182 | /// Check if this is a non-trivial type that would cause a C struct |
1183 | /// transitively containing this type to be non-trivial to destructively |
1184 | /// move and return the kind. Destructive move in this context is a C++-style |
1185 | /// move in which the source object is placed in a valid but unspecified state |
1186 | /// after it is moved, as opposed to a truly destructive move in which the |
1187 | /// source object is placed in an uninitialized state. |
1188 | PrimitiveCopyKind isNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructiveMove() const; |
1189 | |
1190 | enum DestructionKind { |
1191 | DK_none, |
1192 | DK_cxx_destructor, |
1193 | DK_objc_strong_lifetime, |
1194 | DK_objc_weak_lifetime, |
1195 | DK_nontrivial_c_struct |
1196 | }; |
1197 | |
1198 | /// Returns a nonzero value if objects of this type require |
1199 | /// non-trivial work to clean up after. Non-zero because it's |
1200 | /// conceivable that qualifiers (objc_gc(weak)?) could make |
1201 | /// something require destruction. |
1202 | DestructionKind isDestructedType() const { |
1203 | return isDestructedTypeImpl(*this); |
1204 | } |
1205 | |
1206 | /// Check if this is or contains a C union that is non-trivial to |
1207 | /// default-initialize, which is a union that has a member that is non-trivial |
1208 | /// to default-initialize. If this returns true, |
1209 | /// isNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitialize returns PDIK_Struct. |
1210 | bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion() const; |
1211 | |
1212 | /// Check if this is or contains a C union that is non-trivial to destruct, |
1213 | /// which is a union that has a member that is non-trivial to destruct. If |
1214 | /// this returns true, isDestructedType returns DK_nontrivial_c_struct. |
1215 | bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion() const; |
1216 | |
1217 | /// Check if this is or contains a C union that is non-trivial to copy, which |
1218 | /// is a union that has a member that is non-trivial to copy. If this returns |
1219 | /// true, isNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopy returns PCK_Struct. |
1220 | bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion() const; |
1221 | |
1222 | /// Determine whether expressions of the given type are forbidden |
1223 | /// from being lvalues in C. |
1224 | /// |
1225 | /// The expression types that are forbidden to be lvalues are: |
1226 | /// - 'void', but not qualified void |
1227 | /// - function types |
1228 | /// |
1229 | /// The exact rule here is C99 6.3.2.1: |
1230 | /// An lvalue is an expression with an object type or an incomplete |
1231 | /// type other than void. |
1232 | bool isCForbiddenLValueType() const; |
1233 | |
1234 | /// Substitute type arguments for the Objective-C type parameters used in the |
1235 | /// subject type. |
1236 | /// |
1237 | /// \param ctx ASTContext in which the type exists. |
1238 | /// |
1239 | /// \param typeArgs The type arguments that will be substituted for the |
1240 | /// Objective-C type parameters in the subject type, which are generally |
1241 | /// computed via \c Type::getObjCSubstitutions. If empty, the type |
1242 | /// parameters will be replaced with their bounds or id/Class, as appropriate |
1243 | /// for the context. |
1244 | /// |
1245 | /// \param context The context in which the subject type was written. |
1246 | /// |
1247 | /// \returns the resulting type. |
1248 | QualType substObjCTypeArgs(ASTContext &ctx, |
1249 | ArrayRef<QualType> typeArgs, |
1250 | ObjCSubstitutionContext context) const; |
1251 | |
1252 | /// Substitute type arguments from an object type for the Objective-C type |
1253 | /// parameters used in the subject type. |
1254 | /// |
1255 | /// This operation combines the computation of type arguments for |
1256 | /// substitution (\c Type::getObjCSubstitutions) with the actual process of |
1257 | /// substitution (\c QualType::substObjCTypeArgs) for the convenience of |
1258 | /// callers that need to perform a single substitution in isolation. |
1259 | /// |
1260 | /// \param objectType The type of the object whose member type we're |
1261 | /// substituting into. For example, this might be the receiver of a message |
1262 | /// or the base of a property access. |
1263 | /// |
1264 | /// \param dc The declaration context from which the subject type was |
1265 | /// retrieved, which indicates (for example) which type parameters should |
1266 | /// be substituted. |
1267 | /// |
1268 | /// \param context The context in which the subject type was written. |
1269 | /// |
1270 | /// \returns the subject type after replacing all of the Objective-C type |
1271 | /// parameters with their corresponding arguments. |
1272 | QualType substObjCMemberType(QualType objectType, |
1273 | const DeclContext *dc, |
1274 | ObjCSubstitutionContext context) const; |
1275 | |
1276 | /// Strip Objective-C "__kindof" types from the given type. |
1277 | QualType stripObjCKindOfType(const ASTContext &ctx) const; |
1278 | |
1279 | /// Remove all qualifiers including _Atomic. |
1280 | QualType getAtomicUnqualifiedType() const; |
1281 | |
1282 | private: |
1283 | // These methods are implemented in a separate translation unit; |
1284 | // "static"-ize them to avoid creating temporary QualTypes in the |
1285 | // caller. |
1286 | static bool isConstant(QualType T, const ASTContext& Ctx); |
1287 | static QualType getDesugaredType(QualType T, const ASTContext &Context); |
1288 | static SplitQualType getSplitDesugaredType(QualType T); |
1289 | static SplitQualType getSplitUnqualifiedTypeImpl(QualType type); |
1290 | static QualType getSingleStepDesugaredTypeImpl(QualType type, |
1291 | const ASTContext &C); |
1292 | static QualType IgnoreParens(QualType T); |
1293 | static DestructionKind isDestructedTypeImpl(QualType type); |
1294 | |
1295 | /// Check if \param RD is or contains a non-trivial C union. |
1296 | static bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion(const RecordDecl *RD); |
1297 | static bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion(const RecordDecl *RD); |
1298 | static bool hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion(const RecordDecl *RD); |
1299 | }; |
1300 | |
1301 | } // namespace clang |
1302 | |
1303 | namespace llvm { |
1304 | |
1305 | /// Implement simplify_type for QualType, so that we can dyn_cast from QualType |
1306 | /// to a specific Type class. |
1307 | template<> struct simplify_type< ::clang::QualType> { |
1308 | using SimpleType = const ::clang::Type *; |
1309 | |
1310 | static SimpleType getSimplifiedValue(::clang::QualType Val) { |
1311 | return Val.getTypePtr(); |
1312 | } |
1313 | }; |
1314 | |
1315 | // Teach SmallPtrSet that QualType is "basically a pointer". |
1316 | template<> |
1317 | struct PointerLikeTypeTraits<clang::QualType> { |
1318 | static inline void *getAsVoidPointer(clang::QualType P) { |
1319 | return P.getAsOpaquePtr(); |
1320 | } |
1321 | |
1322 | static inline clang::QualType getFromVoidPointer(void *P) { |
1323 | return clang::QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(P); |
1324 | } |
1325 | |
1326 | // Various qualifiers go in low bits. |
1327 | static constexpr int NumLowBitsAvailable = 0; |
1328 | }; |
1329 | |
1330 | } // namespace llvm |
1331 | |
1332 | namespace clang { |
1333 | |
1334 | /// Base class that is common to both the \c ExtQuals and \c Type |
1335 | /// classes, which allows \c QualType to access the common fields between the |
1336 | /// two. |
1337 | class ExtQualsTypeCommonBase { |
1338 | friend class ExtQuals; |
1339 | friend class QualType; |
1340 | friend class Type; |
1341 | |
1342 | /// The "base" type of an extended qualifiers type (\c ExtQuals) or |
1343 | /// a self-referential pointer (for \c Type). |
1344 | /// |
1345 | /// This pointer allows an efficient mapping from a QualType to its |
1346 | /// underlying type pointer. |
1347 | const Type *const BaseType; |
1348 | |
1349 | /// The canonical type of this type. A QualType. |
1350 | QualType CanonicalType; |
1351 | |
1352 | ExtQualsTypeCommonBase(const Type *baseType, QualType canon) |
1353 | : BaseType(baseType), CanonicalType(canon) {} |
1354 | }; |
1355 | |
1356 | /// We can encode up to four bits in the low bits of a |
1357 | /// type pointer, but there are many more type qualifiers that we want |
1358 | /// to be able to apply to an arbitrary type. Therefore we have this |
1359 | /// struct, intended to be heap-allocated and used by QualType to |
1360 | /// store qualifiers. |
1361 | /// |
1362 | /// The current design tags the 'const', 'restrict', and 'volatile' qualifiers |
1363 | /// in three low bits on the QualType pointer; a fourth bit records whether |
1364 | /// the pointer is an ExtQuals node. The extended qualifiers (address spaces, |
1365 | /// Objective-C GC attributes) are much more rare. |
1366 | class ExtQuals : public ExtQualsTypeCommonBase, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
1367 | // NOTE: changing the fast qualifiers should be straightforward as |
1368 | // long as you don't make 'const' non-fast. |
1369 | // 1. Qualifiers: |
1370 | // a) Modify the bitmasks (Qualifiers::TQ and DeclSpec::TQ). |
1371 | // Fast qualifiers must occupy the low-order bits. |
1372 | // b) Update Qualifiers::FastWidth and FastMask. |
1373 | // 2. QualType: |
1374 | // a) Update is{Volatile,Restrict}Qualified(), defined inline. |
1375 | // b) Update remove{Volatile,Restrict}, defined near the end of |
1376 | // this header. |
1377 | // 3. ASTContext: |
1378 | // a) Update get{Volatile,Restrict}Type. |
1379 | |
1380 | /// The immutable set of qualifiers applied by this node. Always contains |
1381 | /// extended qualifiers. |
1382 | Qualifiers Quals; |
1383 | |
1384 | ExtQuals *this_() { return this; } |
1385 | |
1386 | public: |
1387 | ExtQuals(const Type *baseType, QualType canon, Qualifiers quals) |
1388 | : ExtQualsTypeCommonBase(baseType, |
1389 | canon.isNull() ? QualType(this_(), 0) : canon), |
1390 | Quals(quals) { |
1391 | assert(Quals.hasNonFastQualifiers()((Quals.hasNonFastQualifiers() && "ExtQuals created with no fast qualifiers" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("Quals.hasNonFastQualifiers() && \"ExtQuals created with no fast qualifiers\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1392, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
1392 | && "ExtQuals created with no fast qualifiers")((Quals.hasNonFastQualifiers() && "ExtQuals created with no fast qualifiers" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("Quals.hasNonFastQualifiers() && \"ExtQuals created with no fast qualifiers\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1392, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
1393 | assert(!Quals.hasFastQualifiers()((!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && "ExtQuals created with fast qualifiers" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && \"ExtQuals created with fast qualifiers\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1394, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
1394 | && "ExtQuals created with fast qualifiers")((!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && "ExtQuals created with fast qualifiers" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && \"ExtQuals created with fast qualifiers\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1394, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
1395 | } |
1396 | |
1397 | Qualifiers getQualifiers() const { return Quals; } |
1398 | |
1399 | bool hasObjCGCAttr() const { return Quals.hasObjCGCAttr(); } |
1400 | Qualifiers::GC getObjCGCAttr() const { return Quals.getObjCGCAttr(); } |
1401 | |
1402 | bool hasObjCLifetime() const { return Quals.hasObjCLifetime(); } |
1403 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime getObjCLifetime() const { |
1404 | return Quals.getObjCLifetime(); |
1405 | } |
1406 | |
1407 | bool hasAddressSpace() const { return Quals.hasAddressSpace(); } |
1408 | LangAS getAddressSpace() const { return Quals.getAddressSpace(); } |
1409 | |
1410 | const Type *getBaseType() const { return BaseType; } |
1411 | |
1412 | public: |
1413 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) const { |
1414 | Profile(ID, getBaseType(), Quals); |
1415 | } |
1416 | |
1417 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
1418 | const Type *BaseType, |
1419 | Qualifiers Quals) { |
1420 | assert(!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && "fast qualifiers in ExtQuals hash!")((!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && "fast qualifiers in ExtQuals hash!" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!Quals.hasFastQualifiers() && \"fast qualifiers in ExtQuals hash!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1420, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
1421 | ID.AddPointer(BaseType); |
1422 | Quals.Profile(ID); |
1423 | } |
1424 | }; |
1425 | |
1426 | /// The kind of C++11 ref-qualifier associated with a function type. |
1427 | /// This determines whether a member function's "this" object can be an |
1428 | /// lvalue, rvalue, or neither. |
1429 | enum RefQualifierKind { |
1430 | /// No ref-qualifier was provided. |
1431 | RQ_None = 0, |
1432 | |
1433 | /// An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). |
1434 | RQ_LValue, |
1435 | |
1436 | /// An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). |
1437 | RQ_RValue |
1438 | }; |
1439 | |
1440 | /// Which keyword(s) were used to create an AutoType. |
1441 | enum class AutoTypeKeyword { |
1442 | /// auto |
1443 | Auto, |
1444 | |
1445 | /// decltype(auto) |
1446 | DecltypeAuto, |
1447 | |
1448 | /// __auto_type (GNU extension) |
1449 | GNUAutoType |
1450 | }; |
1451 | |
1452 | /// The base class of the type hierarchy. |
1453 | /// |
1454 | /// A central concept with types is that each type always has a canonical |
1455 | /// type. A canonical type is the type with any typedef names stripped out |
1456 | /// of it or the types it references. For example, consider: |
1457 | /// |
1458 | /// typedef int foo; |
1459 | /// typedef foo* bar; |
1460 | /// 'int *' 'foo *' 'bar' |
1461 | /// |
1462 | /// There will be a Type object created for 'int'. Since int is canonical, its |
1463 | /// CanonicalType pointer points to itself. There is also a Type for 'foo' (a |
1464 | /// TypedefType). Its CanonicalType pointer points to the 'int' Type. Next |
1465 | /// there is a PointerType that represents 'int*', which, like 'int', is |
1466 | /// canonical. Finally, there is a PointerType type for 'foo*' whose canonical |
1467 | /// type is 'int*', and there is a TypedefType for 'bar', whose canonical type |
1468 | /// is also 'int*'. |
1469 | /// |
1470 | /// Non-canonical types are useful for emitting diagnostics, without losing |
1471 | /// information about typedefs being used. Canonical types are useful for type |
1472 | /// comparisons (they allow by-pointer equality tests) and useful for reasoning |
1473 | /// about whether something has a particular form (e.g. is a function type), |
1474 | /// because they implicitly, recursively, strip all typedefs out of a type. |
1475 | /// |
1476 | /// Types, once created, are immutable. |
1477 | /// |
1478 | class alignas(8) Type : public ExtQualsTypeCommonBase { |
1479 | public: |
1480 | enum TypeClass { |
1481 | #define TYPE(Class, Base) Class, |
1482 | #define LAST_TYPE(Class) TypeLast = Class |
1483 | #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) |
1484 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.inc" |
1485 | }; |
1486 | |
1487 | private: |
1488 | /// Bitfields required by the Type class. |
1489 | class TypeBitfields { |
1490 | friend class Type; |
1491 | template <class T> friend class TypePropertyCache; |
1492 | |
1493 | /// TypeClass bitfield - Enum that specifies what subclass this belongs to. |
1494 | unsigned TC : 8; |
1495 | |
1496 | /// Store information on the type dependency. |
1497 | unsigned Dependence : llvm::BitWidth<TypeDependence>; |
1498 | |
1499 | /// True if the cache (i.e. the bitfields here starting with |
1500 | /// 'Cache') is valid. |
1501 | mutable unsigned CacheValid : 1; |
1502 | |
1503 | /// Linkage of this type. |
1504 | mutable unsigned CachedLinkage : 3; |
1505 | |
1506 | /// Whether this type involves and local or unnamed types. |
1507 | mutable unsigned CachedLocalOrUnnamed : 1; |
1508 | |
1509 | /// Whether this type comes from an AST file. |
1510 | mutable unsigned FromAST : 1; |
1511 | |
1512 | bool isCacheValid() const { |
1513 | return CacheValid; |
1514 | } |
1515 | |
1516 | Linkage getLinkage() const { |
1517 | assert(isCacheValid() && "getting linkage from invalid cache")((isCacheValid() && "getting linkage from invalid cache" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isCacheValid() && \"getting linkage from invalid cache\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1517, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
1518 | return static_cast<Linkage>(CachedLinkage); |
1519 | } |
1520 | |
1521 | bool hasLocalOrUnnamedType() const { |
1522 | assert(isCacheValid() && "getting linkage from invalid cache")((isCacheValid() && "getting linkage from invalid cache" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isCacheValid() && \"getting linkage from invalid cache\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 1522, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
1523 | return CachedLocalOrUnnamed; |
1524 | } |
1525 | }; |
1526 | enum { NumTypeBits = 8 + llvm::BitWidth<TypeDependence> + 6 }; |
1527 | |
1528 | protected: |
1529 | // These classes allow subclasses to somewhat cleanly pack bitfields |
1530 | // into Type. |
1531 | |
1532 | class ArrayTypeBitfields { |
1533 | friend class ArrayType; |
1534 | |
1535 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1536 | |
1537 | /// CVR qualifiers from declarations like |
1538 | /// 'int X[static restrict 4]'. For function parameters only. |
1539 | unsigned IndexTypeQuals : 3; |
1540 | |
1541 | /// Storage class qualifiers from declarations like |
1542 | /// 'int X[static restrict 4]'. For function parameters only. |
1543 | /// Actually an ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier. |
1544 | unsigned SizeModifier : 3; |
1545 | }; |
1546 | |
1547 | class ConstantArrayTypeBitfields { |
1548 | friend class ConstantArrayType; |
1549 | |
1550 | unsigned : NumTypeBits + 3 + 3; |
1551 | |
1552 | /// Whether we have a stored size expression. |
1553 | unsigned HasStoredSizeExpr : 1; |
1554 | }; |
1555 | |
1556 | class BuiltinTypeBitfields { |
1557 | friend class BuiltinType; |
1558 | |
1559 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1560 | |
1561 | /// The kind (BuiltinType::Kind) of builtin type this is. |
1562 | unsigned Kind : 8; |
1563 | }; |
1564 | |
1565 | /// FunctionTypeBitfields store various bits belonging to FunctionProtoType. |
1566 | /// Only common bits are stored here. Additional uncommon bits are stored |
1567 | /// in a trailing object after FunctionProtoType. |
1568 | class FunctionTypeBitfields { |
1569 | friend class FunctionProtoType; |
1570 | friend class FunctionType; |
1571 | |
1572 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1573 | |
1574 | /// Extra information which affects how the function is called, like |
1575 | /// regparm and the calling convention. |
1576 | unsigned ExtInfo : 13; |
1577 | |
1578 | /// The ref-qualifier associated with a \c FunctionProtoType. |
1579 | /// |
1580 | /// This is a value of type \c RefQualifierKind. |
1581 | unsigned RefQualifier : 2; |
1582 | |
1583 | /// Used only by FunctionProtoType, put here to pack with the |
1584 | /// other bitfields. |
1585 | /// The qualifiers are part of FunctionProtoType because... |
1586 | /// |
1587 | /// C++ 8.3.5p4: The return type, the parameter type list and the |
1588 | /// cv-qualifier-seq, [...], are part of the function type. |
1589 | unsigned FastTypeQuals : Qualifiers::FastWidth; |
1590 | /// Whether this function has extended Qualifiers. |
1591 | unsigned HasExtQuals : 1; |
1592 | |
1593 | /// The number of parameters this function has, not counting '...'. |
1594 | /// According to [implimits] 8 bits should be enough here but this is |
1595 | /// somewhat easy to exceed with metaprogramming and so we would like to |
1596 | /// keep NumParams as wide as reasonably possible. |
1597 | unsigned NumParams : 16; |
1598 | |
1599 | /// The type of exception specification this function has. |
1600 | unsigned ExceptionSpecType : 4; |
1601 | |
1602 | /// Whether this function has extended parameter information. |
1603 | unsigned HasExtParameterInfos : 1; |
1604 | |
1605 | /// Whether the function is variadic. |
1606 | unsigned Variadic : 1; |
1607 | |
1608 | /// Whether this function has a trailing return type. |
1609 | unsigned HasTrailingReturn : 1; |
1610 | }; |
1611 | |
1612 | class ObjCObjectTypeBitfields { |
1613 | friend class ObjCObjectType; |
1614 | |
1615 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1616 | |
1617 | /// The number of type arguments stored directly on this object type. |
1618 | unsigned NumTypeArgs : 7; |
1619 | |
1620 | /// The number of protocols stored directly on this object type. |
1621 | unsigned NumProtocols : 6; |
1622 | |
1623 | /// Whether this is a "kindof" type. |
1624 | unsigned IsKindOf : 1; |
1625 | }; |
1626 | |
1627 | class ReferenceTypeBitfields { |
1628 | friend class ReferenceType; |
1629 | |
1630 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1631 | |
1632 | /// True if the type was originally spelled with an lvalue sigil. |
1633 | /// This is never true of rvalue references but can also be false |
1634 | /// on lvalue references because of C++0x [dcl.typedef]p9, |
1635 | /// as follows: |
1636 | /// |
1637 | /// typedef int &ref; // lvalue, spelled lvalue |
1638 | /// typedef int &&rvref; // rvalue |
1639 | /// ref &a; // lvalue, inner ref, spelled lvalue |
1640 | /// ref &&a; // lvalue, inner ref |
1641 | /// rvref &a; // lvalue, inner ref, spelled lvalue |
1642 | /// rvref &&a; // rvalue, inner ref |
1643 | unsigned SpelledAsLValue : 1; |
1644 | |
1645 | /// True if the inner type is a reference type. This only happens |
1646 | /// in non-canonical forms. |
1647 | unsigned InnerRef : 1; |
1648 | }; |
1649 | |
1650 | class TypeWithKeywordBitfields { |
1651 | friend class TypeWithKeyword; |
1652 | |
1653 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1654 | |
1655 | /// An ElaboratedTypeKeyword. 8 bits for efficient access. |
1656 | unsigned Keyword : 8; |
1657 | }; |
1658 | |
1659 | enum { NumTypeWithKeywordBits = 8 }; |
1660 | |
1661 | class ElaboratedTypeBitfields { |
1662 | friend class ElaboratedType; |
1663 | |
1664 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1665 | unsigned : NumTypeWithKeywordBits; |
1666 | |
1667 | /// Whether the ElaboratedType has a trailing OwnedTagDecl. |
1668 | unsigned HasOwnedTagDecl : 1; |
1669 | }; |
1670 | |
1671 | class VectorTypeBitfields { |
1672 | friend class VectorType; |
1673 | friend class DependentVectorType; |
1674 | |
1675 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1676 | |
1677 | /// The kind of vector, either a generic vector type or some |
1678 | /// target-specific vector type such as for AltiVec or Neon. |
1679 | unsigned VecKind : 3; |
1680 | /// The number of elements in the vector. |
1681 | uint32_t NumElements; |
1682 | }; |
1683 | |
1684 | class AttributedTypeBitfields { |
1685 | friend class AttributedType; |
1686 | |
1687 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1688 | |
1689 | /// An AttributedType::Kind |
1690 | unsigned AttrKind : 32 - NumTypeBits; |
1691 | }; |
1692 | |
1693 | class AutoTypeBitfields { |
1694 | friend class AutoType; |
1695 | |
1696 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1697 | |
1698 | /// Was this placeholder type spelled as 'auto', 'decltype(auto)', |
1699 | /// or '__auto_type'? AutoTypeKeyword value. |
1700 | unsigned Keyword : 2; |
1701 | |
1702 | /// The number of template arguments in the type-constraints, which is |
1703 | /// expected to be able to hold at least 1024 according to [implimits]. |
1704 | /// However as this limit is somewhat easy to hit with template |
1705 | /// metaprogramming we'd prefer to keep it as large as possible. |
1706 | /// At the moment it has been left as a non-bitfield since this type |
1707 | /// safely fits in 64 bits as an unsigned, so there is no reason to |
1708 | /// introduce the performance impact of a bitfield. |
1709 | unsigned NumArgs; |
1710 | }; |
1711 | |
1712 | class SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypeBitfields { |
1713 | friend class SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType; |
1714 | |
1715 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1716 | |
1717 | /// The number of template arguments in \c Arguments, which is |
1718 | /// expected to be able to hold at least 1024 according to [implimits]. |
1719 | /// However as this limit is somewhat easy to hit with template |
1720 | /// metaprogramming we'd prefer to keep it as large as possible. |
1721 | /// At the moment it has been left as a non-bitfield since this type |
1722 | /// safely fits in 64 bits as an unsigned, so there is no reason to |
1723 | /// introduce the performance impact of a bitfield. |
1724 | unsigned NumArgs; |
1725 | }; |
1726 | |
1727 | class TemplateSpecializationTypeBitfields { |
1728 | friend class TemplateSpecializationType; |
1729 | |
1730 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1731 | |
1732 | /// Whether this template specialization type is a substituted type alias. |
1733 | unsigned TypeAlias : 1; |
1734 | |
1735 | /// The number of template arguments named in this class template |
1736 | /// specialization, which is expected to be able to hold at least 1024 |
1737 | /// according to [implimits]. However, as this limit is somewhat easy to |
1738 | /// hit with template metaprogramming we'd prefer to keep it as large |
1739 | /// as possible. At the moment it has been left as a non-bitfield since |
1740 | /// this type safely fits in 64 bits as an unsigned, so there is no reason |
1741 | /// to introduce the performance impact of a bitfield. |
1742 | unsigned NumArgs; |
1743 | }; |
1744 | |
1745 | class DependentTemplateSpecializationTypeBitfields { |
1746 | friend class DependentTemplateSpecializationType; |
1747 | |
1748 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1749 | unsigned : NumTypeWithKeywordBits; |
1750 | |
1751 | /// The number of template arguments named in this class template |
1752 | /// specialization, which is expected to be able to hold at least 1024 |
1753 | /// according to [implimits]. However, as this limit is somewhat easy to |
1754 | /// hit with template metaprogramming we'd prefer to keep it as large |
1755 | /// as possible. At the moment it has been left as a non-bitfield since |
1756 | /// this type safely fits in 64 bits as an unsigned, so there is no reason |
1757 | /// to introduce the performance impact of a bitfield. |
1758 | unsigned NumArgs; |
1759 | }; |
1760 | |
1761 | class PackExpansionTypeBitfields { |
1762 | friend class PackExpansionType; |
1763 | |
1764 | unsigned : NumTypeBits; |
1765 | |
1766 | /// The number of expansions that this pack expansion will |
1767 | /// generate when substituted (+1), which is expected to be able to |
1768 | /// hold at least 1024 according to [implimits]. However, as this limit |
1769 | /// is somewhat easy to hit with template metaprogramming we'd prefer to |
1770 | /// keep it as large as possible. At the moment it has been left as a |
1771 | /// non-bitfield since this type safely fits in 64 bits as an unsigned, so |
1772 | /// there is no reason to introduce the performance impact of a bitfield. |
1773 | /// |
1774 | /// This field will only have a non-zero value when some of the parameter |
1775 | /// packs that occur within the pattern have been substituted but others |
1776 | /// have not. |
1777 | unsigned NumExpansions; |
1778 | }; |
1779 | |
1780 | union { |
1781 | TypeBitfields TypeBits; |
1782 | ArrayTypeBitfields ArrayTypeBits; |
1783 | ConstantArrayTypeBitfields ConstantArrayTypeBits; |
1784 | AttributedTypeBitfields AttributedTypeBits; |
1785 | AutoTypeBitfields AutoTypeBits; |
1786 | BuiltinTypeBitfields BuiltinTypeBits; |
1787 | FunctionTypeBitfields FunctionTypeBits; |
1788 | ObjCObjectTypeBitfields ObjCObjectTypeBits; |
1789 | ReferenceTypeBitfields ReferenceTypeBits; |
1790 | TypeWithKeywordBitfields TypeWithKeywordBits; |
1791 | ElaboratedTypeBitfields ElaboratedTypeBits; |
1792 | VectorTypeBitfields VectorTypeBits; |
1793 | SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypeBitfields SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypeBits; |
1794 | TemplateSpecializationTypeBitfields TemplateSpecializationTypeBits; |
1795 | DependentTemplateSpecializationTypeBitfields |
1796 | DependentTemplateSpecializationTypeBits; |
1797 | PackExpansionTypeBitfields PackExpansionTypeBits; |
1798 | }; |
1799 | |
1800 | private: |
1801 | template <class T> friend class TypePropertyCache; |
1802 | |
1803 | /// Set whether this type comes from an AST file. |
1804 | void setFromAST(bool V = true) const { |
1805 | TypeBits.FromAST = V; |
1806 | } |
1807 | |
1808 | protected: |
1809 | friend class ASTContext; |
1810 | |
1811 | Type(TypeClass tc, QualType canon, TypeDependence Dependence) |
1812 | : ExtQualsTypeCommonBase(this, |
1813 | canon.isNull() ? QualType(this_(), 0) : canon) { |
1814 | static_assert(sizeof(*this) <= 8 + sizeof(ExtQualsTypeCommonBase), |
1815 | "changing bitfields changed sizeof(Type)!"); |
1816 | static_assert(alignof(decltype(*this)) % sizeof(void *) == 0, |
1817 | "Insufficient alignment!"); |
1818 | TypeBits.TC = tc; |
1819 | TypeBits.Dependence = static_cast<unsigned>(Dependence); |
1820 | TypeBits.CacheValid = false; |
1821 | TypeBits.CachedLocalOrUnnamed = false; |
1822 | TypeBits.CachedLinkage = NoLinkage; |
1823 | TypeBits.FromAST = false; |
1824 | } |
1825 | |
1826 | // silence VC++ warning C4355: 'this' : used in base member initializer list |
1827 | Type *this_() { return this; } |
1828 | |
1829 | void setDependence(TypeDependence D) { |
1830 | TypeBits.Dependence = static_cast<unsigned>(D); |
1831 | } |
1832 | |
1833 | void addDependence(TypeDependence D) { setDependence(getDependence() | D); } |
1834 | |
1835 | public: |
1836 | friend class ASTReader; |
1837 | friend class ASTWriter; |
1838 | template <class T> friend class serialization::AbstractTypeReader; |
1839 | template <class T> friend class serialization::AbstractTypeWriter; |
1840 | |
1841 | Type(const Type &) = delete; |
1842 | Type(Type &&) = delete; |
1843 | Type &operator=(const Type &) = delete; |
1844 | Type &operator=(Type &&) = delete; |
1845 | |
1846 | TypeClass getTypeClass() const { return static_cast<TypeClass>(TypeBits.TC); } |
1847 | |
1848 | /// Whether this type comes from an AST file. |
1849 | bool isFromAST() const { return TypeBits.FromAST; } |
1850 | |
1851 | /// Whether this type is or contains an unexpanded parameter |
1852 | /// pack, used to support C++0x variadic templates. |
1853 | /// |
1854 | /// A type that contains a parameter pack shall be expanded by the |
1855 | /// ellipsis operator at some point. For example, the typedef in the |
1856 | /// following example contains an unexpanded parameter pack 'T': |
1857 | /// |
1858 | /// \code |
1859 | /// template<typename ...T> |
1860 | /// struct X { |
1861 | /// typedef T* pointer_types; // ill-formed; T is a parameter pack. |
1862 | /// }; |
1863 | /// \endcode |
1864 | /// |
1865 | /// Note that this routine does not specify which |
1866 | bool containsUnexpandedParameterPack() const { |
1867 | return getDependence() & TypeDependence::UnexpandedPack; |
1868 | } |
1869 | |
1870 | /// Determines if this type would be canonical if it had no further |
1871 | /// qualification. |
1872 | bool isCanonicalUnqualified() const { |
1873 | return CanonicalType == QualType(this, 0); |
1874 | } |
1875 | |
1876 | /// Pull a single level of sugar off of this locally-unqualified type. |
1877 | /// Users should generally prefer SplitQualType::getSingleStepDesugaredType() |
1878 | /// or QualType::getSingleStepDesugaredType(const ASTContext&). |
1879 | QualType getLocallyUnqualifiedSingleStepDesugaredType() const; |
1880 | |
1881 | /// As an extension, we classify types as one of "sized" or "sizeless"; |
1882 | /// every type is one or the other. Standard types are all sized; |
1883 | /// sizeless types are purely an extension. |
1884 | /// |
1885 | /// Sizeless types contain data with no specified size, alignment, |
1886 | /// or layout. |
1887 | bool isSizelessType() const; |
1888 | bool isSizelessBuiltinType() const; |
1889 | |
1890 | /// Determines if this is a sizeless type supported by the |
1891 | /// 'arm_sve_vector_bits' type attribute, which can be applied to a single |
1892 | /// SVE vector or predicate, excluding tuple types such as svint32x4_t. |
1893 | bool isVLSTBuiltinType() const; |
1894 | |
1895 | /// Returns the representative type for the element of an SVE builtin type. |
1896 | /// This is used to represent fixed-length SVE vectors created with the |
1897 | /// 'arm_sve_vector_bits' type attribute as VectorType. |
1898 | QualType getSveEltType(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
1899 | |
1900 | /// Types are partitioned into 3 broad categories (C99 6.2.5p1): |
1901 | /// object types, function types, and incomplete types. |
1902 | |
1903 | /// Return true if this is an incomplete type. |
1904 | /// A type that can describe objects, but which lacks information needed to |
1905 | /// determine its size (e.g. void, or a fwd declared struct). Clients of this |
1906 | /// routine will need to determine if the size is actually required. |
1907 | /// |
1908 | /// Def If non-null, and the type refers to some kind of declaration |
1909 | /// that can be completed (such as a C struct, C++ class, or Objective-C |
1910 | /// class), will be set to the declaration. |
1911 | bool isIncompleteType(NamedDecl **Def = nullptr) const; |
1912 | |
1913 | /// Return true if this is an incomplete or object |
1914 | /// type, in other words, not a function type. |
1915 | bool isIncompleteOrObjectType() const { |
1916 | return !isFunctionType(); |
1917 | } |
1918 | |
1919 | /// Determine whether this type is an object type. |
1920 | bool isObjectType() const { |
1921 | // C++ [basic.types]p8: |
1922 | // An object type is a (possibly cv-qualified) type that is not a |
1923 | // function type, not a reference type, and not a void type. |
1924 | return !isReferenceType() && !isFunctionType() && !isVoidType(); |
1925 | } |
1926 | |
1927 | /// Return true if this is a literal type |
1928 | /// (C++11 [basic.types]p10) |
1929 | bool isLiteralType(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
1930 | |
1931 | /// Determine if this type is a structural type, per C++20 [temp.param]p7. |
1932 | bool isStructuralType() const; |
1933 | |
1934 | /// Test if this type is a standard-layout type. |
1935 | /// (C++0x [basic.type]p9) |
1936 | bool isStandardLayoutType() const; |
1937 | |
1938 | /// Helper methods to distinguish type categories. All type predicates |
1939 | /// operate on the canonical type, ignoring typedefs and qualifiers. |
1940 | |
1941 | /// Returns true if the type is a builtin type. |
1942 | bool isBuiltinType() const; |
1943 | |
1944 | /// Test for a particular builtin type. |
1945 | bool isSpecificBuiltinType(unsigned K) const; |
1946 | |
1947 | /// Test for a type which does not represent an actual type-system type but |
1948 | /// is instead used as a placeholder for various convenient purposes within |
1949 | /// Clang. All such types are BuiltinTypes. |
1950 | bool isPlaceholderType() const; |
1951 | const BuiltinType *getAsPlaceholderType() const; |
1952 | |
1953 | /// Test for a specific placeholder type. |
1954 | bool isSpecificPlaceholderType(unsigned K) const; |
1955 | |
1956 | /// Test for a placeholder type other than Overload; see |
1957 | /// BuiltinType::isNonOverloadPlaceholderType. |
1958 | bool isNonOverloadPlaceholderType() const; |
1959 | |
1960 | /// isIntegerType() does *not* include complex integers (a GCC extension). |
1961 | /// isComplexIntegerType() can be used to test for complex integers. |
1962 | bool isIntegerType() const; // C99 6.2.5p17 (int, char, bool, enum) |
1963 | bool isEnumeralType() const; |
1964 | |
1965 | /// Determine whether this type is a scoped enumeration type. |
1966 | bool isScopedEnumeralType() const; |
1967 | bool isBooleanType() const; |
1968 | bool isCharType() const; |
1969 | bool isWideCharType() const; |
1970 | bool isChar8Type() const; |
1971 | bool isChar16Type() const; |
1972 | bool isChar32Type() const; |
1973 | bool isAnyCharacterType() const; |
1974 | bool isIntegralType(const ASTContext &Ctx) const; |
1975 | |
1976 | /// Determine whether this type is an integral or enumeration type. |
1977 | bool isIntegralOrEnumerationType() const; |
1978 | |
1979 | /// Determine whether this type is an integral or unscoped enumeration type. |
1980 | bool isIntegralOrUnscopedEnumerationType() const; |
1981 | bool isUnscopedEnumerationType() const; |
1982 | |
1983 | /// Floating point categories. |
1984 | bool isRealFloatingType() const; // C99 6.2.5p10 (float, double, long double) |
1985 | /// isComplexType() does *not* include complex integers (a GCC extension). |
1986 | /// isComplexIntegerType() can be used to test for complex integers. |
1987 | bool isComplexType() const; // C99 6.2.5p11 (complex) |
1988 | bool isAnyComplexType() const; // C99 6.2.5p11 (complex) + Complex Int. |
1989 | bool isFloatingType() const; // C99 6.2.5p11 (real floating + complex) |
1990 | bool isHalfType() const; // OpenCL 6.1.1.1, NEON (IEEE 754-2008 half) |
1991 | bool isFloat16Type() const; // C11 extension ISO/IEC TS 18661 |
1992 | bool isBFloat16Type() const; |
1993 | bool isFloat128Type() const; |
1994 | bool isRealType() const; // C99 6.2.5p17 (real floating + integer) |
1995 | bool isArithmeticType() const; // C99 6.2.5p18 (integer + floating) |
1996 | bool isVoidType() const; // C99 6.2.5p19 |
1997 | bool isScalarType() const; // C99 6.2.5p21 (arithmetic + pointers) |
1998 | bool isAggregateType() const; |
1999 | bool isFundamentalType() const; |
2000 | bool isCompoundType() const; |
2001 | |
2002 | // Type Predicates: Check to see if this type is structurally the specified |
2003 | // type, ignoring typedefs and qualifiers. |
2004 | bool isFunctionType() const; |
2005 | bool isFunctionNoProtoType() const { return getAs<FunctionNoProtoType>(); } |
2006 | bool isFunctionProtoType() const { return getAs<FunctionProtoType>(); } |
2007 | bool isPointerType() const; |
2008 | bool isAnyPointerType() const; // Any C pointer or ObjC object pointer |
2009 | bool isBlockPointerType() const; |
2010 | bool isVoidPointerType() const; |
2011 | bool isReferenceType() const; |
2012 | bool isLValueReferenceType() const; |
2013 | bool isRValueReferenceType() const; |
2014 | bool isObjectPointerType() const; |
2015 | bool isFunctionPointerType() const; |
2016 | bool isFunctionReferenceType() const; |
2017 | bool isMemberPointerType() const; |
2018 | bool isMemberFunctionPointerType() const; |
2019 | bool isMemberDataPointerType() const; |
2020 | bool isArrayType() const; |
2021 | bool isConstantArrayType() const; |
2022 | bool isIncompleteArrayType() const; |
2023 | bool isVariableArrayType() const; |
2024 | bool isDependentSizedArrayType() const; |
2025 | bool isRecordType() const; |
2026 | bool isClassType() const; |
2027 | bool isStructureType() const; |
2028 | bool isObjCBoxableRecordType() const; |
2029 | bool isInterfaceType() const; |
2030 | bool isStructureOrClassType() const; |
2031 | bool isUnionType() const; |
2032 | bool isComplexIntegerType() const; // GCC _Complex integer type. |
2033 | bool isVectorType() const; // GCC vector type. |
2034 | bool isExtVectorType() const; // Extended vector type. |
2035 | bool isMatrixType() const; // Matrix type. |
2036 | bool isConstantMatrixType() const; // Constant matrix type. |
2037 | bool isDependentAddressSpaceType() const; // value-dependent address space qualifier |
2038 | bool isObjCObjectPointerType() const; // pointer to ObjC object |
2039 | bool isObjCRetainableType() const; // ObjC object or block pointer |
2040 | bool isObjCLifetimeType() const; // (array of)* retainable type |
2041 | bool isObjCIndirectLifetimeType() const; // (pointer to)* lifetime type |
2042 | bool isObjCNSObjectType() const; // __attribute__((NSObject)) |
2043 | bool isObjCIndependentClassType() const; // __attribute__((objc_independent_class)) |
2044 | // FIXME: change this to 'raw' interface type, so we can used 'interface' type |
2045 | // for the common case. |
2046 | bool isObjCObjectType() const; // NSString or typeof(*(id)0) |
2047 | bool isObjCQualifiedInterfaceType() const; // NSString<foo> |
2048 | bool isObjCQualifiedIdType() const; // id<foo> |
2049 | bool isObjCQualifiedClassType() const; // Class<foo> |
2050 | bool isObjCObjectOrInterfaceType() const; |
2051 | bool isObjCIdType() const; // id |
2052 | bool isDecltypeType() const; |
2053 | /// Was this type written with the special inert-in-ARC __unsafe_unretained |
2054 | /// qualifier? |
2055 | /// |
2056 | /// This approximates the answer to the following question: if this |
2057 | /// translation unit were compiled in ARC, would this type be qualified |
2058 | /// with __unsafe_unretained? |
2059 | bool isObjCInertUnsafeUnretainedType() const { |
2060 | return hasAttr(attr::ObjCInertUnsafeUnretained); |
2061 | } |
2062 | |
2063 | /// Whether the type is Objective-C 'id' or a __kindof type of an |
2064 | /// object type, e.g., __kindof NSView * or __kindof id |
2065 | /// <NSCopying>. |
2066 | /// |
2067 | /// \param bound Will be set to the bound on non-id subtype types, |
2068 | /// which will be (possibly specialized) Objective-C class type, or |
2069 | /// null for 'id. |
2070 | bool isObjCIdOrObjectKindOfType(const ASTContext &ctx, |
2071 | const ObjCObjectType *&bound) const; |
2072 | |
2073 | bool isObjCClassType() const; // Class |
2074 | |
2075 | /// Whether the type is Objective-C 'Class' or a __kindof type of an |
2076 | /// Class type, e.g., __kindof Class <NSCopying>. |
2077 | /// |
2078 | /// Unlike \c isObjCIdOrObjectKindOfType, there is no relevant bound |
2079 | /// here because Objective-C's type system cannot express "a class |
2080 | /// object for a subclass of NSFoo". |
2081 | bool isObjCClassOrClassKindOfType() const; |
2082 | |
2083 | bool isBlockCompatibleObjCPointerType(ASTContext &ctx) const; |
2084 | bool isObjCSelType() const; // Class |
2085 | bool isObjCBuiltinType() const; // 'id' or 'Class' |
2086 | bool isObjCARCBridgableType() const; |
2087 | bool isCARCBridgableType() const; |
2088 | bool isTemplateTypeParmType() const; // C++ template type parameter |
2089 | bool isNullPtrType() const; // C++11 std::nullptr_t |
2090 | bool isNothrowT() const; // C++ std::nothrow_t |
2091 | bool isAlignValT() const; // C++17 std::align_val_t |
2092 | bool isStdByteType() const; // C++17 std::byte |
2093 | bool isAtomicType() const; // C11 _Atomic() |
2094 | bool isUndeducedAutoType() const; // C++11 auto or |
2095 | // C++14 decltype(auto) |
2096 | bool isTypedefNameType() const; // typedef or alias template |
2097 | |
2098 | #define IMAGE_TYPE(ImgType, Id, SingletonId, Access, Suffix) \ |
2099 | bool is##Id##Type() const; |
2100 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLImageTypes.def" |
2101 | |
2102 | bool isImageType() const; // Any OpenCL image type |
2103 | |
2104 | bool isSamplerT() const; // OpenCL sampler_t |
2105 | bool isEventT() const; // OpenCL event_t |
2106 | bool isClkEventT() const; // OpenCL clk_event_t |
2107 | bool isQueueT() const; // OpenCL queue_t |
2108 | bool isReserveIDT() const; // OpenCL reserve_id_t |
2109 | |
2110 | #define EXT_OPAQUE_TYPE(ExtType, Id, Ext) \ |
2111 | bool is##Id##Type() const; |
2112 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLExtensionTypes.def" |
2113 | // Type defined in cl_intel_device_side_avc_motion_estimation OpenCL extension |
2114 | bool isOCLIntelSubgroupAVCType() const; |
2115 | bool isOCLExtOpaqueType() const; // Any OpenCL extension type |
2116 | |
2117 | bool isPipeType() const; // OpenCL pipe type |
2118 | bool isExtIntType() const; // Extended Int Type |
2119 | bool isOpenCLSpecificType() const; // Any OpenCL specific type |
2120 | |
2121 | /// Determines if this type, which must satisfy |
2122 | /// isObjCLifetimeType(), is implicitly __unsafe_unretained rather |
2123 | /// than implicitly __strong. |
2124 | bool isObjCARCImplicitlyUnretainedType() const; |
2125 | |
2126 | /// Check if the type is the CUDA device builtin surface type. |
2127 | bool isCUDADeviceBuiltinSurfaceType() const; |
2128 | /// Check if the type is the CUDA device builtin texture type. |
2129 | bool isCUDADeviceBuiltinTextureType() const; |
2130 | |
2131 | /// Return the implicit lifetime for this type, which must not be dependent. |
2132 | Qualifiers::ObjCLifetime getObjCARCImplicitLifetime() const; |
2133 | |
2134 | enum ScalarTypeKind { |
2135 | STK_CPointer, |
2136 | STK_BlockPointer, |
2137 | STK_ObjCObjectPointer, |
2138 | STK_MemberPointer, |
2139 | STK_Bool, |
2140 | STK_Integral, |
2141 | STK_Floating, |
2142 | STK_IntegralComplex, |
2143 | STK_FloatingComplex, |
2144 | STK_FixedPoint |
2145 | }; |
2146 | |
2147 | /// Given that this is a scalar type, classify it. |
2148 | ScalarTypeKind getScalarTypeKind() const; |
2149 | |
2150 | TypeDependence getDependence() const { |
2151 | return static_cast<TypeDependence>(TypeBits.Dependence); |
2152 | } |
2153 | |
2154 | /// Whether this type is an error type. |
2155 | bool containsErrors() const { |
2156 | return getDependence() & TypeDependence::Error; |
2157 | } |
2158 | |
2159 | /// Whether this type is a dependent type, meaning that its definition |
2160 | /// somehow depends on a template parameter (C++ [temp.dep.type]). |
2161 | bool isDependentType() const { |
2162 | return getDependence() & TypeDependence::Dependent; |
2163 | } |
2164 | |
2165 | /// Determine whether this type is an instantiation-dependent type, |
2166 | /// meaning that the type involves a template parameter (even if the |
2167 | /// definition does not actually depend on the type substituted for that |
2168 | /// template parameter). |
2169 | bool isInstantiationDependentType() const { |
2170 | return getDependence() & TypeDependence::Instantiation; |
2171 | } |
2172 | |
2173 | /// Determine whether this type is an undeduced type, meaning that |
2174 | /// it somehow involves a C++11 'auto' type or similar which has not yet been |
2175 | /// deduced. |
2176 | bool isUndeducedType() const; |
2177 | |
2178 | /// Whether this type is a variably-modified type (C99 6.7.5). |
2179 | bool isVariablyModifiedType() const { |
2180 | return getDependence() & TypeDependence::VariablyModified; |
2181 | } |
2182 | |
2183 | /// Whether this type involves a variable-length array type |
2184 | /// with a definite size. |
2185 | bool hasSizedVLAType() const; |
2186 | |
2187 | /// Whether this type is or contains a local or unnamed type. |
2188 | bool hasUnnamedOrLocalType() const; |
2189 | |
2190 | bool isOverloadableType() const; |
2191 | |
2192 | /// Determine wither this type is a C++ elaborated-type-specifier. |
2193 | bool isElaboratedTypeSpecifier() const; |
2194 | |
2195 | bool canDecayToPointerType() const; |
2196 | |
2197 | /// Whether this type is represented natively as a pointer. This includes |
2198 | /// pointers, references, block pointers, and Objective-C interface, |
2199 | /// qualified id, and qualified interface types, as well as nullptr_t. |
2200 | bool hasPointerRepresentation() const; |
2201 | |
2202 | /// Whether this type can represent an objective pointer type for the |
2203 | /// purpose of GC'ability |
2204 | bool hasObjCPointerRepresentation() const; |
2205 | |
2206 | /// Determine whether this type has an integer representation |
2207 | /// of some sort, e.g., it is an integer type or a vector. |
2208 | bool hasIntegerRepresentation() const; |
2209 | |
2210 | /// Determine whether this type has an signed integer representation |
2211 | /// of some sort, e.g., it is an signed integer type or a vector. |
2212 | bool hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() const; |
2213 | |
2214 | /// Determine whether this type has an unsigned integer representation |
2215 | /// of some sort, e.g., it is an unsigned integer type or a vector. |
2216 | bool hasUnsignedIntegerRepresentation() const; |
2217 | |
2218 | /// Determine whether this type has a floating-point representation |
2219 | /// of some sort, e.g., it is a floating-point type or a vector thereof. |
2220 | bool hasFloatingRepresentation() const; |
2221 | |
2222 | // Type Checking Functions: Check to see if this type is structurally the |
2223 | // specified type, ignoring typedefs and qualifiers, and return a pointer to |
2224 | // the best type we can. |
2225 | const RecordType *getAsStructureType() const; |
2226 | /// NOTE: getAs*ArrayType are methods on ASTContext. |
2227 | const RecordType *getAsUnionType() const; |
2228 | const ComplexType *getAsComplexIntegerType() const; // GCC complex int type. |
2229 | const ObjCObjectType *getAsObjCInterfaceType() const; |
2230 | |
2231 | // The following is a convenience method that returns an ObjCObjectPointerType |
2232 | // for object declared using an interface. |
2233 | const ObjCObjectPointerType *getAsObjCInterfacePointerType() const; |
2234 | const ObjCObjectPointerType *getAsObjCQualifiedIdType() const; |
2235 | const ObjCObjectPointerType *getAsObjCQualifiedClassType() const; |
2236 | const ObjCObjectType *getAsObjCQualifiedInterfaceType() const; |
2237 | |
2238 | /// Retrieves the CXXRecordDecl that this type refers to, either |
2239 | /// because the type is a RecordType or because it is the injected-class-name |
2240 | /// type of a class template or class template partial specialization. |
2241 | CXXRecordDecl *getAsCXXRecordDecl() const; |
2242 | |
2243 | /// Retrieves the RecordDecl this type refers to. |
2244 | RecordDecl *getAsRecordDecl() const; |
2245 | |
2246 | /// Retrieves the TagDecl that this type refers to, either |
2247 | /// because the type is a TagType or because it is the injected-class-name |
2248 | /// type of a class template or class template partial specialization. |
2249 | TagDecl *getAsTagDecl() const; |
2250 | |
2251 | /// If this is a pointer or reference to a RecordType, return the |
2252 | /// CXXRecordDecl that the type refers to. |
2253 | /// |
2254 | /// If this is not a pointer or reference, or the type being pointed to does |
2255 | /// not refer to a CXXRecordDecl, returns NULL. |
2256 | const CXXRecordDecl *getPointeeCXXRecordDecl() const; |
2257 | |
2258 | /// Get the DeducedType whose type will be deduced for a variable with |
2259 | /// an initializer of this type. This looks through declarators like pointer |
2260 | /// types, but not through decltype or typedefs. |
2261 | DeducedType *getContainedDeducedType() const; |
2262 | |
2263 | /// Get the AutoType whose type will be deduced for a variable with |
2264 | /// an initializer of this type. This looks through declarators like pointer |
2265 | /// types, but not through decltype or typedefs. |
2266 | AutoType *getContainedAutoType() const { |
2267 | return dyn_cast_or_null<AutoType>(getContainedDeducedType()); |
2268 | } |
2269 | |
2270 | /// Determine whether this type was written with a leading 'auto' |
2271 | /// corresponding to a trailing return type (possibly for a nested |
2272 | /// function type within a pointer to function type or similar). |
2273 | bool hasAutoForTrailingReturnType() const; |
2274 | |
2275 | /// Member-template getAs<specific type>'. Look through sugar for |
2276 | /// an instance of \<specific type>. This scheme will eventually |
2277 | /// replace the specific getAsXXXX methods above. |
2278 | /// |
2279 | /// There are some specializations of this member template listed |
2280 | /// immediately following this class. |
2281 | template <typename T> const T *getAs() const; |
2282 | |
2283 | /// Member-template getAsAdjusted<specific type>. Look through specific kinds |
2284 | /// of sugar (parens, attributes, etc) for an instance of \<specific type>. |
2285 | /// This is used when you need to walk over sugar nodes that represent some |
2286 | /// kind of type adjustment from a type that was written as a \<specific type> |
2287 | /// to another type that is still canonically a \<specific type>. |
2288 | template <typename T> const T *getAsAdjusted() const; |
2289 | |
2290 | /// A variant of getAs<> for array types which silently discards |
2291 | /// qualifiers from the outermost type. |
2292 | const ArrayType *getAsArrayTypeUnsafe() const; |
2293 | |
2294 | /// Member-template castAs<specific type>. Look through sugar for |
2295 | /// the underlying instance of \<specific type>. |
2296 | /// |
2297 | /// This method has the same relationship to getAs<T> as cast<T> has |
2298 | /// to dyn_cast<T>; which is to say, the underlying type *must* |
2299 | /// have the intended type, and this method will never return null. |
2300 | template <typename T> const T *castAs() const; |
2301 | |
2302 | /// A variant of castAs<> for array type which silently discards |
2303 | /// qualifiers from the outermost type. |
2304 | const ArrayType *castAsArrayTypeUnsafe() const; |
2305 | |
2306 | /// Determine whether this type had the specified attribute applied to it |
2307 | /// (looking through top-level type sugar). |
2308 | bool hasAttr(attr::Kind AK) const; |
2309 | |
2310 | /// Get the base element type of this type, potentially discarding type |
2311 | /// qualifiers. This should never be used when type qualifiers |
2312 | /// are meaningful. |
2313 | const Type *getBaseElementTypeUnsafe() const; |
2314 | |
2315 | /// If this is an array type, return the element type of the array, |
2316 | /// potentially with type qualifiers missing. |
2317 | /// This should never be used when type qualifiers are meaningful. |
2318 | const Type *getArrayElementTypeNoTypeQual() const; |
2319 | |
2320 | /// If this is a pointer type, return the pointee type. |
2321 | /// If this is an array type, return the array element type. |
2322 | /// This should never be used when type qualifiers are meaningful. |
2323 | const Type *getPointeeOrArrayElementType() const; |
2324 | |
2325 | /// If this is a pointer, ObjC object pointer, or block |
2326 | /// pointer, this returns the respective pointee. |
2327 | QualType getPointeeType() const; |
2328 | |
2329 | /// Return the specified type with any "sugar" removed from the type, |
2330 | /// removing any typedefs, typeofs, etc., as well as any qualifiers. |
2331 | const Type *getUnqualifiedDesugaredType() const; |
2332 | |
2333 | /// More type predicates useful for type checking/promotion |
2334 | bool isPromotableIntegerType() const; // C99 6.3.1.1p2 |
2335 | |
2336 | /// Return true if this is an integer type that is |
2337 | /// signed, according to C99 6.2.5p4 [char, signed char, short, int, long..], |
2338 | /// or an enum decl which has a signed representation. |
2339 | bool isSignedIntegerType() const; |
2340 | |
2341 | /// Return true if this is an integer type that is |
2342 | /// unsigned, according to C99 6.2.5p6 [which returns true for _Bool], |
2343 | /// or an enum decl which has an unsigned representation. |
2344 | bool isUnsignedIntegerType() const; |
2345 | |
2346 | /// Determines whether this is an integer type that is signed or an |
2347 | /// enumeration types whose underlying type is a signed integer type. |
2348 | bool isSignedIntegerOrEnumerationType() const; |
2349 | |
2350 | /// Determines whether this is an integer type that is unsigned or an |
2351 | /// enumeration types whose underlying type is a unsigned integer type. |
2352 | bool isUnsignedIntegerOrEnumerationType() const; |
2353 | |
2354 | /// Return true if this is a fixed point type according to |
2355 | /// ISO/IEC JTC1 SC22 WG14 N1169. |
2356 | bool isFixedPointType() const; |
2357 | |
2358 | /// Return true if this is a fixed point or integer type. |
2359 | bool isFixedPointOrIntegerType() const; |
2360 | |
2361 | /// Return true if this is a saturated fixed point type according to |
2362 | /// ISO/IEC JTC1 SC22 WG14 N1169. This type can be signed or unsigned. |
2363 | bool isSaturatedFixedPointType() const; |
2364 | |
2365 | /// Return true if this is a saturated fixed point type according to |
2366 | /// ISO/IEC JTC1 SC22 WG14 N1169. This type can be signed or unsigned. |
2367 | bool isUnsaturatedFixedPointType() const; |
2368 | |
2369 | /// Return true if this is a fixed point type that is signed according |
2370 | /// to ISO/IEC JTC1 SC22 WG14 N1169. This type can also be saturated. |
2371 | bool isSignedFixedPointType() const; |
2372 | |
2373 | /// Return true if this is a fixed point type that is unsigned according |
2374 | /// to ISO/IEC JTC1 SC22 WG14 N1169. This type can also be saturated. |
2375 | bool isUnsignedFixedPointType() const; |
2376 | |
2377 | /// Return true if this is not a variable sized type, |
2378 | /// according to the rules of C99 6.7.5p3. It is not legal to call this on |
2379 | /// incomplete types. |
2380 | bool isConstantSizeType() const; |
2381 | |
2382 | /// Returns true if this type can be represented by some |
2383 | /// set of type specifiers. |
2384 | bool isSpecifierType() const; |
2385 | |
2386 | /// Determine the linkage of this type. |
2387 | Linkage getLinkage() const; |
2388 | |
2389 | /// Determine the visibility of this type. |
2390 | Visibility getVisibility() const { |
2391 | return getLinkageAndVisibility().getVisibility(); |
2392 | } |
2393 | |
2394 | /// Return true if the visibility was explicitly set is the code. |
2395 | bool isVisibilityExplicit() const { |
2396 | return getLinkageAndVisibility().isVisibilityExplicit(); |
2397 | } |
2398 | |
2399 | /// Determine the linkage and visibility of this type. |
2400 | LinkageInfo getLinkageAndVisibility() const; |
2401 | |
2402 | /// True if the computed linkage is valid. Used for consistency |
2403 | /// checking. Should always return true. |
2404 | bool isLinkageValid() const; |
2405 | |
2406 | /// Determine the nullability of the given type. |
2407 | /// |
2408 | /// Note that nullability is only captured as sugar within the type |
2409 | /// system, not as part of the canonical type, so nullability will |
2410 | /// be lost by canonicalization and desugaring. |
2411 | Optional<NullabilityKind> getNullability(const ASTContext &context) const; |
2412 | |
2413 | /// Determine whether the given type can have a nullability |
2414 | /// specifier applied to it, i.e., if it is any kind of pointer type. |
2415 | /// |
2416 | /// \param ResultIfUnknown The value to return if we don't yet know whether |
2417 | /// this type can have nullability because it is dependent. |
2418 | bool canHaveNullability(bool ResultIfUnknown = true) const; |
2419 | |
2420 | /// Retrieve the set of substitutions required when accessing a member |
2421 | /// of the Objective-C receiver type that is declared in the given context. |
2422 | /// |
2423 | /// \c *this is the type of the object we're operating on, e.g., the |
2424 | /// receiver for a message send or the base of a property access, and is |
2425 | /// expected to be of some object or object pointer type. |
2426 | /// |
2427 | /// \param dc The declaration context for which we are building up a |
2428 | /// substitution mapping, which should be an Objective-C class, extension, |
2429 | /// category, or method within. |
2430 | /// |
2431 | /// \returns an array of type arguments that can be substituted for |
2432 | /// the type parameters of the given declaration context in any type described |
2433 | /// within that context, or an empty optional to indicate that no |
2434 | /// substitution is required. |
2435 | Optional<ArrayRef<QualType>> |
2436 | getObjCSubstitutions(const DeclContext *dc) const; |
2437 | |
2438 | /// Determines if this is an ObjC interface type that may accept type |
2439 | /// parameters. |
2440 | bool acceptsObjCTypeParams() const; |
2441 | |
2442 | const char *getTypeClassName() const; |
2443 | |
2444 | QualType getCanonicalTypeInternal() const { |
2445 | return CanonicalType; |
2446 | } |
2447 | |
2448 | CanQualType getCanonicalTypeUnqualified() const; // in CanonicalType.h |
2449 | void dump() const; |
2450 | void dump(llvm::raw_ostream &OS, const ASTContext &Context) const; |
2451 | }; |
2452 | |
2453 | /// This will check for a TypedefType by removing any existing sugar |
2454 | /// until it reaches a TypedefType or a non-sugared type. |
2455 | template <> const TypedefType *Type::getAs() const; |
2456 | |
2457 | /// This will check for a TemplateSpecializationType by removing any |
2458 | /// existing sugar until it reaches a TemplateSpecializationType or a |
2459 | /// non-sugared type. |
2460 | template <> const TemplateSpecializationType *Type::getAs() const; |
2461 | |
2462 | /// This will check for an AttributedType by removing any existing sugar |
2463 | /// until it reaches an AttributedType or a non-sugared type. |
2464 | template <> const AttributedType *Type::getAs() const; |
2465 | |
2466 | // We can do canonical leaf types faster, because we don't have to |
2467 | // worry about preserving child type decoration. |
2468 | #define TYPE(Class, Base) |
2469 | #define LEAF_TYPE(Class) \ |
2470 | template <> inline const Class##Type *Type::getAs() const { \ |
2471 | return dyn_cast<Class##Type>(CanonicalType); \ |
2472 | } \ |
2473 | template <> inline const Class##Type *Type::castAs() const { \ |
2474 | return cast<Class##Type>(CanonicalType); \ |
2475 | } |
2476 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.inc" |
2477 | |
2478 | /// This class is used for builtin types like 'int'. Builtin |
2479 | /// types are always canonical and have a literal name field. |
2480 | class BuiltinType : public Type { |
2481 | public: |
2482 | enum Kind { |
2483 | // OpenCL image types |
2484 | #define IMAGE_TYPE(ImgType, Id, SingletonId, Access, Suffix) Id, |
2485 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLImageTypes.def" |
2486 | // OpenCL extension types |
2487 | #define EXT_OPAQUE_TYPE(ExtType, Id, Ext) Id, |
2488 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLExtensionTypes.def" |
2489 | // SVE Types |
2490 | #define SVE_TYPE(Name, Id, SingletonId) Id, |
2491 | #include "clang/Basic/AArch64SVEACLETypes.def" |
2492 | // PPC MMA Types |
2493 | #define PPC_VECTOR_TYPE(Name, Id, Size) Id, |
2494 | #include "clang/Basic/PPCTypes.def" |
2495 | // RVV Types |
2496 | #define RVV_TYPE(Name, Id, SingletonId) Id, |
2497 | #include "clang/Basic/RISCVVTypes.def" |
2498 | // All other builtin types |
2499 | #define BUILTIN_TYPE(Id, SingletonId) Id, |
2500 | #define LAST_BUILTIN_TYPE(Id) LastKind = Id |
2501 | #include "clang/AST/BuiltinTypes.def" |
2502 | }; |
2503 | |
2504 | private: |
2505 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2506 | |
2507 | BuiltinType(Kind K) |
2508 | : Type(Builtin, QualType(), |
2509 | K == Dependent ? TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation |
2510 | : TypeDependence::None) { |
2511 | BuiltinTypeBits.Kind = K; |
2512 | } |
2513 | |
2514 | public: |
2515 | Kind getKind() const { return static_cast<Kind>(BuiltinTypeBits.Kind); } |
2516 | StringRef getName(const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
2517 | |
2518 | const char *getNameAsCString(const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const { |
2519 | // The StringRef is null-terminated. |
2520 | StringRef str = getName(Policy); |
2521 | assert(!str.empty() && str.data()[str.size()] == '\0')((!str.empty() && str.data()[str.size()] == '\0') ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!str.empty() && str.data()[str.size()] == '\\0'" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 2521, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
2522 | return str.data(); |
2523 | } |
2524 | |
2525 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2526 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2527 | |
2528 | bool isInteger() const { |
2529 | return getKind() >= Bool && getKind() <= Int128; |
2530 | } |
2531 | |
2532 | bool isSignedInteger() const { |
2533 | return getKind() >= Char_S && getKind() <= Int128; |
2534 | } |
2535 | |
2536 | bool isUnsignedInteger() const { |
2537 | return getKind() >= Bool && getKind() <= UInt128; |
2538 | } |
2539 | |
2540 | bool isFloatingPoint() const { |
2541 | return getKind() >= Half && getKind() <= Float128; |
2542 | } |
2543 | |
2544 | /// Determines whether the given kind corresponds to a placeholder type. |
2545 | static bool isPlaceholderTypeKind(Kind K) { |
2546 | return K >= Overload; |
2547 | } |
2548 | |
2549 | /// Determines whether this type is a placeholder type, i.e. a type |
2550 | /// which cannot appear in arbitrary positions in a fully-formed |
2551 | /// expression. |
2552 | bool isPlaceholderType() const { |
2553 | return isPlaceholderTypeKind(getKind()); |
2554 | } |
2555 | |
2556 | /// Determines whether this type is a placeholder type other than |
2557 | /// Overload. Most placeholder types require only syntactic |
2558 | /// information about their context in order to be resolved (e.g. |
2559 | /// whether it is a call expression), which means they can (and |
2560 | /// should) be resolved in an earlier "phase" of analysis. |
2561 | /// Overload expressions sometimes pick up further information |
2562 | /// from their context, like whether the context expects a |
2563 | /// specific function-pointer type, and so frequently need |
2564 | /// special treatment. |
2565 | bool isNonOverloadPlaceholderType() const { |
2566 | return getKind() > Overload; |
2567 | } |
2568 | |
2569 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Builtin; } |
2570 | }; |
2571 | |
2572 | /// Complex values, per C99 6.2.5p11. This supports the C99 complex |
2573 | /// types (_Complex float etc) as well as the GCC integer complex extensions. |
2574 | class ComplexType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2575 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2576 | |
2577 | QualType ElementType; |
2578 | |
2579 | ComplexType(QualType Element, QualType CanonicalPtr) |
2580 | : Type(Complex, CanonicalPtr, Element->getDependence()), |
2581 | ElementType(Element) {} |
2582 | |
2583 | public: |
2584 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
2585 | |
2586 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2587 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2588 | |
2589 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2590 | Profile(ID, getElementType()); |
2591 | } |
2592 | |
2593 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Element) { |
2594 | ID.AddPointer(Element.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2595 | } |
2596 | |
2597 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Complex; } |
2598 | }; |
2599 | |
2600 | /// Sugar for parentheses used when specifying types. |
2601 | class ParenType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2602 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2603 | |
2604 | QualType Inner; |
2605 | |
2606 | ParenType(QualType InnerType, QualType CanonType) |
2607 | : Type(Paren, CanonType, InnerType->getDependence()), Inner(InnerType) {} |
2608 | |
2609 | public: |
2610 | QualType getInnerType() const { return Inner; } |
2611 | |
2612 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
2613 | QualType desugar() const { return getInnerType(); } |
2614 | |
2615 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2616 | Profile(ID, getInnerType()); |
2617 | } |
2618 | |
2619 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Inner) { |
2620 | Inner.Profile(ID); |
2621 | } |
2622 | |
2623 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Paren; } |
2624 | }; |
2625 | |
2626 | /// PointerType - C99 6.7.5.1 - Pointer Declarators. |
2627 | class PointerType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2628 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2629 | |
2630 | QualType PointeeType; |
2631 | |
2632 | PointerType(QualType Pointee, QualType CanonicalPtr) |
2633 | : Type(Pointer, CanonicalPtr, Pointee->getDependence()), |
2634 | PointeeType(Pointee) {} |
2635 | |
2636 | public: |
2637 | QualType getPointeeType() const { return PointeeType; } |
2638 | |
2639 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2640 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2641 | |
2642 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2643 | Profile(ID, getPointeeType()); |
2644 | } |
2645 | |
2646 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Pointee) { |
2647 | ID.AddPointer(Pointee.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2648 | } |
2649 | |
2650 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Pointer; } |
2651 | }; |
2652 | |
2653 | /// Represents a type which was implicitly adjusted by the semantic |
2654 | /// engine for arbitrary reasons. For example, array and function types can |
2655 | /// decay, and function types can have their calling conventions adjusted. |
2656 | class AdjustedType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2657 | QualType OriginalTy; |
2658 | QualType AdjustedTy; |
2659 | |
2660 | protected: |
2661 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2662 | |
2663 | AdjustedType(TypeClass TC, QualType OriginalTy, QualType AdjustedTy, |
2664 | QualType CanonicalPtr) |
2665 | : Type(TC, CanonicalPtr, OriginalTy->getDependence()), |
2666 | OriginalTy(OriginalTy), AdjustedTy(AdjustedTy) {} |
2667 | |
2668 | public: |
2669 | QualType getOriginalType() const { return OriginalTy; } |
2670 | QualType getAdjustedType() const { return AdjustedTy; } |
2671 | |
2672 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
2673 | QualType desugar() const { return AdjustedTy; } |
2674 | |
2675 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2676 | Profile(ID, OriginalTy, AdjustedTy); |
2677 | } |
2678 | |
2679 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Orig, QualType New) { |
2680 | ID.AddPointer(Orig.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2681 | ID.AddPointer(New.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2682 | } |
2683 | |
2684 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2685 | return T->getTypeClass() == Adjusted || T->getTypeClass() == Decayed; |
2686 | } |
2687 | }; |
2688 | |
2689 | /// Represents a pointer type decayed from an array or function type. |
2690 | class DecayedType : public AdjustedType { |
2691 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2692 | |
2693 | inline |
2694 | DecayedType(QualType OriginalType, QualType Decayed, QualType Canonical); |
2695 | |
2696 | public: |
2697 | QualType getDecayedType() const { return getAdjustedType(); } |
2698 | |
2699 | inline QualType getPointeeType() const; |
2700 | |
2701 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Decayed; } |
2702 | }; |
2703 | |
2704 | /// Pointer to a block type. |
2705 | /// This type is to represent types syntactically represented as |
2706 | /// "void (^)(int)", etc. Pointee is required to always be a function type. |
2707 | class BlockPointerType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2708 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2709 | |
2710 | // Block is some kind of pointer type |
2711 | QualType PointeeType; |
2712 | |
2713 | BlockPointerType(QualType Pointee, QualType CanonicalCls) |
2714 | : Type(BlockPointer, CanonicalCls, Pointee->getDependence()), |
2715 | PointeeType(Pointee) {} |
2716 | |
2717 | public: |
2718 | // Get the pointee type. Pointee is required to always be a function type. |
2719 | QualType getPointeeType() const { return PointeeType; } |
2720 | |
2721 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2722 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2723 | |
2724 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2725 | Profile(ID, getPointeeType()); |
2726 | } |
2727 | |
2728 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Pointee) { |
2729 | ID.AddPointer(Pointee.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2730 | } |
2731 | |
2732 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2733 | return T->getTypeClass() == BlockPointer; |
2734 | } |
2735 | }; |
2736 | |
2737 | /// Base for LValueReferenceType and RValueReferenceType |
2738 | class ReferenceType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2739 | QualType PointeeType; |
2740 | |
2741 | protected: |
2742 | ReferenceType(TypeClass tc, QualType Referencee, QualType CanonicalRef, |
2743 | bool SpelledAsLValue) |
2744 | : Type(tc, CanonicalRef, Referencee->getDependence()), |
2745 | PointeeType(Referencee) { |
2746 | ReferenceTypeBits.SpelledAsLValue = SpelledAsLValue; |
2747 | ReferenceTypeBits.InnerRef = Referencee->isReferenceType(); |
2748 | } |
2749 | |
2750 | public: |
2751 | bool isSpelledAsLValue() const { return ReferenceTypeBits.SpelledAsLValue; } |
2752 | bool isInnerRef() const { return ReferenceTypeBits.InnerRef; } |
2753 | |
2754 | QualType getPointeeTypeAsWritten() const { return PointeeType; } |
2755 | |
2756 | QualType getPointeeType() const { |
2757 | // FIXME: this might strip inner qualifiers; okay? |
2758 | const ReferenceType *T = this; |
2759 | while (T->isInnerRef()) |
2760 | T = T->PointeeType->castAs<ReferenceType>(); |
2761 | return T->PointeeType; |
2762 | } |
2763 | |
2764 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2765 | Profile(ID, PointeeType, isSpelledAsLValue()); |
2766 | } |
2767 | |
2768 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
2769 | QualType Referencee, |
2770 | bool SpelledAsLValue) { |
2771 | ID.AddPointer(Referencee.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2772 | ID.AddBoolean(SpelledAsLValue); |
2773 | } |
2774 | |
2775 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2776 | return T->getTypeClass() == LValueReference || |
2777 | T->getTypeClass() == RValueReference; |
2778 | } |
2779 | }; |
2780 | |
2781 | /// An lvalue reference type, per C++11 [dcl.ref]. |
2782 | class LValueReferenceType : public ReferenceType { |
2783 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
2784 | |
2785 | LValueReferenceType(QualType Referencee, QualType CanonicalRef, |
2786 | bool SpelledAsLValue) |
2787 | : ReferenceType(LValueReference, Referencee, CanonicalRef, |
2788 | SpelledAsLValue) {} |
2789 | |
2790 | public: |
2791 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2792 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2793 | |
2794 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2795 | return T->getTypeClass() == LValueReference; |
2796 | } |
2797 | }; |
2798 | |
2799 | /// An rvalue reference type, per C++11 [dcl.ref]. |
2800 | class RValueReferenceType : public ReferenceType { |
2801 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
2802 | |
2803 | RValueReferenceType(QualType Referencee, QualType CanonicalRef) |
2804 | : ReferenceType(RValueReference, Referencee, CanonicalRef, false) {} |
2805 | |
2806 | public: |
2807 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2808 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2809 | |
2810 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2811 | return T->getTypeClass() == RValueReference; |
2812 | } |
2813 | }; |
2814 | |
2815 | /// A pointer to member type per C++ 8.3.3 - Pointers to members. |
2816 | /// |
2817 | /// This includes both pointers to data members and pointer to member functions. |
2818 | class MemberPointerType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2819 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2820 | |
2821 | QualType PointeeType; |
2822 | |
2823 | /// The class of which the pointee is a member. Must ultimately be a |
2824 | /// RecordType, but could be a typedef or a template parameter too. |
2825 | const Type *Class; |
2826 | |
2827 | MemberPointerType(QualType Pointee, const Type *Cls, QualType CanonicalPtr) |
2828 | : Type(MemberPointer, CanonicalPtr, |
2829 | (Cls->getDependence() & ~TypeDependence::VariablyModified) | |
2830 | Pointee->getDependence()), |
2831 | PointeeType(Pointee), Class(Cls) {} |
2832 | |
2833 | public: |
2834 | QualType getPointeeType() const { return PointeeType; } |
2835 | |
2836 | /// Returns true if the member type (i.e. the pointee type) is a |
2837 | /// function type rather than a data-member type. |
2838 | bool isMemberFunctionPointer() const { |
2839 | return PointeeType->isFunctionProtoType(); |
2840 | } |
2841 | |
2842 | /// Returns true if the member type (i.e. the pointee type) is a |
2843 | /// data type rather than a function type. |
2844 | bool isMemberDataPointer() const { |
2845 | return !PointeeType->isFunctionProtoType(); |
2846 | } |
2847 | |
2848 | const Type *getClass() const { return Class; } |
2849 | CXXRecordDecl *getMostRecentCXXRecordDecl() const; |
2850 | |
2851 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2852 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2853 | |
2854 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2855 | Profile(ID, getPointeeType(), getClass()); |
2856 | } |
2857 | |
2858 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Pointee, |
2859 | const Type *Class) { |
2860 | ID.AddPointer(Pointee.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
2861 | ID.AddPointer(Class); |
2862 | } |
2863 | |
2864 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2865 | return T->getTypeClass() == MemberPointer; |
2866 | } |
2867 | }; |
2868 | |
2869 | /// Represents an array type, per C99 6.7.5.2 - Array Declarators. |
2870 | class ArrayType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
2871 | public: |
2872 | /// Capture whether this is a normal array (e.g. int X[4]) |
2873 | /// an array with a static size (e.g. int X[static 4]), or an array |
2874 | /// with a star size (e.g. int X[*]). |
2875 | /// 'static' is only allowed on function parameters. |
2876 | enum ArraySizeModifier { |
2877 | Normal, Static, Star |
2878 | }; |
2879 | |
2880 | private: |
2881 | /// The element type of the array. |
2882 | QualType ElementType; |
2883 | |
2884 | protected: |
2885 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2886 | |
2887 | ArrayType(TypeClass tc, QualType et, QualType can, ArraySizeModifier sm, |
2888 | unsigned tq, const Expr *sz = nullptr); |
2889 | |
2890 | public: |
2891 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
2892 | |
2893 | ArraySizeModifier getSizeModifier() const { |
2894 | return ArraySizeModifier(ArrayTypeBits.SizeModifier); |
2895 | } |
2896 | |
2897 | Qualifiers getIndexTypeQualifiers() const { |
2898 | return Qualifiers::fromCVRMask(getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()); |
2899 | } |
2900 | |
2901 | unsigned getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers() const { |
2902 | return ArrayTypeBits.IndexTypeQuals; |
2903 | } |
2904 | |
2905 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2906 | return T->getTypeClass() == ConstantArray || |
2907 | T->getTypeClass() == VariableArray || |
2908 | T->getTypeClass() == IncompleteArray || |
2909 | T->getTypeClass() == DependentSizedArray; |
2910 | } |
2911 | }; |
2912 | |
2913 | /// Represents the canonical version of C arrays with a specified constant size. |
2914 | /// For example, the canonical type for 'int A[4 + 4*100]' is a |
2915 | /// ConstantArrayType where the element type is 'int' and the size is 404. |
2916 | class ConstantArrayType final |
2917 | : public ArrayType, |
2918 | private llvm::TrailingObjects<ConstantArrayType, const Expr *> { |
2919 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2920 | friend TrailingObjects; |
2921 | |
2922 | llvm::APInt Size; // Allows us to unique the type. |
2923 | |
2924 | ConstantArrayType(QualType et, QualType can, const llvm::APInt &size, |
2925 | const Expr *sz, ArraySizeModifier sm, unsigned tq) |
2926 | : ArrayType(ConstantArray, et, can, sm, tq, sz), Size(size) { |
2927 | ConstantArrayTypeBits.HasStoredSizeExpr = sz != nullptr; |
2928 | if (ConstantArrayTypeBits.HasStoredSizeExpr) { |
2929 | assert(!can.isNull() && "canonical constant array should not have size")((!can.isNull() && "canonical constant array should not have size" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!can.isNull() && \"canonical constant array should not have size\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 2929, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
2930 | *getTrailingObjects<const Expr*>() = sz; |
2931 | } |
2932 | } |
2933 | |
2934 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<const Expr*>) const { |
2935 | return ConstantArrayTypeBits.HasStoredSizeExpr; |
2936 | } |
2937 | |
2938 | public: |
2939 | const llvm::APInt &getSize() const { return Size; } |
2940 | const Expr *getSizeExpr() const { |
2941 | return ConstantArrayTypeBits.HasStoredSizeExpr |
2942 | ? *getTrailingObjects<const Expr *>() |
2943 | : nullptr; |
2944 | } |
2945 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2946 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2947 | |
2948 | /// Determine the number of bits required to address a member of |
2949 | // an array with the given element type and number of elements. |
2950 | static unsigned getNumAddressingBits(const ASTContext &Context, |
2951 | QualType ElementType, |
2952 | const llvm::APInt &NumElements); |
2953 | |
2954 | /// Determine the maximum number of active bits that an array's size |
2955 | /// can require, which limits the maximum size of the array. |
2956 | static unsigned getMaxSizeBits(const ASTContext &Context); |
2957 | |
2958 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Ctx) { |
2959 | Profile(ID, Ctx, getElementType(), getSize(), getSizeExpr(), |
2960 | getSizeModifier(), getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()); |
2961 | } |
2962 | |
2963 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Ctx, |
2964 | QualType ET, const llvm::APInt &ArraySize, |
2965 | const Expr *SizeExpr, ArraySizeModifier SizeMod, |
2966 | unsigned TypeQuals); |
2967 | |
2968 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2969 | return T->getTypeClass() == ConstantArray; |
2970 | } |
2971 | }; |
2972 | |
2973 | /// Represents a C array with an unspecified size. For example 'int A[]' has |
2974 | /// an IncompleteArrayType where the element type is 'int' and the size is |
2975 | /// unspecified. |
2976 | class IncompleteArrayType : public ArrayType { |
2977 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
2978 | |
2979 | IncompleteArrayType(QualType et, QualType can, |
2980 | ArraySizeModifier sm, unsigned tq) |
2981 | : ArrayType(IncompleteArray, et, can, sm, tq) {} |
2982 | |
2983 | public: |
2984 | friend class StmtIteratorBase; |
2985 | |
2986 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
2987 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
2988 | |
2989 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
2990 | return T->getTypeClass() == IncompleteArray; |
2991 | } |
2992 | |
2993 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
2994 | Profile(ID, getElementType(), getSizeModifier(), |
2995 | getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()); |
2996 | } |
2997 | |
2998 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType ET, |
2999 | ArraySizeModifier SizeMod, unsigned TypeQuals) { |
3000 | ID.AddPointer(ET.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
3001 | ID.AddInteger(SizeMod); |
3002 | ID.AddInteger(TypeQuals); |
3003 | } |
3004 | }; |
3005 | |
3006 | /// Represents a C array with a specified size that is not an |
3007 | /// integer-constant-expression. For example, 'int s[x+foo()]'. |
3008 | /// Since the size expression is an arbitrary expression, we store it as such. |
3009 | /// |
3010 | /// Note: VariableArrayType's aren't uniqued (since the expressions aren't) and |
3011 | /// should not be: two lexically equivalent variable array types could mean |
3012 | /// different things, for example, these variables do not have the same type |
3013 | /// dynamically: |
3014 | /// |
3015 | /// void foo(int x) { |
3016 | /// int Y[x]; |
3017 | /// ++x; |
3018 | /// int Z[x]; |
3019 | /// } |
3020 | class VariableArrayType : public ArrayType { |
3021 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
3022 | |
3023 | /// An assignment-expression. VLA's are only permitted within |
3024 | /// a function block. |
3025 | Stmt *SizeExpr; |
3026 | |
3027 | /// The range spanned by the left and right array brackets. |
3028 | SourceRange Brackets; |
3029 | |
3030 | VariableArrayType(QualType et, QualType can, Expr *e, |
3031 | ArraySizeModifier sm, unsigned tq, |
3032 | SourceRange brackets) |
3033 | : ArrayType(VariableArray, et, can, sm, tq, e), |
3034 | SizeExpr((Stmt*) e), Brackets(brackets) {} |
3035 | |
3036 | public: |
3037 | friend class StmtIteratorBase; |
3038 | |
3039 | Expr *getSizeExpr() const { |
3040 | // We use C-style casts instead of cast<> here because we do not wish |
3041 | // to have a dependency of Type.h on Stmt.h/Expr.h. |
3042 | return (Expr*) SizeExpr; |
3043 | } |
3044 | |
3045 | SourceRange getBracketsRange() const { return Brackets; } |
3046 | SourceLocation getLBracketLoc() const { return Brackets.getBegin(); } |
3047 | SourceLocation getRBracketLoc() const { return Brackets.getEnd(); } |
3048 | |
3049 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3050 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3051 | |
3052 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3053 | return T->getTypeClass() == VariableArray; |
3054 | } |
3055 | |
3056 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3057 | llvm_unreachable("Cannot unique VariableArrayTypes.")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("Cannot unique VariableArrayTypes." , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 3057); |
3058 | } |
3059 | }; |
3060 | |
3061 | /// Represents an array type in C++ whose size is a value-dependent expression. |
3062 | /// |
3063 | /// For example: |
3064 | /// \code |
3065 | /// template<typename T, int Size> |
3066 | /// class array { |
3067 | /// T data[Size]; |
3068 | /// }; |
3069 | /// \endcode |
3070 | /// |
3071 | /// For these types, we won't actually know what the array bound is |
3072 | /// until template instantiation occurs, at which point this will |
3073 | /// become either a ConstantArrayType or a VariableArrayType. |
3074 | class DependentSizedArrayType : public ArrayType { |
3075 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
3076 | |
3077 | const ASTContext &Context; |
3078 | |
3079 | /// An assignment expression that will instantiate to the |
3080 | /// size of the array. |
3081 | /// |
3082 | /// The expression itself might be null, in which case the array |
3083 | /// type will have its size deduced from an initializer. |
3084 | Stmt *SizeExpr; |
3085 | |
3086 | /// The range spanned by the left and right array brackets. |
3087 | SourceRange Brackets; |
3088 | |
3089 | DependentSizedArrayType(const ASTContext &Context, QualType et, QualType can, |
3090 | Expr *e, ArraySizeModifier sm, unsigned tq, |
3091 | SourceRange brackets); |
3092 | |
3093 | public: |
3094 | friend class StmtIteratorBase; |
3095 | |
3096 | Expr *getSizeExpr() const { |
3097 | // We use C-style casts instead of cast<> here because we do not wish |
3098 | // to have a dependency of Type.h on Stmt.h/Expr.h. |
3099 | return (Expr*) SizeExpr; |
3100 | } |
3101 | |
3102 | SourceRange getBracketsRange() const { return Brackets; } |
3103 | SourceLocation getLBracketLoc() const { return Brackets.getBegin(); } |
3104 | SourceLocation getRBracketLoc() const { return Brackets.getEnd(); } |
3105 | |
3106 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3107 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3108 | |
3109 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3110 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentSizedArray; |
3111 | } |
3112 | |
3113 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3114 | Profile(ID, Context, getElementType(), |
3115 | getSizeModifier(), getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), getSizeExpr()); |
3116 | } |
3117 | |
3118 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
3119 | QualType ET, ArraySizeModifier SizeMod, |
3120 | unsigned TypeQuals, Expr *E); |
3121 | }; |
3122 | |
3123 | /// Represents an extended address space qualifier where the input address space |
3124 | /// value is dependent. Non-dependent address spaces are not represented with a |
3125 | /// special Type subclass; they are stored on an ExtQuals node as part of a QualType. |
3126 | /// |
3127 | /// For example: |
3128 | /// \code |
3129 | /// template<typename T, int AddrSpace> |
3130 | /// class AddressSpace { |
3131 | /// typedef T __attribute__((address_space(AddrSpace))) type; |
3132 | /// } |
3133 | /// \endcode |
3134 | class DependentAddressSpaceType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
3135 | friend class ASTContext; |
3136 | |
3137 | const ASTContext &Context; |
3138 | Expr *AddrSpaceExpr; |
3139 | QualType PointeeType; |
3140 | SourceLocation loc; |
3141 | |
3142 | DependentAddressSpaceType(const ASTContext &Context, QualType PointeeType, |
3143 | QualType can, Expr *AddrSpaceExpr, |
3144 | SourceLocation loc); |
3145 | |
3146 | public: |
3147 | Expr *getAddrSpaceExpr() const { return AddrSpaceExpr; } |
3148 | QualType getPointeeType() const { return PointeeType; } |
3149 | SourceLocation getAttributeLoc() const { return loc; } |
3150 | |
3151 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3152 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3153 | |
3154 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3155 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentAddressSpace; |
3156 | } |
3157 | |
3158 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3159 | Profile(ID, Context, getPointeeType(), getAddrSpaceExpr()); |
3160 | } |
3161 | |
3162 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
3163 | QualType PointeeType, Expr *AddrSpaceExpr); |
3164 | }; |
3165 | |
3166 | /// Represents an extended vector type where either the type or size is |
3167 | /// dependent. |
3168 | /// |
3169 | /// For example: |
3170 | /// \code |
3171 | /// template<typename T, int Size> |
3172 | /// class vector { |
3173 | /// typedef T __attribute__((ext_vector_type(Size))) type; |
3174 | /// } |
3175 | /// \endcode |
3176 | class DependentSizedExtVectorType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
3177 | friend class ASTContext; |
3178 | |
3179 | const ASTContext &Context; |
3180 | Expr *SizeExpr; |
3181 | |
3182 | /// The element type of the array. |
3183 | QualType ElementType; |
3184 | |
3185 | SourceLocation loc; |
3186 | |
3187 | DependentSizedExtVectorType(const ASTContext &Context, QualType ElementType, |
3188 | QualType can, Expr *SizeExpr, SourceLocation loc); |
3189 | |
3190 | public: |
3191 | Expr *getSizeExpr() const { return SizeExpr; } |
3192 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
3193 | SourceLocation getAttributeLoc() const { return loc; } |
3194 | |
3195 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3196 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3197 | |
3198 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3199 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentSizedExtVector; |
3200 | } |
3201 | |
3202 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3203 | Profile(ID, Context, getElementType(), getSizeExpr()); |
3204 | } |
3205 | |
3206 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
3207 | QualType ElementType, Expr *SizeExpr); |
3208 | }; |
3209 | |
3210 | |
3211 | /// Represents a GCC generic vector type. This type is created using |
3212 | /// __attribute__((vector_size(n)), where "n" specifies the vector size in |
3213 | /// bytes; or from an Altivec __vector or vector declaration. |
3214 | /// Since the constructor takes the number of vector elements, the |
3215 | /// client is responsible for converting the size into the number of elements. |
3216 | class VectorType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
3217 | public: |
3218 | enum VectorKind { |
3219 | /// not a target-specific vector type |
3220 | GenericVector, |
3221 | |
3222 | /// is AltiVec vector |
3223 | AltiVecVector, |
3224 | |
3225 | /// is AltiVec 'vector Pixel' |
3226 | AltiVecPixel, |
3227 | |
3228 | /// is AltiVec 'vector bool ...' |
3229 | AltiVecBool, |
3230 | |
3231 | /// is ARM Neon vector |
3232 | NeonVector, |
3233 | |
3234 | /// is ARM Neon polynomial vector |
3235 | NeonPolyVector, |
3236 | |
3237 | /// is AArch64 SVE fixed-length data vector |
3238 | SveFixedLengthDataVector, |
3239 | |
3240 | /// is AArch64 SVE fixed-length predicate vector |
3241 | SveFixedLengthPredicateVector |
3242 | }; |
3243 | |
3244 | protected: |
3245 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
3246 | |
3247 | /// The element type of the vector. |
3248 | QualType ElementType; |
3249 | |
3250 | VectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned nElements, QualType canonType, |
3251 | VectorKind vecKind); |
3252 | |
3253 | VectorType(TypeClass tc, QualType vecType, unsigned nElements, |
3254 | QualType canonType, VectorKind vecKind); |
3255 | |
3256 | public: |
3257 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
3258 | unsigned getNumElements() const { return VectorTypeBits.NumElements; } |
3259 | |
3260 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3261 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3262 | |
3263 | VectorKind getVectorKind() const { |
3264 | return VectorKind(VectorTypeBits.VecKind); |
3265 | } |
3266 | |
3267 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3268 | Profile(ID, getElementType(), getNumElements(), |
3269 | getTypeClass(), getVectorKind()); |
3270 | } |
3271 | |
3272 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType ElementType, |
3273 | unsigned NumElements, TypeClass TypeClass, |
3274 | VectorKind VecKind) { |
3275 | ID.AddPointer(ElementType.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
3276 | ID.AddInteger(NumElements); |
3277 | ID.AddInteger(TypeClass); |
3278 | ID.AddInteger(VecKind); |
3279 | } |
3280 | |
3281 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3282 | return T->getTypeClass() == Vector || T->getTypeClass() == ExtVector; |
3283 | } |
3284 | }; |
3285 | |
3286 | /// Represents a vector type where either the type or size is dependent. |
3287 | //// |
3288 | /// For example: |
3289 | /// \code |
3290 | /// template<typename T, int Size> |
3291 | /// class vector { |
3292 | /// typedef T __attribute__((vector_size(Size))) type; |
3293 | /// } |
3294 | /// \endcode |
3295 | class DependentVectorType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
3296 | friend class ASTContext; |
3297 | |
3298 | const ASTContext &Context; |
3299 | QualType ElementType; |
3300 | Expr *SizeExpr; |
3301 | SourceLocation Loc; |
3302 | |
3303 | DependentVectorType(const ASTContext &Context, QualType ElementType, |
3304 | QualType CanonType, Expr *SizeExpr, |
3305 | SourceLocation Loc, VectorType::VectorKind vecKind); |
3306 | |
3307 | public: |
3308 | Expr *getSizeExpr() const { return SizeExpr; } |
3309 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
3310 | SourceLocation getAttributeLoc() const { return Loc; } |
3311 | VectorType::VectorKind getVectorKind() const { |
3312 | return VectorType::VectorKind(VectorTypeBits.VecKind); |
3313 | } |
3314 | |
3315 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3316 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3317 | |
3318 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3319 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentVector; |
3320 | } |
3321 | |
3322 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3323 | Profile(ID, Context, getElementType(), getSizeExpr(), getVectorKind()); |
3324 | } |
3325 | |
3326 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
3327 | QualType ElementType, const Expr *SizeExpr, |
3328 | VectorType::VectorKind VecKind); |
3329 | }; |
3330 | |
3331 | /// ExtVectorType - Extended vector type. This type is created using |
3332 | /// __attribute__((ext_vector_type(n)), where "n" is the number of elements. |
3333 | /// Unlike vector_size, ext_vector_type is only allowed on typedef's. This |
3334 | /// class enables syntactic extensions, like Vector Components for accessing |
3335 | /// points (as .xyzw), colors (as .rgba), and textures (modeled after OpenGL |
3336 | /// Shading Language). |
3337 | class ExtVectorType : public VectorType { |
3338 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
3339 | |
3340 | ExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned nElements, QualType canonType) |
3341 | : VectorType(ExtVector, vecType, nElements, canonType, GenericVector) {} |
3342 | |
3343 | public: |
3344 | static int getPointAccessorIdx(char c) { |
3345 | switch (c) { |
3346 | default: return -1; |
3347 | case 'x': case 'r': return 0; |
3348 | case 'y': case 'g': return 1; |
3349 | case 'z': case 'b': return 2; |
3350 | case 'w': case 'a': return 3; |
3351 | } |
3352 | } |
3353 | |
3354 | static int getNumericAccessorIdx(char c) { |
3355 | switch (c) { |
3356 | default: return -1; |
3357 | case '0': return 0; |
3358 | case '1': return 1; |
3359 | case '2': return 2; |
3360 | case '3': return 3; |
3361 | case '4': return 4; |
3362 | case '5': return 5; |
3363 | case '6': return 6; |
3364 | case '7': return 7; |
3365 | case '8': return 8; |
3366 | case '9': return 9; |
3367 | case 'A': |
3368 | case 'a': return 10; |
3369 | case 'B': |
3370 | case 'b': return 11; |
3371 | case 'C': |
3372 | case 'c': return 12; |
3373 | case 'D': |
3374 | case 'd': return 13; |
3375 | case 'E': |
3376 | case 'e': return 14; |
3377 | case 'F': |
3378 | case 'f': return 15; |
3379 | } |
3380 | } |
3381 | |
3382 | static int getAccessorIdx(char c, bool isNumericAccessor) { |
3383 | if (isNumericAccessor) |
3384 | return getNumericAccessorIdx(c); |
3385 | else |
3386 | return getPointAccessorIdx(c); |
3387 | } |
3388 | |
3389 | bool isAccessorWithinNumElements(char c, bool isNumericAccessor) const { |
3390 | if (int idx = getAccessorIdx(c, isNumericAccessor)+1) |
3391 | return unsigned(idx-1) < getNumElements(); |
3392 | return false; |
3393 | } |
3394 | |
3395 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3396 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3397 | |
3398 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3399 | return T->getTypeClass() == ExtVector; |
3400 | } |
3401 | }; |
3402 | |
3403 | /// Represents a matrix type, as defined in the Matrix Types clang extensions. |
3404 | /// __attribute__((matrix_type(rows, columns))), where "rows" specifies |
3405 | /// number of rows and "columns" specifies the number of columns. |
3406 | class MatrixType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
3407 | protected: |
3408 | friend class ASTContext; |
3409 | |
3410 | /// The element type of the matrix. |
3411 | QualType ElementType; |
3412 | |
3413 | MatrixType(QualType ElementTy, QualType CanonElementTy); |
3414 | |
3415 | MatrixType(TypeClass TypeClass, QualType ElementTy, QualType CanonElementTy, |
3416 | const Expr *RowExpr = nullptr, const Expr *ColumnExpr = nullptr); |
3417 | |
3418 | public: |
3419 | /// Returns type of the elements being stored in the matrix |
3420 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
3421 | |
3422 | /// Valid elements types are the following: |
3423 | /// * an integer type (as in C2x 6.2.5p19), but excluding enumerated types |
3424 | /// and _Bool |
3425 | /// * the standard floating types float or double |
3426 | /// * a half-precision floating point type, if one is supported on the target |
3427 | static bool isValidElementType(QualType T) { |
3428 | return T->isDependentType() || |
3429 | (T->isRealType() && !T->isBooleanType() && !T->isEnumeralType()); |
3430 | } |
3431 | |
3432 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3433 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3434 | |
3435 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3436 | return T->getTypeClass() == ConstantMatrix || |
3437 | T->getTypeClass() == DependentSizedMatrix; |
3438 | } |
3439 | }; |
3440 | |
3441 | /// Represents a concrete matrix type with constant number of rows and columns |
3442 | class ConstantMatrixType final : public MatrixType { |
3443 | protected: |
3444 | friend class ASTContext; |
3445 | |
3446 | /// The element type of the matrix. |
3447 | // FIXME: Appears to be unused? There is also MatrixType::ElementType... |
3448 | QualType ElementType; |
3449 | |
3450 | /// Number of rows and columns. |
3451 | unsigned NumRows; |
3452 | unsigned NumColumns; |
3453 | |
3454 | static constexpr unsigned MaxElementsPerDimension = (1 << 20) - 1; |
3455 | |
3456 | ConstantMatrixType(QualType MatrixElementType, unsigned NRows, |
3457 | unsigned NColumns, QualType CanonElementType); |
3458 | |
3459 | ConstantMatrixType(TypeClass typeClass, QualType MatrixType, unsigned NRows, |
3460 | unsigned NColumns, QualType CanonElementType); |
3461 | |
3462 | public: |
3463 | /// Returns the number of rows in the matrix. |
3464 | unsigned getNumRows() const { return NumRows; } |
3465 | |
3466 | /// Returns the number of columns in the matrix. |
3467 | unsigned getNumColumns() const { return NumColumns; } |
3468 | |
3469 | /// Returns the number of elements required to embed the matrix into a vector. |
3470 | unsigned getNumElementsFlattened() const { |
3471 | return getNumRows() * getNumColumns(); |
3472 | } |
3473 | |
3474 | /// Returns true if \p NumElements is a valid matrix dimension. |
3475 | static constexpr bool isDimensionValid(size_t NumElements) { |
3476 | return NumElements > 0 && NumElements <= MaxElementsPerDimension; |
3477 | } |
3478 | |
3479 | /// Returns the maximum number of elements per dimension. |
3480 | static constexpr unsigned getMaxElementsPerDimension() { |
3481 | return MaxElementsPerDimension; |
3482 | } |
3483 | |
3484 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3485 | Profile(ID, getElementType(), getNumRows(), getNumColumns(), |
3486 | getTypeClass()); |
3487 | } |
3488 | |
3489 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType ElementType, |
3490 | unsigned NumRows, unsigned NumColumns, |
3491 | TypeClass TypeClass) { |
3492 | ID.AddPointer(ElementType.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
3493 | ID.AddInteger(NumRows); |
3494 | ID.AddInteger(NumColumns); |
3495 | ID.AddInteger(TypeClass); |
3496 | } |
3497 | |
3498 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3499 | return T->getTypeClass() == ConstantMatrix; |
3500 | } |
3501 | }; |
3502 | |
3503 | /// Represents a matrix type where the type and the number of rows and columns |
3504 | /// is dependent on a template. |
3505 | class DependentSizedMatrixType final : public MatrixType { |
3506 | friend class ASTContext; |
3507 | |
3508 | const ASTContext &Context; |
3509 | Expr *RowExpr; |
3510 | Expr *ColumnExpr; |
3511 | |
3512 | SourceLocation loc; |
3513 | |
3514 | DependentSizedMatrixType(const ASTContext &Context, QualType ElementType, |
3515 | QualType CanonicalType, Expr *RowExpr, |
3516 | Expr *ColumnExpr, SourceLocation loc); |
3517 | |
3518 | public: |
3519 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
3520 | Expr *getRowExpr() const { return RowExpr; } |
3521 | Expr *getColumnExpr() const { return ColumnExpr; } |
3522 | SourceLocation getAttributeLoc() const { return loc; } |
3523 | |
3524 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3525 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3526 | |
3527 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3528 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentSizedMatrix; |
3529 | } |
3530 | |
3531 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3532 | Profile(ID, Context, getElementType(), getRowExpr(), getColumnExpr()); |
3533 | } |
3534 | |
3535 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
3536 | QualType ElementType, Expr *RowExpr, Expr *ColumnExpr); |
3537 | }; |
3538 | |
3539 | /// FunctionType - C99 6.7.5.3 - Function Declarators. This is the common base |
3540 | /// class of FunctionNoProtoType and FunctionProtoType. |
3541 | class FunctionType : public Type { |
3542 | // The type returned by the function. |
3543 | QualType ResultType; |
3544 | |
3545 | public: |
3546 | /// Interesting information about a specific parameter that can't simply |
3547 | /// be reflected in parameter's type. This is only used by FunctionProtoType |
3548 | /// but is in FunctionType to make this class available during the |
3549 | /// specification of the bases of FunctionProtoType. |
3550 | /// |
3551 | /// It makes sense to model language features this way when there's some |
3552 | /// sort of parameter-specific override (such as an attribute) that |
3553 | /// affects how the function is called. For example, the ARC ns_consumed |
3554 | /// attribute changes whether a parameter is passed at +0 (the default) |
3555 | /// or +1 (ns_consumed). This must be reflected in the function type, |
3556 | /// but isn't really a change to the parameter type. |
3557 | /// |
3558 | /// One serious disadvantage of modelling language features this way is |
3559 | /// that they generally do not work with language features that attempt |
3560 | /// to destructure types. For example, template argument deduction will |
3561 | /// not be able to match a parameter declared as |
3562 | /// T (*)(U) |
3563 | /// against an argument of type |
3564 | /// void (*)(__attribute__((ns_consumed)) id) |
3565 | /// because the substitution of T=void, U=id into the former will |
3566 | /// not produce the latter. |
3567 | class ExtParameterInfo { |
3568 | enum { |
3569 | ABIMask = 0x0F, |
3570 | IsConsumed = 0x10, |
3571 | HasPassObjSize = 0x20, |
3572 | IsNoEscape = 0x40, |
3573 | }; |
3574 | unsigned char Data = 0; |
3575 | |
3576 | public: |
3577 | ExtParameterInfo() = default; |
3578 | |
3579 | /// Return the ABI treatment of this parameter. |
3580 | ParameterABI getABI() const { return ParameterABI(Data & ABIMask); } |
3581 | ExtParameterInfo withABI(ParameterABI kind) const { |
3582 | ExtParameterInfo copy = *this; |
3583 | copy.Data = (copy.Data & ~ABIMask) | unsigned(kind); |
3584 | return copy; |
3585 | } |
3586 | |
3587 | /// Is this parameter considered "consumed" by Objective-C ARC? |
3588 | /// Consumed parameters must have retainable object type. |
3589 | bool isConsumed() const { return (Data & IsConsumed); } |
3590 | ExtParameterInfo withIsConsumed(bool consumed) const { |
3591 | ExtParameterInfo copy = *this; |
3592 | if (consumed) |
3593 | copy.Data |= IsConsumed; |
3594 | else |
3595 | copy.Data &= ~IsConsumed; |
3596 | return copy; |
3597 | } |
3598 | |
3599 | bool hasPassObjectSize() const { return Data & HasPassObjSize; } |
3600 | ExtParameterInfo withHasPassObjectSize() const { |
3601 | ExtParameterInfo Copy = *this; |
3602 | Copy.Data |= HasPassObjSize; |
3603 | return Copy; |
3604 | } |
3605 | |
3606 | bool isNoEscape() const { return Data & IsNoEscape; } |
3607 | ExtParameterInfo withIsNoEscape(bool NoEscape) const { |
3608 | ExtParameterInfo Copy = *this; |
3609 | if (NoEscape) |
3610 | Copy.Data |= IsNoEscape; |
3611 | else |
3612 | Copy.Data &= ~IsNoEscape; |
3613 | return Copy; |
3614 | } |
3615 | |
3616 | unsigned char getOpaqueValue() const { return Data; } |
3617 | static ExtParameterInfo getFromOpaqueValue(unsigned char data) { |
3618 | ExtParameterInfo result; |
3619 | result.Data = data; |
3620 | return result; |
3621 | } |
3622 | |
3623 | friend bool operator==(ExtParameterInfo lhs, ExtParameterInfo rhs) { |
3624 | return lhs.Data == rhs.Data; |
3625 | } |
3626 | |
3627 | friend bool operator!=(ExtParameterInfo lhs, ExtParameterInfo rhs) { |
3628 | return lhs.Data != rhs.Data; |
3629 | } |
3630 | }; |
3631 | |
3632 | /// A class which abstracts out some details necessary for |
3633 | /// making a call. |
3634 | /// |
3635 | /// It is not actually used directly for storing this information in |
3636 | /// a FunctionType, although FunctionType does currently use the |
3637 | /// same bit-pattern. |
3638 | /// |
3639 | // If you add a field (say Foo), other than the obvious places (both, |
3640 | // constructors, compile failures), what you need to update is |
3641 | // * Operator== |
3642 | // * getFoo |
3643 | // * withFoo |
3644 | // * functionType. Add Foo, getFoo. |
3645 | // * ASTContext::getFooType |
3646 | // * ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes |
3647 | // * FunctionNoProtoType::Profile |
3648 | // * FunctionProtoType::Profile |
3649 | // * TypePrinter::PrintFunctionProto |
3650 | // * AST read and write |
3651 | // * Codegen |
3652 | class ExtInfo { |
3653 | friend class FunctionType; |
3654 | |
3655 | // Feel free to rearrange or add bits, but if you go over 16, you'll need to |
3656 | // adjust the Bits field below, and if you add bits, you'll need to adjust |
3657 | // Type::FunctionTypeBitfields::ExtInfo as well. |
3658 | |
3659 | // | CC |noreturn|produces|nocallersavedregs|regparm|nocfcheck|cmsenscall| |
3660 | // |0 .. 4| 5 | 6 | 7 |8 .. 10| 11 | 12 | |
3661 | // |
3662 | // regparm is either 0 (no regparm attribute) or the regparm value+1. |
3663 | enum { CallConvMask = 0x1F }; |
3664 | enum { NoReturnMask = 0x20 }; |
3665 | enum { ProducesResultMask = 0x40 }; |
3666 | enum { NoCallerSavedRegsMask = 0x80 }; |
3667 | enum { |
3668 | RegParmMask = 0x700, |
3669 | RegParmOffset = 8 |
3670 | }; |
3671 | enum { NoCfCheckMask = 0x800 }; |
3672 | enum { CmseNSCallMask = 0x1000 }; |
3673 | uint16_t Bits = CC_C; |
3674 | |
3675 | ExtInfo(unsigned Bits) : Bits(static_cast<uint16_t>(Bits)) {} |
3676 | |
3677 | public: |
3678 | // Constructor with no defaults. Use this when you know that you |
3679 | // have all the elements (when reading an AST file for example). |
3680 | ExtInfo(bool noReturn, bool hasRegParm, unsigned regParm, CallingConv cc, |
3681 | bool producesResult, bool noCallerSavedRegs, bool NoCfCheck, |
3682 | bool cmseNSCall) { |
3683 | assert((!hasRegParm || regParm < 7) && "Invalid regparm value")(((!hasRegParm || regParm < 7) && "Invalid regparm value" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("(!hasRegParm || regParm < 7) && \"Invalid regparm value\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 3683, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
3684 | Bits = ((unsigned)cc) | (noReturn ? NoReturnMask : 0) | |
3685 | (producesResult ? ProducesResultMask : 0) | |
3686 | (noCallerSavedRegs ? NoCallerSavedRegsMask : 0) | |
3687 | (hasRegParm ? ((regParm + 1) << RegParmOffset) : 0) | |
3688 | (NoCfCheck ? NoCfCheckMask : 0) | |
3689 | (cmseNSCall ? CmseNSCallMask : 0); |
3690 | } |
3691 | |
3692 | // Constructor with all defaults. Use when for example creating a |
3693 | // function known to use defaults. |
3694 | ExtInfo() = default; |
3695 | |
3696 | // Constructor with just the calling convention, which is an important part |
3697 | // of the canonical type. |
3698 | ExtInfo(CallingConv CC) : Bits(CC) {} |
3699 | |
3700 | bool getNoReturn() const { return Bits & NoReturnMask; } |
3701 | bool getProducesResult() const { return Bits & ProducesResultMask; } |
3702 | bool getCmseNSCall() const { return Bits & CmseNSCallMask; } |
3703 | bool getNoCallerSavedRegs() const { return Bits & NoCallerSavedRegsMask; } |
3704 | bool getNoCfCheck() const { return Bits & NoCfCheckMask; } |
3705 | bool getHasRegParm() const { return ((Bits & RegParmMask) >> RegParmOffset) != 0; } |
3706 | |
3707 | unsigned getRegParm() const { |
3708 | unsigned RegParm = (Bits & RegParmMask) >> RegParmOffset; |
3709 | if (RegParm > 0) |
3710 | --RegParm; |
3711 | return RegParm; |
3712 | } |
3713 | |
3714 | CallingConv getCC() const { return CallingConv(Bits & CallConvMask); } |
3715 | |
3716 | bool operator==(ExtInfo Other) const { |
3717 | return Bits == Other.Bits; |
3718 | } |
3719 | bool operator!=(ExtInfo Other) const { |
3720 | return Bits != Other.Bits; |
3721 | } |
3722 | |
3723 | // Note that we don't have setters. That is by design, use |
3724 | // the following with methods instead of mutating these objects. |
3725 | |
3726 | ExtInfo withNoReturn(bool noReturn) const { |
3727 | if (noReturn) |
3728 | return ExtInfo(Bits | NoReturnMask); |
3729 | else |
3730 | return ExtInfo(Bits & ~NoReturnMask); |
3731 | } |
3732 | |
3733 | ExtInfo withProducesResult(bool producesResult) const { |
3734 | if (producesResult) |
3735 | return ExtInfo(Bits | ProducesResultMask); |
3736 | else |
3737 | return ExtInfo(Bits & ~ProducesResultMask); |
3738 | } |
3739 | |
3740 | ExtInfo withCmseNSCall(bool cmseNSCall) const { |
3741 | if (cmseNSCall) |
3742 | return ExtInfo(Bits | CmseNSCallMask); |
3743 | else |
3744 | return ExtInfo(Bits & ~CmseNSCallMask); |
3745 | } |
3746 | |
3747 | ExtInfo withNoCallerSavedRegs(bool noCallerSavedRegs) const { |
3748 | if (noCallerSavedRegs) |
3749 | return ExtInfo(Bits | NoCallerSavedRegsMask); |
3750 | else |
3751 | return ExtInfo(Bits & ~NoCallerSavedRegsMask); |
3752 | } |
3753 | |
3754 | ExtInfo withNoCfCheck(bool noCfCheck) const { |
3755 | if (noCfCheck) |
3756 | return ExtInfo(Bits | NoCfCheckMask); |
3757 | else |
3758 | return ExtInfo(Bits & ~NoCfCheckMask); |
3759 | } |
3760 | |
3761 | ExtInfo withRegParm(unsigned RegParm) const { |
3762 | assert(RegParm < 7 && "Invalid regparm value")((RegParm < 7 && "Invalid regparm value") ? static_cast <void> (0) : __assert_fail ("RegParm < 7 && \"Invalid regparm value\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 3762, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
3763 | return ExtInfo((Bits & ~RegParmMask) | |
3764 | ((RegParm + 1) << RegParmOffset)); |
3765 | } |
3766 | |
3767 | ExtInfo withCallingConv(CallingConv cc) const { |
3768 | return ExtInfo((Bits & ~CallConvMask) | (unsigned) cc); |
3769 | } |
3770 | |
3771 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) const { |
3772 | ID.AddInteger(Bits); |
3773 | } |
3774 | }; |
3775 | |
3776 | /// A simple holder for a QualType representing a type in an |
3777 | /// exception specification. Unfortunately needed by FunctionProtoType |
3778 | /// because TrailingObjects cannot handle repeated types. |
3779 | struct ExceptionType { QualType Type; }; |
3780 | |
3781 | /// A simple holder for various uncommon bits which do not fit in |
3782 | /// FunctionTypeBitfields. Aligned to alignof(void *) to maintain the |
3783 | /// alignment of subsequent objects in TrailingObjects. You must update |
3784 | /// hasExtraBitfields in FunctionProtoType after adding extra data here. |
3785 | struct alignas(void *) FunctionTypeExtraBitfields { |
3786 | /// The number of types in the exception specification. |
3787 | /// A whole unsigned is not needed here and according to |
3788 | /// [implimits] 8 bits would be enough here. |
3789 | unsigned NumExceptionType; |
3790 | }; |
3791 | |
3792 | protected: |
3793 | FunctionType(TypeClass tc, QualType res, QualType Canonical, |
3794 | TypeDependence Dependence, ExtInfo Info) |
3795 | : Type(tc, Canonical, Dependence), ResultType(res) { |
3796 | FunctionTypeBits.ExtInfo = Info.Bits; |
3797 | } |
3798 | |
3799 | Qualifiers getFastTypeQuals() const { |
3800 | return Qualifiers::fromFastMask(FunctionTypeBits.FastTypeQuals); |
3801 | } |
3802 | |
3803 | public: |
3804 | QualType getReturnType() const { return ResultType; } |
3805 | |
3806 | bool getHasRegParm() const { return getExtInfo().getHasRegParm(); } |
3807 | unsigned getRegParmType() const { return getExtInfo().getRegParm(); } |
3808 | |
3809 | /// Determine whether this function type includes the GNU noreturn |
3810 | /// attribute. The C++11 [[noreturn]] attribute does not affect the function |
3811 | /// type. |
3812 | bool getNoReturnAttr() const { return getExtInfo().getNoReturn(); } |
3813 | |
3814 | bool getCmseNSCallAttr() const { return getExtInfo().getCmseNSCall(); } |
3815 | CallingConv getCallConv() const { return getExtInfo().getCC(); } |
3816 | ExtInfo getExtInfo() const { return ExtInfo(FunctionTypeBits.ExtInfo); } |
3817 | |
3818 | static_assert((~Qualifiers::FastMask & Qualifiers::CVRMask) == 0, |
3819 | "Const, volatile and restrict are assumed to be a subset of " |
3820 | "the fast qualifiers."); |
3821 | |
3822 | bool isConst() const { return getFastTypeQuals().hasConst(); } |
3823 | bool isVolatile() const { return getFastTypeQuals().hasVolatile(); } |
3824 | bool isRestrict() const { return getFastTypeQuals().hasRestrict(); } |
3825 | |
3826 | /// Determine the type of an expression that calls a function of |
3827 | /// this type. |
3828 | QualType getCallResultType(const ASTContext &Context) const { |
3829 | return getReturnType().getNonLValueExprType(Context); |
3830 | } |
3831 | |
3832 | static StringRef getNameForCallConv(CallingConv CC); |
3833 | |
3834 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3835 | return T->getTypeClass() == FunctionNoProto || |
3836 | T->getTypeClass() == FunctionProto; |
3837 | } |
3838 | }; |
3839 | |
3840 | /// Represents a K&R-style 'int foo()' function, which has |
3841 | /// no information available about its arguments. |
3842 | class FunctionNoProtoType : public FunctionType, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
3843 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
3844 | |
3845 | FunctionNoProtoType(QualType Result, QualType Canonical, ExtInfo Info) |
3846 | : FunctionType(FunctionNoProto, Result, Canonical, |
3847 | Result->getDependence() & |
3848 | ~(TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation | |
3849 | TypeDependence::UnexpandedPack), |
3850 | Info) {} |
3851 | |
3852 | public: |
3853 | // No additional state past what FunctionType provides. |
3854 | |
3855 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
3856 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
3857 | |
3858 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
3859 | Profile(ID, getReturnType(), getExtInfo()); |
3860 | } |
3861 | |
3862 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType ResultType, |
3863 | ExtInfo Info) { |
3864 | Info.Profile(ID); |
3865 | ID.AddPointer(ResultType.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
3866 | } |
3867 | |
3868 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
3869 | return T->getTypeClass() == FunctionNoProto; |
3870 | } |
3871 | }; |
3872 | |
3873 | /// Represents a prototype with parameter type info, e.g. |
3874 | /// 'int foo(int)' or 'int foo(void)'. 'void' is represented as having no |
3875 | /// parameters, not as having a single void parameter. Such a type can have |
3876 | /// an exception specification, but this specification is not part of the |
3877 | /// canonical type. FunctionProtoType has several trailing objects, some of |
3878 | /// which optional. For more information about the trailing objects see |
3879 | /// the first comment inside FunctionProtoType. |
3880 | class FunctionProtoType final |
3881 | : public FunctionType, |
3882 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode, |
3883 | private llvm::TrailingObjects< |
3884 | FunctionProtoType, QualType, SourceLocation, |
3885 | FunctionType::FunctionTypeExtraBitfields, FunctionType::ExceptionType, |
3886 | Expr *, FunctionDecl *, FunctionType::ExtParameterInfo, Qualifiers> { |
3887 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
3888 | friend TrailingObjects; |
3889 | |
3890 | // FunctionProtoType is followed by several trailing objects, some of |
3891 | // which optional. They are in order: |
3892 | // |
3893 | // * An array of getNumParams() QualType holding the parameter types. |
3894 | // Always present. Note that for the vast majority of FunctionProtoType, |
3895 | // these will be the only trailing objects. |
3896 | // |
3897 | // * Optionally if the function is variadic, the SourceLocation of the |
3898 | // ellipsis. |
3899 | // |
3900 | // * Optionally if some extra data is stored in FunctionTypeExtraBitfields |
3901 | // (see FunctionTypeExtraBitfields and FunctionTypeBitfields): |
3902 | // a single FunctionTypeExtraBitfields. Present if and only if |
3903 | // hasExtraBitfields() is true. |
3904 | // |
3905 | // * Optionally exactly one of: |
3906 | // * an array of getNumExceptions() ExceptionType, |
3907 | // * a single Expr *, |
3908 | // * a pair of FunctionDecl *, |
3909 | // * a single FunctionDecl * |
3910 | // used to store information about the various types of exception |
3911 | // specification. See getExceptionSpecSize for the details. |
3912 | // |
3913 | // * Optionally an array of getNumParams() ExtParameterInfo holding |
3914 | // an ExtParameterInfo for each of the parameters. Present if and |
3915 | // only if hasExtParameterInfos() is true. |
3916 | // |
3917 | // * Optionally a Qualifiers object to represent extra qualifiers that can't |
3918 | // be represented by FunctionTypeBitfields.FastTypeQuals. Present if and only |
3919 | // if hasExtQualifiers() is true. |
3920 | // |
3921 | // The optional FunctionTypeExtraBitfields has to be before the data |
3922 | // related to the exception specification since it contains the number |
3923 | // of exception types. |
3924 | // |
3925 | // We put the ExtParameterInfos last. If all were equal, it would make |
3926 | // more sense to put these before the exception specification, because |
3927 | // it's much easier to skip past them compared to the elaborate switch |
3928 | // required to skip the exception specification. However, all is not |
3929 | // equal; ExtParameterInfos are used to model very uncommon features, |
3930 | // and it's better not to burden the more common paths. |
3931 | |
3932 | public: |
3933 | /// Holds information about the various types of exception specification. |
3934 | /// ExceptionSpecInfo is not stored as such in FunctionProtoType but is |
3935 | /// used to group together the various bits of information about the |
3936 | /// exception specification. |
3937 | struct ExceptionSpecInfo { |
3938 | /// The kind of exception specification this is. |
3939 | ExceptionSpecificationType Type = EST_None; |
3940 | |
3941 | /// Explicitly-specified list of exception types. |
3942 | ArrayRef<QualType> Exceptions; |
3943 | |
3944 | /// Noexcept expression, if this is a computed noexcept specification. |
3945 | Expr *NoexceptExpr = nullptr; |
3946 | |
3947 | /// The function whose exception specification this is, for |
3948 | /// EST_Unevaluated and EST_Uninstantiated. |
3949 | FunctionDecl *SourceDecl = nullptr; |
3950 | |
3951 | /// The function template whose exception specification this is instantiated |
3952 | /// from, for EST_Uninstantiated. |
3953 | FunctionDecl *SourceTemplate = nullptr; |
3954 | |
3955 | ExceptionSpecInfo() = default; |
3956 | |
3957 | ExceptionSpecInfo(ExceptionSpecificationType EST) : Type(EST) {} |
3958 | }; |
3959 | |
3960 | /// Extra information about a function prototype. ExtProtoInfo is not |
3961 | /// stored as such in FunctionProtoType but is used to group together |
3962 | /// the various bits of extra information about a function prototype. |
3963 | struct ExtProtoInfo { |
3964 | FunctionType::ExtInfo ExtInfo; |
3965 | bool Variadic : 1; |
3966 | bool HasTrailingReturn : 1; |
3967 | Qualifiers TypeQuals; |
3968 | RefQualifierKind RefQualifier = RQ_None; |
3969 | ExceptionSpecInfo ExceptionSpec; |
3970 | const ExtParameterInfo *ExtParameterInfos = nullptr; |
3971 | SourceLocation EllipsisLoc; |
3972 | |
3973 | ExtProtoInfo() : Variadic(false), HasTrailingReturn(false) {} |
3974 | |
3975 | ExtProtoInfo(CallingConv CC) |
3976 | : ExtInfo(CC), Variadic(false), HasTrailingReturn(false) {} |
3977 | |
3978 | ExtProtoInfo withExceptionSpec(const ExceptionSpecInfo &ESI) { |
3979 | ExtProtoInfo Result(*this); |
3980 | Result.ExceptionSpec = ESI; |
3981 | return Result; |
3982 | } |
3983 | }; |
3984 | |
3985 | private: |
3986 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<QualType>) const { |
3987 | return getNumParams(); |
3988 | } |
3989 | |
3990 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<SourceLocation>) const { |
3991 | return isVariadic(); |
3992 | } |
3993 | |
3994 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<FunctionTypeExtraBitfields>) const { |
3995 | return hasExtraBitfields(); |
3996 | } |
3997 | |
3998 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<ExceptionType>) const { |
3999 | return getExceptionSpecSize().NumExceptionType; |
4000 | } |
4001 | |
4002 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<Expr *>) const { |
4003 | return getExceptionSpecSize().NumExprPtr; |
4004 | } |
4005 | |
4006 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<FunctionDecl *>) const { |
4007 | return getExceptionSpecSize().NumFunctionDeclPtr; |
4008 | } |
4009 | |
4010 | unsigned numTrailingObjects(OverloadToken<ExtParameterInfo>) const { |
4011 | return hasExtParameterInfos() ? getNumParams() : 0; |
4012 | } |
4013 | |
4014 | /// Determine whether there are any argument types that |
4015 | /// contain an unexpanded parameter pack. |
4016 | static bool containsAnyUnexpandedParameterPack(const QualType *ArgArray, |
4017 | unsigned numArgs) { |
4018 | for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx < numArgs; ++Idx) |
4019 | if (ArgArray[Idx]->containsUnexpandedParameterPack()) |
4020 | return true; |
4021 | |
4022 | return false; |
4023 | } |
4024 | |
4025 | FunctionProtoType(QualType result, ArrayRef<QualType> params, |
4026 | QualType canonical, const ExtProtoInfo &epi); |
4027 | |
4028 | /// This struct is returned by getExceptionSpecSize and is used to |
4029 | /// translate an ExceptionSpecificationType to the number and kind |
4030 | /// of trailing objects related to the exception specification. |
4031 | struct ExceptionSpecSizeHolder { |
4032 | unsigned NumExceptionType; |
4033 | unsigned NumExprPtr; |
4034 | unsigned NumFunctionDeclPtr; |
4035 | }; |
4036 | |
4037 | /// Return the number and kind of trailing objects |
4038 | /// related to the exception specification. |
4039 | static ExceptionSpecSizeHolder |
4040 | getExceptionSpecSize(ExceptionSpecificationType EST, unsigned NumExceptions) { |
4041 | switch (EST) { |
4042 | case EST_None: |
4043 | case EST_DynamicNone: |
4044 | case EST_MSAny: |
4045 | case EST_BasicNoexcept: |
4046 | case EST_Unparsed: |
4047 | case EST_NoThrow: |
4048 | return {0, 0, 0}; |
4049 | |
4050 | case EST_Dynamic: |
4051 | return {NumExceptions, 0, 0}; |
4052 | |
4053 | case EST_DependentNoexcept: |
4054 | case EST_NoexceptFalse: |
4055 | case EST_NoexceptTrue: |
4056 | return {0, 1, 0}; |
4057 | |
4058 | case EST_Uninstantiated: |
4059 | return {0, 0, 2}; |
4060 | |
4061 | case EST_Unevaluated: |
4062 | return {0, 0, 1}; |
4063 | } |
4064 | llvm_unreachable("bad exception specification kind")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("bad exception specification kind" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4064); |
4065 | } |
4066 | |
4067 | /// Return the number and kind of trailing objects |
4068 | /// related to the exception specification. |
4069 | ExceptionSpecSizeHolder getExceptionSpecSize() const { |
4070 | return getExceptionSpecSize(getExceptionSpecType(), getNumExceptions()); |
4071 | } |
4072 | |
4073 | /// Whether the trailing FunctionTypeExtraBitfields is present. |
4074 | static bool hasExtraBitfields(ExceptionSpecificationType EST) { |
4075 | // If the exception spec type is EST_Dynamic then we have > 0 exception |
4076 | // types and the exact number is stored in FunctionTypeExtraBitfields. |
4077 | return EST == EST_Dynamic; |
4078 | } |
4079 | |
4080 | /// Whether the trailing FunctionTypeExtraBitfields is present. |
4081 | bool hasExtraBitfields() const { |
4082 | return hasExtraBitfields(getExceptionSpecType()); |
4083 | } |
4084 | |
4085 | bool hasExtQualifiers() const { |
4086 | return FunctionTypeBits.HasExtQuals; |
4087 | } |
4088 | |
4089 | public: |
4090 | unsigned getNumParams() const { return FunctionTypeBits.NumParams; } |
4091 | |
4092 | QualType getParamType(unsigned i) const { |
4093 | assert(i < getNumParams() && "invalid parameter index")((i < getNumParams() && "invalid parameter index") ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("i < getNumParams() && \"invalid parameter index\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4093, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4094 | return param_type_begin()[i]; |
4095 | } |
4096 | |
4097 | ArrayRef<QualType> getParamTypes() const { |
4098 | return llvm::makeArrayRef(param_type_begin(), param_type_end()); |
4099 | } |
4100 | |
4101 | ExtProtoInfo getExtProtoInfo() const { |
4102 | ExtProtoInfo EPI; |
4103 | EPI.ExtInfo = getExtInfo(); |
4104 | EPI.Variadic = isVariadic(); |
4105 | EPI.EllipsisLoc = getEllipsisLoc(); |
4106 | EPI.HasTrailingReturn = hasTrailingReturn(); |
4107 | EPI.ExceptionSpec = getExceptionSpecInfo(); |
4108 | EPI.TypeQuals = getMethodQuals(); |
4109 | EPI.RefQualifier = getRefQualifier(); |
4110 | EPI.ExtParameterInfos = getExtParameterInfosOrNull(); |
4111 | return EPI; |
4112 | } |
4113 | |
4114 | /// Get the kind of exception specification on this function. |
4115 | ExceptionSpecificationType getExceptionSpecType() const { |
4116 | return static_cast<ExceptionSpecificationType>( |
4117 | FunctionTypeBits.ExceptionSpecType); |
4118 | } |
4119 | |
4120 | /// Return whether this function has any kind of exception spec. |
4121 | bool hasExceptionSpec() const { return getExceptionSpecType() != EST_None; } |
4122 | |
4123 | /// Return whether this function has a dynamic (throw) exception spec. |
4124 | bool hasDynamicExceptionSpec() const { |
4125 | return isDynamicExceptionSpec(getExceptionSpecType()); |
4126 | } |
4127 | |
4128 | /// Return whether this function has a noexcept exception spec. |
4129 | bool hasNoexceptExceptionSpec() const { |
4130 | return isNoexceptExceptionSpec(getExceptionSpecType()); |
4131 | } |
4132 | |
4133 | /// Return whether this function has a dependent exception spec. |
4134 | bool hasDependentExceptionSpec() const; |
4135 | |
4136 | /// Return whether this function has an instantiation-dependent exception |
4137 | /// spec. |
4138 | bool hasInstantiationDependentExceptionSpec() const; |
4139 | |
4140 | /// Return all the available information about this type's exception spec. |
4141 | ExceptionSpecInfo getExceptionSpecInfo() const { |
4142 | ExceptionSpecInfo Result; |
4143 | Result.Type = getExceptionSpecType(); |
4144 | if (Result.Type == EST_Dynamic) { |
4145 | Result.Exceptions = exceptions(); |
4146 | } else if (isComputedNoexcept(Result.Type)) { |
4147 | Result.NoexceptExpr = getNoexceptExpr(); |
4148 | } else if (Result.Type == EST_Uninstantiated) { |
4149 | Result.SourceDecl = getExceptionSpecDecl(); |
4150 | Result.SourceTemplate = getExceptionSpecTemplate(); |
4151 | } else if (Result.Type == EST_Unevaluated) { |
4152 | Result.SourceDecl = getExceptionSpecDecl(); |
4153 | } |
4154 | return Result; |
4155 | } |
4156 | |
4157 | /// Return the number of types in the exception specification. |
4158 | unsigned getNumExceptions() const { |
4159 | return getExceptionSpecType() == EST_Dynamic |
4160 | ? getTrailingObjects<FunctionTypeExtraBitfields>() |
4161 | ->NumExceptionType |
4162 | : 0; |
4163 | } |
4164 | |
4165 | /// Return the ith exception type, where 0 <= i < getNumExceptions(). |
4166 | QualType getExceptionType(unsigned i) const { |
4167 | assert(i < getNumExceptions() && "Invalid exception number!")((i < getNumExceptions() && "Invalid exception number!" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("i < getNumExceptions() && \"Invalid exception number!\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4167, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4168 | return exception_begin()[i]; |
4169 | } |
4170 | |
4171 | /// Return the expression inside noexcept(expression), or a null pointer |
4172 | /// if there is none (because the exception spec is not of this form). |
4173 | Expr *getNoexceptExpr() const { |
4174 | if (!isComputedNoexcept(getExceptionSpecType())) |
4175 | return nullptr; |
4176 | return *getTrailingObjects<Expr *>(); |
4177 | } |
4178 | |
4179 | /// If this function type has an exception specification which hasn't |
4180 | /// been determined yet (either because it has not been evaluated or because |
4181 | /// it has not been instantiated), this is the function whose exception |
4182 | /// specification is represented by this type. |
4183 | FunctionDecl *getExceptionSpecDecl() const { |
4184 | if (getExceptionSpecType() != EST_Uninstantiated && |
4185 | getExceptionSpecType() != EST_Unevaluated) |
4186 | return nullptr; |
4187 | return getTrailingObjects<FunctionDecl *>()[0]; |
4188 | } |
4189 | |
4190 | /// If this function type has an uninstantiated exception |
4191 | /// specification, this is the function whose exception specification |
4192 | /// should be instantiated to find the exception specification for |
4193 | /// this type. |
4194 | FunctionDecl *getExceptionSpecTemplate() const { |
4195 | if (getExceptionSpecType() != EST_Uninstantiated) |
4196 | return nullptr; |
4197 | return getTrailingObjects<FunctionDecl *>()[1]; |
4198 | } |
4199 | |
4200 | /// Determine whether this function type has a non-throwing exception |
4201 | /// specification. |
4202 | CanThrowResult canThrow() const; |
4203 | |
4204 | /// Determine whether this function type has a non-throwing exception |
4205 | /// specification. If this depends on template arguments, returns |
4206 | /// \c ResultIfDependent. |
4207 | bool isNothrow(bool ResultIfDependent = false) const { |
4208 | return ResultIfDependent ? canThrow() != CT_Can : canThrow() == CT_Cannot; |
4209 | } |
4210 | |
4211 | /// Whether this function prototype is variadic. |
4212 | bool isVariadic() const { return FunctionTypeBits.Variadic; } |
4213 | |
4214 | SourceLocation getEllipsisLoc() const { |
4215 | return isVariadic() ? *getTrailingObjects<SourceLocation>() |
4216 | : SourceLocation(); |
4217 | } |
4218 | |
4219 | /// Determines whether this function prototype contains a |
4220 | /// parameter pack at the end. |
4221 | /// |
4222 | /// A function template whose last parameter is a parameter pack can be |
4223 | /// called with an arbitrary number of arguments, much like a variadic |
4224 | /// function. |
4225 | bool isTemplateVariadic() const; |
4226 | |
4227 | /// Whether this function prototype has a trailing return type. |
4228 | bool hasTrailingReturn() const { return FunctionTypeBits.HasTrailingReturn; } |
4229 | |
4230 | Qualifiers getMethodQuals() const { |
4231 | if (hasExtQualifiers()) |
4232 | return *getTrailingObjects<Qualifiers>(); |
4233 | else |
4234 | return getFastTypeQuals(); |
4235 | } |
4236 | |
4237 | /// Retrieve the ref-qualifier associated with this function type. |
4238 | RefQualifierKind getRefQualifier() const { |
4239 | return static_cast<RefQualifierKind>(FunctionTypeBits.RefQualifier); |
4240 | } |
4241 | |
4242 | using param_type_iterator = const QualType *; |
4243 | using param_type_range = llvm::iterator_range<param_type_iterator>; |
4244 | |
4245 | param_type_range param_types() const { |
4246 | return param_type_range(param_type_begin(), param_type_end()); |
4247 | } |
4248 | |
4249 | param_type_iterator param_type_begin() const { |
4250 | return getTrailingObjects<QualType>(); |
4251 | } |
4252 | |
4253 | param_type_iterator param_type_end() const { |
4254 | return param_type_begin() + getNumParams(); |
4255 | } |
4256 | |
4257 | using exception_iterator = const QualType *; |
4258 | |
4259 | ArrayRef<QualType> exceptions() const { |
4260 | return llvm::makeArrayRef(exception_begin(), exception_end()); |
4261 | } |
4262 | |
4263 | exception_iterator exception_begin() const { |
4264 | return reinterpret_cast<exception_iterator>( |
4265 | getTrailingObjects<ExceptionType>()); |
4266 | } |
4267 | |
4268 | exception_iterator exception_end() const { |
4269 | return exception_begin() + getNumExceptions(); |
4270 | } |
4271 | |
4272 | /// Is there any interesting extra information for any of the parameters |
4273 | /// of this function type? |
4274 | bool hasExtParameterInfos() const { |
4275 | return FunctionTypeBits.HasExtParameterInfos; |
4276 | } |
4277 | |
4278 | ArrayRef<ExtParameterInfo> getExtParameterInfos() const { |
4279 | assert(hasExtParameterInfos())((hasExtParameterInfos()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("hasExtParameterInfos()", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4279, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4280 | return ArrayRef<ExtParameterInfo>(getTrailingObjects<ExtParameterInfo>(), |
4281 | getNumParams()); |
4282 | } |
4283 | |
4284 | /// Return a pointer to the beginning of the array of extra parameter |
4285 | /// information, if present, or else null if none of the parameters |
4286 | /// carry it. This is equivalent to getExtProtoInfo().ExtParameterInfos. |
4287 | const ExtParameterInfo *getExtParameterInfosOrNull() const { |
4288 | if (!hasExtParameterInfos()) |
4289 | return nullptr; |
4290 | return getTrailingObjects<ExtParameterInfo>(); |
4291 | } |
4292 | |
4293 | ExtParameterInfo getExtParameterInfo(unsigned I) const { |
4294 | assert(I < getNumParams() && "parameter index out of range")((I < getNumParams() && "parameter index out of range" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("I < getNumParams() && \"parameter index out of range\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4294, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4295 | if (hasExtParameterInfos()) |
4296 | return getTrailingObjects<ExtParameterInfo>()[I]; |
4297 | return ExtParameterInfo(); |
4298 | } |
4299 | |
4300 | ParameterABI getParameterABI(unsigned I) const { |
4301 | assert(I < getNumParams() && "parameter index out of range")((I < getNumParams() && "parameter index out of range" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("I < getNumParams() && \"parameter index out of range\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4301, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4302 | if (hasExtParameterInfos()) |
4303 | return getTrailingObjects<ExtParameterInfo>()[I].getABI(); |
4304 | return ParameterABI::Ordinary; |
4305 | } |
4306 | |
4307 | bool isParamConsumed(unsigned I) const { |
4308 | assert(I < getNumParams() && "parameter index out of range")((I < getNumParams() && "parameter index out of range" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("I < getNumParams() && \"parameter index out of range\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4308, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4309 | if (hasExtParameterInfos()) |
4310 | return getTrailingObjects<ExtParameterInfo>()[I].isConsumed(); |
4311 | return false; |
4312 | } |
4313 | |
4314 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
4315 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
4316 | |
4317 | void printExceptionSpecification(raw_ostream &OS, |
4318 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy) const; |
4319 | |
4320 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4321 | return T->getTypeClass() == FunctionProto; |
4322 | } |
4323 | |
4324 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Ctx); |
4325 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Result, |
4326 | param_type_iterator ArgTys, unsigned NumArgs, |
4327 | const ExtProtoInfo &EPI, const ASTContext &Context, |
4328 | bool Canonical); |
4329 | }; |
4330 | |
4331 | /// Represents the dependent type named by a dependently-scoped |
4332 | /// typename using declaration, e.g. |
4333 | /// using typename Base<T>::foo; |
4334 | /// |
4335 | /// Template instantiation turns these into the underlying type. |
4336 | class UnresolvedUsingType : public Type { |
4337 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4338 | |
4339 | UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Decl; |
4340 | |
4341 | UnresolvedUsingType(const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *D) |
4342 | : Type(UnresolvedUsing, QualType(), |
4343 | TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation), |
4344 | Decl(const_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *>(D)) {} |
4345 | |
4346 | public: |
4347 | UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *getDecl() const { return Decl; } |
4348 | |
4349 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
4350 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
4351 | |
4352 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4353 | return T->getTypeClass() == UnresolvedUsing; |
4354 | } |
4355 | |
4356 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4357 | return Profile(ID, Decl); |
4358 | } |
4359 | |
4360 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
4361 | UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *D) { |
4362 | ID.AddPointer(D); |
4363 | } |
4364 | }; |
4365 | |
4366 | class TypedefType : public Type { |
4367 | TypedefNameDecl *Decl; |
4368 | |
4369 | private: |
4370 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4371 | |
4372 | TypedefType(TypeClass tc, const TypedefNameDecl *D, QualType underlying, |
4373 | QualType can); |
4374 | |
4375 | public: |
4376 | TypedefNameDecl *getDecl() const { return Decl; } |
4377 | |
4378 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
4379 | QualType desugar() const; |
4380 | |
4381 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Typedef; } |
4382 | }; |
4383 | |
4384 | /// Sugar type that represents a type that was qualified by a qualifier written |
4385 | /// as a macro invocation. |
4386 | class MacroQualifiedType : public Type { |
4387 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4388 | |
4389 | QualType UnderlyingTy; |
4390 | const IdentifierInfo *MacroII; |
4391 | |
4392 | MacroQualifiedType(QualType UnderlyingTy, QualType CanonTy, |
4393 | const IdentifierInfo *MacroII) |
4394 | : Type(MacroQualified, CanonTy, UnderlyingTy->getDependence()), |
4395 | UnderlyingTy(UnderlyingTy), MacroII(MacroII) { |
4396 | assert(isa<AttributedType>(UnderlyingTy) &&((isa<AttributedType>(UnderlyingTy) && "Expected a macro qualified type to only wrap attributed types." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<AttributedType>(UnderlyingTy) && \"Expected a macro qualified type to only wrap attributed types.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4397, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
4397 | "Expected a macro qualified type to only wrap attributed types.")((isa<AttributedType>(UnderlyingTy) && "Expected a macro qualified type to only wrap attributed types." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<AttributedType>(UnderlyingTy) && \"Expected a macro qualified type to only wrap attributed types.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4397, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4398 | } |
4399 | |
4400 | public: |
4401 | const IdentifierInfo *getMacroIdentifier() const { return MacroII; } |
4402 | QualType getUnderlyingType() const { return UnderlyingTy; } |
4403 | |
4404 | /// Return this attributed type's modified type with no qualifiers attached to |
4405 | /// it. |
4406 | QualType getModifiedType() const; |
4407 | |
4408 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
4409 | QualType desugar() const; |
4410 | |
4411 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4412 | return T->getTypeClass() == MacroQualified; |
4413 | } |
4414 | }; |
4415 | |
4416 | /// Represents a `typeof` (or __typeof__) expression (a GCC extension). |
4417 | class TypeOfExprType : public Type { |
4418 | Expr *TOExpr; |
4419 | |
4420 | protected: |
4421 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4422 | |
4423 | TypeOfExprType(Expr *E, QualType can = QualType()); |
4424 | |
4425 | public: |
4426 | Expr *getUnderlyingExpr() const { return TOExpr; } |
4427 | |
4428 | /// Remove a single level of sugar. |
4429 | QualType desugar() const; |
4430 | |
4431 | /// Returns whether this type directly provides sugar. |
4432 | bool isSugared() const; |
4433 | |
4434 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == TypeOfExpr; } |
4435 | }; |
4436 | |
4437 | /// Internal representation of canonical, dependent |
4438 | /// `typeof(expr)` types. |
4439 | /// |
4440 | /// This class is used internally by the ASTContext to manage |
4441 | /// canonical, dependent types, only. Clients will only see instances |
4442 | /// of this class via TypeOfExprType nodes. |
4443 | class DependentTypeOfExprType |
4444 | : public TypeOfExprType, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4445 | const ASTContext &Context; |
4446 | |
4447 | public: |
4448 | DependentTypeOfExprType(const ASTContext &Context, Expr *E) |
4449 | : TypeOfExprType(E), Context(Context) {} |
4450 | |
4451 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4452 | Profile(ID, Context, getUnderlyingExpr()); |
4453 | } |
4454 | |
4455 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
4456 | Expr *E); |
4457 | }; |
4458 | |
4459 | /// Represents `typeof(type)`, a GCC extension. |
4460 | class TypeOfType : public Type { |
4461 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4462 | |
4463 | QualType TOType; |
4464 | |
4465 | TypeOfType(QualType T, QualType can) |
4466 | : Type(TypeOf, can, T->getDependence()), TOType(T) { |
4467 | assert(!isa<TypedefType>(can) && "Invalid canonical type")((!isa<TypedefType>(can) && "Invalid canonical type" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!isa<TypedefType>(can) && \"Invalid canonical type\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4467, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
4468 | } |
4469 | |
4470 | public: |
4471 | QualType getUnderlyingType() const { return TOType; } |
4472 | |
4473 | /// Remove a single level of sugar. |
4474 | QualType desugar() const { return getUnderlyingType(); } |
4475 | |
4476 | /// Returns whether this type directly provides sugar. |
4477 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
4478 | |
4479 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == TypeOf; } |
4480 | }; |
4481 | |
4482 | /// Represents the type `decltype(expr)` (C++11). |
4483 | class DecltypeType : public Type { |
4484 | Expr *E; |
4485 | QualType UnderlyingType; |
4486 | |
4487 | protected: |
4488 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4489 | |
4490 | DecltypeType(Expr *E, QualType underlyingType, QualType can = QualType()); |
4491 | |
4492 | public: |
4493 | Expr *getUnderlyingExpr() const { return E; } |
4494 | QualType getUnderlyingType() const { return UnderlyingType; } |
4495 | |
4496 | /// Remove a single level of sugar. |
4497 | QualType desugar() const; |
4498 | |
4499 | /// Returns whether this type directly provides sugar. |
4500 | bool isSugared() const; |
4501 | |
4502 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Decltype; } |
4503 | }; |
4504 | |
4505 | /// Internal representation of canonical, dependent |
4506 | /// decltype(expr) types. |
4507 | /// |
4508 | /// This class is used internally by the ASTContext to manage |
4509 | /// canonical, dependent types, only. Clients will only see instances |
4510 | /// of this class via DecltypeType nodes. |
4511 | class DependentDecltypeType : public DecltypeType, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4512 | const ASTContext &Context; |
4513 | |
4514 | public: |
4515 | DependentDecltypeType(const ASTContext &Context, Expr *E); |
4516 | |
4517 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4518 | Profile(ID, Context, getUnderlyingExpr()); |
4519 | } |
4520 | |
4521 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
4522 | Expr *E); |
4523 | }; |
4524 | |
4525 | /// A unary type transform, which is a type constructed from another. |
4526 | class UnaryTransformType : public Type { |
4527 | public: |
4528 | enum UTTKind { |
4529 | EnumUnderlyingType |
4530 | }; |
4531 | |
4532 | private: |
4533 | /// The untransformed type. |
4534 | QualType BaseType; |
4535 | |
4536 | /// The transformed type if not dependent, otherwise the same as BaseType. |
4537 | QualType UnderlyingType; |
4538 | |
4539 | UTTKind UKind; |
4540 | |
4541 | protected: |
4542 | friend class ASTContext; |
4543 | |
4544 | UnaryTransformType(QualType BaseTy, QualType UnderlyingTy, UTTKind UKind, |
4545 | QualType CanonicalTy); |
4546 | |
4547 | public: |
4548 | bool isSugared() const { return !isDependentType(); } |
4549 | QualType desugar() const { return UnderlyingType; } |
4550 | |
4551 | QualType getUnderlyingType() const { return UnderlyingType; } |
4552 | QualType getBaseType() const { return BaseType; } |
4553 | |
4554 | UTTKind getUTTKind() const { return UKind; } |
4555 | |
4556 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4557 | return T->getTypeClass() == UnaryTransform; |
4558 | } |
4559 | }; |
4560 | |
4561 | /// Internal representation of canonical, dependent |
4562 | /// __underlying_type(type) types. |
4563 | /// |
4564 | /// This class is used internally by the ASTContext to manage |
4565 | /// canonical, dependent types, only. Clients will only see instances |
4566 | /// of this class via UnaryTransformType nodes. |
4567 | class DependentUnaryTransformType : public UnaryTransformType, |
4568 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4569 | public: |
4570 | DependentUnaryTransformType(const ASTContext &C, QualType BaseType, |
4571 | UTTKind UKind); |
4572 | |
4573 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4574 | Profile(ID, getBaseType(), getUTTKind()); |
4575 | } |
4576 | |
4577 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType BaseType, |
4578 | UTTKind UKind) { |
4579 | ID.AddPointer(BaseType.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
4580 | ID.AddInteger((unsigned)UKind); |
4581 | } |
4582 | }; |
4583 | |
4584 | class TagType : public Type { |
4585 | friend class ASTReader; |
4586 | template <class T> friend class serialization::AbstractTypeReader; |
4587 | |
4588 | /// Stores the TagDecl associated with this type. The decl may point to any |
4589 | /// TagDecl that declares the entity. |
4590 | TagDecl *decl; |
4591 | |
4592 | protected: |
4593 | TagType(TypeClass TC, const TagDecl *D, QualType can); |
4594 | |
4595 | public: |
4596 | TagDecl *getDecl() const; |
4597 | |
4598 | /// Determines whether this type is in the process of being defined. |
4599 | bool isBeingDefined() const; |
4600 | |
4601 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4602 | return T->getTypeClass() == Enum || T->getTypeClass() == Record; |
4603 | } |
4604 | }; |
4605 | |
4606 | /// A helper class that allows the use of isa/cast/dyncast |
4607 | /// to detect TagType objects of structs/unions/classes. |
4608 | class RecordType : public TagType { |
4609 | protected: |
4610 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4611 | |
4612 | explicit RecordType(const RecordDecl *D) |
4613 | : TagType(Record, reinterpret_cast<const TagDecl*>(D), QualType()) {} |
4614 | explicit RecordType(TypeClass TC, RecordDecl *D) |
4615 | : TagType(TC, reinterpret_cast<const TagDecl*>(D), QualType()) {} |
4616 | |
4617 | public: |
4618 | RecordDecl *getDecl() const { |
4619 | return reinterpret_cast<RecordDecl*>(TagType::getDecl()); |
4620 | } |
4621 | |
4622 | /// Recursively check all fields in the record for const-ness. If any field |
4623 | /// is declared const, return true. Otherwise, return false. |
4624 | bool hasConstFields() const; |
4625 | |
4626 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
4627 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
4628 | |
4629 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Record; } |
4630 | }; |
4631 | |
4632 | /// A helper class that allows the use of isa/cast/dyncast |
4633 | /// to detect TagType objects of enums. |
4634 | class EnumType : public TagType { |
4635 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
4636 | |
4637 | explicit EnumType(const EnumDecl *D) |
4638 | : TagType(Enum, reinterpret_cast<const TagDecl*>(D), QualType()) {} |
4639 | |
4640 | public: |
4641 | EnumDecl *getDecl() const { |
4642 | return reinterpret_cast<EnumDecl*>(TagType::getDecl()); |
4643 | } |
4644 | |
4645 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
4646 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
4647 | |
4648 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Enum; } |
4649 | }; |
4650 | |
4651 | /// An attributed type is a type to which a type attribute has been applied. |
4652 | /// |
4653 | /// The "modified type" is the fully-sugared type to which the attributed |
4654 | /// type was applied; generally it is not canonically equivalent to the |
4655 | /// attributed type. The "equivalent type" is the minimally-desugared type |
4656 | /// which the type is canonically equivalent to. |
4657 | /// |
4658 | /// For example, in the following attributed type: |
4659 | /// int32_t __attribute__((vector_size(16))) |
4660 | /// - the modified type is the TypedefType for int32_t |
4661 | /// - the equivalent type is VectorType(16, int32_t) |
4662 | /// - the canonical type is VectorType(16, int) |
4663 | class AttributedType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4664 | public: |
4665 | using Kind = attr::Kind; |
4666 | |
4667 | private: |
4668 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
4669 | |
4670 | QualType ModifiedType; |
4671 | QualType EquivalentType; |
4672 | |
4673 | AttributedType(QualType canon, attr::Kind attrKind, QualType modified, |
4674 | QualType equivalent) |
4675 | : Type(Attributed, canon, equivalent->getDependence()), |
4676 | ModifiedType(modified), EquivalentType(equivalent) { |
4677 | AttributedTypeBits.AttrKind = attrKind; |
4678 | } |
4679 | |
4680 | public: |
4681 | Kind getAttrKind() const { |
4682 | return static_cast<Kind>(AttributedTypeBits.AttrKind); |
4683 | } |
4684 | |
4685 | QualType getModifiedType() const { return ModifiedType; } |
4686 | QualType getEquivalentType() const { return EquivalentType; } |
4687 | |
4688 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
4689 | QualType desugar() const { return getEquivalentType(); } |
4690 | |
4691 | /// Does this attribute behave like a type qualifier? |
4692 | /// |
4693 | /// A type qualifier adjusts a type to provide specialized rules for |
4694 | /// a specific object, like the standard const and volatile qualifiers. |
4695 | /// This includes attributes controlling things like nullability, |
4696 | /// address spaces, and ARC ownership. The value of the object is still |
4697 | /// largely described by the modified type. |
4698 | /// |
4699 | /// In contrast, many type attributes "rewrite" their modified type to |
4700 | /// produce a fundamentally different type, not necessarily related in any |
4701 | /// formalizable way to the original type. For example, calling convention |
4702 | /// and vector attributes are not simple type qualifiers. |
4703 | /// |
4704 | /// Type qualifiers are often, but not always, reflected in the canonical |
4705 | /// type. |
4706 | bool isQualifier() const; |
4707 | |
4708 | bool isMSTypeSpec() const; |
4709 | |
4710 | bool isCallingConv() const; |
4711 | |
4712 | llvm::Optional<NullabilityKind> getImmediateNullability() const; |
4713 | |
4714 | /// Retrieve the attribute kind corresponding to the given |
4715 | /// nullability kind. |
4716 | static Kind getNullabilityAttrKind(NullabilityKind kind) { |
4717 | switch (kind) { |
4718 | case NullabilityKind::NonNull: |
4719 | return attr::TypeNonNull; |
4720 | |
4721 | case NullabilityKind::Nullable: |
4722 | return attr::TypeNullable; |
4723 | |
4724 | case NullabilityKind::NullableResult: |
4725 | return attr::TypeNullableResult; |
4726 | |
4727 | case NullabilityKind::Unspecified: |
4728 | return attr::TypeNullUnspecified; |
4729 | } |
4730 | llvm_unreachable("Unknown nullability kind.")::llvm::llvm_unreachable_internal("Unknown nullability kind." , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 4730); |
4731 | } |
4732 | |
4733 | /// Strip off the top-level nullability annotation on the given |
4734 | /// type, if it's there. |
4735 | /// |
4736 | /// \param T The type to strip. If the type is exactly an |
4737 | /// AttributedType specifying nullability (without looking through |
4738 | /// type sugar), the nullability is returned and this type changed |
4739 | /// to the underlying modified type. |
4740 | /// |
4741 | /// \returns the top-level nullability, if present. |
4742 | static Optional<NullabilityKind> stripOuterNullability(QualType &T); |
4743 | |
4744 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4745 | Profile(ID, getAttrKind(), ModifiedType, EquivalentType); |
4746 | } |
4747 | |
4748 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, Kind attrKind, |
4749 | QualType modified, QualType equivalent) { |
4750 | ID.AddInteger(attrKind); |
4751 | ID.AddPointer(modified.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
4752 | ID.AddPointer(equivalent.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
4753 | } |
4754 | |
4755 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4756 | return T->getTypeClass() == Attributed; |
4757 | } |
4758 | }; |
4759 | |
4760 | class TemplateTypeParmType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4761 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
4762 | |
4763 | // Helper data collector for canonical types. |
4764 | struct CanonicalTTPTInfo { |
4765 | unsigned Depth : 15; |
4766 | unsigned ParameterPack : 1; |
4767 | unsigned Index : 16; |
4768 | }; |
4769 | |
4770 | union { |
4771 | // Info for the canonical type. |
4772 | CanonicalTTPTInfo CanTTPTInfo; |
4773 | |
4774 | // Info for the non-canonical type. |
4775 | TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl; |
4776 | }; |
4777 | |
4778 | /// Build a non-canonical type. |
4779 | TemplateTypeParmType(TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl, QualType Canon) |
4780 | : Type(TemplateTypeParm, Canon, |
4781 | TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation | |
4782 | (Canon->getDependence() & TypeDependence::UnexpandedPack)), |
4783 | TTPDecl(TTPDecl) {} |
4784 | |
4785 | /// Build the canonical type. |
4786 | TemplateTypeParmType(unsigned D, unsigned I, bool PP) |
4787 | : Type(TemplateTypeParm, QualType(this, 0), |
4788 | TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation | |
4789 | (PP ? TypeDependence::UnexpandedPack : TypeDependence::None)) { |
4790 | CanTTPTInfo.Depth = D; |
4791 | CanTTPTInfo.Index = I; |
4792 | CanTTPTInfo.ParameterPack = PP; |
4793 | } |
4794 | |
4795 | const CanonicalTTPTInfo& getCanTTPTInfo() const { |
4796 | QualType Can = getCanonicalTypeInternal(); |
4797 | return Can->castAs<TemplateTypeParmType>()->CanTTPTInfo; |
4798 | } |
4799 | |
4800 | public: |
4801 | unsigned getDepth() const { return getCanTTPTInfo().Depth; } |
4802 | unsigned getIndex() const { return getCanTTPTInfo().Index; } |
4803 | bool isParameterPack() const { return getCanTTPTInfo().ParameterPack; } |
4804 | |
4805 | TemplateTypeParmDecl *getDecl() const { |
4806 | return isCanonicalUnqualified() ? nullptr : TTPDecl; |
4807 | } |
4808 | |
4809 | IdentifierInfo *getIdentifier() const; |
4810 | |
4811 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
4812 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
4813 | |
4814 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4815 | Profile(ID, getDepth(), getIndex(), isParameterPack(), getDecl()); |
4816 | } |
4817 | |
4818 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, unsigned Depth, |
4819 | unsigned Index, bool ParameterPack, |
4820 | TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTPDecl) { |
4821 | ID.AddInteger(Depth); |
4822 | ID.AddInteger(Index); |
4823 | ID.AddBoolean(ParameterPack); |
4824 | ID.AddPointer(TTPDecl); |
4825 | } |
4826 | |
4827 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4828 | return T->getTypeClass() == TemplateTypeParm; |
4829 | } |
4830 | }; |
4831 | |
4832 | /// Represents the result of substituting a type for a template |
4833 | /// type parameter. |
4834 | /// |
4835 | /// Within an instantiated template, all template type parameters have |
4836 | /// been replaced with these. They are used solely to record that a |
4837 | /// type was originally written as a template type parameter; |
4838 | /// therefore they are never canonical. |
4839 | class SubstTemplateTypeParmType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4840 | friend class ASTContext; |
4841 | |
4842 | // The original type parameter. |
4843 | const TemplateTypeParmType *Replaced; |
4844 | |
4845 | SubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Param, QualType Canon) |
4846 | : Type(SubstTemplateTypeParm, Canon, Canon->getDependence()), |
4847 | Replaced(Param) {} |
4848 | |
4849 | public: |
4850 | /// Gets the template parameter that was substituted for. |
4851 | const TemplateTypeParmType *getReplacedParameter() const { |
4852 | return Replaced; |
4853 | } |
4854 | |
4855 | /// Gets the type that was substituted for the template |
4856 | /// parameter. |
4857 | QualType getReplacementType() const { |
4858 | return getCanonicalTypeInternal(); |
4859 | } |
4860 | |
4861 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
4862 | QualType desugar() const { return getReplacementType(); } |
4863 | |
4864 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
4865 | Profile(ID, getReplacedParameter(), getReplacementType()); |
4866 | } |
4867 | |
4868 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
4869 | const TemplateTypeParmType *Replaced, |
4870 | QualType Replacement) { |
4871 | ID.AddPointer(Replaced); |
4872 | ID.AddPointer(Replacement.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
4873 | } |
4874 | |
4875 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4876 | return T->getTypeClass() == SubstTemplateTypeParm; |
4877 | } |
4878 | }; |
4879 | |
4880 | /// Represents the result of substituting a set of types for a template |
4881 | /// type parameter pack. |
4882 | /// |
4883 | /// When a pack expansion in the source code contains multiple parameter packs |
4884 | /// and those parameter packs correspond to different levels of template |
4885 | /// parameter lists, this type node is used to represent a template type |
4886 | /// parameter pack from an outer level, which has already had its argument pack |
4887 | /// substituted but that still lives within a pack expansion that itself |
4888 | /// could not be instantiated. When actually performing a substitution into |
4889 | /// that pack expansion (e.g., when all template parameters have corresponding |
4890 | /// arguments), this type will be replaced with the \c SubstTemplateTypeParmType |
4891 | /// at the current pack substitution index. |
4892 | class SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4893 | friend class ASTContext; |
4894 | |
4895 | /// The original type parameter. |
4896 | const TemplateTypeParmType *Replaced; |
4897 | |
4898 | /// A pointer to the set of template arguments that this |
4899 | /// parameter pack is instantiated with. |
4900 | const TemplateArgument *Arguments; |
4901 | |
4902 | SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Param, |
4903 | QualType Canon, |
4904 | const TemplateArgument &ArgPack); |
4905 | |
4906 | public: |
4907 | IdentifierInfo *getIdentifier() const { return Replaced->getIdentifier(); } |
4908 | |
4909 | /// Gets the template parameter that was substituted for. |
4910 | const TemplateTypeParmType *getReplacedParameter() const { |
4911 | return Replaced; |
4912 | } |
4913 | |
4914 | unsigned getNumArgs() const { |
4915 | return SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypeBits.NumArgs; |
4916 | } |
4917 | |
4918 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
4919 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
4920 | |
4921 | TemplateArgument getArgumentPack() const; |
4922 | |
4923 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID); |
4924 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
4925 | const TemplateTypeParmType *Replaced, |
4926 | const TemplateArgument &ArgPack); |
4927 | |
4928 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4929 | return T->getTypeClass() == SubstTemplateTypeParmPack; |
4930 | } |
4931 | }; |
4932 | |
4933 | /// Common base class for placeholders for types that get replaced by |
4934 | /// placeholder type deduction: C++11 auto, C++14 decltype(auto), C++17 deduced |
4935 | /// class template types, and constrained type names. |
4936 | /// |
4937 | /// These types are usually a placeholder for a deduced type. However, before |
4938 | /// the initializer is attached, or (usually) if the initializer is |
4939 | /// type-dependent, there is no deduced type and the type is canonical. In |
4940 | /// the latter case, it is also a dependent type. |
4941 | class DeducedType : public Type { |
4942 | protected: |
4943 | DeducedType(TypeClass TC, QualType DeducedAsType, |
4944 | TypeDependence ExtraDependence) |
4945 | : Type(TC, |
4946 | // FIXME: Retain the sugared deduced type? |
4947 | DeducedAsType.isNull() ? QualType(this, 0) |
4948 | : DeducedAsType.getCanonicalType(), |
4949 | ExtraDependence | (DeducedAsType.isNull() |
4950 | ? TypeDependence::None |
4951 | : DeducedAsType->getDependence() & |
4952 | ~TypeDependence::VariablyModified)) {} |
4953 | |
4954 | public: |
4955 | bool isSugared() const { return !isCanonicalUnqualified(); } |
4956 | QualType desugar() const { return getCanonicalTypeInternal(); } |
4957 | |
4958 | /// Get the type deduced for this placeholder type, or null if it's |
4959 | /// either not been deduced or was deduced to a dependent type. |
4960 | QualType getDeducedType() const { |
4961 | return !isCanonicalUnqualified() ? getCanonicalTypeInternal() : QualType(); |
4962 | } |
4963 | bool isDeduced() const { |
4964 | return !isCanonicalUnqualified() || isDependentType(); |
4965 | } |
4966 | |
4967 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
4968 | return T->getTypeClass() == Auto || |
4969 | T->getTypeClass() == DeducedTemplateSpecialization; |
4970 | } |
4971 | }; |
4972 | |
4973 | /// Represents a C++11 auto or C++14 decltype(auto) type, possibly constrained |
4974 | /// by a type-constraint. |
4975 | class alignas(8) AutoType : public DeducedType, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
4976 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
4977 | |
4978 | ConceptDecl *TypeConstraintConcept; |
4979 | |
4980 | AutoType(QualType DeducedAsType, AutoTypeKeyword Keyword, |
4981 | TypeDependence ExtraDependence, ConceptDecl *CD, |
4982 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> TypeConstraintArgs); |
4983 | |
4984 | const TemplateArgument *getArgBuffer() const { |
4985 | return reinterpret_cast<const TemplateArgument*>(this+1); |
4986 | } |
4987 | |
4988 | TemplateArgument *getArgBuffer() { |
4989 | return reinterpret_cast<TemplateArgument*>(this+1); |
4990 | } |
4991 | |
4992 | public: |
4993 | /// Retrieve the template arguments. |
4994 | const TemplateArgument *getArgs() const { |
4995 | return getArgBuffer(); |
4996 | } |
4997 | |
4998 | /// Retrieve the number of template arguments. |
4999 | unsigned getNumArgs() const { |
5000 | return AutoTypeBits.NumArgs; |
5001 | } |
5002 | |
5003 | const TemplateArgument &getArg(unsigned Idx) const; // in TemplateBase.h |
5004 | |
5005 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> getTypeConstraintArguments() const { |
5006 | return {getArgs(), getNumArgs()}; |
5007 | } |
5008 | |
5009 | ConceptDecl *getTypeConstraintConcept() const { |
5010 | return TypeConstraintConcept; |
5011 | } |
5012 | |
5013 | bool isConstrained() const { |
5014 | return TypeConstraintConcept != nullptr; |
5015 | } |
5016 | |
5017 | bool isDecltypeAuto() const { |
5018 | return getKeyword() == AutoTypeKeyword::DecltypeAuto; |
5019 | } |
5020 | |
5021 | AutoTypeKeyword getKeyword() const { |
5022 | return (AutoTypeKeyword)AutoTypeBits.Keyword; |
5023 | } |
5024 | |
5025 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context) { |
5026 | Profile(ID, Context, getDeducedType(), getKeyword(), isDependentType(), |
5027 | getTypeConstraintConcept(), getTypeConstraintArguments()); |
5028 | } |
5029 | |
5030 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
5031 | QualType Deduced, AutoTypeKeyword Keyword, |
5032 | bool IsDependent, ConceptDecl *CD, |
5033 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Arguments); |
5034 | |
5035 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5036 | return T->getTypeClass() == Auto; |
5037 | } |
5038 | }; |
5039 | |
5040 | /// Represents a C++17 deduced template specialization type. |
5041 | class DeducedTemplateSpecializationType : public DeducedType, |
5042 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5043 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
5044 | |
5045 | /// The name of the template whose arguments will be deduced. |
5046 | TemplateName Template; |
5047 | |
5048 | DeducedTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, |
5049 | QualType DeducedAsType, |
5050 | bool IsDeducedAsDependent) |
5051 | : DeducedType(DeducedTemplateSpecialization, DeducedAsType, |
5052 | toTypeDependence(Template.getDependence()) | |
5053 | (IsDeducedAsDependent |
5054 | ? TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation |
5055 | : TypeDependence::None)), |
5056 | Template(Template) {} |
5057 | |
5058 | public: |
5059 | /// Retrieve the name of the template that we are deducing. |
5060 | TemplateName getTemplateName() const { return Template;} |
5061 | |
5062 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
5063 | Profile(ID, getTemplateName(), getDeducedType(), isDependentType()); |
5064 | } |
5065 | |
5066 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, TemplateName Template, |
5067 | QualType Deduced, bool IsDependent) { |
5068 | Template.Profile(ID); |
5069 | ID.AddPointer(Deduced.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
5070 | ID.AddBoolean(IsDependent); |
5071 | } |
5072 | |
5073 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5074 | return T->getTypeClass() == DeducedTemplateSpecialization; |
5075 | } |
5076 | }; |
5077 | |
5078 | /// Represents a type template specialization; the template |
5079 | /// must be a class template, a type alias template, or a template |
5080 | /// template parameter. A template which cannot be resolved to one of |
5081 | /// these, e.g. because it is written with a dependent scope |
5082 | /// specifier, is instead represented as a |
5083 | /// @c DependentTemplateSpecializationType. |
5084 | /// |
5085 | /// A non-dependent template specialization type is always "sugar", |
5086 | /// typically for a \c RecordType. For example, a class template |
5087 | /// specialization type of \c vector<int> will refer to a tag type for |
5088 | /// the instantiation \c std::vector<int, std::allocator<int>> |
5089 | /// |
5090 | /// Template specializations are dependent if either the template or |
5091 | /// any of the template arguments are dependent, in which case the |
5092 | /// type may also be canonical. |
5093 | /// |
5094 | /// Instances of this type are allocated with a trailing array of |
5095 | /// TemplateArguments, followed by a QualType representing the |
5096 | /// non-canonical aliased type when the template is a type alias |
5097 | /// template. |
5098 | class alignas(8) TemplateSpecializationType |
5099 | : public Type, |
5100 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5101 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
5102 | |
5103 | /// The name of the template being specialized. This is |
5104 | /// either a TemplateName::Template (in which case it is a |
5105 | /// ClassTemplateDecl*, a TemplateTemplateParmDecl*, or a |
5106 | /// TypeAliasTemplateDecl*), a |
5107 | /// TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParmPack, or a |
5108 | /// TemplateName::SubstTemplateTemplateParm (in which case the |
5109 | /// replacement must, recursively, be one of these). |
5110 | TemplateName Template; |
5111 | |
5112 | TemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName T, |
5113 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Args, |
5114 | QualType Canon, |
5115 | QualType Aliased); |
5116 | |
5117 | public: |
5118 | /// Determine whether any of the given template arguments are dependent. |
5119 | /// |
5120 | /// The converted arguments should be supplied when known; whether an |
5121 | /// argument is dependent can depend on the conversions performed on it |
5122 | /// (for example, a 'const int' passed as a template argument might be |
5123 | /// dependent if the parameter is a reference but non-dependent if the |
5124 | /// parameter is an int). |
5125 | /// |
5126 | /// Note that the \p Args parameter is unused: this is intentional, to remind |
5127 | /// the caller that they need to pass in the converted arguments, not the |
5128 | /// specified arguments. |
5129 | static bool |
5130 | anyDependentTemplateArguments(ArrayRef<TemplateArgumentLoc> Args, |
5131 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Converted); |
5132 | static bool |
5133 | anyDependentTemplateArguments(const TemplateArgumentListInfo &, |
5134 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Converted); |
5135 | static bool anyInstantiationDependentTemplateArguments( |
5136 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgumentLoc> Args); |
5137 | |
5138 | /// True if this template specialization type matches a current |
5139 | /// instantiation in the context in which it is found. |
5140 | bool isCurrentInstantiation() const { |
5141 | return isa<InjectedClassNameType>(getCanonicalTypeInternal()); |
5142 | } |
5143 | |
5144 | /// Determine if this template specialization type is for a type alias |
5145 | /// template that has been substituted. |
5146 | /// |
5147 | /// Nearly every template specialization type whose template is an alias |
5148 | /// template will be substituted. However, this is not the case when |
5149 | /// the specialization contains a pack expansion but the template alias |
5150 | /// does not have a corresponding parameter pack, e.g., |
5151 | /// |
5152 | /// \code |
5153 | /// template<typename T, typename U, typename V> struct S; |
5154 | /// template<typename T, typename U> using A = S<T, int, U>; |
5155 | /// template<typename... Ts> struct X { |
5156 | /// typedef A<Ts...> type; // not a type alias |
5157 | /// }; |
5158 | /// \endcode |
5159 | bool isTypeAlias() const { return TemplateSpecializationTypeBits.TypeAlias; } |
5160 | |
5161 | /// Get the aliased type, if this is a specialization of a type alias |
5162 | /// template. |
5163 | QualType getAliasedType() const { |
5164 | assert(isTypeAlias() && "not a type alias template specialization")((isTypeAlias() && "not a type alias template specialization" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isTypeAlias() && \"not a type alias template specialization\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5164, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5165 | return *reinterpret_cast<const QualType*>(end()); |
5166 | } |
5167 | |
5168 | using iterator = const TemplateArgument *; |
5169 | |
5170 | iterator begin() const { return getArgs(); } |
5171 | iterator end() const; // defined inline in TemplateBase.h |
5172 | |
5173 | /// Retrieve the name of the template that we are specializing. |
5174 | TemplateName getTemplateName() const { return Template; } |
5175 | |
5176 | /// Retrieve the template arguments. |
5177 | const TemplateArgument *getArgs() const { |
5178 | return reinterpret_cast<const TemplateArgument *>(this + 1); |
5179 | } |
5180 | |
5181 | /// Retrieve the number of template arguments. |
5182 | unsigned getNumArgs() const { |
5183 | return TemplateSpecializationTypeBits.NumArgs; |
5184 | } |
5185 | |
5186 | /// Retrieve a specific template argument as a type. |
5187 | /// \pre \c isArgType(Arg) |
5188 | const TemplateArgument &getArg(unsigned Idx) const; // in TemplateBase.h |
5189 | |
5190 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> template_arguments() const { |
5191 | return {getArgs(), getNumArgs()}; |
5192 | } |
5193 | |
5194 | bool isSugared() const { |
5195 | return !isDependentType() || isCurrentInstantiation() || isTypeAlias(); |
5196 | } |
5197 | |
5198 | QualType desugar() const { |
5199 | return isTypeAlias() ? getAliasedType() : getCanonicalTypeInternal(); |
5200 | } |
5201 | |
5202 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Ctx) { |
5203 | Profile(ID, Template, template_arguments(), Ctx); |
5204 | if (isTypeAlias()) |
5205 | getAliasedType().Profile(ID); |
5206 | } |
5207 | |
5208 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, TemplateName T, |
5209 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Args, |
5210 | const ASTContext &Context); |
5211 | |
5212 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5213 | return T->getTypeClass() == TemplateSpecialization; |
5214 | } |
5215 | }; |
5216 | |
5217 | /// Print a template argument list, including the '<' and '>' |
5218 | /// enclosing the template arguments. |
5219 | void printTemplateArgumentList(raw_ostream &OS, |
5220 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Args, |
5221 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
5222 | const TemplateParameterList *TPL = nullptr); |
5223 | |
5224 | void printTemplateArgumentList(raw_ostream &OS, |
5225 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgumentLoc> Args, |
5226 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
5227 | const TemplateParameterList *TPL = nullptr); |
5228 | |
5229 | void printTemplateArgumentList(raw_ostream &OS, |
5230 | const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args, |
5231 | const PrintingPolicy &Policy, |
5232 | const TemplateParameterList *TPL = nullptr); |
5233 | |
5234 | /// The injected class name of a C++ class template or class |
5235 | /// template partial specialization. Used to record that a type was |
5236 | /// spelled with a bare identifier rather than as a template-id; the |
5237 | /// equivalent for non-templated classes is just RecordType. |
5238 | /// |
5239 | /// Injected class name types are always dependent. Template |
5240 | /// instantiation turns these into RecordTypes. |
5241 | /// |
5242 | /// Injected class name types are always canonical. This works |
5243 | /// because it is impossible to compare an injected class name type |
5244 | /// with the corresponding non-injected template type, for the same |
5245 | /// reason that it is impossible to directly compare template |
5246 | /// parameters from different dependent contexts: injected class name |
5247 | /// types can only occur within the scope of a particular templated |
5248 | /// declaration, and within that scope every template specialization |
5249 | /// will canonicalize to the injected class name (when appropriate |
5250 | /// according to the rules of the language). |
5251 | class InjectedClassNameType : public Type { |
5252 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
5253 | friend class ASTNodeImporter; |
5254 | friend class ASTReader; // FIXME: ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType is not |
5255 | // currently suitable for AST reading, too much |
5256 | // interdependencies. |
5257 | template <class T> friend class serialization::AbstractTypeReader; |
5258 | |
5259 | CXXRecordDecl *Decl; |
5260 | |
5261 | /// The template specialization which this type represents. |
5262 | /// For example, in |
5263 | /// template <class T> class A { ... }; |
5264 | /// this is A<T>, whereas in |
5265 | /// template <class X, class Y> class A<B<X,Y> > { ... }; |
5266 | /// this is A<B<X,Y> >. |
5267 | /// |
5268 | /// It is always unqualified, always a template specialization type, |
5269 | /// and always dependent. |
5270 | QualType InjectedType; |
5271 | |
5272 | InjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *D, QualType TST) |
5273 | : Type(InjectedClassName, QualType(), |
5274 | TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation), |
5275 | Decl(D), InjectedType(TST) { |
5276 | assert(isa<TemplateSpecializationType>(TST))((isa<TemplateSpecializationType>(TST)) ? static_cast< void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<TemplateSpecializationType>(TST)" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5276, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5277 | assert(!TST.hasQualifiers())((!TST.hasQualifiers()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!TST.hasQualifiers()", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5277, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5278 | assert(TST->isDependentType())((TST->isDependentType()) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("TST->isDependentType()", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5278, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5279 | } |
5280 | |
5281 | public: |
5282 | QualType getInjectedSpecializationType() const { return InjectedType; } |
5283 | |
5284 | const TemplateSpecializationType *getInjectedTST() const { |
5285 | return cast<TemplateSpecializationType>(InjectedType.getTypePtr()); |
5286 | } |
5287 | |
5288 | TemplateName getTemplateName() const { |
5289 | return getInjectedTST()->getTemplateName(); |
5290 | } |
5291 | |
5292 | CXXRecordDecl *getDecl() const; |
5293 | |
5294 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
5295 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
5296 | |
5297 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5298 | return T->getTypeClass() == InjectedClassName; |
5299 | } |
5300 | }; |
5301 | |
5302 | /// The kind of a tag type. |
5303 | enum TagTypeKind { |
5304 | /// The "struct" keyword. |
5305 | TTK_Struct, |
5306 | |
5307 | /// The "__interface" keyword. |
5308 | TTK_Interface, |
5309 | |
5310 | /// The "union" keyword. |
5311 | TTK_Union, |
5312 | |
5313 | /// The "class" keyword. |
5314 | TTK_Class, |
5315 | |
5316 | /// The "enum" keyword. |
5317 | TTK_Enum |
5318 | }; |
5319 | |
5320 | /// The elaboration keyword that precedes a qualified type name or |
5321 | /// introduces an elaborated-type-specifier. |
5322 | enum ElaboratedTypeKeyword { |
5323 | /// The "struct" keyword introduces the elaborated-type-specifier. |
5324 | ETK_Struct, |
5325 | |
5326 | /// The "__interface" keyword introduces the elaborated-type-specifier. |
5327 | ETK_Interface, |
5328 | |
5329 | /// The "union" keyword introduces the elaborated-type-specifier. |
5330 | ETK_Union, |
5331 | |
5332 | /// The "class" keyword introduces the elaborated-type-specifier. |
5333 | ETK_Class, |
5334 | |
5335 | /// The "enum" keyword introduces the elaborated-type-specifier. |
5336 | ETK_Enum, |
5337 | |
5338 | /// The "typename" keyword precedes the qualified type name, e.g., |
5339 | /// \c typename T::type. |
5340 | ETK_Typename, |
5341 | |
5342 | /// No keyword precedes the qualified type name. |
5343 | ETK_None |
5344 | }; |
5345 | |
5346 | /// A helper class for Type nodes having an ElaboratedTypeKeyword. |
5347 | /// The keyword in stored in the free bits of the base class. |
5348 | /// Also provides a few static helpers for converting and printing |
5349 | /// elaborated type keyword and tag type kind enumerations. |
5350 | class TypeWithKeyword : public Type { |
5351 | protected: |
5352 | TypeWithKeyword(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, TypeClass tc, |
5353 | QualType Canonical, TypeDependence Dependence) |
5354 | : Type(tc, Canonical, Dependence) { |
5355 | TypeWithKeywordBits.Keyword = Keyword; |
5356 | } |
5357 | |
5358 | public: |
5359 | ElaboratedTypeKeyword getKeyword() const { |
5360 | return static_cast<ElaboratedTypeKeyword>(TypeWithKeywordBits.Keyword); |
5361 | } |
5362 | |
5363 | /// Converts a type specifier (DeclSpec::TST) into an elaborated type keyword. |
5364 | static ElaboratedTypeKeyword getKeywordForTypeSpec(unsigned TypeSpec); |
5365 | |
5366 | /// Converts a type specifier (DeclSpec::TST) into a tag type kind. |
5367 | /// It is an error to provide a type specifier which *isn't* a tag kind here. |
5368 | static TagTypeKind getTagTypeKindForTypeSpec(unsigned TypeSpec); |
5369 | |
5370 | /// Converts a TagTypeKind into an elaborated type keyword. |
5371 | static ElaboratedTypeKeyword getKeywordForTagTypeKind(TagTypeKind Tag); |
5372 | |
5373 | /// Converts an elaborated type keyword into a TagTypeKind. |
5374 | /// It is an error to provide an elaborated type keyword |
5375 | /// which *isn't* a tag kind here. |
5376 | static TagTypeKind getTagTypeKindForKeyword(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword); |
5377 | |
5378 | static bool KeywordIsTagTypeKind(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword); |
5379 | |
5380 | static StringRef getKeywordName(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword); |
5381 | |
5382 | static StringRef getTagTypeKindName(TagTypeKind Kind) { |
5383 | return getKeywordName(getKeywordForTagTypeKind(Kind)); |
5384 | } |
5385 | |
5386 | class CannotCastToThisType {}; |
5387 | static CannotCastToThisType classof(const Type *); |
5388 | }; |
5389 | |
5390 | /// Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type |
5391 | /// keyword, e.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, |
5392 | /// or both. |
5393 | /// |
5394 | /// This type is used to keep track of a type name as written in the |
5395 | /// source code, including tag keywords and any nested-name-specifiers. |
5396 | /// The type itself is always "sugar", used to express what was written |
5397 | /// in the source code but containing no additional semantic information. |
5398 | class ElaboratedType final |
5399 | : public TypeWithKeyword, |
5400 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode, |
5401 | private llvm::TrailingObjects<ElaboratedType, TagDecl *> { |
5402 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
5403 | friend TrailingObjects; |
5404 | |
5405 | /// The nested name specifier containing the qualifier. |
5406 | NestedNameSpecifier *NNS; |
5407 | |
5408 | /// The type that this qualified name refers to. |
5409 | QualType NamedType; |
5410 | |
5411 | /// The (re)declaration of this tag type owned by this occurrence is stored |
5412 | /// as a trailing object if there is one. Use getOwnedTagDecl to obtain |
5413 | /// it, or obtain a null pointer if there is none. |
5414 | |
5415 | ElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, |
5416 | QualType NamedType, QualType CanonType, TagDecl *OwnedTagDecl) |
5417 | : TypeWithKeyword(Keyword, Elaborated, CanonType, |
5418 | // Any semantic dependence on the qualifier will have |
5419 | // been incorporated into NamedType. We still need to |
5420 | // track syntactic (instantiation / error / pack) |
5421 | // dependence on the qualifier. |
5422 | NamedType->getDependence() | |
5423 | (NNS ? toSyntacticDependence( |
5424 | toTypeDependence(NNS->getDependence())) |
5425 | : TypeDependence::None)), |
5426 | NNS(NNS), NamedType(NamedType) { |
5427 | ElaboratedTypeBits.HasOwnedTagDecl = false; |
5428 | if (OwnedTagDecl) { |
5429 | ElaboratedTypeBits.HasOwnedTagDecl = true; |
5430 | *getTrailingObjects<TagDecl *>() = OwnedTagDecl; |
5431 | } |
5432 | assert(!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) &&((!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) && "ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword " "and name qualifier both null." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) && \"ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword \" \"and name qualifier both null.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5434, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
5433 | "ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword "((!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) && "ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword " "and name qualifier both null." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) && \"ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword \" \"and name qualifier both null.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5434, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
5434 | "and name qualifier both null.")((!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) && "ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword " "and name qualifier both null." ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(Keyword == ETK_None && NNS == nullptr) && \"ElaboratedType cannot have elaborated type keyword \" \"and name qualifier both null.\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5434, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5435 | } |
5436 | |
5437 | public: |
5438 | /// Retrieve the qualification on this type. |
5439 | NestedNameSpecifier *getQualifier() const { return NNS; } |
5440 | |
5441 | /// Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id. |
5442 | QualType getNamedType() const { return NamedType; } |
5443 | |
5444 | /// Remove a single level of sugar. |
5445 | QualType desugar() const { return getNamedType(); } |
5446 | |
5447 | /// Returns whether this type directly provides sugar. |
5448 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
5449 | |
5450 | /// Return the (re)declaration of this type owned by this occurrence of this |
5451 | /// type, or nullptr if there is none. |
5452 | TagDecl *getOwnedTagDecl() const { |
5453 | return ElaboratedTypeBits.HasOwnedTagDecl ? *getTrailingObjects<TagDecl *>() |
5454 | : nullptr; |
5455 | } |
5456 | |
5457 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
5458 | Profile(ID, getKeyword(), NNS, NamedType, getOwnedTagDecl()); |
5459 | } |
5460 | |
5461 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, |
5462 | NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, QualType NamedType, |
5463 | TagDecl *OwnedTagDecl) { |
5464 | ID.AddInteger(Keyword); |
5465 | ID.AddPointer(NNS); |
5466 | NamedType.Profile(ID); |
5467 | ID.AddPointer(OwnedTagDecl); |
5468 | } |
5469 | |
5470 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == Elaborated; } |
5471 | }; |
5472 | |
5473 | /// Represents a qualified type name for which the type name is |
5474 | /// dependent. |
5475 | /// |
5476 | /// DependentNameType represents a class of dependent types that involve a |
5477 | /// possibly dependent nested-name-specifier (e.g., "T::") followed by a |
5478 | /// name of a type. The DependentNameType may start with a "typename" (for a |
5479 | /// typename-specifier), "class", "struct", "union", or "enum" (for a |
5480 | /// dependent elaborated-type-specifier), or nothing (in contexts where we |
5481 | /// know that we must be referring to a type, e.g., in a base class specifier). |
5482 | /// Typically the nested-name-specifier is dependent, but in MSVC compatibility |
5483 | /// mode, this type is used with non-dependent names to delay name lookup until |
5484 | /// instantiation. |
5485 | class DependentNameType : public TypeWithKeyword, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5486 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
5487 | |
5488 | /// The nested name specifier containing the qualifier. |
5489 | NestedNameSpecifier *NNS; |
5490 | |
5491 | /// The type that this typename specifier refers to. |
5492 | const IdentifierInfo *Name; |
5493 | |
5494 | DependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, |
5495 | const IdentifierInfo *Name, QualType CanonType) |
5496 | : TypeWithKeyword(Keyword, DependentName, CanonType, |
5497 | TypeDependence::DependentInstantiation | |
5498 | toTypeDependence(NNS->getDependence())), |
5499 | NNS(NNS), Name(Name) {} |
5500 | |
5501 | public: |
5502 | /// Retrieve the qualification on this type. |
5503 | NestedNameSpecifier *getQualifier() const { return NNS; } |
5504 | |
5505 | /// Retrieve the type named by the typename specifier as an identifier. |
5506 | /// |
5507 | /// This routine will return a non-NULL identifier pointer when the |
5508 | /// form of the original typename was terminated by an identifier, |
5509 | /// e.g., "typename T::type". |
5510 | const IdentifierInfo *getIdentifier() const { |
5511 | return Name; |
5512 | } |
5513 | |
5514 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
5515 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
5516 | |
5517 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
5518 | Profile(ID, getKeyword(), NNS, Name); |
5519 | } |
5520 | |
5521 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, |
5522 | NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, const IdentifierInfo *Name) { |
5523 | ID.AddInteger(Keyword); |
5524 | ID.AddPointer(NNS); |
5525 | ID.AddPointer(Name); |
5526 | } |
5527 | |
5528 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5529 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentName; |
5530 | } |
5531 | }; |
5532 | |
5533 | /// Represents a template specialization type whose template cannot be |
5534 | /// resolved, e.g. |
5535 | /// A<T>::template B<T> |
5536 | class alignas(8) DependentTemplateSpecializationType |
5537 | : public TypeWithKeyword, |
5538 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5539 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
5540 | |
5541 | /// The nested name specifier containing the qualifier. |
5542 | NestedNameSpecifier *NNS; |
5543 | |
5544 | /// The identifier of the template. |
5545 | const IdentifierInfo *Name; |
5546 | |
5547 | DependentTemplateSpecializationType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, |
5548 | NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, |
5549 | const IdentifierInfo *Name, |
5550 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Args, |
5551 | QualType Canon); |
5552 | |
5553 | const TemplateArgument *getArgBuffer() const { |
5554 | return reinterpret_cast<const TemplateArgument*>(this+1); |
5555 | } |
5556 | |
5557 | TemplateArgument *getArgBuffer() { |
5558 | return reinterpret_cast<TemplateArgument*>(this+1); |
5559 | } |
5560 | |
5561 | public: |
5562 | NestedNameSpecifier *getQualifier() const { return NNS; } |
5563 | const IdentifierInfo *getIdentifier() const { return Name; } |
5564 | |
5565 | /// Retrieve the template arguments. |
5566 | const TemplateArgument *getArgs() const { |
5567 | return getArgBuffer(); |
5568 | } |
5569 | |
5570 | /// Retrieve the number of template arguments. |
5571 | unsigned getNumArgs() const { |
5572 | return DependentTemplateSpecializationTypeBits.NumArgs; |
5573 | } |
5574 | |
5575 | const TemplateArgument &getArg(unsigned Idx) const; // in TemplateBase.h |
5576 | |
5577 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> template_arguments() const { |
5578 | return {getArgs(), getNumArgs()}; |
5579 | } |
5580 | |
5581 | using iterator = const TemplateArgument *; |
5582 | |
5583 | iterator begin() const { return getArgs(); } |
5584 | iterator end() const; // inline in TemplateBase.h |
5585 | |
5586 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
5587 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
5588 | |
5589 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context) { |
5590 | Profile(ID, Context, getKeyword(), NNS, Name, {getArgs(), getNumArgs()}); |
5591 | } |
5592 | |
5593 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
5594 | const ASTContext &Context, |
5595 | ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, |
5596 | NestedNameSpecifier *Qualifier, |
5597 | const IdentifierInfo *Name, |
5598 | ArrayRef<TemplateArgument> Args); |
5599 | |
5600 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5601 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentTemplateSpecialization; |
5602 | } |
5603 | }; |
5604 | |
5605 | /// Represents a pack expansion of types. |
5606 | /// |
5607 | /// Pack expansions are part of C++11 variadic templates. A pack |
5608 | /// expansion contains a pattern, which itself contains one or more |
5609 | /// "unexpanded" parameter packs. When instantiated, a pack expansion |
5610 | /// produces a series of types, each instantiated from the pattern of |
5611 | /// the expansion, where the Ith instantiation of the pattern uses the |
5612 | /// Ith arguments bound to each of the unexpanded parameter packs. The |
5613 | /// pack expansion is considered to "expand" these unexpanded |
5614 | /// parameter packs. |
5615 | /// |
5616 | /// \code |
5617 | /// template<typename ...Types> struct tuple; |
5618 | /// |
5619 | /// template<typename ...Types> |
5620 | /// struct tuple_of_references { |
5621 | /// typedef tuple<Types&...> type; |
5622 | /// }; |
5623 | /// \endcode |
5624 | /// |
5625 | /// Here, the pack expansion \c Types&... is represented via a |
5626 | /// PackExpansionType whose pattern is Types&. |
5627 | class PackExpansionType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5628 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these |
5629 | |
5630 | /// The pattern of the pack expansion. |
5631 | QualType Pattern; |
5632 | |
5633 | PackExpansionType(QualType Pattern, QualType Canon, |
5634 | Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) |
5635 | : Type(PackExpansion, Canon, |
5636 | (Pattern->getDependence() | TypeDependence::Dependent | |
5637 | TypeDependence::Instantiation) & |
5638 | ~TypeDependence::UnexpandedPack), |
5639 | Pattern(Pattern) { |
5640 | PackExpansionTypeBits.NumExpansions = |
5641 | NumExpansions ? *NumExpansions + 1 : 0; |
5642 | } |
5643 | |
5644 | public: |
5645 | /// Retrieve the pattern of this pack expansion, which is the |
5646 | /// type that will be repeatedly instantiated when instantiating the |
5647 | /// pack expansion itself. |
5648 | QualType getPattern() const { return Pattern; } |
5649 | |
5650 | /// Retrieve the number of expansions that this pack expansion will |
5651 | /// generate, if known. |
5652 | Optional<unsigned> getNumExpansions() const { |
5653 | if (PackExpansionTypeBits.NumExpansions) |
5654 | return PackExpansionTypeBits.NumExpansions - 1; |
5655 | return None; |
5656 | } |
5657 | |
5658 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
5659 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
5660 | |
5661 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
5662 | Profile(ID, getPattern(), getNumExpansions()); |
5663 | } |
5664 | |
5665 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType Pattern, |
5666 | Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) { |
5667 | ID.AddPointer(Pattern.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
5668 | ID.AddBoolean(NumExpansions.hasValue()); |
5669 | if (NumExpansions) |
5670 | ID.AddInteger(*NumExpansions); |
5671 | } |
5672 | |
5673 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5674 | return T->getTypeClass() == PackExpansion; |
5675 | } |
5676 | }; |
5677 | |
5678 | /// This class wraps the list of protocol qualifiers. For types that can |
5679 | /// take ObjC protocol qualifers, they can subclass this class. |
5680 | template <class T> |
5681 | class ObjCProtocolQualifiers { |
5682 | protected: |
5683 | ObjCProtocolQualifiers() = default; |
5684 | |
5685 | ObjCProtocolDecl * const *getProtocolStorage() const { |
5686 | return const_cast<ObjCProtocolQualifiers*>(this)->getProtocolStorage(); |
5687 | } |
5688 | |
5689 | ObjCProtocolDecl **getProtocolStorage() { |
5690 | return static_cast<T*>(this)->getProtocolStorageImpl(); |
5691 | } |
5692 | |
5693 | void setNumProtocols(unsigned N) { |
5694 | static_cast<T*>(this)->setNumProtocolsImpl(N); |
5695 | } |
5696 | |
5697 | void initialize(ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> protocols) { |
5698 | setNumProtocols(protocols.size()); |
5699 | assert(getNumProtocols() == protocols.size() &&((getNumProtocols() == protocols.size() && "bitfield overflow in protocol count" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getNumProtocols() == protocols.size() && \"bitfield overflow in protocol count\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5700, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)) |
5700 | "bitfield overflow in protocol count")((getNumProtocols() == protocols.size() && "bitfield overflow in protocol count" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("getNumProtocols() == protocols.size() && \"bitfield overflow in protocol count\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5700, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5701 | if (!protocols.empty()) |
5702 | memcpy(getProtocolStorage(), protocols.data(), |
5703 | protocols.size() * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl*)); |
5704 | } |
5705 | |
5706 | public: |
5707 | using qual_iterator = ObjCProtocolDecl * const *; |
5708 | using qual_range = llvm::iterator_range<qual_iterator>; |
5709 | |
5710 | qual_range quals() const { return qual_range(qual_begin(), qual_end()); } |
5711 | qual_iterator qual_begin() const { return getProtocolStorage(); } |
5712 | qual_iterator qual_end() const { return qual_begin() + getNumProtocols(); } |
5713 | |
5714 | bool qual_empty() const { return getNumProtocols() == 0; } |
5715 | |
5716 | /// Return the number of qualifying protocols in this type, or 0 if |
5717 | /// there are none. |
5718 | unsigned getNumProtocols() const { |
5719 | return static_cast<const T*>(this)->getNumProtocolsImpl(); |
5720 | } |
5721 | |
5722 | /// Fetch a protocol by index. |
5723 | ObjCProtocolDecl *getProtocol(unsigned I) const { |
5724 | assert(I < getNumProtocols() && "Out-of-range protocol access")((I < getNumProtocols() && "Out-of-range protocol access" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("I < getNumProtocols() && \"Out-of-range protocol access\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5724, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5725 | return qual_begin()[I]; |
5726 | } |
5727 | |
5728 | /// Retrieve all of the protocol qualifiers. |
5729 | ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> getProtocols() const { |
5730 | return ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *>(qual_begin(), getNumProtocols()); |
5731 | } |
5732 | }; |
5733 | |
5734 | /// Represents a type parameter type in Objective C. It can take |
5735 | /// a list of protocols. |
5736 | class ObjCTypeParamType : public Type, |
5737 | public ObjCProtocolQualifiers<ObjCTypeParamType>, |
5738 | public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5739 | friend class ASTContext; |
5740 | friend class ObjCProtocolQualifiers<ObjCTypeParamType>; |
5741 | |
5742 | /// The number of protocols stored on this type. |
5743 | unsigned NumProtocols : 6; |
5744 | |
5745 | ObjCTypeParamDecl *OTPDecl; |
5746 | |
5747 | /// The protocols are stored after the ObjCTypeParamType node. In the |
5748 | /// canonical type, the list of protocols are sorted alphabetically |
5749 | /// and uniqued. |
5750 | ObjCProtocolDecl **getProtocolStorageImpl(); |
5751 | |
5752 | /// Return the number of qualifying protocols in this interface type, |
5753 | /// or 0 if there are none. |
5754 | unsigned getNumProtocolsImpl() const { |
5755 | return NumProtocols; |
5756 | } |
5757 | |
5758 | void setNumProtocolsImpl(unsigned N) { |
5759 | NumProtocols = N; |
5760 | } |
5761 | |
5762 | ObjCTypeParamType(const ObjCTypeParamDecl *D, |
5763 | QualType can, |
5764 | ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> protocols); |
5765 | |
5766 | public: |
5767 | bool isSugared() const { return true; } |
5768 | QualType desugar() const { return getCanonicalTypeInternal(); } |
5769 | |
5770 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5771 | return T->getTypeClass() == ObjCTypeParam; |
5772 | } |
5773 | |
5774 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID); |
5775 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
5776 | const ObjCTypeParamDecl *OTPDecl, |
5777 | QualType CanonicalType, |
5778 | ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> protocols); |
5779 | |
5780 | ObjCTypeParamDecl *getDecl() const { return OTPDecl; } |
5781 | }; |
5782 | |
5783 | /// Represents a class type in Objective C. |
5784 | /// |
5785 | /// Every Objective C type is a combination of a base type, a set of |
5786 | /// type arguments (optional, for parameterized classes) and a list of |
5787 | /// protocols. |
5788 | /// |
5789 | /// Given the following declarations: |
5790 | /// \code |
5791 | /// \@class C<T>; |
5792 | /// \@protocol P; |
5793 | /// \endcode |
5794 | /// |
5795 | /// 'C' is an ObjCInterfaceType C. It is sugar for an ObjCObjectType |
5796 | /// with base C and no protocols. |
5797 | /// |
5798 | /// 'C<P>' is an unspecialized ObjCObjectType with base C and protocol list [P]. |
5799 | /// 'C<C*>' is a specialized ObjCObjectType with type arguments 'C*' and no |
5800 | /// protocol list. |
5801 | /// 'C<C*><P>' is a specialized ObjCObjectType with base C, type arguments 'C*', |
5802 | /// and protocol list [P]. |
5803 | /// |
5804 | /// 'id' is a TypedefType which is sugar for an ObjCObjectPointerType whose |
5805 | /// pointee is an ObjCObjectType with base BuiltinType::ObjCIdType |
5806 | /// and no protocols. |
5807 | /// |
5808 | /// 'id<P>' is an ObjCObjectPointerType whose pointee is an ObjCObjectType |
5809 | /// with base BuiltinType::ObjCIdType and protocol list [P]. Eventually |
5810 | /// this should get its own sugar class to better represent the source. |
5811 | class ObjCObjectType : public Type, |
5812 | public ObjCProtocolQualifiers<ObjCObjectType> { |
5813 | friend class ObjCProtocolQualifiers<ObjCObjectType>; |
5814 | |
5815 | // ObjCObjectType.NumTypeArgs - the number of type arguments stored |
5816 | // after the ObjCObjectPointerType node. |
5817 | // ObjCObjectType.NumProtocols - the number of protocols stored |
5818 | // after the type arguments of ObjCObjectPointerType node. |
5819 | // |
5820 | // These protocols are those written directly on the type. If |
5821 | // protocol qualifiers ever become additive, the iterators will need |
5822 | // to get kindof complicated. |
5823 | // |
5824 | // In the canonical object type, these are sorted alphabetically |
5825 | // and uniqued. |
5826 | |
5827 | /// Either a BuiltinType or an InterfaceType or sugar for either. |
5828 | QualType BaseType; |
5829 | |
5830 | /// Cached superclass type. |
5831 | mutable llvm::PointerIntPair<const ObjCObjectType *, 1, bool> |
5832 | CachedSuperClassType; |
5833 | |
5834 | QualType *getTypeArgStorage(); |
5835 | const QualType *getTypeArgStorage() const { |
5836 | return const_cast<ObjCObjectType *>(this)->getTypeArgStorage(); |
5837 | } |
5838 | |
5839 | ObjCProtocolDecl **getProtocolStorageImpl(); |
5840 | /// Return the number of qualifying protocols in this interface type, |
5841 | /// or 0 if there are none. |
5842 | unsigned getNumProtocolsImpl() const { |
5843 | return ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumProtocols; |
5844 | } |
5845 | void setNumProtocolsImpl(unsigned N) { |
5846 | ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumProtocols = N; |
5847 | } |
5848 | |
5849 | protected: |
5850 | enum Nonce_ObjCInterface { Nonce_ObjCInterface }; |
5851 | |
5852 | ObjCObjectType(QualType Canonical, QualType Base, |
5853 | ArrayRef<QualType> typeArgs, |
5854 | ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> protocols, |
5855 | bool isKindOf); |
5856 | |
5857 | ObjCObjectType(enum Nonce_ObjCInterface) |
5858 | : Type(ObjCInterface, QualType(), TypeDependence::None), |
5859 | BaseType(QualType(this_(), 0)) { |
5860 | ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumProtocols = 0; |
5861 | ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumTypeArgs = 0; |
5862 | ObjCObjectTypeBits.IsKindOf = 0; |
5863 | } |
5864 | |
5865 | void computeSuperClassTypeSlow() const; |
5866 | |
5867 | public: |
5868 | /// Gets the base type of this object type. This is always (possibly |
5869 | /// sugar for) one of: |
5870 | /// - the 'id' builtin type (as opposed to the 'id' type visible to the |
5871 | /// user, which is a typedef for an ObjCObjectPointerType) |
5872 | /// - the 'Class' builtin type (same caveat) |
5873 | /// - an ObjCObjectType (currently always an ObjCInterfaceType) |
5874 | QualType getBaseType() const { return BaseType; } |
5875 | |
5876 | bool isObjCId() const { |
5877 | return getBaseType()->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ObjCId); |
5878 | } |
5879 | |
5880 | bool isObjCClass() const { |
5881 | return getBaseType()->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ObjCClass); |
5882 | } |
5883 | |
5884 | bool isObjCUnqualifiedId() const { return qual_empty() && isObjCId(); } |
5885 | bool isObjCUnqualifiedClass() const { return qual_empty() && isObjCClass(); } |
5886 | bool isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() const { |
5887 | if (!qual_empty()) return false; |
5888 | if (const BuiltinType *T = getBaseType()->getAs<BuiltinType>()) |
5889 | return T->getKind() == BuiltinType::ObjCId || |
5890 | T->getKind() == BuiltinType::ObjCClass; |
5891 | return false; |
5892 | } |
5893 | bool isObjCQualifiedId() const { return !qual_empty() && isObjCId(); } |
5894 | bool isObjCQualifiedClass() const { return !qual_empty() && isObjCClass(); } |
5895 | |
5896 | /// Gets the interface declaration for this object type, if the base type |
5897 | /// really is an interface. |
5898 | ObjCInterfaceDecl *getInterface() const; |
5899 | |
5900 | /// Determine whether this object type is "specialized", meaning |
5901 | /// that it has type arguments. |
5902 | bool isSpecialized() const; |
5903 | |
5904 | /// Determine whether this object type was written with type arguments. |
5905 | bool isSpecializedAsWritten() const { |
5906 | return ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumTypeArgs > 0; |
5907 | } |
5908 | |
5909 | /// Determine whether this object type is "unspecialized", meaning |
5910 | /// that it has no type arguments. |
5911 | bool isUnspecialized() const { return !isSpecialized(); } |
5912 | |
5913 | /// Determine whether this object type is "unspecialized" as |
5914 | /// written, meaning that it has no type arguments. |
5915 | bool isUnspecializedAsWritten() const { return !isSpecializedAsWritten(); } |
5916 | |
5917 | /// Retrieve the type arguments of this object type (semantically). |
5918 | ArrayRef<QualType> getTypeArgs() const; |
5919 | |
5920 | /// Retrieve the type arguments of this object type as they were |
5921 | /// written. |
5922 | ArrayRef<QualType> getTypeArgsAsWritten() const { |
5923 | return llvm::makeArrayRef(getTypeArgStorage(), |
5924 | ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumTypeArgs); |
5925 | } |
5926 | |
5927 | /// Whether this is a "__kindof" type as written. |
5928 | bool isKindOfTypeAsWritten() const { return ObjCObjectTypeBits.IsKindOf; } |
5929 | |
5930 | /// Whether this ia a "__kindof" type (semantically). |
5931 | bool isKindOfType() const; |
5932 | |
5933 | /// Retrieve the type of the superclass of this object type. |
5934 | /// |
5935 | /// This operation substitutes any type arguments into the |
5936 | /// superclass of the current class type, potentially producing a |
5937 | /// specialization of the superclass type. Produces a null type if |
5938 | /// there is no superclass. |
5939 | QualType getSuperClassType() const { |
5940 | if (!CachedSuperClassType.getInt()) |
5941 | computeSuperClassTypeSlow(); |
5942 | |
5943 | assert(CachedSuperClassType.getInt() && "Superclass not set?")((CachedSuperClassType.getInt() && "Superclass not set?" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("CachedSuperClassType.getInt() && \"Superclass not set?\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 5943, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
5944 | return QualType(CachedSuperClassType.getPointer(), 0); |
5945 | } |
5946 | |
5947 | /// Strip off the Objective-C "kindof" type and (with it) any |
5948 | /// protocol qualifiers. |
5949 | QualType stripObjCKindOfTypeAndQuals(const ASTContext &ctx) const; |
5950 | |
5951 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
5952 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
5953 | |
5954 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
5955 | return T->getTypeClass() == ObjCObject || |
5956 | T->getTypeClass() == ObjCInterface; |
5957 | } |
5958 | }; |
5959 | |
5960 | /// A class providing a concrete implementation |
5961 | /// of ObjCObjectType, so as to not increase the footprint of |
5962 | /// ObjCInterfaceType. Code outside of ASTContext and the core type |
5963 | /// system should not reference this type. |
5964 | class ObjCObjectTypeImpl : public ObjCObjectType, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
5965 | friend class ASTContext; |
5966 | |
5967 | // If anyone adds fields here, ObjCObjectType::getProtocolStorage() |
5968 | // will need to be modified. |
5969 | |
5970 | ObjCObjectTypeImpl(QualType Canonical, QualType Base, |
5971 | ArrayRef<QualType> typeArgs, |
5972 | ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> protocols, |
5973 | bool isKindOf) |
5974 | : ObjCObjectType(Canonical, Base, typeArgs, protocols, isKindOf) {} |
5975 | |
5976 | public: |
5977 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID); |
5978 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, |
5979 | QualType Base, |
5980 | ArrayRef<QualType> typeArgs, |
5981 | ArrayRef<ObjCProtocolDecl *> protocols, |
5982 | bool isKindOf); |
5983 | }; |
5984 | |
5985 | inline QualType *ObjCObjectType::getTypeArgStorage() { |
5986 | return reinterpret_cast<QualType *>(static_cast<ObjCObjectTypeImpl*>(this)+1); |
5987 | } |
5988 | |
5989 | inline ObjCProtocolDecl **ObjCObjectType::getProtocolStorageImpl() { |
5990 | return reinterpret_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl**>( |
5991 | getTypeArgStorage() + ObjCObjectTypeBits.NumTypeArgs); |
5992 | } |
5993 | |
5994 | inline ObjCProtocolDecl **ObjCTypeParamType::getProtocolStorageImpl() { |
5995 | return reinterpret_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl**>( |
5996 | static_cast<ObjCTypeParamType*>(this)+1); |
5997 | } |
5998 | |
5999 | /// Interfaces are the core concept in Objective-C for object oriented design. |
6000 | /// They basically correspond to C++ classes. There are two kinds of interface |
6001 | /// types: normal interfaces like `NSString`, and qualified interfaces, which |
6002 | /// are qualified with a protocol list like `NSString<NSCopyable, NSAmazing>`. |
6003 | /// |
6004 | /// ObjCInterfaceType guarantees the following properties when considered |
6005 | /// as a subtype of its superclass, ObjCObjectType: |
6006 | /// - There are no protocol qualifiers. To reinforce this, code which |
6007 | /// tries to invoke the protocol methods via an ObjCInterfaceType will |
6008 | /// fail to compile. |
6009 | /// - It is its own base type. That is, if T is an ObjCInterfaceType*, |
6010 | /// T->getBaseType() == QualType(T, 0). |
6011 | class ObjCInterfaceType : public ObjCObjectType { |
6012 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
6013 | friend class ASTReader; |
6014 | friend class ObjCInterfaceDecl; |
6015 | template <class T> friend class serialization::AbstractTypeReader; |
6016 | |
6017 | mutable ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl; |
6018 | |
6019 | ObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) |
6020 | : ObjCObjectType(Nonce_ObjCInterface), |
6021 | Decl(const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl*>(D)) {} |
6022 | |
6023 | public: |
6024 | /// Get the declaration of this interface. |
6025 | ObjCInterfaceDecl *getDecl() const { return Decl; } |
6026 | |
6027 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
6028 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
6029 | |
6030 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
6031 | return T->getTypeClass() == ObjCInterface; |
6032 | } |
6033 | |
6034 | // Nonsense to "hide" certain members of ObjCObjectType within this |
6035 | // class. People asking for protocols on an ObjCInterfaceType are |
6036 | // not going to get what they want: ObjCInterfaceTypes are |
6037 | // guaranteed to have no protocols. |
6038 | enum { |
6039 | qual_iterator, |
6040 | qual_begin, |
6041 | qual_end, |
6042 | getNumProtocols, |
6043 | getProtocol |
6044 | }; |
6045 | }; |
6046 | |
6047 | inline ObjCInterfaceDecl *ObjCObjectType::getInterface() const { |
6048 | QualType baseType = getBaseType(); |
6049 | while (const auto *ObjT = baseType->getAs<ObjCObjectType>()) { |
6050 | if (const auto *T = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(ObjT)) |
6051 | return T->getDecl(); |
6052 | |
6053 | baseType = ObjT->getBaseType(); |
6054 | } |
6055 | |
6056 | return nullptr; |
6057 | } |
6058 | |
6059 | /// Represents a pointer to an Objective C object. |
6060 | /// |
6061 | /// These are constructed from pointer declarators when the pointee type is |
6062 | /// an ObjCObjectType (or sugar for one). In addition, the 'id' and 'Class' |
6063 | /// types are typedefs for these, and the protocol-qualified types 'id<P>' |
6064 | /// and 'Class<P>' are translated into these. |
6065 | /// |
6066 | /// Pointers to pointers to Objective C objects are still PointerTypes; |
6067 | /// only the first level of pointer gets it own type implementation. |
6068 | class ObjCObjectPointerType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
6069 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
6070 | |
6071 | QualType PointeeType; |
6072 | |
6073 | ObjCObjectPointerType(QualType Canonical, QualType Pointee) |
6074 | : Type(ObjCObjectPointer, Canonical, Pointee->getDependence()), |
6075 | PointeeType(Pointee) {} |
6076 | |
6077 | public: |
6078 | /// Gets the type pointed to by this ObjC pointer. |
6079 | /// The result will always be an ObjCObjectType or sugar thereof. |
6080 | QualType getPointeeType() const { return PointeeType; } |
6081 | |
6082 | /// Gets the type pointed to by this ObjC pointer. Always returns non-null. |
6083 | /// |
6084 | /// This method is equivalent to getPointeeType() except that |
6085 | /// it discards any typedefs (or other sugar) between this |
6086 | /// type and the "outermost" object type. So for: |
6087 | /// \code |
6088 | /// \@class A; \@protocol P; \@protocol Q; |
6089 | /// typedef A<P> AP; |
6090 | /// typedef A A1; |
6091 | /// typedef A1<P> A1P; |
6092 | /// typedef A1P<Q> A1PQ; |
6093 | /// \endcode |
6094 | /// For 'A*', getObjectType() will return 'A'. |
6095 | /// For 'A<P>*', getObjectType() will return 'A<P>'. |
6096 | /// For 'AP*', getObjectType() will return 'A<P>'. |
6097 | /// For 'A1*', getObjectType() will return 'A'. |
6098 | /// For 'A1<P>*', getObjectType() will return 'A1<P>'. |
6099 | /// For 'A1P*', getObjectType() will return 'A1<P>'. |
6100 | /// For 'A1PQ*', getObjectType() will return 'A1<Q>', because |
6101 | /// adding protocols to a protocol-qualified base discards the |
6102 | /// old qualifiers (for now). But if it didn't, getObjectType() |
6103 | /// would return 'A1P<Q>' (and we'd have to make iterating over |
6104 | /// qualifiers more complicated). |
6105 | const ObjCObjectType *getObjectType() const { |
6106 | return PointeeType->castAs<ObjCObjectType>(); |
6107 | } |
6108 | |
6109 | /// If this pointer points to an Objective C |
6110 | /// \@interface type, gets the type for that interface. Any protocol |
6111 | /// qualifiers on the interface are ignored. |
6112 | /// |
6113 | /// \return null if the base type for this pointer is 'id' or 'Class' |
6114 | const ObjCInterfaceType *getInterfaceType() const; |
6115 | |
6116 | /// If this pointer points to an Objective \@interface |
6117 | /// type, gets the declaration for that interface. |
6118 | /// |
6119 | /// \return null if the base type for this pointer is 'id' or 'Class' |
6120 | ObjCInterfaceDecl *getInterfaceDecl() const { |
6121 | return getObjectType()->getInterface(); |
6122 | } |
6123 | |
6124 | /// True if this is equivalent to the 'id' type, i.e. if |
6125 | /// its object type is the primitive 'id' type with no protocols. |
6126 | bool isObjCIdType() const { |
6127 | return getObjectType()->isObjCUnqualifiedId(); |
6128 | } |
6129 | |
6130 | /// True if this is equivalent to the 'Class' type, |
6131 | /// i.e. if its object tive is the primitive 'Class' type with no protocols. |
6132 | bool isObjCClassType() const { |
6133 | return getObjectType()->isObjCUnqualifiedClass(); |
6134 | } |
6135 | |
6136 | /// True if this is equivalent to the 'id' or 'Class' type, |
6137 | bool isObjCIdOrClassType() const { |
6138 | return getObjectType()->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass(); |
6139 | } |
6140 | |
6141 | /// True if this is equivalent to 'id<P>' for some non-empty set of |
6142 | /// protocols. |
6143 | bool isObjCQualifiedIdType() const { |
6144 | return getObjectType()->isObjCQualifiedId(); |
6145 | } |
6146 | |
6147 | /// True if this is equivalent to 'Class<P>' for some non-empty set of |
6148 | /// protocols. |
6149 | bool isObjCQualifiedClassType() const { |
6150 | return getObjectType()->isObjCQualifiedClass(); |
6151 | } |
6152 | |
6153 | /// Whether this is a "__kindof" type. |
6154 | bool isKindOfType() const { return getObjectType()->isKindOfType(); } |
6155 | |
6156 | /// Whether this type is specialized, meaning that it has type arguments. |
6157 | bool isSpecialized() const { return getObjectType()->isSpecialized(); } |
6158 | |
6159 | /// Whether this type is specialized, meaning that it has type arguments. |
6160 | bool isSpecializedAsWritten() const { |
6161 | return getObjectType()->isSpecializedAsWritten(); |
6162 | } |
6163 | |
6164 | /// Whether this type is unspecialized, meaning that is has no type arguments. |
6165 | bool isUnspecialized() const { return getObjectType()->isUnspecialized(); } |
6166 | |
6167 | /// Determine whether this object type is "unspecialized" as |
6168 | /// written, meaning that it has no type arguments. |
6169 | bool isUnspecializedAsWritten() const { return !isSpecializedAsWritten(); } |
6170 | |
6171 | /// Retrieve the type arguments for this type. |
6172 | ArrayRef<QualType> getTypeArgs() const { |
6173 | return getObjectType()->getTypeArgs(); |
6174 | } |
6175 | |
6176 | /// Retrieve the type arguments for this type. |
6177 | ArrayRef<QualType> getTypeArgsAsWritten() const { |
6178 | return getObjectType()->getTypeArgsAsWritten(); |
6179 | } |
6180 | |
6181 | /// An iterator over the qualifiers on the object type. Provided |
6182 | /// for convenience. This will always iterate over the full set of |
6183 | /// protocols on a type, not just those provided directly. |
6184 | using qual_iterator = ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator; |
6185 | using qual_range = llvm::iterator_range<qual_iterator>; |
6186 | |
6187 | qual_range quals() const { return qual_range(qual_begin(), qual_end()); } |
6188 | |
6189 | qual_iterator qual_begin() const { |
6190 | return getObjectType()->qual_begin(); |
6191 | } |
6192 | |
6193 | qual_iterator qual_end() const { |
6194 | return getObjectType()->qual_end(); |
6195 | } |
6196 | |
6197 | bool qual_empty() const { return getObjectType()->qual_empty(); } |
6198 | |
6199 | /// Return the number of qualifying protocols on the object type. |
6200 | unsigned getNumProtocols() const { |
6201 | return getObjectType()->getNumProtocols(); |
6202 | } |
6203 | |
6204 | /// Retrieve a qualifying protocol by index on the object type. |
6205 | ObjCProtocolDecl *getProtocol(unsigned I) const { |
6206 | return getObjectType()->getProtocol(I); |
6207 | } |
6208 | |
6209 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
6210 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
6211 | |
6212 | /// Retrieve the type of the superclass of this object pointer type. |
6213 | /// |
6214 | /// This operation substitutes any type arguments into the |
6215 | /// superclass of the current class type, potentially producing a |
6216 | /// pointer to a specialization of the superclass type. Produces a |
6217 | /// null type if there is no superclass. |
6218 | QualType getSuperClassType() const; |
6219 | |
6220 | /// Strip off the Objective-C "kindof" type and (with it) any |
6221 | /// protocol qualifiers. |
6222 | const ObjCObjectPointerType *stripObjCKindOfTypeAndQuals( |
6223 | const ASTContext &ctx) const; |
6224 | |
6225 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
6226 | Profile(ID, getPointeeType()); |
6227 | } |
6228 | |
6229 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType T) { |
6230 | ID.AddPointer(T.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
6231 | } |
6232 | |
6233 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
6234 | return T->getTypeClass() == ObjCObjectPointer; |
6235 | } |
6236 | }; |
6237 | |
6238 | class AtomicType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
6239 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
6240 | |
6241 | QualType ValueType; |
6242 | |
6243 | AtomicType(QualType ValTy, QualType Canonical) |
6244 | : Type(Atomic, Canonical, ValTy->getDependence()), ValueType(ValTy) {} |
6245 | |
6246 | public: |
6247 | /// Gets the type contained by this atomic type, i.e. |
6248 | /// the type returned by performing an atomic load of this atomic type. |
6249 | QualType getValueType() const { return ValueType; } |
6250 | |
6251 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
6252 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
6253 | |
6254 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
6255 | Profile(ID, getValueType()); |
6256 | } |
6257 | |
6258 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType T) { |
6259 | ID.AddPointer(T.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
6260 | } |
6261 | |
6262 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
6263 | return T->getTypeClass() == Atomic; |
6264 | } |
6265 | }; |
6266 | |
6267 | /// PipeType - OpenCL20. |
6268 | class PipeType : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
6269 | friend class ASTContext; // ASTContext creates these. |
6270 | |
6271 | QualType ElementType; |
6272 | bool isRead; |
6273 | |
6274 | PipeType(QualType elemType, QualType CanonicalPtr, bool isRead) |
6275 | : Type(Pipe, CanonicalPtr, elemType->getDependence()), |
6276 | ElementType(elemType), isRead(isRead) {} |
6277 | |
6278 | public: |
6279 | QualType getElementType() const { return ElementType; } |
6280 | |
6281 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
6282 | |
6283 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
6284 | |
6285 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
6286 | Profile(ID, getElementType(), isReadOnly()); |
6287 | } |
6288 | |
6289 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, QualType T, bool isRead) { |
6290 | ID.AddPointer(T.getAsOpaquePtr()); |
6291 | ID.AddBoolean(isRead); |
6292 | } |
6293 | |
6294 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
6295 | return T->getTypeClass() == Pipe; |
6296 | } |
6297 | |
6298 | bool isReadOnly() const { return isRead; } |
6299 | }; |
6300 | |
6301 | /// A fixed int type of a specified bitwidth. |
6302 | class ExtIntType final : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
6303 | friend class ASTContext; |
6304 | unsigned IsUnsigned : 1; |
6305 | unsigned NumBits : 24; |
6306 | |
6307 | protected: |
6308 | ExtIntType(bool isUnsigned, unsigned NumBits); |
6309 | |
6310 | public: |
6311 | bool isUnsigned() const { return IsUnsigned; } |
6312 | bool isSigned() const { return !IsUnsigned; } |
6313 | unsigned getNumBits() const { return NumBits; } |
6314 | |
6315 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
6316 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
6317 | |
6318 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
6319 | Profile(ID, isUnsigned(), getNumBits()); |
6320 | } |
6321 | |
6322 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, bool IsUnsigned, |
6323 | unsigned NumBits) { |
6324 | ID.AddBoolean(IsUnsigned); |
6325 | ID.AddInteger(NumBits); |
6326 | } |
6327 | |
6328 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { return T->getTypeClass() == ExtInt; } |
6329 | }; |
6330 | |
6331 | class DependentExtIntType final : public Type, public llvm::FoldingSetNode { |
6332 | friend class ASTContext; |
6333 | const ASTContext &Context; |
6334 | llvm::PointerIntPair<Expr*, 1, bool> ExprAndUnsigned; |
6335 | |
6336 | protected: |
6337 | DependentExtIntType(const ASTContext &Context, bool IsUnsigned, |
6338 | Expr *NumBits); |
6339 | |
6340 | public: |
6341 | bool isUnsigned() const; |
6342 | bool isSigned() const { return !isUnsigned(); } |
6343 | Expr *getNumBitsExpr() const; |
6344 | |
6345 | bool isSugared() const { return false; } |
6346 | QualType desugar() const { return QualType(this, 0); } |
6347 | |
6348 | void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID) { |
6349 | Profile(ID, Context, isUnsigned(), getNumBitsExpr()); |
6350 | } |
6351 | static void Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID, const ASTContext &Context, |
6352 | bool IsUnsigned, Expr *NumBitsExpr); |
6353 | |
6354 | static bool classof(const Type *T) { |
6355 | return T->getTypeClass() == DependentExtInt; |
6356 | } |
6357 | }; |
6358 | |
6359 | /// A qualifier set is used to build a set of qualifiers. |
6360 | class QualifierCollector : public Qualifiers { |
6361 | public: |
6362 | QualifierCollector(Qualifiers Qs = Qualifiers()) : Qualifiers(Qs) {} |
6363 | |
6364 | /// Collect any qualifiers on the given type and return an |
6365 | /// unqualified type. The qualifiers are assumed to be consistent |
6366 | /// with those already in the type. |
6367 | const Type *strip(QualType type) { |
6368 | addFastQualifiers(type.getLocalFastQualifiers()); |
6369 | if (!type.hasLocalNonFastQualifiers()) |
6370 | return type.getTypePtrUnsafe(); |
6371 | |
6372 | const ExtQuals *extQuals = type.getExtQualsUnsafe(); |
6373 | addConsistentQualifiers(extQuals->getQualifiers()); |
6374 | return extQuals->getBaseType(); |
6375 | } |
6376 | |
6377 | /// Apply the collected qualifiers to the given type. |
6378 | QualType apply(const ASTContext &Context, QualType QT) const; |
6379 | |
6380 | /// Apply the collected qualifiers to the given type. |
6381 | QualType apply(const ASTContext &Context, const Type* T) const; |
6382 | }; |
6383 | |
6384 | /// A container of type source information. |
6385 | /// |
6386 | /// A client can read the relevant info using TypeLoc wrappers, e.g: |
6387 | /// @code |
6388 | /// TypeLoc TL = TypeSourceInfo->getTypeLoc(); |
6389 | /// TL.getBeginLoc().print(OS, SrcMgr); |
6390 | /// @endcode |
6391 | class alignas(8) TypeSourceInfo { |
6392 | // Contains a memory block after the class, used for type source information, |
6393 | // allocated by ASTContext. |
6394 | friend class ASTContext; |
6395 | |
6396 | QualType Ty; |
6397 | |
6398 | TypeSourceInfo(QualType ty) : Ty(ty) {} |
6399 | |
6400 | public: |
6401 | /// Return the type wrapped by this type source info. |
6402 | QualType getType() const { return Ty; } |
6403 | |
6404 | /// Return the TypeLoc wrapper for the type source info. |
6405 | TypeLoc getTypeLoc() const; // implemented in TypeLoc.h |
6406 | |
6407 | /// Override the type stored in this TypeSourceInfo. Use with caution! |
6408 | void overrideType(QualType T) { Ty = T; } |
6409 | }; |
6410 | |
6411 | // Inline function definitions. |
6412 | |
6413 | inline SplitQualType SplitQualType::getSingleStepDesugaredType() const { |
6414 | SplitQualType desugar = |
6415 | Ty->getLocallyUnqualifiedSingleStepDesugaredType().split(); |
6416 | desugar.Quals.addConsistentQualifiers(Quals); |
6417 | return desugar; |
6418 | } |
6419 | |
6420 | inline const Type *QualType::getTypePtr() const { |
6421 | return getCommonPtr()->BaseType; |
6422 | } |
6423 | |
6424 | inline const Type *QualType::getTypePtrOrNull() const { |
6425 | return (isNull() ? nullptr : getCommonPtr()->BaseType); |
6426 | } |
6427 | |
6428 | inline SplitQualType QualType::split() const { |
6429 | if (!hasLocalNonFastQualifiers()) |
6430 | return SplitQualType(getTypePtrUnsafe(), |
6431 | Qualifiers::fromFastMask(getLocalFastQualifiers())); |
6432 | |
6433 | const ExtQuals *eq = getExtQualsUnsafe(); |
6434 | Qualifiers qs = eq->getQualifiers(); |
6435 | qs.addFastQualifiers(getLocalFastQualifiers()); |
6436 | return SplitQualType(eq->getBaseType(), qs); |
6437 | } |
6438 | |
6439 | inline Qualifiers QualType::getLocalQualifiers() const { |
6440 | Qualifiers Quals; |
6441 | if (hasLocalNonFastQualifiers()) |
6442 | Quals = getExtQualsUnsafe()->getQualifiers(); |
6443 | Quals.addFastQualifiers(getLocalFastQualifiers()); |
6444 | return Quals; |
6445 | } |
6446 | |
6447 | inline Qualifiers QualType::getQualifiers() const { |
6448 | Qualifiers quals = getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType.getLocalQualifiers(); |
6449 | quals.addFastQualifiers(getLocalFastQualifiers()); |
6450 | return quals; |
6451 | } |
6452 | |
6453 | inline unsigned QualType::getCVRQualifiers() const { |
6454 | unsigned cvr = getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType.getLocalCVRQualifiers(); |
6455 | cvr |= getLocalCVRQualifiers(); |
6456 | return cvr; |
6457 | } |
6458 | |
6459 | inline QualType QualType::getCanonicalType() const { |
6460 | QualType canon = getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType; |
6461 | return canon.withFastQualifiers(getLocalFastQualifiers()); |
6462 | } |
6463 | |
6464 | inline bool QualType::isCanonical() const { |
6465 | return getTypePtr()->isCanonicalUnqualified(); |
6466 | } |
6467 | |
6468 | inline bool QualType::isCanonicalAsParam() const { |
6469 | if (!isCanonical()) return false; |
6470 | if (hasLocalQualifiers()) return false; |
6471 | |
6472 | const Type *T = getTypePtr(); |
6473 | if (T->isVariablyModifiedType() && T->hasSizedVLAType()) |
6474 | return false; |
6475 | |
6476 | return !isa<FunctionType>(T) && !isa<ArrayType>(T); |
6477 | } |
6478 | |
6479 | inline bool QualType::isConstQualified() const { |
6480 | return isLocalConstQualified() || |
6481 | getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType.isLocalConstQualified(); |
6482 | } |
6483 | |
6484 | inline bool QualType::isRestrictQualified() const { |
6485 | return isLocalRestrictQualified() || |
6486 | getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType.isLocalRestrictQualified(); |
6487 | } |
6488 | |
6489 | |
6490 | inline bool QualType::isVolatileQualified() const { |
6491 | return isLocalVolatileQualified() || |
6492 | getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType.isLocalVolatileQualified(); |
6493 | } |
6494 | |
6495 | inline bool QualType::hasQualifiers() const { |
6496 | return hasLocalQualifiers() || |
6497 | getCommonPtr()->CanonicalType.hasLocalQualifiers(); |
6498 | } |
6499 | |
6500 | inline QualType QualType::getUnqualifiedType() const { |
6501 | if (!getTypePtr()->getCanonicalTypeInternal().hasLocalQualifiers()) |
6502 | return QualType(getTypePtr(), 0); |
6503 | |
6504 | return QualType(getSplitUnqualifiedTypeImpl(*this).Ty, 0); |
6505 | } |
6506 | |
6507 | inline SplitQualType QualType::getSplitUnqualifiedType() const { |
6508 | if (!getTypePtr()->getCanonicalTypeInternal().hasLocalQualifiers()) |
6509 | return split(); |
6510 | |
6511 | return getSplitUnqualifiedTypeImpl(*this); |
6512 | } |
6513 | |
6514 | inline void QualType::removeLocalConst() { |
6515 | removeLocalFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Const); |
6516 | } |
6517 | |
6518 | inline void QualType::removeLocalRestrict() { |
6519 | removeLocalFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Restrict); |
6520 | } |
6521 | |
6522 | inline void QualType::removeLocalVolatile() { |
6523 | removeLocalFastQualifiers(Qualifiers::Volatile); |
6524 | } |
6525 | |
6526 | inline void QualType::removeLocalCVRQualifiers(unsigned Mask) { |
6527 | assert(!(Mask & ~Qualifiers::CVRMask) && "mask has non-CVR bits")((!(Mask & ~Qualifiers::CVRMask) && "mask has non-CVR bits" ) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("!(Mask & ~Qualifiers::CVRMask) && \"mask has non-CVR bits\"" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 6527, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
6528 | static_assert((int)Qualifiers::CVRMask == (int)Qualifiers::FastMask, |
6529 | "Fast bits differ from CVR bits!"); |
6530 | |
6531 | // Fast path: we don't need to touch the slow qualifiers. |
6532 | removeLocalFastQualifiers(Mask); |
6533 | } |
6534 | |
6535 | /// Check if this type has any address space qualifier. |
6536 | inline bool QualType::hasAddressSpace() const { |
6537 | return getQualifiers().hasAddressSpace(); |
6538 | } |
6539 | |
6540 | /// Return the address space of this type. |
6541 | inline LangAS QualType::getAddressSpace() const { |
6542 | return getQualifiers().getAddressSpace(); |
6543 | } |
6544 | |
6545 | /// Return the gc attribute of this type. |
6546 | inline Qualifiers::GC QualType::getObjCGCAttr() const { |
6547 | return getQualifiers().getObjCGCAttr(); |
6548 | } |
6549 | |
6550 | inline bool QualType::hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion() const { |
6551 | if (auto *RD = getTypePtr()->getBaseElementTypeUnsafe()->getAsRecordDecl()) |
6552 | return hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDefaultInitializeCUnion(RD); |
6553 | return false; |
6554 | } |
6555 | |
6556 | inline bool QualType::hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion() const { |
6557 | if (auto *RD = getTypePtr()->getBaseElementTypeUnsafe()->getAsRecordDecl()) |
6558 | return hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveDestructCUnion(RD); |
6559 | return false; |
6560 | } |
6561 | |
6562 | inline bool QualType::hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion() const { |
6563 | if (auto *RD = getTypePtr()->getBaseElementTypeUnsafe()->getAsRecordDecl()) |
6564 | return hasNonTrivialToPrimitiveCopyCUnion(RD); |
6565 | return false; |
6566 | } |
6567 | |
6568 | inline FunctionType::ExtInfo getFunctionExtInfo(const Type &t) { |
6569 | if (const auto *PT = t.getAs<PointerType>()) { |
6570 | if (const auto *FT = PT->getPointeeType()->getAs<FunctionType>()) |
6571 | return FT->getExtInfo(); |
6572 | } else if (const auto *FT = t.getAs<FunctionType>()) |
6573 | return FT->getExtInfo(); |
6574 | |
6575 | return FunctionType::ExtInfo(); |
6576 | } |
6577 | |
6578 | inline FunctionType::ExtInfo getFunctionExtInfo(QualType t) { |
6579 | return getFunctionExtInfo(*t); |
6580 | } |
6581 | |
6582 | /// Determine whether this type is more |
6583 | /// qualified than the Other type. For example, "const volatile int" |
6584 | /// is more qualified than "const int", "volatile int", and |
6585 | /// "int". However, it is not more qualified than "const volatile |
6586 | /// int". |
6587 | inline bool QualType::isMoreQualifiedThan(QualType other) const { |
6588 | Qualifiers MyQuals = getQualifiers(); |
6589 | Qualifiers OtherQuals = other.getQualifiers(); |
6590 | return (MyQuals != OtherQuals && MyQuals.compatiblyIncludes(OtherQuals)); |
6591 | } |
6592 | |
6593 | /// Determine whether this type is at last |
6594 | /// as qualified as the Other type. For example, "const volatile |
6595 | /// int" is at least as qualified as "const int", "volatile int", |
6596 | /// "int", and "const volatile int". |
6597 | inline bool QualType::isAtLeastAsQualifiedAs(QualType other) const { |
6598 | Qualifiers OtherQuals = other.getQualifiers(); |
6599 | |
6600 | // Ignore __unaligned qualifier if this type is a void. |
6601 | if (getUnqualifiedType()->isVoidType()) |
6602 | OtherQuals.removeUnaligned(); |
6603 | |
6604 | return getQualifiers().compatiblyIncludes(OtherQuals); |
6605 | } |
6606 | |
6607 | /// If Type is a reference type (e.g., const |
6608 | /// int&), returns the type that the reference refers to ("const |
6609 | /// int"). Otherwise, returns the type itself. This routine is used |
6610 | /// throughout Sema to implement C++ 5p6: |
6611 | /// |
6612 | /// If an expression initially has the type "reference to T" (8.3.2, |
6613 | /// 8.5.3), the type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further |
6614 | /// analysis, the expression designates the object or function |
6615 | /// denoted by the reference, and the expression is an lvalue. |
6616 | inline QualType QualType::getNonReferenceType() const { |
6617 | if (const auto *RefType = (*this)->getAs<ReferenceType>()) |
6618 | return RefType->getPointeeType(); |
6619 | else |
6620 | return *this; |
6621 | } |
6622 | |
6623 | inline bool QualType::isCForbiddenLValueType() const { |
6624 | return ((getTypePtr()->isVoidType() && !hasQualifiers()) || |
6625 | getTypePtr()->isFunctionType()); |
6626 | } |
6627 | |
6628 | /// Tests whether the type is categorized as a fundamental type. |
6629 | /// |
6630 | /// \returns True for types specified in C++0x [basic.fundamental]. |
6631 | inline bool Type::isFundamentalType() const { |
6632 | return isVoidType() || |
6633 | isNullPtrType() || |
6634 | // FIXME: It's really annoying that we don't have an |
6635 | // 'isArithmeticType()' which agrees with the standard definition. |
6636 | (isArithmeticType() && !isEnumeralType()); |
6637 | } |
6638 | |
6639 | /// Tests whether the type is categorized as a compound type. |
6640 | /// |
6641 | /// \returns True for types specified in C++0x [basic.compound]. |
6642 | inline bool Type::isCompoundType() const { |
6643 | // C++0x [basic.compound]p1: |
6644 | // Compound types can be constructed in the following ways: |
6645 | // -- arrays of objects of a given type [...]; |
6646 | return isArrayType() || |
6647 | // -- functions, which have parameters of given types [...]; |
6648 | isFunctionType() || |
6649 | // -- pointers to void or objects or functions [...]; |
6650 | isPointerType() || |
6651 | // -- references to objects or functions of a given type. [...] |
6652 | isReferenceType() || |
6653 | // -- classes containing a sequence of objects of various types, [...]; |
6654 | isRecordType() || |
6655 | // -- unions, which are classes capable of containing objects of different |
6656 | // types at different times; |
6657 | isUnionType() || |
6658 | // -- enumerations, which comprise a set of named constant values. [...]; |
6659 | isEnumeralType() || |
6660 | // -- pointers to non-static class members, [...]. |
6661 | isMemberPointerType(); |
6662 | } |
6663 | |
6664 | inline bool Type::isFunctionType() const { |
6665 | return isa<FunctionType>(CanonicalType); |
6666 | } |
6667 | |
6668 | inline bool Type::isPointerType() const { |
6669 | return isa<PointerType>(CanonicalType); |
6670 | } |
6671 | |
6672 | inline bool Type::isAnyPointerType() const { |
6673 | return isPointerType() || isObjCObjectPointerType(); |
6674 | } |
6675 | |
6676 | inline bool Type::isBlockPointerType() const { |
6677 | return isa<BlockPointerType>(CanonicalType); |
6678 | } |
6679 | |
6680 | inline bool Type::isReferenceType() const { |
6681 | return isa<ReferenceType>(CanonicalType); |
6682 | } |
6683 | |
6684 | inline bool Type::isLValueReferenceType() const { |
6685 | return isa<LValueReferenceType>(CanonicalType); |
6686 | } |
6687 | |
6688 | inline bool Type::isRValueReferenceType() const { |
6689 | return isa<RValueReferenceType>(CanonicalType); |
6690 | } |
6691 | |
6692 | inline bool Type::isObjectPointerType() const { |
6693 | // Note: an "object pointer type" is not the same thing as a pointer to an |
6694 | // object type; rather, it is a pointer to an object type or a pointer to cv |
6695 | // void. |
6696 | if (const auto *T = getAs<PointerType>()) |
6697 | return !T->getPointeeType()->isFunctionType(); |
6698 | else |
6699 | return false; |
6700 | } |
6701 | |
6702 | inline bool Type::isFunctionPointerType() const { |
6703 | if (const auto *T = getAs<PointerType>()) |
6704 | return T->getPointeeType()->isFunctionType(); |
6705 | else |
6706 | return false; |
6707 | } |
6708 | |
6709 | inline bool Type::isFunctionReferenceType() const { |
6710 | if (const auto *T = getAs<ReferenceType>()) |
6711 | return T->getPointeeType()->isFunctionType(); |
6712 | else |
6713 | return false; |
6714 | } |
6715 | |
6716 | inline bool Type::isMemberPointerType() const { |
6717 | return isa<MemberPointerType>(CanonicalType); |
6718 | } |
6719 | |
6720 | inline bool Type::isMemberFunctionPointerType() const { |
6721 | if (const auto *T = getAs<MemberPointerType>()) |
6722 | return T->isMemberFunctionPointer(); |
6723 | else |
6724 | return false; |
6725 | } |
6726 | |
6727 | inline bool Type::isMemberDataPointerType() const { |
6728 | if (const auto *T = getAs<MemberPointerType>()) |
6729 | return T->isMemberDataPointer(); |
6730 | else |
6731 | return false; |
6732 | } |
6733 | |
6734 | inline bool Type::isArrayType() const { |
6735 | return isa<ArrayType>(CanonicalType); |
6736 | } |
6737 | |
6738 | inline bool Type::isConstantArrayType() const { |
6739 | return isa<ConstantArrayType>(CanonicalType); |
6740 | } |
6741 | |
6742 | inline bool Type::isIncompleteArrayType() const { |
6743 | return isa<IncompleteArrayType>(CanonicalType); |
6744 | } |
6745 | |
6746 | inline bool Type::isVariableArrayType() const { |
6747 | return isa<VariableArrayType>(CanonicalType); |
6748 | } |
6749 | |
6750 | inline bool Type::isDependentSizedArrayType() const { |
6751 | return isa<DependentSizedArrayType>(CanonicalType); |
6752 | } |
6753 | |
6754 | inline bool Type::isBuiltinType() const { |
6755 | return isa<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType); |
6756 | } |
6757 | |
6758 | inline bool Type::isRecordType() const { |
6759 | return isa<RecordType>(CanonicalType); |
6760 | } |
6761 | |
6762 | inline bool Type::isEnumeralType() const { |
6763 | return isa<EnumType>(CanonicalType); |
6764 | } |
6765 | |
6766 | inline bool Type::isAnyComplexType() const { |
6767 | return isa<ComplexType>(CanonicalType); |
6768 | } |
6769 | |
6770 | inline bool Type::isVectorType() const { |
6771 | return isa<VectorType>(CanonicalType); |
6772 | } |
6773 | |
6774 | inline bool Type::isExtVectorType() const { |
6775 | return isa<ExtVectorType>(CanonicalType); |
6776 | } |
6777 | |
6778 | inline bool Type::isMatrixType() const { |
6779 | return isa<MatrixType>(CanonicalType); |
6780 | } |
6781 | |
6782 | inline bool Type::isConstantMatrixType() const { |
6783 | return isa<ConstantMatrixType>(CanonicalType); |
6784 | } |
6785 | |
6786 | inline bool Type::isDependentAddressSpaceType() const { |
6787 | return isa<DependentAddressSpaceType>(CanonicalType); |
6788 | } |
6789 | |
6790 | inline bool Type::isObjCObjectPointerType() const { |
6791 | return isa<ObjCObjectPointerType>(CanonicalType); |
6792 | } |
6793 | |
6794 | inline bool Type::isObjCObjectType() const { |
6795 | return isa<ObjCObjectType>(CanonicalType); |
6796 | } |
6797 | |
6798 | inline bool Type::isObjCObjectOrInterfaceType() const { |
6799 | return isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(CanonicalType) || |
6800 | isa<ObjCObjectType>(CanonicalType); |
6801 | } |
6802 | |
6803 | inline bool Type::isAtomicType() const { |
6804 | return isa<AtomicType>(CanonicalType); |
6805 | } |
6806 | |
6807 | inline bool Type::isUndeducedAutoType() const { |
6808 | return isa<AutoType>(CanonicalType); |
6809 | } |
6810 | |
6811 | inline bool Type::isObjCQualifiedIdType() const { |
6812 | if (const auto *OPT = getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) |
6813 | return OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType(); |
6814 | return false; |
6815 | } |
6816 | |
6817 | inline bool Type::isObjCQualifiedClassType() const { |
6818 | if (const auto *OPT = getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) |
6819 | return OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType(); |
6820 | return false; |
6821 | } |
6822 | |
6823 | inline bool Type::isObjCIdType() const { |
6824 | if (const auto *OPT = getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) |
6825 | return OPT->isObjCIdType(); |
6826 | return false; |
6827 | } |
6828 | |
6829 | inline bool Type::isObjCClassType() const { |
6830 | if (const auto *OPT = getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) |
6831 | return OPT->isObjCClassType(); |
6832 | return false; |
6833 | } |
6834 | |
6835 | inline bool Type::isObjCSelType() const { |
6836 | if (const auto *OPT = getAs<PointerType>()) |
6837 | return OPT->getPointeeType()->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::ObjCSel); |
6838 | return false; |
6839 | } |
6840 | |
6841 | inline bool Type::isObjCBuiltinType() const { |
6842 | return isObjCIdType() || isObjCClassType() || isObjCSelType(); |
6843 | } |
6844 | |
6845 | inline bool Type::isDecltypeType() const { |
6846 | return isa<DecltypeType>(this); |
6847 | } |
6848 | |
6849 | #define IMAGE_TYPE(ImgType, Id, SingletonId, Access, Suffix) \ |
6850 | inline bool Type::is##Id##Type() const { \ |
6851 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Id); \ |
6852 | } |
6853 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLImageTypes.def" |
6854 | |
6855 | inline bool Type::isSamplerT() const { |
6856 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::OCLSampler); |
6857 | } |
6858 | |
6859 | inline bool Type::isEventT() const { |
6860 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::OCLEvent); |
6861 | } |
6862 | |
6863 | inline bool Type::isClkEventT() const { |
6864 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::OCLClkEvent); |
6865 | } |
6866 | |
6867 | inline bool Type::isQueueT() const { |
6868 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::OCLQueue); |
6869 | } |
6870 | |
6871 | inline bool Type::isReserveIDT() const { |
6872 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::OCLReserveID); |
6873 | } |
6874 | |
6875 | inline bool Type::isImageType() const { |
6876 | #define IMAGE_TYPE(ImgType, Id, SingletonId, Access, Suffix) is##Id##Type() || |
6877 | return |
6878 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLImageTypes.def" |
6879 | false; // end boolean or operation |
6880 | } |
6881 | |
6882 | inline bool Type::isPipeType() const { |
6883 | return isa<PipeType>(CanonicalType); |
6884 | } |
6885 | |
6886 | inline bool Type::isExtIntType() const { |
6887 | return isa<ExtIntType>(CanonicalType); |
6888 | } |
6889 | |
6890 | #define EXT_OPAQUE_TYPE(ExtType, Id, Ext) \ |
6891 | inline bool Type::is##Id##Type() const { \ |
6892 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Id); \ |
6893 | } |
6894 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLExtensionTypes.def" |
6895 | |
6896 | inline bool Type::isOCLIntelSubgroupAVCType() const { |
6897 | #define INTEL_SUBGROUP_AVC_TYPE(ExtType, Id) \ |
6898 | isOCLIntelSubgroupAVC##Id##Type() || |
6899 | return |
6900 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLExtensionTypes.def" |
6901 | false; // end of boolean or operation |
6902 | } |
6903 | |
6904 | inline bool Type::isOCLExtOpaqueType() const { |
6905 | #define EXT_OPAQUE_TYPE(ExtType, Id, Ext) is##Id##Type() || |
6906 | return |
6907 | #include "clang/Basic/OpenCLExtensionTypes.def" |
6908 | false; // end of boolean or operation |
6909 | } |
6910 | |
6911 | inline bool Type::isOpenCLSpecificType() const { |
6912 | return isSamplerT() || isEventT() || isImageType() || isClkEventT() || |
6913 | isQueueT() || isReserveIDT() || isPipeType() || isOCLExtOpaqueType(); |
6914 | } |
6915 | |
6916 | inline bool Type::isTemplateTypeParmType() const { |
6917 | return isa<TemplateTypeParmType>(CanonicalType); |
6918 | } |
6919 | |
6920 | inline bool Type::isSpecificBuiltinType(unsigned K) const { |
6921 | if (const BuiltinType *BT = getAs<BuiltinType>()) { |
6922 | return BT->getKind() == static_cast<BuiltinType::Kind>(K); |
6923 | } |
6924 | return false; |
6925 | } |
6926 | |
6927 | inline bool Type::isPlaceholderType() const { |
6928 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(this)) |
6929 | return BT->isPlaceholderType(); |
6930 | return false; |
6931 | } |
6932 | |
6933 | inline const BuiltinType *Type::getAsPlaceholderType() const { |
6934 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(this)) |
6935 | if (BT->isPlaceholderType()) |
6936 | return BT; |
6937 | return nullptr; |
6938 | } |
6939 | |
6940 | inline bool Type::isSpecificPlaceholderType(unsigned K) const { |
6941 | assert(BuiltinType::isPlaceholderTypeKind((BuiltinType::Kind) K))((BuiltinType::isPlaceholderTypeKind((BuiltinType::Kind) K)) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("BuiltinType::isPlaceholderTypeKind((BuiltinType::Kind) K)" , "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 6941, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
6942 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(K); |
6943 | } |
6944 | |
6945 | inline bool Type::isNonOverloadPlaceholderType() const { |
6946 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(this)) |
6947 | return BT->isNonOverloadPlaceholderType(); |
6948 | return false; |
6949 | } |
6950 | |
6951 | inline bool Type::isVoidType() const { |
6952 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Void); |
6953 | } |
6954 | |
6955 | inline bool Type::isHalfType() const { |
6956 | // FIXME: Should we allow complex __fp16? Probably not. |
6957 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Half); |
6958 | } |
6959 | |
6960 | inline bool Type::isFloat16Type() const { |
6961 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Float16); |
6962 | } |
6963 | |
6964 | inline bool Type::isBFloat16Type() const { |
6965 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::BFloat16); |
6966 | } |
6967 | |
6968 | inline bool Type::isFloat128Type() const { |
6969 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Float128); |
6970 | } |
6971 | |
6972 | inline bool Type::isNullPtrType() const { |
6973 | return isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::NullPtr); |
6974 | } |
6975 | |
6976 | bool IsEnumDeclComplete(EnumDecl *); |
6977 | bool IsEnumDeclScoped(EnumDecl *); |
6978 | |
6979 | inline bool Type::isIntegerType() const { |
6980 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) |
6981 | return BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::Bool && |
6982 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::Int128; |
6983 | if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(CanonicalType)) { |
6984 | // Incomplete enum types are not treated as integer types. |
6985 | // FIXME: In C++, enum types are never integer types. |
6986 | return IsEnumDeclComplete(ET->getDecl()) && |
6987 | !IsEnumDeclScoped(ET->getDecl()); |
6988 | } |
6989 | return isExtIntType(); |
6990 | } |
6991 | |
6992 | inline bool Type::isFixedPointType() const { |
6993 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) { |
6994 | return BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::ShortAccum && |
6995 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::SatULongFract; |
6996 | } |
6997 | return false; |
6998 | } |
6999 | |
7000 | inline bool Type::isFixedPointOrIntegerType() const { |
7001 | return isFixedPointType() || isIntegerType(); |
7002 | } |
7003 | |
7004 | inline bool Type::isSaturatedFixedPointType() const { |
7005 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) { |
7006 | return BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::SatShortAccum && |
7007 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::SatULongFract; |
7008 | } |
7009 | return false; |
7010 | } |
7011 | |
7012 | inline bool Type::isUnsaturatedFixedPointType() const { |
7013 | return isFixedPointType() && !isSaturatedFixedPointType(); |
7014 | } |
7015 | |
7016 | inline bool Type::isSignedFixedPointType() const { |
7017 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) { |
7018 | return ((BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::ShortAccum && |
7019 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::LongAccum) || |
7020 | (BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::ShortFract && |
7021 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::LongFract) || |
7022 | (BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::SatShortAccum && |
7023 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::SatLongAccum) || |
7024 | (BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::SatShortFract && |
7025 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::SatLongFract)); |
7026 | } |
7027 | return false; |
7028 | } |
7029 | |
7030 | inline bool Type::isUnsignedFixedPointType() const { |
7031 | return isFixedPointType() && !isSignedFixedPointType(); |
7032 | } |
7033 | |
7034 | inline bool Type::isScalarType() const { |
7035 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) |
7036 | return BT->getKind() > BuiltinType::Void && |
7037 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::NullPtr; |
7038 | if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(CanonicalType)) |
7039 | // Enums are scalar types, but only if they are defined. Incomplete enums |
7040 | // are not treated as scalar types. |
7041 | return IsEnumDeclComplete(ET->getDecl()); |
7042 | return isa<PointerType>(CanonicalType) || |
7043 | isa<BlockPointerType>(CanonicalType) || |
7044 | isa<MemberPointerType>(CanonicalType) || |
7045 | isa<ComplexType>(CanonicalType) || |
7046 | isa<ObjCObjectPointerType>(CanonicalType) || |
7047 | isExtIntType(); |
7048 | } |
7049 | |
7050 | inline bool Type::isIntegralOrEnumerationType() const { |
7051 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) |
7052 | return BT->getKind() >= BuiltinType::Bool && |
7053 | BT->getKind() <= BuiltinType::Int128; |
7054 | |
7055 | // Check for a complete enum type; incomplete enum types are not properly an |
7056 | // enumeration type in the sense required here. |
7057 | if (const auto *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(CanonicalType)) |
7058 | return IsEnumDeclComplete(ET->getDecl()); |
7059 | |
7060 | return isExtIntType(); |
7061 | } |
7062 | |
7063 | inline bool Type::isBooleanType() const { |
7064 | if (const auto *BT = dyn_cast<BuiltinType>(CanonicalType)) |
7065 | return BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Bool; |
7066 | return false; |
7067 | } |
7068 | |
7069 | inline bool Type::isUndeducedType() const { |
7070 | auto *DT = getContainedDeducedType(); |
7071 | return DT && !DT->isDeduced(); |
7072 | } |
7073 | |
7074 | /// Determines whether this is a type for which one can define |
7075 | /// an overloaded operator. |
7076 | inline bool Type::isOverloadableType() const { |
7077 | return isDependentType() || isRecordType() || isEnumeralType(); |
7078 | } |
7079 | |
7080 | /// Determines whether this type is written as a typedef-name. |
7081 | inline bool Type::isTypedefNameType() const { |
7082 | if (getAs<TypedefType>()) |
7083 | return true; |
7084 | if (auto *TST = getAs<TemplateSpecializationType>()) |
7085 | return TST->isTypeAlias(); |
7086 | return false; |
7087 | } |
7088 | |
7089 | /// Determines whether this type can decay to a pointer type. |
7090 | inline bool Type::canDecayToPointerType() const { |
7091 | return isFunctionType() || isArrayType(); |
7092 | } |
7093 | |
7094 | inline bool Type::hasPointerRepresentation() const { |
7095 | return (isPointerType() || isReferenceType() || isBlockPointerType() || |
7096 | isObjCObjectPointerType() || isNullPtrType()); |
7097 | } |
7098 | |
7099 | inline bool Type::hasObjCPointerRepresentation() const { |
7100 | return isObjCObjectPointerType(); |
7101 | } |
7102 | |
7103 | inline const Type *Type::getBaseElementTypeUnsafe() const { |
7104 | const Type *type = this; |
7105 | while (const ArrayType *arrayType = type->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe()) |
7106 | type = arrayType->getElementType().getTypePtr(); |
7107 | return type; |
7108 | } |
7109 | |
7110 | inline const Type *Type::getPointeeOrArrayElementType() const { |
7111 | const Type *type = this; |
7112 | if (type->isAnyPointerType()) |
7113 | return type->getPointeeType().getTypePtr(); |
7114 | else if (type->isArrayType()) |
7115 | return type->getBaseElementTypeUnsafe(); |
7116 | return type; |
7117 | } |
7118 | /// Insertion operator for partial diagnostics. This allows sending adress |
7119 | /// spaces into a diagnostic with <<. |
7120 | inline const StreamingDiagnostic &operator<<(const StreamingDiagnostic &PD, |
7121 | LangAS AS) { |
7122 | PD.AddTaggedVal(static_cast<std::underlying_type_t<LangAS>>(AS), |
7123 | DiagnosticsEngine::ArgumentKind::ak_addrspace); |
7124 | return PD; |
7125 | } |
7126 | |
7127 | /// Insertion operator for partial diagnostics. This allows sending Qualifiers |
7128 | /// into a diagnostic with <<. |
7129 | inline const StreamingDiagnostic &operator<<(const StreamingDiagnostic &PD, |
7130 | Qualifiers Q) { |
7131 | PD.AddTaggedVal(Q.getAsOpaqueValue(), |
7132 | DiagnosticsEngine::ArgumentKind::ak_qual); |
7133 | return PD; |
7134 | } |
7135 | |
7136 | /// Insertion operator for partial diagnostics. This allows sending QualType's |
7137 | /// into a diagnostic with <<. |
7138 | inline const StreamingDiagnostic &operator<<(const StreamingDiagnostic &PD, |
7139 | QualType T) { |
7140 | PD.AddTaggedVal(reinterpret_cast<intptr_t>(T.getAsOpaquePtr()), |
7141 | DiagnosticsEngine::ak_qualtype); |
7142 | return PD; |
7143 | } |
7144 | |
7145 | // Helper class template that is used by Type::getAs to ensure that one does |
7146 | // not try to look through a qualified type to get to an array type. |
7147 | template <typename T> |
7148 | using TypeIsArrayType = |
7149 | std::integral_constant<bool, std::is_same<T, ArrayType>::value || |
7150 | std::is_base_of<ArrayType, T>::value>; |
7151 | |
7152 | // Member-template getAs<specific type>'. |
7153 | template <typename T> const T *Type::getAs() const { |
7154 | static_assert(!TypeIsArrayType<T>::value, |
7155 | "ArrayType cannot be used with getAs!"); |
7156 | |
7157 | // If this is directly a T type, return it. |
7158 | if (const auto *Ty = dyn_cast<T>(this)) |
7159 | return Ty; |
7160 | |
7161 | // If the canonical form of this type isn't the right kind, reject it. |
7162 | if (!isa<T>(CanonicalType)) |
7163 | return nullptr; |
7164 | |
7165 | // If this is a typedef for the type, strip the typedef off without |
7166 | // losing all typedef information. |
7167 | return cast<T>(getUnqualifiedDesugaredType()); |
7168 | } |
7169 | |
7170 | template <typename T> const T *Type::getAsAdjusted() const { |
7171 | static_assert(!TypeIsArrayType<T>::value, "ArrayType cannot be used with getAsAdjusted!"); |
7172 | |
7173 | // If this is directly a T type, return it. |
7174 | if (const auto *Ty = dyn_cast<T>(this)) |
7175 | return Ty; |
7176 | |
7177 | // If the canonical form of this type isn't the right kind, reject it. |
7178 | if (!isa<T>(CanonicalType)) |
7179 | return nullptr; |
7180 | |
7181 | // Strip off type adjustments that do not modify the underlying nature of the |
7182 | // type. |
7183 | const Type *Ty = this; |
7184 | while (Ty) { |
7185 | if (const auto *A = dyn_cast<AttributedType>(Ty)) |
7186 | Ty = A->getModifiedType().getTypePtr(); |
7187 | else if (const auto *E = dyn_cast<ElaboratedType>(Ty)) |
7188 | Ty = E->desugar().getTypePtr(); |
7189 | else if (const auto *P = dyn_cast<ParenType>(Ty)) |
7190 | Ty = P->desugar().getTypePtr(); |
7191 | else if (const auto *A = dyn_cast<AdjustedType>(Ty)) |
7192 | Ty = A->desugar().getTypePtr(); |
7193 | else if (const auto *M = dyn_cast<MacroQualifiedType>(Ty)) |
7194 | Ty = M->desugar().getTypePtr(); |
7195 | else |
7196 | break; |
7197 | } |
7198 | |
7199 | // Just because the canonical type is correct does not mean we can use cast<>, |
7200 | // since we may not have stripped off all the sugar down to the base type. |
7201 | return dyn_cast<T>(Ty); |
7202 | } |
7203 | |
7204 | inline const ArrayType *Type::getAsArrayTypeUnsafe() const { |
7205 | // If this is directly an array type, return it. |
7206 | if (const auto *arr = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(this)) |
7207 | return arr; |
7208 | |
7209 | // If the canonical form of this type isn't the right kind, reject it. |
7210 | if (!isa<ArrayType>(CanonicalType)) |
7211 | return nullptr; |
7212 | |
7213 | // If this is a typedef for the type, strip the typedef off without |
7214 | // losing all typedef information. |
7215 | return cast<ArrayType>(getUnqualifiedDesugaredType()); |
7216 | } |
7217 | |
7218 | template <typename T> const T *Type::castAs() const { |
7219 | static_assert(!TypeIsArrayType<T>::value, |
7220 | "ArrayType cannot be used with castAs!"); |
7221 | |
7222 | if (const auto *ty = dyn_cast<T>(this)) return ty; |
7223 | assert(isa<T>(CanonicalType))((isa<T>(CanonicalType)) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<T>(CanonicalType)", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 7223, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
7224 | return cast<T>(getUnqualifiedDesugaredType()); |
7225 | } |
7226 | |
7227 | inline const ArrayType *Type::castAsArrayTypeUnsafe() const { |
7228 | assert(isa<ArrayType>(CanonicalType))((isa<ArrayType>(CanonicalType)) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<ArrayType>(CanonicalType)", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 7228, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
7229 | if (const auto *arr = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(this)) return arr; |
7230 | return cast<ArrayType>(getUnqualifiedDesugaredType()); |
7231 | } |
7232 | |
7233 | DecayedType::DecayedType(QualType OriginalType, QualType DecayedPtr, |
7234 | QualType CanonicalPtr) |
7235 | : AdjustedType(Decayed, OriginalType, DecayedPtr, CanonicalPtr) { |
7236 | #ifndef NDEBUG |
7237 | QualType Adjusted = getAdjustedType(); |
7238 | (void)AttributedType::stripOuterNullability(Adjusted); |
7239 | assert(isa<PointerType>(Adjusted))((isa<PointerType>(Adjusted)) ? static_cast<void> (0) : __assert_fail ("isa<PointerType>(Adjusted)", "/build/llvm-toolchain-snapshot-13~++20210405022414+5f57793c4fe4/clang/include/clang/AST/Type.h" , 7239, __PRETTY_FUNCTION__)); |
7240 | #endif |
7241 | } |
7242 | |
7243 | QualType DecayedType::getPointeeType() const { |
7244 | QualType Decayed = getDecayedType(); |
7245 | (void)AttributedType::stripOuterNullability(Decayed); |
7246 | return cast<PointerType>(Decayed)->getPointeeType(); |
7247 | } |
7248 | |
7249 | // Get the decimal string representation of a fixed point type, represented |
7250 | // as a scaled integer. |
7251 | // TODO: At some point, we should change the arguments to instead just accept an |
7252 | // APFixedPoint instead of APSInt and scale. |
7253 | void FixedPointValueToString(SmallVectorImpl<char> &Str, llvm::APSInt Val, |
7254 | unsigned Scale); |
7255 | |
7256 | } // namespace clang |
7257 | |
7258 | #endif // LLVM_CLANG_AST_TYPE_H |